TW201210564A - Anchor assembly including expandable anchor - Google Patents

Anchor assembly including expandable anchor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201210564A
TW201210564A TW100114690A TW100114690A TW201210564A TW 201210564 A TW201210564 A TW 201210564A TW 100114690 A TW100114690 A TW 100114690A TW 100114690 A TW100114690 A TW 100114690A TW 201210564 A TW201210564 A TW 201210564A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
strand
anchor
actuating
anchor assembly
strands
Prior art date
Application number
TW100114690A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Tom Overes
Jamie Manos
Kevin Henrichsen
Daniel Vennard
Wamis Singhatat
Scott Larsen
James Talbot
Original Assignee
Synthes Gmbh
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Synthes Gmbh filed Critical Synthes Gmbh
Publication of TW201210564A publication Critical patent/TW201210564A/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Surgical Instruments (AREA)

Abstract

An anchor assembly can include at least one anchor member, such as a pair of anchor members that are configured to be implanted in a target anatomical location in a first configuration, and can subsequently be actuated to an expanded configuration that secures the anchor members in the target anatomy. The anchor assembly can further include a connector member that attaches the pair of anchor members together across a gap so as to approximate the anatomical defect.

Description

201210564 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 相關申請案之交互參照 本申請案主張以下文獻的權益:申請於2010年4 月27日的美國專利申請案第61/328,251號(Overes), 申請於2010年6月29曰的美國專利申請案第 61/398,699 號(Overes 等人),申請於 2011 年 1 月 14 曰的美國專利申s青案第61/432,755號(Henrichsen等 人)’申請於2011年i月18曰的美國專利申請案第 61/461,490 號(Henrichsen,等人),以及申請於 2011 年 2月15曰的美國專利申請案第61/443,142號 (Overes),各文獻的揭不内容全部併入本文作為參考 資料。 【先前技術】 骨科手術(orthopaedic surgical procedure)常涉及 使用固定器(fixation device)。常在骨骼或軟組織中做 成可繫緊適當固定器於其中的出入孔。除了螺絲以 外’可使用可擴展固定器,其係以收合狀態(c〇llapsed state)插入該孔,以及在正確定位後即轉變成擴展狀態 (expanded state)。 在一示範骨科手術(例如,腰摘除)中,神經根病 變(radiculopathy)的治療係藉由手術移除突出髓核 (herniated nucleus pulposus)以達成神經減壓。腰摘除 為現今最常見的脊柱手術之一。許多患者用此手術減 3 201210564 輕病痛,但是對於其他人,椎間盤可能通過圓環的開 孔再突出(re-herniate)導致持續疼痛而可能需要額外 手術。目#,標準摘除技術不包括封閉環形缺損 (卿1ardefeet)而使外科Μ進退兩難。治療神經根病 變的外科醫生可選擇移除核t侵犯神經的突出部份, 但是增加其餘龍通過财㈣環缺損而產生 再f的風險。替換地,外科醫生可選擇執行大面積 的減積手術(deMUking)’除了突出部份以外,盆係移 除大部份的其餘核㈣以最錢手職賤出的風 =不過,手術後椎間隙收合(disc以幽Μ—)的 風險及減少背痛的後續回診會增加。 份二Ϊ=物?含套筒’該套筒有可擴展部 伤與延伸穿過㈣中心孔的壓縮元件, 有由套筒周壁中之中_孔或孔形成“數個 =r 曲― 【發明内容】 根據一實施例,一種錨組件,装 銷定至-目標解剖仅置。該錫組件it f組態成可 包含定義-可擴展部份的一錨體。兮=’而該銷 於第-組態時實質沿著長形方向延;;了份在處 穿過該錨體以及實質沿著該長形 田疋義延伸 向隔開的複數個開 4 201210564 孔。該錨更包含延伸穿過該等 致動:件。該致動構件係經“成可 =r=:;r由該第-組態運 合’一_方::;==收 【實施方式】 =始請參考第 各自包含經組態成固定於解剖位置之_28的至少 -可擴紐22,例如複數個可擴展助, :=、一解剖結構24定義。根據圖示實施例,錫組 件20包含各自經組態成可固定於解剖位置(例如,解 剖結構24)的第-錯22a及第二銷咖。可帛,例如, 人類或其他動物之㈣位置’或固定於或經組態成可 固定於人類或其他祕之解剖位置的植人物來定義解 剖結構24。解剖位置的定義可用可包含㈣與軟組織 (例如’肌腱、韌帶、軟骨、椎間盤的圓環、或其類似 物)中之至少一者的組織。 根據一實施例’至少一解剖結構2 4可定義在間隙 (例如,間隙2 4 c)之兩對邊上的第一及第二目標解剖位 置24a、24b。因此,間隙24c可配置於解剖結構,以 及例如可定義解剖缺損,或可配置於不同的解剖結構 之間。可將第一及第二錨22a、22b注入或以其他方式 致動或插入各自在間隙24c之兩對邊上的第一及第二 目標解剖位置24a、24b ’隨後拉向對方以便使間隙24c 201210564 接近。替換地或附加地,如在說明第lc圖至第id圖 時所#述的,錨組件20係經組態成可固定輔助結構 25於解剖結構24。在這點上,更應瞭解,錨組件2〇 可才女需要包含任意複數個I苗22。 各個錨體28可包含可擴展部份36與致動構件 37,例如致動繩股(actuation strand)38,該致動構件37 係經級態成可驅使可擴展部份36從而錨體28,由圖 示於第1A圖之第一組態(藉此初始將錨體28放在目 標解剖位置)運動到圖示於第1B圖之擴展組態,藉此 銷體28可固定於解剖結構24。因此,錨22a、2加的 錯體28可各自插入穿過在目標解剖位置24a、24b的 開孔23,例如’目標解剖位置24a、24b可在注入I苗 體28於目標解剖位置24a、24b時產生。 第一及第二錯22a、22b的致動繩股38中之每一 可相互附接。例如,第一銷22a的致動繩股38可與第 一錯22b的致動繩股3 8整合。替換地,如以下所詳述 的,第一錨22a的致動繩股38可與第二錨22a的致動 繩股38分離’藉此隨後用任何適當連接構件63(例 如,參考第18C圖)使第一及第二錨22a、22b的致動 繩股38直接或間接地附接。連接構件63可與致動繩 股38中之任一或兩者整合(例如,參考第19A圖)或可 個別附接至致動繩股38中之每一(例如,參考第20A 圖)。根據一實施例,第一及第二錨22a、22b的致動 繩股38各自定義至少一致動部份131而且可進一步包 含至少一附接部份133。致動部份131各經組態成可 6 201210564 接受造成錨22a、22b各自由第一組態運動至擴展組態 的致動力。 根據圖示實施例,第一及第二錯之致動繩股38 的附接部份133經組態成可相互附接^使用任何適當 連接構件’附接部份133可彼此整合,或相互附接。 此外’根據圖示實施例,在施加致動力F於致動部份 131之前或之後,致動部份131也可定義用任何適當 方式組態成可相互附接的附接部份。因此,個別錨的 附接部份133經組態成可使該個別錨附接至另一錨, 例如該另一錨的附接部份133。此外,個別錨的致動 部份131經組態成可使該個別錨附接至另一錨。根據 圖示實施例,第一錨22a之致動繩股38的附接部份 133與第二錨22b之致動繩股38的附接部份133,然 而應瞭解,第一及第二錨22a、22b的附接部份133 可彼此分開及相互附接,如下文所述。 繼續參考第1A圖至第1B圖,一旦已使錨22a、 22b的可擴展部份36運動到擴展組態,可使致動繩股 38有張力。例如,根據一實施例,可施加接近力AF 於第一及第二錨22a、22b之致動繩股38的致動部份 131中之任一或兩者,從而產生第一及第二錨22a、22b 之致動繩股38的張力以便施加使第一及第二錨22a、 22b向對方拉的偏壓力。因此,如果配置間隙24c於 第及第二鋪22a、22b之間’ i苗22a、22b因應偏壓 力而向對方運動會使間隙24c(在某些實施例中,這可 為解剖缺損,例如上述的組織缺損)接近。 7 201210564 替換地或附加地,如第1C圖所示,錫組件20係 經組態成可固定辅助結構25至可定義個別目標解剖 位置24a、24b的解剖結構24。按需要,辅助結構25 可組態成為解剖結構,例如上述組織或可組態成為接 枝、網目(mesh)、黏土、硬件、骨板的植入物,或任 何替代結構。在這點上’更應瞭解,錫組件20可包含 任意複數個錯22按需要。例如,輔助結構25可定位 於致動繩股38中之一或兩者,特別是附接部份133 中之一或兩者,與至少一解剖結構24之間。因此,當 致動繩股38(特別是,附接部份33)的張力產生時,辅 助結構24(例如,軟組織)在第一及第二目標解剖位置 24a、24b的位置可被拉往及固定於例如在致動繩股 38、解剖結構24之間的解剖結構24,例如,骨路。 在這點上,應瞭解,輔助結構24、解刳結構24的間 隙會減少。此外,如果間隙配置於錨22a、22b之間, 如第1A圖至第1B圖所示,除了固定輔助結構25於 解剖結構24以外,致動繩股38的張力可使間隙24c 進一步接近。因此,除非另有說明,以下說明意謂經 組態成可使間隙24c接近的致動繩股38張力也被組態 成可固定輔助結構於致動繩股38、第一及第二目標解 剖位置24a、24b中之至少一解剖結構24之間。 替換地或附加地,如第1D圖所示,錨組件20可 包含經組態成可固定輔助結構25於致動繩股38、解 剖結構24之間的至少一錨22。例如,錨22可用上述 方式固定至解剖結構24的目標解剖位置24a。致動繩 8 201210564 =38例如對立的第一及第二末端(各自可由致動部 份^及附接部们33定義)可打結、縫合或以其他方 1固定於另〜解剖結構2 7,從而例如在致動繩股3 8、 解剖結,24之間’在致動繩股38中產生張力以及拉 扯及^定輔助結構25(例如,軟組織)於解剖結構24(例 如,骨骼)。在這點上,應瞭解,辅助結構25、解剖 結構24之間的間隙會減少。致動繩股38可與錨體28 分開及編織穿過錨體28,如第2A圖至第2B圖所示, 或可與銷體28整合,如第8A圖所示。 此外,當致動繩股38在缺損24接近後仍有張力 時’可防止錨體28由解剖位置退回而可能使解剖缺損 打開。因此,一旦間隙24c接近後,第一錨22a的致 動繩股38可附接至第二銷咖㈣動繩股%以便維 持第-及第m2a、22b之間的張力以及防止第一及 第二錨22a、22b分開。201210564 VI. STATEMENT OF EMBODIMENT: RELATED APPLICATIONS This application claims the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of the benefit of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 61/398,699 (U.S. Pat. No. No. 61/432,755, filed Jan. U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 61/461,490, filed on Jan. 18, 2011 (Henrichsen, et al.), and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 61/443,142 (Overes), filed on Feb. 15, 2011. The contents of the disclosure are incorporated herein by reference. [Prior Art] An orthopaedic surgical procedure often involves the use of a fixation device. Often in the bone or soft tissue, the access hole can be fastened to the appropriate holder. Except for the screw, an expandable holder can be used, which is inserted into the hole in a collapsed state, and is converted into an expanded state after being correctly positioned. In an exemplary orthopedic surgery (e.g., lumbar removal), the treatment of radiculopathy is accomplished by surgical removal of herniated nucleus pulposus to achieve neurodecompression. Waist removal is one of the most common spinal procedures available today. Many patients use this procedure to reduce the severity of the disease, but for others, the disc may re-herniate through the opening of the ring causing persistent pain and may require additional surgery. Mesh #, the standard ablation technique does not include the closure of the ring defect (clear 1ardefeet) and makes the surgery a dilemma. The surgeon treating the radiculopathy may choose to remove the protruding portion of the nucleus that invades the nerve, but increases the risk that the remaining dragon will produce a further f through the financial (four) ring defect. Alternatively, the surgeon can choose to perform a large area of demobilization (deMUking). In addition to the protruding part, the basin removes most of the remaining core (4) with the most expensive hand-carrying wind = however, the post-operative vertebra The risk of gap collapse (disc to coma -) and subsequent follow-up of back pain reduction will increase. Two copies = object? Containing a sleeve 'the sleeve has an expandable portion and a compression element extending through the center hole of the (four), and is formed by a hole or a hole in the peripheral wall of the sleeve. "Several = r 曲" - According to an implementation For example, an anchor assembly is fixed to the target anatomy. The tin assembly is configured to include an anchor body that can define a - expandable portion. 兮 = ' and the pin is in the first configuration Extending along the elongate direction; the portion passes through the anchor body and substantially extends along the elongate field to form a plurality of openings 10 201210564. The anchor further includes extending through the actuations The actuating member is "formed by =r=:;r by the first-configuration" _方方::;==收 [Implementation] = Please refer to the respective containment configured At least - expandable 22 that is fixed at _28 of the anatomical location, such as a plurality of expandable aids, :=, an anatomical structure 24 definition. In accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the tin assembly 20 includes a first error 22a and a second pin that are each configured to be secured to an anatomical location (e.g., anatomical structure 24). The anatomical structure 24 can be defined, for example, by a (four) position of a human or other animal or a planted person that is fixed or configured to be affixed to a human or other anatomical location. The definition of the anatomical location may be tissue that may include (d) at least one of soft tissue (e.g., 'tendon, ligament, cartilage, a ring of the disc, or the like). According to an embodiment, at least one anatomical structure 24 can define first and second target anatomical locations 24a, 24b on two opposite sides of a gap (e.g., gap 2 4 c). Thus, the gap 24c can be configured in an anatomical structure, and for example, an anatomical defect can be defined, or can be disposed between different anatomical structures. The first and second anchors 22a, 22b can be injected or otherwise actuated or inserted into the first and second target anatomical locations 24a, 24b' on each of the opposite sides of the gap 24c, and then pulled toward the other side to cause the gap 24c 201210564 Close. Alternatively or additionally, the anchor assembly 20 is configured to secure the auxiliary structure 25 to the anatomy 24 as described in the description of the lc to id diagrams. In this regard, it should be understood that the anchor assembly 2 may need to include any number of I seedlings 22. Each anchor body 28 can include an expandable portion 36 and an actuating member 37, such as an actuation strand 38 that is stepped to drive the expandable portion 36 and thereby the anchor body 28, The first configuration illustrated in FIG. 1A (by initially placing the anchor body 28 at the target anatomical location) is moved to the expanded configuration illustrated in FIG. 1B, whereby the pin body 28 can be secured to the anatomical structure 24 . Thus, the anchors 22a, 2 plus the wrong bodies 28 can each be inserted through the apertures 23 at the target anatomical locations 24a, 24b, for example, the 'target anatomical locations 24a, 24b can be injected into the I seed body 28 at the target anatomical locations 24a, 24b. Produced at the time. Each of the actuation strands 38 of the first and second faults 22a, 22b can be attached to each other. For example, the actuation strand 38 of the first pin 22a can be integrated with the actuation strand 38 of the first error 22b. Alternatively, as detailed below, the actuation strand 38 of the first anchor 22a can be separated from the actuation strand 38 of the second anchor 22a', whereby any suitable connection member 63 is subsequently used (eg, refer to Figure 18C) The actuating strands 38 of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b are attached directly or indirectly. The connecting member 63 can be integrated with either or both of the actuation strands 38 (e.g., with reference to Figure 19A) or can be individually attached to each of the actuation strands 38 (e.g., reference to Figure 20A). According to an embodiment, the actuation strands 38 of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b each define at least an intermeshing portion 131 and may further comprise at least one attachment portion 133. The actuation sections 131 are each configured to accept an actuation force that causes the anchors 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration, respectively. According to the illustrated embodiment, the attachment portions 133 of the first and second offset actuation strands 38 are configured to be attachable to one another. The attachment portions 133 can be integrated with one another using any suitable attachment member, or Attached. Further, according to the illustrated embodiment, the actuation portion 131 may also define attachment portions that are configurable to each other in any suitable manner before or after application of the actuation force F to the actuation portion 131. Accordingly, the attachment portion 133 of the individual anchor is configured to attach the individual anchor to another anchor, such as the attachment portion 133 of the other anchor. In addition, the actuation portion 131 of the individual anchor is configured to attach the individual anchor to another anchor. According to the illustrated embodiment, the attachment portion 133 of the actuation strand 38 of the first anchor 22a and the attachment portion 133 of the actuation strand 38 of the second anchor 22b, however, it should be understood that the first and second anchors The attachment portions 133 of 22a, 22b can be separated from each other and attached to each other, as described below. With continued reference to Figures 1A through 1B, once the expandable portion 36 of the anchors 22a, 22b has been moved to the expanded configuration, the actuating strand 38 can be tensioned. For example, according to an embodiment, either or both of the proximity force AF can be applied to the actuation portions 131 of the actuation strands 38 of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b to create the first and second anchors. The tension of the actuating strands 38 of 22a, 22b is such as to apply a biasing force that pulls the first and second anchors 22a, 22b toward each other. Therefore, if the configuration gap 24c is moved between the first and second booths 22a, 22b by the biasing force, the gap 24c (in some embodiments, this may be an anatomical defect, such as the above). Tissue defects are close. 7 201210564 Alternatively or additionally, as shown in Figure 1C, the tin assembly 20 is configured to secure the auxiliary structure 25 to an anatomical structure 24 that can define individual target anatomical locations 24a, 24b. The auxiliary structure 25 can be configured as an anatomical structure, such as the tissue described above or an implant that can be configured as a graft, mesh, clay, hardware, bone plate, or any alternative structure, as desired. In this regard, it will be appreciated that tin assembly 20 can include any number of errors 22 as desired. For example, the auxiliary structure 25 can be positioned between one or both of the actuation strands 38, particularly one or both of the attachment portions 133, and between the at least one anatomical structure 24. Thus, when tension is applied to the actuation strand 38 (in particular, the attachment portion 33), the position of the auxiliary structure 24 (e.g., soft tissue) at the first and second target anatomical locations 24a, 24b can be pulled An anatomical structure 24, such as a bone path, is secured, for example, between the actuation strands 38, the anatomy 24. In this regard, it will be appreciated that the gap between the auxiliary structure 24 and the untwisting structure 24 will be reduced. Further, if the gap is disposed between the anchors 22a, 22b, as shown in Figs. 1A to 1B, in addition to fixing the auxiliary structure 25 to the anatomical structure 24, the tension of the actuating strands 38 can bring the gap 24c closer. Thus, unless otherwise indicated, the following description means that the actuation strand 38 tension configured to bring the gap 24c into proximity is also configured to secure the auxiliary structure to the actuation strand 38, the first and second target anatomy Between at least one of the anatomical structures 24 of the locations 24a, 24b. Alternatively or additionally, as shown in FIG. 1D, the anchor assembly 20 can include at least one anchor 22 configured to secure the auxiliary structure 25 between the actuation strand 38 and the anatomical structure 24. For example, the anchor 22 can be secured to the target anatomical location 24a of the anatomy 24 in the manner described above. Actuating cord 8 201210564 = 38, for example, the opposing first and second ends (each of which may be defined by the actuation portion and the attachment portion 33) may be knotted, stitched or otherwise secured to the other anatomy 2 7 Thus, for example, between the actuation strands 38, the anatomical junctions 24, tension is created in the actuation strands 38 and the auxiliary structure 25 (e.g., soft tissue) is pulled and secured to the anatomical structure 24 (e.g., bone). In this regard, it will be appreciated that the gap between the auxiliary structure 25 and the anatomical structure 24 will be reduced. The actuation strands 38 can be separated from the anchor body 28 and woven through the anchor body 28, as shown in Figures 2A-2B, or can be integrated with the pin body 28, as shown in Figure 8A. In addition, when the actuation strand 38 is still tensioned after the defect 24 approaches, the anchor 28 can be prevented from retracting from the anatomical location and possibly opening the anatomical defect. Therefore, once the gap 24c is approached, the actuating strands 38 of the first anchor 22a can be attached to the second pin (4) moving strands % in order to maintain the tension between the first and the m2a, 22b and prevent the first and the first The two anchors 22a, 22b are separated.

儘管圖示於第1A圖至第1B圖的第一及第二錨 22a、22b分別用以下在說明第2A圖與第2B圖時所 述的方式構造,應瞭解’錨22a、22b的構造可按需要 根據描述於本文的任何實施例或任何替代實施例。此 外,應暸解,儘管錨組件20包含組態成可植入於在間 隙24c之兩對邊上的第一及第二錨22a、22b,錨组二 2 0可包含數目跟想要附接之銷2 2 —樣多(例如,至少 兩個)的錨22 ’彼等可成對排列或按需要排列,例如 越過相同的間隙或解剖缺損,越過-個以上的間隙, 或按拍要配置於間隙的同一邊。替換地,複數個銷U 9 201210564 可全部附接在一起’藉此可配置錨22中選定的 、 解剖缺損的一邊以及可配置錨22中之其他者於個, 缺損的另一邊,或替換地越過不同的解剖缺損。' °' 繼續參考第2A圖至第2B圖,錨體28以〇 展部份36沿著中軸線29呈長形,以及定義第 或近端3 0以及實質沿著中軸線2 9與近端3 〇隔開的= 二末端或遠端32。中軸線29可定義任何形狀,戈按 需要有任何形狀部份。例如,中軸線29,部份中^ ^ 29可呈線性、實質線性、非線性(包含規則、不規則、'、 或其他的弧形)’或按需要可有其他的形狀。因此, 體28可定義在第—及第二末端%、32之間線性延伸 的長形方向34。應瞭解,例如當中軸線29實質筆直 時’長形方向34可與中軸線29實質重合。更應瞭解, 例如當中軸線29呈非線性時,長形方向34至少部份 或貫質完全與中軸線29隔開。錨體28更定義有第一 末端或近端39a及第二末端或遠端3%的可擴展部份 36。可擴展部伤36 W近端39a可與錨體28的近端3〇 重合或不重合(例如,相對凹人)’以及可擴展部份%Although the first and second anchors 22a, 22b shown in Figs. 1A to 1B are respectively constructed in the manner described below in the description of Figs. 2A and 2B, it should be understood that the construction of the anchors 22a, 22b can be understood. Any of the embodiments or any alternative embodiments described herein are as desired. Moreover, it should be appreciated that although the anchor assembly 20 includes first and second anchors 22a, 22b that are configured to be implantable on two opposite sides of the gap 24c, the anchor set 220 can include a number to which it is intended to be attached. Pins 2 2 - many (eg, at least two) of the anchors 22 ' may be arranged in pairs or as desired, such as over the same gap or anatomical defect, over more than one gap, or by beat The same side of the gap. Alternatively, the plurality of pins U 9 201210564 may all be attached together 'by thereby arranging the selected one of the anatomically-deficient sides of the anchor 22 and the other of the configurable anchors 22, the other side of the defect, or alternatively Cross different anatomical defects. '°' Continuing with reference to Figures 2A-2B, the anchor body 28 is elongated along the central axis 29 with the flared portion 36, and defines the first or proximal end 30 and substantially along the central axis 2 9 and the proximal end 3 〇 separated = two ends or distal ends 32. The central axis 29 can define any shape, and any shape portion is required as needed. For example, the central axis 29 may be linear, substantially linear, non-linear (including regular, irregular, 'or other arcs') or may have other shapes as desired. Thus, body 28 can define an elongated direction 34 that extends linearly between the first and second ends %, 32. It will be appreciated that the elongate direction 34 may substantially coincide with the central axis 29, for example, when the central axis 29 is substantially straight. It will be further appreciated that, for example, when the central axis 29 is non-linear, the elongate direction 34 is at least partially or substantially completely separated from the central axis 29. The anchor body 28 is further defined with a first end or proximal end 39a and a second end or distal end 3% expandable portion 36. The expandable portion 36 W proximal end 39a may coincide or not coincide with the proximal end 3 of the anchor 28 (eg, relatively concave) and the expandable portion%

的遠端39b可與錯體28㈣端%重合或不重 如,相對凹入)。 V 錨22更包含可組態成為致動繩股38的致動構件 37 ’它可使可擴展部份%從而鋪體28,由圖示於第 1A圖之第一組態運關圖㈣第圖之擴展組離。 :== 要广任何替代方式構成的線來提供致 動规版3 8。J田體28的Ί5Γ搞ft Jirt /八、 妁了擴展部份36沿著長形方向34 201210564 延伸以便定義初始距離Dl ’其係於第一組態時沿著長 形方向34由近端39a至遠端39b測得。初始距離di 可按需要有任何長度,其範園是:下端可用約5毫米、 或者約10毫米、或者約20毫米、以及或者約24.5毫 米定義’以及上端可用約5〇毫米、或者約40毫米、 或者約30毫米、以及或者約25.5毫米定義。 此外,在處於第一組態時’可擴展部份36定義在 與長形方向34實質垂直的第二方向35延伸的初始最 大厚度T1 ^可按需要製作初始最大厚度τΐ的尺寸。 如第1B圖所示’在可擴展部份36處於擴展組態時, 可擴展部份36沿著長形方向34收合,例如或壓縮或 糾結,成第二距離D2,其係沿著長形方向34由近端 39a至遠端39b測量。第二距離D2可小於初始距離 °當可擴展部份36沿著長形方向收合時,例如在 它由第一組態運動到擴展組態時,可擴展部份36沿著 第二方向35擴展成大於初始最大厚度T1的第二最大 厚度T2。第二最大厚度T2沿著實質垂直於長形方向 34的第二方向35延伸。 可定義在第二方向35的最大厚度ΤΙ、Τ2,使得 、·田體28在第_一方向35不定義分別大於最大厚度τι、 Τ2的厚度。應瞭解,在可擴展部份36運動到擴展組 態(例如,由可擴展部份36在處於擴展組態時的組態 引起的)時,近端及遠端39a、39b在可擴展部份36上 可改變位置。不過,在可擴展部份36處於擴展組態 時,近端及遠端39a、39b繼續定義可擴展部份36的 201210564 最近端及最遠端,蘇μ + 時在可擴展部份% 瑞& 土部份36纽擴展組態 刀妁的近鳊及返端39a、39b之間沿荖 長形方向34直線定義距離M。 %。者 ^擴展部份36可定義各自定義沿著第二方向35 延過了擴展部份36之開孔40(例如,至少兩個開 孔40)的後數個線圈(1卿)3卜例如可將線圈η構 造成為如帛3Α圖至帛3C圖所示的線圈56,圖示於 第11Α圖至第11Η圖的線圈99,或任何適當以替代 方式構成的_。可擴展部份36可包含任意複數個線 圈31 >(物8個線圈,8個以上的線圈,8個以下的 線圈。開孔40沿著中軸線29實質隔開,從而也沿著 長^/方向34實質隔開。例如,開孔4〇沿著在長形方 向34有分!的方向隔開。因此,開孔40可沿著長形 方向34及第二方向35隔開。 開孔40可定義最近端開孔4〇a與最遠端開孔 40b’以及至少一個中間開孔4〇c,例如配置於最近端 開孔40a、最遠端開孔4〇b之間的複數個中間開孔 4〇c。可擴展部份36可配置於定義近端、遠端開孔 40a、40b之間(包括)的線圈31。致動繩股%經組態 成可編織穿過至少一個開孔4〇,包含複數個開孔 例如:至少兩個至所有的開孔4〇)。因此’在實質 沿著長形方向34施加致動力F至致動繩股38時,致 動繩股38可偏壓可擴展部份%從而錨體28以沿著長 形方向34收合及沿著第二方向35擴展,從而使該鋪 由第一組態擴展至擴展組態。力F可為拉力㈦仍^ 12 201210564 之 含力或可偏離純拉力但是有為純拉肛 IS^應瞭解,可實質沿著長形方向24施加 力F至各個致動繩股3 y 24重合或平行的方向„具有與長形方向 平行或重合。或可完全與長形方向24 應瞭解,在可擴展部份36處於第一組態時,至少 開孔40至所有開孔4〇在個別線圈的近端及遠端 •^間可定義第-最大尺寸,以及在個別線圈31的兩對 邊之間延伸於翻線圈31之間的第二最大尺寸。在可 擴展部份36由第-組態擴展至擴展組態時,至少一開 孔40至所有開孔4〇的第二尺寸第一尺寸之比可增 加此外,在可擴展部份處於擴展組態時,複數個線 圈31,例如,線圈31的兩對邊,沿著第二方向%重 豐$可大於在可擴展部份36處於第一組態時的。根據 具加例,線圈31的兩對邊在第二方向35不重疊, 或在第二方向35稍微重疊,這取決於產生於可擴展部 份36的張力量。 請參考第3A圖至第3C圖’錨體22的形式可為 基材42,在一實施例中,可為定義錨體繩股44的線, 例如縫合線(suture strand)或以任何替代方式構成的 線。按需要,錨體繩股44及錨組件20的其他組件為 可吸收(resorbable)。按需要,錨體繩股44可具有任何 適當的USP(美國藥典)大小(或直徑),例如在USP 7-0、USP 5之間(包括),例如在USP 2-0、USP 5之間 (包括),例如USP 2。錨體繩股44可為織布及多孔以 201210564 便定義開孔,或按需要可為不織布 錨體繩股44為織布或者是不織及無,孔。不論 (braid)錨體繩股44以便定義開^ /可按需要編結 構造猫體22從而可擴展«繩股44 步打個有支柱端— 止擋結(stopperknot)46,它可定義化 、 結46。 料體28的近端止擋 錨體繩股44定義定義第一止梓处 的第-端部52,例如近端部份 之自由端5〇 *之支柱端48的第二料54,例=,端止擋結 法更包含下列步驟:使第-端部5 2在f。該方 46的位置處成圈(1_以便形成第—近 止擒結 :為配置於近端30的終端線圈。第一近端線:’它 穿過止播結46使得第—端部52由第、、圈56a 延伸穿過止播結46。第一端部52可進一^圈如 近端線圈%及„以便定義娜28 ^ 近端線圈57,如第2ASI至第2Bffil所示圈=最 =的第1部52可轉或若需要在㈣於^體^股 最近端線圈57的位置(從而緊鄰於近端3。及39丄之 1個簡早結’以及按需要燒去茸毛a 線44在使用期間的結構完整性。因此,第—端寺每 可疋義錨體28之線圈31的最近端線圈57之52 -亥方法更包含遠端編結第二端部Μ的步 疋義可擴展部份36的實質沿著中軸線29隔開以3 方式構成的複數個線圈56。線圈56各自定定義^ 201210564 個開孔40中之_個。例如 二端部54成_步驟”方法可進-步包含使筹 端線圈56b,於先前線1新的線圈,例如第1 56a,以及使第二遠端線圈第-近端線圈 56a。該編結步驟可進一步勺人 “第—近端線圈 端部54製成新的線圈,加步驟:由第二 此將先前線圈(例如,$ _…第二遇端線圈56c,藉 端線圈56c是在近端七=細)配置成對於附加遠 鄰於先前線圈56b °,線圈56c經配置成緊 圈-穿過最近端線圈:::步法:包含使附加遠端線 4方法更^含下列步驟:按需要由 第二端部54 ^成,:附加遠端線圈,以及使新的附加遠端線圈56 之每穿過各自的先前線圈以製成另一侗新的遠端 線圈°可按需要製成新的附加遠端線圈56 J:到產生有 想要長度的編結58及有想要數目的線圈%。一旦編 結58已達所欲長度,第二端部54在最遠端線圈% 的遠端處可打結或以其他方式結尾以便定義第二止擋 結60 ’它可定義錨體28的遠端止擋結。第二端部54 可切掉或若需要在緊鄰於第二止擋結60的位置打個 簡單結’以及燒去茸毛以便維持使用期間的結構完整 性。因此’第二端部54定義第二止擋結60的自由端。 應瞭解,儘管可擴展部份36的線圈56可由如第 3A至3C圖所示的錯體繩股44構成,因此根據圖示 實施例可相互整合,然而替換地,可擴展部份36可包 含兩個或更多錨線55,它們可單獨及/或〆起定義可 15 201210564 用以下方式連結的數個編結分段或線圈56,例如,焊 接(如以下在說明第5C圖時所詳述的)、縫合(如以下 在說明第5D圖時所§羊述的)、打结、絞接(SpHce)、或 以其他方式附接。更應瞭解,按需要可以任何交替方 式編結銷體繩股44以便定義有可擴展部份36的銷體 28 ’該可擴展部份36經組態成可使它由第一組態運動 至擴展組癌,如本文所述。 致動繩股38與可擴展部份36從而與錦體28可分 開或不整合’以及按需要用任何方式附接至可擴展部 份36 ’如第1Α圖至第1Β圖及第2Α圖至第2Β圖所 示’使得施加至致動繩股38的致動力F導致錨體28 由第一組態運動至擴展組態。按需要,該致動繩股可 具有任何適當的USP(美國藥典)大小(或直徑),例如在 USP 7-0、USP 5 之間(包括),例如在 USP 2-0、USP 5 之間(包括)。例如,如第2Α圖所示,錨22可包含與 致動主體28之基材42分開或不整合以及附接至基材 42的輔助繩股33。可編織輔助繩股33從而延伸穿過 一對開孔40,例如第一或近端選定開孔45a與對於第 —選定開孔45a是配置於遠端的第二或遠端選定開孔 45b。根據圖示實施例,第一選定開孔45a為最近端開 孔40a而第二選定開孔45b為最遠端開孔40b,然而 應瞭解’第一及第二選定開孔45a、45b中之任一或兩 者可選自中間開孔40c。致動繩股38可定義第一部份 41 ’它可定義在近端伸出,例如在對於接受致動繩股 38之開孔40是在近端的位置由錫體28伸出的致動部 201210564 份。第一部份41可進一步延伸及離開解剖位置24, 且被經組態成可接受致動力F。根據一些具體實施 例’第一部份41更可定義致動繩股38的末端。致動 繩股38可由第一部份41遠端延伸。 在此參考第一及第二選定開孔45a、45b描述數個 具體實施例。應瞭解’相對於確定第—及第二選定開 孔的不同具體實施例,元件符號“45a”及“45b”用來在 概念上識別第-及第二選定開孔旧孔4()中定義特定 之第及第—選定開孔45a、45b的特定者不-定逐個 具體實施谢目符’事實场冑要可隨著減實施例而 有所不同。 可進一步使致動繩股38有穿過第二選定開孔45b 的線圈以便定義第—及第二部份,它們定義第一部份 41與第二部份43,該第二部份43可定義向近端伸出 解剖結構24且在第—部份41對面的成圈部份。如以 下所洋述的’根據—些具體實施例,可施加致動力F 至致動繩股38,例如至第一部份41及第二部份们中 之至少一或,者,以便使可擴展部份36由第一組態運 動至擴展組,4。根據圖示實施例,可編織第二部份43 從而延伸穿過可配置於第—及第二選定開孔45a、45b 之間的至少一開孔4〇(例如,複數個選定開孔4〇),使 仔致動繩股38可義線圈53。例如,致動繩股%的 第二部份43可編織穿過複數個中間開孔输,以及進 -步編織穿過第-選^開孔45a,它可為最近端開孔 40a。第-及第二部份41、43可由錯體近端延伸及離 17 201210564 開解。彳位置,藉此可施加致動力F至第一部份41,第 =j份43可附接至第二錨的致動繩股。因此,根據圖 不實施例,第一部份41定義致動繩股38的致動部份 131,以及第二部份43定義致動繩股38的附接部份 133。替換地,如第2B圖所示,第二部份幻可接受 ^動力F而第一部份41可附接至第二錨的致動繩 ^因此,第二部份43可定義致動繩股38的致動部 伤131而第一部份41可定義致動繩股兇的附接份 133 〇 如上文在說明第1A圖至第1B圖時所述,致動繩 股38可與第二錨的致動繩股整合。替換地,可按需要 用任何方式附接致動繩股3 8 ’例如經由任何適當的連 接構件,例如黏著劑、結、焊件(例如,參考第5C圖)、The distal end 39b may coincide or not be as heavy as the wrong body 28 (four) end. The V-anchor 22 further includes an actuating member 37 that can be configured to actuate the strand 38. 'It can expand the % of the portion to the paving body 28, as illustrated by the first configuration in Figure 1A (4) The extended group of the graph is separated. :== To extend the line of any alternative way to provide an actuation plate 38.田 rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt Measured to the distal end 39b. The initial distance di may be of any length as desired, and the lower end may be defined as about 5 mm, or about 10 mm, or about 20 mm, and or about 24.5 mm, and the upper end may be about 5 mm, or about 40 mm. , or about 30 mm, and or about 25.5 mm. Moreover, the initial maximum thickness T1 of the expandable portion 36 defined in the second direction 35 substantially perpendicular to the elongated direction 34 when in the first configuration can be made to the size of the initial maximum thickness τ 按 as desired. As shown in FIG. 1B, 'when the expandable portion 36 is in the expanded configuration, the expandable portion 36 is folded along the elongated direction 34, for example, compressed or tangled to a second distance D2, which is along the length. The shape direction 34 is measured from the proximal end 39a to the distal end 39b. The second distance D2 may be less than the initial distance. When the expandable portion 36 is collapsed in the elongate direction, such as when it is moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration, the expandable portion 36 is along the second direction 35. Expanded to a second maximum thickness T2 that is greater than the initial maximum thickness T1. The second maximum thickness T2 extends along a second direction 35 that is substantially perpendicular to the elongated direction 34. The maximum thickness ΤΙ, Τ2 in the second direction 35 can be defined such that the field body 28 does not define thicknesses greater than the maximum thicknesses τι, Τ2, respectively, in the first direction 35. It will be appreciated that the proximal and distal ends 39a, 39b are in the expandable portion as the expandable portion 36 moves to the extended configuration (e.g., caused by the configuration of the expandable portion 36 when in the extended configuration). The position can be changed on 36. However, when the expandable portion 36 is in the extended configuration, the near and far ends 39a, 39b continue to define the 201210564 most recent and farthest end of the expandable portion 36, and the Su μ + is in the expandable portion % 瑞 & The distance between the proximal and return ends 39a, 39b of the earth portion 36 New Zealand extended configuration knife is defined by a straight line along the lengthwise direction 34 of the crucible. %. The extension portion 36 can define a plurality of coils (1) that each define an opening 40 (e.g., at least two openings 40) extending through the extension portion 36 along the second direction 35. The coil η is configured as a coil 56 as shown in FIG. 3A to FIG. 3C, and is illustrated in the coil 99 of the 11th to 11th drawings, or any suitably configured _. The expandable portion 36 can include any number of coils 31 > (8 coils, 8 or more coils, 8 or less coils. The apertures 40 are substantially separated along the central axis 29, thereby also along the length ^ The / direction 34 is substantially spaced apart. For example, the apertures 4 are spaced apart in a direction that is divided in the elongate direction 34. Thus, the apertures 40 can be spaced apart along the elongate direction 34 and the second direction 35. 40 may define a proximal end opening 4〇a and a distal end opening 40b' and at least one intermediate opening 4〇c, for example, a plurality of disposed between the proximal end opening 40a and the most distal opening 4〇b Intermediate opening 4〇c. The expandable portion 36 can be disposed in a coil 31 defining (including) between the proximal end and the distal opening 40a, 40b. The actuating strand % is configured to be woven through at least one The opening 4 〇 includes a plurality of openings such as: at least two to all of the openings 4). Thus, when the actuation force F is applied substantially in the elongated direction 34 to the actuation strand 38, the actuation strand 38 can bias the expandable portion % so that the anchor body 28 collapses and follows along the elongated direction 34. The second direction 35 is expanded to extend the shop from the first configuration to the extended configuration. The force F can be the tension (seven) still ^ 12 201210564 the force or can deviate from the pure tension but there is a pure pull anus IS ^ should be understood, the force F can be applied substantially along the long direction 24 to the respective actuating strands 3 y 24 coincide Or parallel directions „ have parallel or coincident with the elongated direction. Or may be completely related to the elongated direction 24, at least when the expandable portion 36 is in the first configuration, at least the opening 40 to all the openings 4 The first and largest dimensions of the coil may be defined between the proximal end and the distal end, and a second largest dimension extending between the two opposite sides of the individual coil 31 between the turned coils 31. When the configuration is extended to the extended configuration, the ratio of the at least one opening 40 to the second size of the first size of all the openings 4 可 can be increased. Further, when the expandable portion is in the extended configuration, the plurality of coils 31, for example The two opposite sides of the coil 31 may be larger than the second direction % in the first configuration. According to the additional example, the two opposite sides of the coil 31 are not in the second direction 35. Overlap, or slightly overlapping in the second direction 35, depending on the sheet resulting from the expandable portion 36 Referring to Figures 3A-3C, the form of the anchor 22 can be a substrate 42, in one embodiment, a line defining the anchor strand 44, such as a suture strand or in any Alternative lines of construction. The anchor strands 44 and other components of the anchor assembly 20 are resorbable as desired. The anchor strands 44 can have any suitable USP (United States Pharmacopoeia) size (or diameter) as desired. ), for example between USP 7-0, USP 5 (inclusive), for example between USP 2-0, USP 5 (inclusive), such as USP 2. The anchor strand 44 can be woven and porous to 201210564 Defining the opening, or if desired, the non-woven anchor strand 44 is woven or non-woven and non-woven, regardless of the braided anchor strand 44 to define the opening / / can be constructed as needed to create the cat body 22 Scalable « strands 44 steps to have a strut end - stop knot 46, which can be defined, knot 46. The proximal stop of the body 28 anchor strand 44 defines the first stop The first end portion 52, for example, the second end 54 of the proximal end portion of the free end 5〇* of the post end 48, for example, the end stop blocking method further includes The following steps: the first end portion 52 is looped at the position of the square 46 (1_ to form a first-near stop knot: a terminal coil disposed at the proximal end 30. The first proximal line: ' It passes through the stop knot 46 such that the first end 52 extends from the first, loop 56a through the stop knot 46. The first end 52 can be advanced into a loop such as the proximal coil % and „ to define the Na 28 ^ proximal end The coil 57, as indicated by the second ASI to the second Bffil, = the most = the first portion 52 can be rotated or if necessary (4) at the position of the proximal end coil 57 (and thus immediately adjacent to the proximal end 3. And a simple early knot of 39' and the structural integrity of the hairline a 44 as needed during use. Therefore, the 52-Hai method of the nearest-end coil 57 of the coil 31 of the apex-possible anchor body 28 further includes the substantial portion of the step-excitable expandable portion 36 of the distal end of the second end portion. The axis 29 is separated by a plurality of coils 56 constructed in a three-way manner. The coils 56 each define one of the 201210564 openings 40. For example, the two-end portion 54 can be stepped to include a make-up coil 56b, a new coil on the previous line 1, such as the first 56a, and a second distal coil first-near coil 56a. The step can further scoop the "first-proximal coil end 54 to make a new coil, adding steps: by the second this will be the previous coil (for example, $ _... second end coil 56c, borrowing end coil 56c is near The end seven = thin) is configured to be attached to the previous coil 56b °, the coil 56c is configured to be tight-through the nearest-end coil:::step: including the method of making the additional remote line 4 further include the following steps: By the second end portion 54 as needed, the distal coil is attached, and each of the new additional distal coils 56 is passed through the respective previous coil to make another new remote coil. A new additional remote coil 56 J: to produce a braid 58 of the desired length and a desired number of coils. Once the braid 58 has reached the desired length, the second end 54 can be knotted or otherwise terminated at the distal end of the most distal coil % to define a second stop knot 60 'which defines the distal end of the anchor 28 Stop the knot. The second end portion 54 can be cut or if desired, a simple knot is placed adjacent to the second stop knot 60 and the hair is burned to maintain structural integrity during use. Thus the second end 54 defines the free end of the second stop knot 60. It will be appreciated that although the coils 56 of the expandable portion 36 may be constructed of the wrong body strands 44 as shown in Figures 3A through 3C, they may be integrated with each other according to the illustrated embodiment, however alternatively, the expandable portion 36 may comprise Two or more anchor lines 55, which may be individually and/or splayed, may be defined as 15 201210564. A number of braided segments or coils 56 that are joined in the following manner, for example, soldering (as detailed below in the description of Figure 5C) , suture (as described below in the description of Figure 5D), knotting, splicing (SpHce), or otherwise attached. It will be further appreciated that the pin string 44 can be braided in any alternating manner as desired to define the pin body 28 of the expandable portion 36. The expandable portion 36 is configured to move it from the first configuration to the extension Group cancer, as described herein. Actuating the strands 38 and the expandable portion 36 so as to be separable or unconformable with the brocade 28 and attaching to the expandable portion 36' in any manner as desired, as in Figures 1 to 1 and 2 to The second embodiment shows that the actuation force F applied to the actuation strand 38 causes the anchor 28 to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. The actuation strand may have any suitable USP (United States Pharmacopoeia) size (or diameter), as desired, for example between USP 7-0, USP 5 (inclusive), such as between USP 2-0, USP 5 (include). For example, as shown in Figure 2, the anchor 22 can include an auxiliary strand 33 that is separate or uncoupled from the substrate 42 of the actuation body 28 and that is attached to the substrate 42. The auxiliary strands 33 can be woven to extend through a pair of apertures 40, such as a first or proximal selected aperture 45a and a second or distal selected aperture 45b disposed at the distal end for the first selected aperture 45a. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first selected opening 45a is the proximal opening 40a and the second selected opening 45b is the distal opening 40b, however, it should be understood that the first and second selected openings 45a, 45b Either or both may be selected from the intermediate opening 40c. The actuation strand 38 can define a first portion 41 'which can be defined to project proximally, such as by actuation of the tin body 28 at a proximal end position for receiving the aperture 40 of the actuation strand 38. Ministry 201210564 copies. The first portion 41 can be further extended and exited from the anatomical location 24 and configured to accept an actuation force F. The first portion 41 can define the end of the actuation strand 38 in accordance with some embodiments. Actuating strands 38 may extend distally of first portion 41. Several specific embodiments are described herein with reference to the first and second selected apertures 45a, 45b. It should be understood that 'with respect to different embodiments for determining the first and second selected apertures, the component symbols "45a" and "45b" are used to conceptually identify the first and second selected apertures in the old aperture 4(). The particular ones of the first and the first selected openings 45a, 45b are not specific to the implementation of the "eyes". The facts may vary from embodiment to embodiment. The actuating strand 38 can be further provided with a coil passing through the second selected opening 45b to define a first portion and a second portion defining a first portion 41 and a second portion 43, the second portion 43 being A looping portion that extends the anatomical structure 24 proximally and opposite the first portion 41 is defined. As will be described below, according to some embodiments, an actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strand 38, for example to at least one of the first portion 41 and the second portion, to enable The extension portion 36 is moved from the first configuration to the extended group, 4. According to the illustrated embodiment, the second portion 43 can be woven to extend through at least one opening 4〇 (eg, a plurality of selected openings 4〇) that can be disposed between the first and second selected openings 45a, 45b. ), so that the activating the strand 38 can be used for the coil 53. For example, the second portion 43 of the actuating strands may be woven through a plurality of intermediate openings and further woven through the first opening 45a, which may be the proximal opening 40a. The first and second portions 41, 43 can be extended from the proximal end of the wrong body and open from 17 201210564. The 彳 position, whereby the actuation force F can be applied to the first portion 41, and the =j portion 43 can be attached to the actuation strand of the second anchor. Thus, in accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the first portion 41 defines the actuation portion 131 of the actuation strand 38 and the second portion 43 defines the attachment portion 133 of the actuation strand 38. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 2B, the second portion can accept the power F and the first portion 41 can be attached to the actuation rope of the second anchor. Therefore, the second portion 43 can define the actuation rope. The actuation portion of the strand 38 is injured 131 and the first portion 41 can define an attachment portion 133 of the actuation strand. As described above in the description of Figures 1A-1B, the actuation strand 38 can be The second anchor's actuation strands are integrated. Alternatively, the actuation strands 38 can be attached in any manner as desired, for example, via any suitable attachment member, such as an adhesive, a knot, a weldment (e.g., see Figure 5C),

縫合(例如,參考第5D圖)、絞接(例如,參考第19D 圖至第19H圖)、結(例如,參考第4A圖)、辅助連接 構件(例如,參考第20A圖)、或按需要任何替代合適 連接構件。 在操作期間,繼續參考第2A圖,當致動力F施 加至致動繩股38,尤其是致動繩股38的第一部份41 在可擴展部份36的近端39a有支撐以及致動繩股38 的第二部份43有張力時,隨著線圈53的大小減少, 可擴展部份36的遠端39b會被拉向可擴展部份%的 近端39a。例如可用解剖結構24或支撐工具(^狀丨吨 tool)來支撐近端39,或替換地在錨體28的近端3〇例 如由解剖結構24或支撐工具支撐時可支撐近端%。 201210564 因此’可擴展部份由第—_擴展至擴展組態。根 據圖示貫施例,當遠端39b被拉向近端39a時,可擴 展部份36可定義實質u形。 也參考第1A圖至第1B圖,當致動力F繼續施加 至第一部份41時,辅助繩股38平移通過錨體28,從 而減少第二部份43的鬆弛,以及最終產生第二部份 43的張力。一旦第二部份43有張力,進一步施加致 動力F至第一部份41造成線圈53的大小減少,從而 造成可擴展部份36沿著致動繩股38的第二部份43 滑動’從而沿著致動繩股38把遠端39b進一步拉向近 端39a,以及造成可擴展部份36在仍處於擴展組態時 變糾結或以其他方式收合。應瞭解,在致動繩股之第 二部份43或附接至第二錨的致動繩股38末端產生的 額外張力可向第二錨偏壓錨22,從而使間隙24c接 近,如上述。 當圖示於第2A圖的錨22定義圖示於第ία圖至 第1B圖的第一錨22a以及圖示於第2B圖的錨22定 義圖示於第1A圖至第1B圖的第二錯22b時,第一錨 22a之致動繩股38的第一部份41接受致動力F,以及 第二錨22b之致動繩股38的第二部份43可接受致動 力F。第一錨22a之致動繩股38的第二部份43可附 接至第二錨22b之致動繩股38的第一部份41。因此, 在第一及第二錨22a、22b之致動繩股38由於有致動 力施加至致動繩股38而產生的張力導致第一及第二 錨22a、22b由第一組態運動至擴展組態。如下文所詳 201210564 述的,應瞭解,第一錨22a之致動繩股38的第一及第 二部份41、43中之任一或兩者可接受致動力f,第一 錯22a之致動繩股38的第一及第二部份41、43中之 任一或兩者可附接(以整合方式或者是分離式附接)至 第二銷22b的致動繩股38,第二錯22b之致動繩股38 的第一及第二部份4卜43中之任一或兩者可接受致動 力F,以及第二錨22b之致動繩股38第一及第二部份 41、43中之任一或兩者可附接(以整合方式或者是分 離式附接)至第一錫22a的致動繩股38。 也應瞭解,第一及第二錯22a、22b的致動可發 生,而與產生於越過間隙24c之致動繩股38的張力無 關。例如,可致動錨22a、22b中之一個至擴展組態, 以及可致動錨22a、22b中之另一至擴展組態。持續施 力至致動繩股38的致動部份131中之任一或兩者在致 動繩股38的附接部份133相互附接時可在致動繩股 38的附接部份133中產生張力。 請參考第2C圖,應瞭解,致動繩股38可帶有倒 刺以利致動繩股38沿著致動方向運動通過開孔4〇而 導致可擴展部份36由第一組態運動至擴展組態。因 此’致動繩股38可定義棘輪(ratchet)用以允許致動繩 股沿著致動方向單向運動通過可擴展部份36,但是阻 止或限制致動繩股38沿著與致動方向相反的方向運 動0 致動繩股38可包含單絲(m〇n〇fiiament),以及在 一貫施例中’可為鶴毛筆縫合線(qUill suture)。致動繩 201210564 股38的致動部份131 ’它可為圖示之第二部份43,可 包含各自定義前端65的第一至少一倒刺61,例如第 一複數個倒刺61 ’該前端65定義凸輪以利致動繩股 38在前端65方向(例如’致動方向)的運動。倒刺61 中之每一可進一步定義尾端67,該尾端67定義掣子 (catch)以阻止致動繩股38沿著與致動方向相反的方 向運動通過開孔40。 致動繩股38的附接部份133(可為圖示之第一部 份41)包含經組態成在致動可擴展部份36由第一組態 至擴展組態之前及期間可保持在可擴展部份36外的 第一部份41a。第一部份43的第一部份4la可包含各 自定義前端65的第二至少一倒刺69,例如第二複數 個倒刺69,該前端65的方向與第一複數個倒刺61中 之每一的前端65的相反。第二複數個倒刺69中之每 一可進一步定義方向與第一複數個倒刺61之尾端67 相反的尾端67。因此,第一及第二倒刺61、69的尾 端67彼此面對面。第二倒刺69中之每一的尾端67 可定義接合構件,其係經組態成可抓住錨體繩股44 以便在致動繩股38沿著致動方向行進時阻止致動繩 股38運動通過開孔40。致動繩股38的附接部份 133(可為圖示之第一部份41)更包含配置於第一選定 開孔4 5 a遠端而且也可攜帶複數個第一倒刺61的第二 部份。 因此,在操作期間,當致動力F作用於致動繩股 38的致動部份131(例如,第二部份43)時,致動繩股 21 201210564 38行進通過開孔40。第一複數個倒刺61 ^ 〒之母一 έδ 定向成可定義允許致動繩股38沿著致動可_ 广 36由第一組態至擴展組態的方向運動通過開^展^部份 棘輪。致動繩股38平移通過開孔4〇直丨〇的Stitching (eg, refer to FIG. 5D), splicing (eg, refer to Figures 19D through 19H), knots (eg, refer to FIG. 4A), auxiliary connecting members (eg, refer to FIG. 20A), or as needed Any alternative to a suitable connecting member. During operation, with continued reference to FIG. 2A, when actuation force F is applied to actuation strand 38, in particular, first portion 41 of actuation strand 38 is supported and actuated at proximal end 39a of expandable portion 36. When the second portion 43 of the strand 38 is under tension, as the size of the coil 53 decreases, the distal end 39b of the expandable portion 36 is pulled toward the proximal end 39a of the expandable portion. For example, the proximal end 39 can be supported by an anatomical structure 24 or a support tool, or alternatively the proximal end can be supported at the proximal end 3 of the anchor body 28, such as by an anatomical structure 24 or a support tool. 201210564 Therefore the 'extensible part' is extended from the first to the extended configuration. According to the illustrated embodiment, the expandable portion 36 defines a substantially u-shape when the distal end 39b is pulled toward the proximal end 39a. Referring also to Figures 1A-1B, when the actuation force F continues to be applied to the first portion 41, the auxiliary strands 38 translate through the anchor body 28, thereby reducing slack in the second portion 43, and ultimately producing the second portion. The tension of 43 parts. Once the second portion 43 has tension, further application of the actuation force F to the first portion 41 causes the size of the coil 53 to decrease, thereby causing the expandable portion 36 to slide along the second portion 43 of the actuation strand 38. The distal end 39b is further pulled toward the proximal end 39a along the actuation strand 38 and causes the expandable portion 36 to become tangled or otherwise collapsed while still in the expanded configuration. It will be appreciated that additional tension generated at the second portion 43 of the actuation strand or the end of the actuation strand 38 attached to the second anchor can bias the anchor 22 toward the second anchor, thereby bringing the gap 24c into proximity, as described above . The anchor 22 shown in Fig. 2A defines the first anchor 22a shown in Fig. 1A to Fig. 1B and the anchor 22 shown in Fig. 2B. The second diagram is shown in Fig. 1A to Fig. 1B. At the error 22b, the first portion 41 of the actuating strand 38 of the first anchor 22a receives the actuation force F, and the second portion 43 of the actuation strand 38 of the second anchor 22b can receive the actuation force F. The second portion 43 of the actuation strand 38 of the first anchor 22a can be attached to the first portion 41 of the actuation strand 38 of the second anchor 22b. Thus, the tension generated by the actuating strands 38 of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b due to the actuation force applied to the actuating strands 38 causes the first and second anchors 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the expansion. configuration. As will be described in detail below in 201210564, it will be appreciated that either or both of the first and second portions 41, 43 of the actuation strand 38 of the first anchor 22a can receive an actuation force f, the first error 22a Either or both of the first and second portions 41, 43 of the actuation strand 38 can be attached (in an integrated manner or separately attached) to the actuation strand 38 of the second pin 22b, Either or both of the first and second portions 4, 43 of the actuation strand 38 of the second error 22b can receive the actuation force F, and the first and second portions of the actuation strand 38 of the second anchor 22b Either or both of the portions 41, 43 may be attached (in an integrated manner or separately attached) to the actuation strands 38 of the first tin 22a. It will also be appreciated that actuation of the first and second errors 22a, 22b may occur regardless of the tension generated by the actuation strands 38 that pass over the gap 24c. For example, one of the anchors 22a, 22b can be actuated to an extended configuration, and the other of the anchors 22a, 22b can be actuated to an extended configuration. Either or both of the actuating portions 131 of the actuating strands 38 can be applied to the attachment portion of the actuating strands 38 when the attachment portions 133 of the actuating strands 38 are attached to each other. Tension is generated in 133. Referring to Figure 2C, it should be understood that the actuating strand 38 can be barbed to facilitate movement of the strand 38 in the actuating direction through the opening 4 to cause the expandable portion 36 to move from the first configuration. To the extended configuration. Thus, the actuating strand 38 can define a ratchet to allow the actuating strand to move unidirectionally through the expandable portion 36 in the direction of actuation, but to prevent or limit actuation of the strand 38 along the direction of actuation. The opposite direction of motion 0 actuation of the strand 38 may comprise a monofilament (m〇n〇fiiament), and in a consistent embodiment, may be a qUill suture. Actuating cord 201210564 actuating portion 131' of strand 38' which may be the second portion 43 of the illustration, may include a first at least one barb 61 each defining a front end 65, such as a first plurality of barbs 61' The front end 65 defines a cam to facilitate movement of the strand 38 in the direction of the leading end 65 (eg, the 'actuating direction'). Each of the barbs 61 can further define a trailing end 67 that defines a catch to prevent the actuating strand 38 from moving through the aperture 40 in a direction opposite the direction of actuation. The attachment portion 133 (which may be the first portion 41 of the illustration) of the actuation strand 38 is configured to be maintained before and during actuation of the expandable portion 36 from the first configuration to the extended configuration The first portion 41a outside the expandable portion 36. The first portion 4la of the first portion 43 may include a second at least one barb 69 defining a front end 65, such as a second plurality of barbs 69, the direction of the front end 65 being the same as the first plurality of barbs 61 The opposite of each of the front ends 65. Each of the second plurality of barbs 69 can further define a trailing end 67 that is opposite the end 67 of the first plurality of barbs 61. Therefore, the trailing ends 67 of the first and second barbs 61, 69 face each other. The trailing end 67 of each of the second barbs 69 can define an engagement member configured to grasp the anchor strand 44 to prevent actuation of the rope when the actuation strand 38 travels in the actuation direction The strand 38 moves through the opening 40. The attachment portion 133 of the actuating strand 38 (which may be the first portion 41 shown) further includes a first end that is disposed at the distal end of the first selected opening 45 a and may also carry a plurality of first barbs 61 Two parts. Thus, during operation, when the actuation force F acts on the actuation portion 131 (e.g., the second portion 43) of the actuation strand 38, the actuation strand 21 201210564 38 travels through the aperture 40. The first plurality of barbs 61 ^ 〒 έ δ δ δ can be defined to allow the actuation of the strands 38 along the actuation _ 广 36 movement from the first configuration to the extended configuration through the opening ratchet. Actuating the strand 38 translates through the opening 4

i 一倒刺 6Q =之-㈣尾端67在轉於第—選定開孔 二9 疋義最近端開孔40的線圈31)的位置抓住缅股 4。當在可擴展部份36的近端3如 、‘ _丰 ::致動力F至致動繩践,配對的第二;= 可擴展部份由第二選定開孔 3選疋開孔45a’從而使可擴展部份 = =收合以及致―由第I:::擴 攜帶可定義對‘可圖’辅θ助繩股33可定義或 49的滑動構件47。特。曰份Μ 一是酉己置於近端之開孔 複數個開孔4〇以及可、疋,第二部份43可編織穿過 圖示實施例,第二進—步定義滑動構件47。根據 一部份41可編織穿在滑動構件47結尾。第 個開孔40,以及可 夕一開孔40,例如穿過複數 49以便定義線圈53 ^延伸穿過滑動構件47的開孔 彼此可滑動_合。此’第—及第二部份4卜43 態成為定義包含開孔4康一實施例,致動繩股38可組 地,可切割(例如,^之複數個開孔的編織線。替換 43。在操作期間,刀割)開孔49穿過第二部份 之至少-有切(例:動構件47、可擴展部份36令 牙(例如,用解剖結構24或支撐工具) 22 201210564 時可施加致動力F至笛—ώίΤ ,、 的女丨W,Τ彼Η 一 〇Ρ伤41 ’這會減少線圈53 的大小以及在可健部份36由第-组 組態時,造成可擴展部份 動,展 第工部份峨^第—朴^致動概糊如, 「伤41可進一步附接至第〜 錨的致動繩股38。因此,势 Α 弟〜 匕第—部份41可定義致叙Λ 份131與附接部份133 疋義欠動邹 定義可接受致動力F動繩h 的末端,例如部份41或二接J第,之致動繩^ 第-部份4i可定義^ J = ^點上’應瞭解, 我及揭帶滑動構件47而第二部份“ 可疋義致動部份131與附接部份133。 例如’請參考第2E®,第一部份41可 帶滑動構件47,如以上在說明第2〇_時所述。根^ 圖不貫施例’第-部份41可在滑動構件47結尾 別是’第二部份43可編織f過複數個開孔4〇以及由 錨體28近端延伸穿過滑動構件47。因此,第一及第 二部份41、43彼此可滑動地耦合。 因此應瞭解,相對於致動繩股38的附接部份 133(例如,第一部份41與第二部份43中之另一),滑 動構件47可滑動地耦合至致動繩股38的致動部份 131(例如,第一部份41或第二部份43)。在操作期間’ 在滑動構件47或可擴展部份36有支撐(例如,用解剖 結構24或支撲工具)時,致動力F可施加至致動部份 131,這會減少線圈53的大小以及在在可擴展部份36 由第一組態運動至擴展組態時造成可擴展部份36沿 著致動繩股38行進。 23 201210564 替換地,請參考第2F圖,如上述,第一部份41 可延伸穿過複數個開孔4〇以及近端由錨體28離開以 便定義致動部份131 ’以及第二部份43可由被第二部 份43穿過之開孔40中的最遠端者伸出,以及近端離 開解剖結構24而不穿過任何一個開孔4〇或錨體28 的其他地方。第二部份43可定義附接部份133,它可 附接至錯22之致動繩股%且經組態成可附接至另一 I田22。在操作期間,根據圖示實施例,當致動力F施 加至致動繩股38的致動部份131(例如,第一部份41) a寺,在可擴展部份36的近端39a有支樓(例如,用解 剖結構24《支撐工具)時,可擴展部份%❸遠端 沿著致動繩股38中編織穿過開孔4〇㈣份被拉向近 端39a,從而造成可擴展部份36在由第一組態運動至 擴展組態時變糾結。 請參考第2G圖與第4A圖,錨22可進一步包含 可定義鎖定構件64的任何適當連接構件63,該鎖定 構件64經組態成可選擇性地固定致動繩股%之可滑 動部份(例如’致動部份131與附接部份133)的相對位 置。連接構件63可組態成為結66或以替代方式構 屬本文所述類型之任何適當連接構件63或任 替代連接構件。結66可由致動繩股%定義以及相ς 於銷體28的近端30 ’可配置於近端。致動繩股3 定義結66之支柱端68與結66之自由端7(),其係於 支柱端68四周成圈及打結使得在自由端7〇在姓的 的支柱端68四周收緊之前,支柱端68對於自由:7〇 24 201210564 可滑動。根據圖示實施例,自由端70在支柱端68周 圍可定義複數個線圈,例如4個線圈71A至D,然而 應瞭解,自由端70在支柱端68周圍可按需要定義許 多線圈。致動繩股38的自由端70包含由結66遠端延 伸以及進入錨體28的靜態部份70a,以及由結66延 伸以及不伸入錨體28的自由部份70b。 支柱端68可由第一部份41、第二部份43中之一 個定義,以及自由端70可由第一部份41、第二部份 43中之另一定義。根據圖示實施例,支柱端68由圖 示成第一部份41的致動部份131定義,以及自由端 70由第二部份43定義。因此,第一部份41與第二43 彼此可滑動地耦合使得第一部份41可與第二部份43 相對滑動。因此,應瞭解,鎖定構件64可進一步定義 滑動構件47,以及結66可進一步被稱為滑動鎖定結。 在操作期間,當致動力F施加至第一部份41時, 第一部份41相對於第二部份43近端滑動從而減少線 圈53的大小以及致動錨體28由第一組態至擴展組 態。可收緊可由第二部份43定義的自由端70以便使 自由端70繞著支柱端68收緊,從而鎖定由第一部份 41定義的支柱端68與自由端70的相對平移。當自由 端70繞著支柱端68收緊時,從而使結66繞著支柱端 68固定,自由端70可定義致動繩股38的附接部份 133。替換地或附加地,一旦錨體28已擴展成擴展組 態,結66可沿著支柱端68遠端平移,從而減少線圈 53的大小以及致動可擴展部份36至擴展組態,以及 25 201210564 酼後結66可繞著支柱端68收緊以便固定線圈53已減 少的大小,以及在有些情形下,可協助錨體28保持擴 展組態。 以下參考第4A圖至第4E圖,根據一實施例描述 結66的構造。如第4A圖所示,自由端7〇定義繞著 支柱端68的複數個滑動線圈71A至D,其係經組態 成可沿著支柱端68滑動。線圈71 a至D中之至少一 者(例如,圖示之最遠端線圈71A、71B),可進一步定 義鎖定線圈,其係經組態成在收緊力(tightening f〇rCe)F1施加至自由部份7〇b時可收緊’從而用上述 方式使自由端70繞著支柱端68收緊。如第4B圖所 =結66的形成係藉由沿著同—方向使自由端见繞 6688至/^細如,兩次)成圈,從而製成繞 ;支柱鳊68的至少-滑動線圈71Α,例如,一對線 二例Γ!:滑動線圈71Α與第二滑動線圈㈣。應 便按需要糾魏個Β多次以 白由端70在繞著支柱端艮據圖不實施例’ 於第二線圈71B,可近端 & =平移藉此相對 自由❹定義由線圈 由線圈71遠端延伸的靜態部份70a,以^伤與 動繩股38的第二部份43。 夂也可定義致 接下來,請參考第4C圖, 70b收緊同時保持支柱端6 ^自由部份 態以便使滑動線圈71A、7 處於緊張狀 貝耆對方。例如,遠端 26 201210564 收緊力可施加至自由部份爲,從而使第二線圈加 頂著第-線圈71A。接下來,如第仍圖所示,在第 -滑動線圈71A近端的位置’自由部份赐沿著與滑 動線圈71A、71B相同的方向再度繞著支柱端68成圈 以便定義第三滑動線圈71C。當自由部份成圈於 支柱端68時,在自由部份70b、支柱端砧之間定義 間隙73。然後’自由部份鳥可饋入穿過間隙乃使 得滑動線圈71C可進-步定義鎖定線圈,以及自由部 份7〇b由滑動線圈71C伸出。接下來,請參考第4E ,,自由部份70b可收緊以便使第三滑動線圈71€頂 著直接ffl比鄰及近端有間隔的第一滑動線圈71A,使得 自由部份70b由間隙73伸出。 如第4F圖所示,在第三滑動線圈71(:近端的位 置,自由部份70b沿著與滑動線圈71八至c相同的方 向再度成圈於支柱端68以便定義第四滑動線圈 71D。當自由部份7〇b成圈於支柱端68時,在自由部 份70b與支柱端68之間定義間隙73a。然後,自由部 伤70b可饋入穿過間隙73使得第四滑動線圈71D可 進一步定義鎖定線圈,以及自由部份7〇b由第四滑動 線圈71E)伸出。接下來,自由部份7〇b可收緊以便使 第四滑動線圈71D頂著直接毗鄰及近端有間隔的第三 滑動線圈71C,如第4A圖所示。 應瞭解,結66可定義任意複數個滑動線圈71, 例如至少一滑動線圈71或複數個滑動線圈Μ。更應 瞭解’ Μ動線圈71中之至少一者至所有按需要可進一 27 201210564 步定義鎖定_ 7卜在操作期間…旦製成結的,致 動力F施加至可定義致動部份131(如圖示之第一部份 41)的支柱端68,使得錨體28的可擴展部份36由第 一組態擴展至擴展組態。更應瞭解,可配置處於解鎖 組態的結66,藉此在錨體28擴展時支柱端68相對於 線圈71 T平移穿過至結66。可為拉力的鎖定力 (locking f0rce)可施加至自由部份7%以便致動結的 至鎖定組態(locked C〇nfigUration)。特別是,鎖定^圈 71均繞著支柱端68收緊,阻止致動部份131平移穿 過結66。自由端70之自由部份雇可由結的伸出, 如第2G圖所示’以及定義致動繩股%中使銷體μ 附接至另一錨的附接部份133。 田 如第2H圖所示,自由部份鳥從而附接部份13 可定義經組態成可直接或者是間接地附接至另一^ 致動繩股的連接構件63。根據圖示實施例,連接 63經組態成為與致動繩股38整合的孔眼72。因此| 由於致動繩股38由錨體28的可擴展部份%伸出,^ 可以說孔眼72同樣由可擴展部份%伸出。 ^ 附加地,錯體28可包含由可擴展部份%伸孔祀 84b(參考第6A圖至第㈣),也由可擴展部份申 出的孔眼9〇(參考第9A圖至第%圖),或以任何替代 方式構成由㈣展雜36直接相接轉出的孔^ 互補線(例如,致動繩股的附接部份), 接構件(例如,連接繩股(connect〇r价㈣ 第33A圖至第33C圖)可饋人穿過孔眼72或以便使錫 28 201210564 22附接至第二錨。該互補線可平移穿過孔眼72,從而 應瞭解,孔眼72,以及孔眼84b及90可定義滑動構 件47。例如’如第2G圖所示’由致動繩股48之自由 4份70b定義的附接部份133可饋入穿過第二錯體的 孔目艮’其係經組態成為孔眼72、孔眼84b、孔眼90、 或以替代方式構成直接或間接地附接至錨體之可擴展 邵份以便使錫體28附接至第二錯體的任何適當孔 眼。應瞭解,在這方面,錨組件2〇可包含經組態成可 使一個以上之錨連結在一起的至少一連接構件63。連 接構件63可與致動繩股38中之至少一者整合,或可 分開及附接至致動繩股38中之至少一者。 田請參考第5Α圖至第5Β圖,孔眼72可由第一折 ®自由部份70b本身構成以便定義由第一末端(例 如’梗柄(stem)76)伸出的折疊部份74。因此,梗柄% ^結66(參考第2H圖)與折疊部份%之間延伸。自由 Ηπ 70b疋義由折豐部份74伸出的第二末端,例如末 =%。自由部份7%可經定向成藉此可將末端78配 置一梗柄76晚鄰。折疊部份%可在梗柄%及末端 成圈以便定義線圈8卜以及隨後在梗柄%及末 於封閉m以及穿過_81以便定義孔眼結8〇 缺ϊ 份78及定義孔眼72的封閉位置"1。 ^可施加至折疊部份78以便加緊結80及封 孔眼72且有^ 74也由結伸出以及定義孔眼72。因此, 結80定義或可用任何替代封閉構件定義 29 201210564 的基部。 例如,請參考第5C圖,末端78可焊接(例如,加 熱)或經由黏著劑至在封閉位置113的梗柄76以便封 閉折疊部份74以及定義孔眼72。封閉位置113可定 義孔眼72的基部。替換地,請參考第5D圖,末端78 可縫合至在封閉位置113的梗柄76以便封閉折疊部份 74以及疋義孔眼72的基部。例如,線(例如,至少一 縫合線75)可縫合穿過末端78及梗柄76以便使末端 78連結至梗柄76。因此,應瞭解,末端78可用任何 習知方式附接至梗柄76以便定義孔眼72,使得另一 4苗22的線(例如’致動繩股)或連接繩股可饋入穿過孔 眼72以及施力(例如,接近力)至孔眼72,如以上在說 明第1A圖至第iB圖時所述。該接近力足以使配置於 錨體28之間的間隙24c接近,如第1A圖至第1B圖 所示。 請參考第6A圖至第6B圖,錯22可進一步包含 可附接至錨體28(例如,可擴展部份36)及致動繩股38 的附接構件82以便使致動繩股38可操作地耦合至4 擴展部份36。附接構件82可輔助錨體28,以及與描 體繩股44及致動繩股38分離及不整合《附接構件82 可定義分別在成圈繩股79之相對第一及第二末端 82a、82b定義至少一固定區(例如’孔眼,例如第一 孔眼84a與第二孔眼84b)的成圈繩股79。附接構件 82可進一步包含附接於孔眼84a、84b之間的本體部 份85,使得附接構件82可定義連續線圈83。 201210564 第一及第二孔眼84a、84b實質沿著第二方向35 由本體部份85伸出穿過錯體28中之至少一個別開孔 40。根據圖示實施例,第一及第二孔眼84a、84b各自 延伸穿過第一及第二選定開孔45a、45b,第一及第二 選定開孔45a、45b可按需要安置成相對於第二孔眼 84b ’可配置第一孔眼84a於近端。如圖示,本體部份 85可在可擴展部份36外延伸於第一及第二孔眼84a、 84b之間,或替換地,本體部份85可延伸穿過在第一 及第二選定開孔45a、45b之間的至少一開孔40,包 括複數個開孔40。根據一實施例,第一選定開孔45a 可為最近端開孔40a,使得第一孔眼84a可延伸穿過 最近端開孔40a,以及第二選定開孔45b可為最遠端 開孔40b使得第二孔眼84b可延伸穿過最遠端開孔 40b。應瞭解’ 一旦附接構件82附接至錨體28,第一 及第二孔眼84a、84b即可各自定義錨22的開孔87a、 87b。 致動繩股38可附接至第二孔眼84b,例如饋入穿 過第二孔眼84之開孔87b,以便定義由第二孔眼84b 伸出的第一及第二部份41、43。致動力F可施加至第 一及第二部份41、43使得致動繩股38向第一孔眼偏 ,第二孔眼84b,從而使可擴展部份36由定義第二選 定開孔45b的線圈31向定義第一選定開孔45a的線圈 31近端移動,從而致動可擴展部份36由第一組態至 ,展組悲。根據圖示實施例,致動繩股38被折疊成可 疋義連接位置(例如,褶疊86) ’其係經組態成可附接 31 201210564 至第二孔眼84b。第一及第二部份41、43由褶疊% 的兩對邊近端伸出。褶·疊86可延伸穿過第二孔眼 84b’以及第一及第二部份41、43可由褶疊86近端伸 出及穿過第一孔眼84a的開孔87a。因此,第一及第 二部份41、43延伸穿過第一孔眼84a的第一開孔 87a,以及該糟疊成圈穿過第二孔眼84b的開孔gyb 以便使致動繩股38附接至第二孔眼84b。應瞭解,致 動繩股38以此方式定義在可擴展部份36由第一組態 致動至擴展組態時第二孔眼84b穿過第一孔眼82a的 行進路徑。 例如’在操作期間,致動力F可施加至由第一孔 眼84a近端伸出的第一及第二部份41、43。因此,第 一及第一部份41、43兩者可定義致動繩股%的致動 部份η卜替換地,致動力F可施加至第一及= 份41、43中之任一同時第一及第二末端中之另一有支 撐以便在致動力F的施加期間產生張力於致動繩股 中。因此,可以說,第一及第二部份41、43中之至少 一者可定義接受致動力F以便使可擴展部份36由第 一組態運動至擴展組態的致動部份131。致動力f造 成褶疊86從而致動繩股38可偏壓第二孔眼84b沿= 由致動繩股38定義的路徑近端移向及穿過第一孔眼 84a。當第二孔眼84b近端移動時,附接構件82致動 可擴展部份36由第一組態運動至擴展組態。 更應瞭解,第一及第二部份41、43中'^之至少一或 兩者可定義附接至第二錨(參考例如,第2U二 32 201210564 接部份133。替換地,第二孔眼84b可由第一孔眼84a 伸出以及若需要進一步遠離解剖結構24,致動繩股38 可由孔眼84b卸下,以及連接構件(例如,連接繩股) 隨後可饋入穿過第二孔眼84b以及直接或間接地附接 至第二錨以便按需要使錨22附接至第二福。 如第6C圖所示,附接構件82的形式可為基材, 在一實施例中,它可為有第一及第二相對兩端7知、 79b的線,例如缝合線或以任何替代方式構成之線 79。相對兩端79a、79b可按需要附接使得附接構件 82可定義連續線圈83,如第6D圖所示。可將線圈83 組態成例如在線圈83的相對兩端可定義可與第一及 第二選定開孔45a、45b對齊的第一及第二孔眼84&、 84b。第一及第二孔眼84a、84b可各自插入選定開孔 45a 45b,如第6E圖所示。應瞭解,本體部份85按 需要可進一步編織穿過配置於第一及第二選定開孔 45a、45b(例如,複數個中間開孔4〇c)之間的至少— 孔40。 、♦儘管如上述致動繩股38可與錨體28的基材42 分離或不整合以及附接至娜28,應暸解,致動構件 37可替換地與錨體28整合。因此,致動繩股%可替 換地與基材42整合,例如錨體繩股44,因而也因此 與可擴展部份36整合。 例如,請參考第7A圖至第7C圖,致動繩股38 可^銷體繩股44的第—及第二末端部52、54中之一 個定義’可將錦體繩股44!且態成如以上在說明第3a 33 201210564 圖至第3C圖時所述,或以其他方式έ a 實施例,由錨體28近端伸出的C康圖示 繩股38,以及由錨體28遠端伸出的卩52疋義欵動 最靠近錨體28(例如,最靠近可擴展 端°卩54可在 僻展部份36的對廡、土 端39b)的位置結尾,使得第二端部54的長产^應碾 錨體28附接至第二錨的錨體。 、又以使 如以上在說明第3A圖至第3C圖時所述,儘 體繩股44的第一端部52可在最靠近線圈31之最近二 線圈57的位置結尾,第一端部52替換地可定義由= 擴展部份36之近端39a遠端伸出的致動繩股% 及可編織穿過從而延伸穿過開孔40中與可擴展部广 36近端39a遠端隔開的至少一選定開孔45ae選定^ 孔45a可為圖示之最遠端開孔40b,或替換地可為; 間開孔40c中之一個。致動繩股38可延伸穿過選定開 孔45a以便定義線圈53 ’包括第一及第二部份41、43。 例如,第一部份41可由第一部份52遠端伸出至第一 選定開孔45a。第二部份43可由第一選定開孔45a近 端伸出離開錨體28以及離開解剖結構24。例如,根 據圖示實施例,第二部份43可編織穿過從而延伸穿過 可配置於近端39a、選定開孔45a之間的至少一開孔 4〇 ’例如複數個選定開孔40。例如,致動繩股38的 第二部份43可編織穿過中間開孔(例如,複數個中間 開孔40c)中之至少一者。第二部份43可伸出錨體28 的可擴展部份36穿過開孔40中的第二選定開孔 45b’例如它可為最近端止擋結46的最近端開孔4〇a。 34 201210564 因此,在可擴展部份36(例如 =為在例如第一部份41施加至致動 4 1、由第—_運動至擴展組態。因此,第-部份 。可疋義整合致動繩股38的致動部份13卜特別是, 可擴展部份36當沿著長形方向3 合成沿著長形方向34的第二距離史 IT如’第二部份43)滑動。當可擴展部份36 〜者致動繩股38收合時’可擴展部份%在沿著第二 =份C行進時在第二方向變糾結或以其他方· ^ ’從而造成可擴展部份36在第二方向35由初始最 =度τι擴展成大於初始最A厚度T1的擴展後最大 =T2。然:後’第—部份41可在最靠近娜28的位 =尾,例如切割與燒去茸毛,或替換地可定義可附 接至第二錯的附接部份133,例如,如本文所述用任 :所欲方式連結至第二錯的互補連接構件。因此,應 瞭,,由錨體2 8伸出離開解剖結構2 4的第一部份= 可定義致動部份131與附接部份133中之至少— 者。 皮替換地,如第8A圖至第8B圖所示,錨22可構 =成如以上在說明第7A圖至第7C圖時所述,不過錨 體繩股44的第二端部54可由可擴展部份36的遠端 9b伸出一段充分距離以便定義經組態成可附接至第 二麵的附接部份133以便使錨22附接至第二錨。例 如’附接部份133可附接至第二錨的錨線。附接部份 35 201210564 133可與第二I苗的鋪線整合,或錯組件20可包含使附 接部份133附接至第二錨(例如,第二錨的致動繩股) 的連接器。該連接器可與致動繩股38和第二錨的致動 繩股中之至少一或兩者,或可分離及附接至致動繩股 38與第二錨的致動繩股中之至少一或兩者。在操作期 間’致動力F可施加至第一部份41,如上述它可定義 致動部份131。應瞭解,致動力F可至少部份被附接 部份133(在圖示實施例中,其係由第二部份43定義) 抵消。此外,如以上在說明第1D圖時所述,致動繩 股38的相對第一及第二末端(各自可由致動部份131 與附接部份133定義)可打結、縫合、或以其他方式固 定於另一解剖結構27,從而產生致動繩股38的張力 以及固定辅助結構25於致動繩股38、解剖結構24之 間。 請參考第9A圖,以及如上述,錨體28可包含由 可擴展部份36伸出的孔眼90。根據圖示實施例’在 可擴展部份36處於第一組態時,孔眼90可配置於錨 體28的遠端32。孔眼90可構造成如本文所述的’或 替換地可包含猫體28的線圈中之選定者,例如大於由 錫體28定義的其他線圈中之一或更多的線圈。錫22 可包含可定義致動繩股的辅助繩股33,該致動繩股經 組態成在該錨植入目標解剖結構24時可用上述方式 使錨22在第一組態、擴展組態之間運動。替換地或附 加地,辅助繩股33可定義經組態成可協助錨22附接 至另一錦的部署線(deployment strand),如下文所洋 36 201210564 述例如在說明第37A圖至第37D圖時提及的。 、辅助纖股33可定義第一及第二部份41、43,及 $接位置’例如配置於第-及第二部份4卜43之間及 了 ’、I σ附接的糟疊86。糟疊86可延伸穿過孔眼90 ^便使辅助繩股33附接至孔眼9G,使得在可擴展部 ^ 36處於第一组態時第一及第二部份4卜43由孔眼 =近端伸出至少穿過選定開孔45,例如開孔4〇的複 個選疋開孔45。選定開孔45可包含至少一個中間 ^孔4〇C ’以及可進一步包含最近端開孔40a。若需 辅助繩股33更可打結或以其他方式附接至孔眼 、。根據圖示實施例,第一及第二部份41、43延伸穿 =開孔40中的複數個選定開孔45,以及進一步延伸 =相同的開孔4〇。例如,第—及第二部份41、43 可每隔i開孔4G沿著近端方向由孔眼⑽,每隔兩 ,開孔40沿著近端方向由孔眼90,每一個開孔40沿 著近方向由孔眼9〇穿出’或按需要以任何規則重覆 圖案或任何不規則重覆圖案來延伸穿過孔眼40。 凊參考第9B圖,由於第一及第二部份41、43由 孔眼90沿著近端方向延伸穿過相同的選定開孔45, 第一及第二部份41、43定義在致動力ρ施加至第一 及第二部份41、43時孔眼9〇穿過選定開孔45的行進 路徑。因此,當辅助繩股33的第一及第二部份41、 43因應外加致動力ρ行進近端穿過錨體28的選定開 孔45時,孔眼90與致動構件38在可擴展部份由第一 組態運動至擴展組態時一起行進穿過選定開孔45。結 37 201210564 ΐ行=C充圖二示,一^ 展組態時相對藉此在可擴展部份36處於擴 端。因此,在可擔it:份36可配置線圈86於近 9〇也由可擴展部份36° H處於擴展纽態時,孔眼 構件孔 整合的連接構直接(例如,經由與第二銷 或不整合及附接n 經由與第二鋪分離 至第二I 少—連接構件)附接 接至第二二孔眼90可接細22附 繩股,㈣:線妾受的線可為第二錨的致動 眼'的以之致動繩股直接或間接地附接至孔 孔目28可按需要用任何方式構造,例如藉由製作 可擴展^及進一步藉由按需要用任何適當方式製作 義I目36。因此,錨體繩股44可打成結以便定 便定義\丨’或焊接、縫合或以其他方式附接至本身以 便疋義孔眼9〇。 r體實施例,大體參考第1GA圖至第聰圖, 二::44可折疊及縫合通過本身以便定義線圈 99由線圈91之對邊各自伸出的第一及第二段 A @。針94的尖端可插穿第一段92a以便定義延 第’段92a的第一孔道(channel)。第二段義上 二之尾端可饋人穿過針94的孔眼。然後,可使 、’移向則穿過第一段92a使得第二段92b被拉穿 38 201210564 過第一段92a中由針94製成的孔道,從而封閉線圈 91,如第10B圖所示,以及定義第一缝合93。線圈 91由第一縫合93遠端伸出。如第10C圖所示,第二 段92b可反向平移穿過第一段92a以便按需要調整線 圈91的大小。根據一實施例,如第i〇c圖所教導的’ 可調整線圈91約有5毫米的長度。 接下來,請參考第10D圖至第10E圖,錫體繩股 44可第二次縫合穿過本身。例如,在第〆縫合93的 遠端位置可致動針94的尖端穿過錯體繩胜44的段 92a、92b ’從而製成在第一縫合93遠端位重_各自延伸 穿過第一及第二段92a、92b的第二及第三扎道。如第 10E圖所示,第二段92b可饋入穿過針94的孔眼,然 後可使針94平移向前穿過第二及第三孔道使得第二 段92b在線圈91 一邊被拉穿過本身,以及在線圈91 對邊進一步拉出第一段92a以便在第一缝舍93遠端位 置定義第二缝合95。第一及第二縫合93,95可定義 線圈91的基部。第二段92b更定義由第一及第二縫合 93、95伸出的線圈96。應瞭解,在製成第二縫合95 後’線圈91的大小會因此減少。 請參考第10F圖至第l〇G圖,福體鄉股44在第 一及第二縫合93、95打成結97以固定定義孔眼90 之線圈91的大小。例如,第二段92b可定義由第二段 92b之苐三孔道伸出穿過線圈%的自由端92c,以及 隨後收緊以便定義結97。因此,結97是齡置於線圈 的基部。應瞭解,在製作結97之前,第二段92b可依 39 201210564 所欲次數縫合穿過線圈91以便固定線圈91。因此, 應瞭解,製成孔眼9〇可藉由縫合錨體繩股44穿過本 身以便製成至少-縫合’例如兩個縫合,從而定義線 圈,以及隨後繞著線圈基部打個結97以便固定孔眼 90。 以下用第11A圖至第UH圖描述一種構造可擴展 部份的方法’其係包含編結致動繩股44。例如,如第 :=:示’_股44之一端 用 :何替代封閉構件(例如,圖示於第5A圖至第5D圖 Z 定義之基部的孔眼90。銷體繩股44以此 方式疋義疋義孔眼90乃贫_ 52,以及由孔眼90伸出:-段92上的第-或近端部份 或遠端部份54。出而且可包含第一段仏的第二 錫體28之可擴展~ ^ 列师遠端編結第:二36的構造方法大體包含下 成之複數個線圈9954以便定義以相同方式構 長形方向34 1% Μ μ R X專線圈"各自定義實質沿著 長办万门外開的開子 如果該等線圈99及各柄B 圓所不應瞭解, 有方向分量的方向_ ^孔4G沿著在長形方向Μ 實質沿著長形方向34隔^圈"及開孔4G可以說是 複數個開孔4G中之各線圈"中之每―可定義i A barb 6Q = - (4) The tail end 67 grasps the Burmese strand 4 at the position of the coil 31) which is turned to the first selected hole 2-9. When at the proximal end 3 of the expandable portion 36, for example, '_丰:: actuation force F to actuating the rope, the second pair is matched; = the expandable portion is selected by the second selected opening 3 to open the opening 45a' Thus, the expandable portion == collapse and the "I::: expansion" can define a sliding member 47 that can be defined or 49 for the 'figurable' auxiliary θ-assisted strand 33. special. The first part is the opening of the proximal opening, the plurality of openings 4, and the second portion 43 can be woven through the illustrated embodiment, and the second step defines the sliding member 47. A portion 41 can be woven to be worn at the end of the sliding member 47. The first opening 40, and the opening 40, for example, passes through the plurality 49 to define that the opening of the coil 53^ extending through the sliding member 47 is slidable. The 'first- and second-part 4' states are defined as an embodiment comprising an opening 4, and the actuating strands 38 can be assembled to cut (for example, a plurality of open-ended braided wires. Replacement 43 During operation, the knife cuts through the opening 49 through at least the second portion (eg, the movable member 47, the expandable portion 36 makes the teeth (eg, with the anatomical structure 24 or the support tool) 22 201210564 The actuation force F can be applied to the flute - ώίΤ , , the female 丨 W, Τ Η Η 〇Ρ 41 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' For the part of the exhibition, the part of the exhibition is 峨^第—朴^ actuation is as follows, “Injury 41 can be further attached to the actuation strand 38 of the anchor. Therefore, the potential brother~ 匕第—Part 41 The descriptive 131 Λ 131 and the attachment part 133 can be defined as the end of the actuating F-moving rope h, such as the part 41 or the second J, the actuating rope ^ the first part 4i Can be defined ^ J = ^ point on 'should understand, I strip the sliding member 47 and the second part " can be used to activate the part 131 and the attachment part 133. For example, please refer to the 2E® The first portion 41 can be provided with a sliding member 47 as described above in the description of the second 〇 _. The second portion of the sliding portion 47 can be the second portion 43 The plurality of openings 4 可 can be woven and extended from the proximal end of the anchor body 28 through the sliding member 47. Therefore, the first and second portions 41, 43 are slidably coupled to each other. Therefore, it should be understood that relative to actuation The attachment portion 133 of the strand 38 (eg, the other of the first portion 41 and the second portion 43), the sliding member 47 is slidably coupled to the actuation portion 131 of the actuation strand 38 (eg, , the first portion 41 or the second portion 43). During operation, when the sliding member 47 or the expandable portion 36 is supported (for example, with the anatomical structure 24 or the plucking tool), the actuation force F can be applied to Actuating portion 131, which reduces the size of coil 53 and causes expandable portion 36 to travel along actuation strand 38 as the expandable portion 36 moves from the first configuration to the extended configuration. 23 201210564 Alternatively Please refer to FIG. 2F. As described above, the first portion 41 can extend through the plurality of openings 4 and the proximal end is separated by the anchor body 28 to set The actuation portion 131' and the second portion 43 may extend from the farthest of the apertures 40 through which the second portion 43 passes, and the proximal end exits the anatomy 24 without passing through any of the apertures 4 Else or elsewhere in the anchor body 28. The second portion 43 can define an attachment portion 133 that can be attached to the actuation strand % of the error 22 and configured to be attachable to another I field 22. During operation, in accordance with the illustrated embodiment, when actuation force F is applied to actuation portion 131 (e.g., first portion 41) a temple of actuation strand 38, there is a proximal end 39a of expandable portion 36. In the case of a slab (for example, with the anatomical structure 24 "supporting tool"), the distal portion of the expandable portion ❸ is woven through the opening 4 in the actuating strand 38 and is pulled toward the proximal end 39a, thereby causing The extension portion 36 becomes tangled as it moves from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Referring to Figures 2G and 4A, the anchor 22 can further include any suitable connecting member 63 that can define a locking member 64 that is configured to selectively secure the slidable portion of the actuating strand. (For example, the relative position of the actuation portion 131 and the attachment portion 133). The connecting member 63 can be configured as a knot 66 or alternatively any suitable connecting member 63 of the type described herein or any alternative connecting member. The knot 66 can be defined by the actuation strand % and the proximal end 30' of the pin body 28 can be disposed at the proximal end. The actuating strand 3 defines a strut end 68 of the knot 66 and a free end 7 () of the knot 66 that is looped around the strut end 68 and knotted so that the free end 7 is tightened around the last strut end 68 Previously, the strut end 68 was slidable for freedom: 7〇24 201210564. According to the illustrated embodiment, the free end 70 defines a plurality of coils, such as four coils 71A-D, around the strut end 68, although it will be appreciated that the free end 70 can define as many coils around the strut end 68 as desired. The free end 70 of the actuating strand 38 includes a static portion 70a extending from the distal end of the knot 66 and into the anchor body 28, and a free portion 70b extending from the knot 66 and not extending into the anchor body 28. The post end 68 can be defined by one of the first portion 41 and the second portion 43, and the free end 70 can be defined by the other of the first portion 41 and the second portion 43. According to the illustrated embodiment, the strut end 68 is defined by the actuating portion 131 illustrated as the first portion 41 and the free end 70 is defined by the second portion 43. Therefore, the first portion 41 and the second portion 43 are slidably coupled to each other such that the first portion 41 can slide relative to the second portion 43. Accordingly, it should be understood that the locking member 64 can further define the sliding member 47, and the knot 66 can be further referred to as a sliding locking knot. During operation, when the actuation force F is applied to the first portion 41, the first portion 41 slides proximally relative to the second portion 43 to reduce the size of the coil 53 and actuate the anchor 28 from the first configuration to Extended configuration. The free end 70, which may be defined by the second portion 43, can be tightened to tighten the free end 70 about the strut end 68, thereby locking the relative translation of the strut end 68 and the free end 70 defined by the first portion 41. When the free end 70 is tightened about the strut end 68, thereby securing the knot 66 about the strut end 68, the free end 70 defines the attachment portion 133 of the actuating strand 38. Alternatively or additionally, once the anchor body 28 has been expanded into an expanded configuration, the knot 66 can be translated distally along the strut end 68, thereby reducing the size of the coil 53 and actuating the expandable portion 36 to the extended configuration, and 25 The 201210564 rear sill 66 can be tightened about the strut end 68 to fix the reduced size of the coil 53 and, in some cases, assist the anchor 28 to maintain the expanded configuration. Referring now to Figures 4A through 4E, the construction of the junction 66 is described in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in Fig. 4A, the free end 7A defines a plurality of sliding coils 71A-D around the strut end 68 that are configured to slide along the strut end 68. At least one of the coils 71a-D (eg, the most distal coils 71A, 71B shown) may further define a locking coil configured to be applied to a tightening force (tightening f〇rCe) F1 to The free portion 7b can be tightened to thereby tighten the free end 70 about the strut end 68 in the manner described above. As shown in Fig. 4B, the formation of the junction 66 is made by winding the free end around the 6688 to / / ^, as in the same direction, to form a loop; at least the sliding coil 71 of the pillar 鳊 68 Α For example, a pair of lines in two cases!: Slide coil 71Α and second slide coil (4). It should be corrected as needed. The white end 70 is around the end of the strut. According to the figure, the second coil 71B can be used. The proximal end & = translation can be defined by the relative free ❹ by the coil by the coil. The distal end of the static portion 70a extends to the second portion 43 of the movable strand 38.夂 can also be defined. Next, please refer to Figure 4C, 70b tightens while maintaining the strut end 6 ^ free partial state so that the sliding coils 71A, 7 are in tension with each other. For example, the distal end 26 201210564 tightening force can be applied to the free portion so that the second coil is affixed to the first coil 71A. Next, as shown in the still figure, the free portion at the proximal end of the first-sliding coil 71A is recirculated around the strut end 68 in the same direction as the sliding coils 71A, 71B to define the third sliding coil. 71C. When the free portion is looped around the strut end 68, a gap 73 is defined between the free portion 70b and the strut end anvil. Then, the free part of the bird can be fed through the gap so that the sliding coil 71C can further define the locking coil, and the free portion 7b is extended by the sliding coil 71C. Next, referring to FIG. 4E, the free portion 70b can be tightened so that the third sliding coil 71 is placed against the first sliding coil 71A spaced apart from the adjacent and proximal ends, so that the free portion 70b is extended by the gap 73. Out. As shown in FIG. 4F, at the position of the third sliding coil 71 (the proximal end, the free portion 70b is again looped around the strut end 68 in the same direction as the sliding coils 71 to c to define the fourth sliding coil 71D. When the free portion 7〇b is looped around the strut end 68, a gap 73a is defined between the free portion 70b and the strut end 68. Then, the free portion wound 70b can be fed through the gap 73 such that the fourth slip coil 71D The locking coil can be further defined, and the free portion 7b is extended by the fourth sliding coil 71E). Next, the free portion 7〇b can be tightened so that the fourth sliding coil 71D is placed against the third sliding coil 71C which is directly adjacent and proximally spaced, as shown in Fig. 4A. It should be understood that the knot 66 can define any number of slip coils 71, such as at least one slip coil 71 or a plurality of slip coil turns. It should be further understood that 'at least one of the swaying coils 71 to all can be entered as needed. 27 201210564 steps to define the locking _ 7 卜 during the operation ... to make the knot, the actuation force F is applied to the definable actuation portion 131 ( The post end 68 of the first portion 41) is shown such that the expandable portion 36 of the anchor body 28 extends from the first configuration to the extended configuration. It will be appreciated that the knot 66 in the unlocked configuration can be configured whereby the strut end 68 translates relative to the coil 71 T through the knot 66 as the anchor 28 expands. The locking force (locking f0rce) can be applied to the free part 7% to actuate the locked configuration (locked C〇nfigUration). In particular, the locking ring 71 is tightened about the strut end 68 to prevent the actuation portion 131 from translating through the knot 66. The free portion of the free end 70 can be extended by the knot, as shown in Figure 2G, and defines the attachment portion 133 of the actuating strands that causes the pin body μ to be attached to the other anchor. As shown in Fig. 2H, the free portion of the bird, and thus the attachment portion 13, can define a connecting member 63 that is configured to be attached directly or indirectly to the other actuating strand. According to the illustrated embodiment, the connection 63 is configured as an aperture 72 that is integrated with the actuation strand 38. Therefore, since the actuating strand 38 is extended by the expandable portion % of the anchor body 28, it can be said that the eyelet 72 is also extended by the expandable portion %. ^ Additionally, the wrong body 28 may include an aperture 9b (refer to FIGS. 6A to (4)) of the expandable portion %, and an aperture 9 申 which is also applied by the expandable portion (refer to FIG. 9A to FIG. , or in any alternative way, constitute a hole complementary line that is directly connected by (4) the hybrid 36 (for example, the attachment portion of the actuating strand), and the connecting member (for example, the connecting strand (connector r price (four) 33A through 33C) may be fed through the aperture 72 or to attach the tin 28 201210564 22 to the second anchor. The complementary line may translate through the aperture 72 such that the aperture 72, and the aperture 84b and 90 may define a sliding member 47. For example, 'as shown in Fig. 2G', the attachment portion 133 defined by the free 4 portions 70b of the actuation strand 48 may be fed through the aperture of the second wrong body. It is configured to be an eyelet 72, an eyelet 84b, an eyelet 90, or alternatively an optional aperture that is directly or indirectly attached to the expandable portion of the anchor body to attach the tin body 28 to the second body. It is understood that in this aspect, the anchor assembly 2 can include at least one connection configured to couple more than one anchor together Item 63. The connecting member 63 can be integrated with at least one of the actuating strands 38 or can be separated and attached to at least one of the actuating strands 38. Please refer to Figures 5 through 5 for an eyelet. 72 may be constructed by the first fold® free portion 70b itself to define a folded portion 74 that extends from the first end (e.g., 'stem 76'). Thus, the stem is %^ knot 66 (see Figure 2H) Extending from the folded portion %. The free Ηπ 70b 疋 is defined by the second end of the folded portion 74, such as the end = %. The free portion 7% can be oriented so that the end 78 can be configured with a stalk The shank 76 is adjacent to each other. The folded portion % can be looped at the % and end of the stem to define the coil 8 and then at the % stem and at the end of the closure m and through the _81 to define the aperture junction 8 and the defect 78 and The closed position of the aperture 72 is defined "1. ^ can be applied to the folded portion 78 to tighten the knot 80 and the sealing eye 72 and the 74 is also extended by the knot and defines the aperture 72. Thus, the knot 80 is defined or can be closed by any alternative Component Definition 29 The base of 201210564. For example, please refer to Figure 5C, the end 78 can be welded (for example, heated) or From the adhesive to the stem 76 in the closed position 113 to close the folded portion 74 and define the aperture 72. The closed position 113 can define the base of the aperture 72. Alternatively, refer to Figure 5D, the end 78 can be sewn to the closed position A stem 76 of 113 is configured to enclose the folded portion 74 and the base of the sinusoidal aperture 72. For example, a wire (eg, at least one suture 75) can be sutured through the distal end 78 and the stem 76 to attach the distal end 78 to the stem 76. Thus, it will be appreciated that the tip 78 can be attached to the stem 76 in any conventional manner to define the eyelet 72 such that a line of another 4 seedling 22 (eg, 'actuating strands') or connecting strands can be fed through the eyelet. 72 and a force (e.g., proximity force) to the aperture 72, as described above in the description of Figures 1A through iB. This approaching force is sufficient to bring the gap 24c disposed between the anchor bodies 28 close as shown in Figs. 1A to 1B. Referring to FIGS. 6A-6B, the error 22 can further include an attachment member 82 attachable to the anchor body 28 (eg, the expandable portion 36) and the actuation strand 38 such that the actuation strand 38 can be It is operatively coupled to the 4 extension portion 36. The attachment member 82 can assist the anchor body 28 and be separate and unconformable from the tracing strands 44 and the actuation strands 38. The attachment members 82 can be defined at opposite first and second ends 82a of the looped strands 79, respectively. 82b defines a looped strand 79 of at least one fixed zone (eg, 'holes, such as first eyelet 84a and second eyelet 84b'). The attachment member 82 can further include a body portion 85 that is attached between the apertures 84a, 84b such that the attachment member 82 can define a continuous coil 83. The first and second apertures 84a, 84b extend substantially through the body portion 85 through at least one of the apertures 40 of the malformed body 28 substantially along the second direction 35. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second apertures 84a, 84b each extend through the first and second selected apertures 45a, 45b, and the first and second selected apertures 45a, 45b can be disposed as needed relative to the first The second eye 84b' can be configured with the first eye 84a at the proximal end. As illustrated, the body portion 85 can extend between the first and second apertures 84a, 84b outside the expandable portion 36, or alternatively, the body portion 85 can extend through the first and second selected openings. At least one opening 40 between the holes 45a, 45b includes a plurality of openings 40. According to an embodiment, the first selected aperture 45a can be the proximal end opening 40a such that the first aperture 84a can extend through the proximal opening 40a and the second selected aperture 45b can be the distalmost opening 40b The second eyelet 84b can extend through the most distal opening 40b. It will be appreciated that once the attachment member 82 is attached to the anchor body 28, the first and second eyelets 84a, 84b can each define an opening 87a, 87b of the anchor 22. Actuating strands 38 can be attached to second eyelet 84b, such as through opening 87b through second eyelet 84, to define first and second portions 41, 43 extending from second eyelet 84b. The actuation force F can be applied to the first and second portions 41, 43 such that the actuation strand 38 is biased toward the first aperture, the second aperture 84b, such that the expandable portion 36 is defined by the second selected aperture 45b. 31 moves proximally to the coil 31 defining the first selected aperture 45a, thereby actuating the expandable portion 36 from the first configuration to the display. According to the illustrated embodiment, the actuation strand 38 is folded into a splicable connection location (e.g., pleat 86)' that is configured to attach 31 201210564 to the second aperture 84b. The first and second portions 41, 43 project from the proximal ends of the two pairs of pleats. The pleat pack 86 can extend through the second eyelet 84b' and the first and second portions 41, 43 can extend from the proximal end of the pleat pack 86 and through the opening 87a of the first eyelet 84a. Therefore, the first and second portions 41, 43 extend through the first opening 87a of the first eyelet 84a, and the defective hole gyb that is looped through the second eyelet 84b to attach the actuating strand 38 Connected to the second eyelet 84b. It will be appreciated that the actuating strand 38 defines in this manner the path of travel of the second eyelet 84b through the first eyelet 82a as the expandable portion 36 is actuated from the first configuration to the expanded configuration. For example, during operation, the actuation force F can be applied to the first and second portions 41, 43 that project from the proximal end of the first eye 84a. Thus, both the first and first portions 41, 43 can define an actuation portion of the actuation strand %. Alternatively, the actuation force F can be applied to either the first and the remainder 41, 43 simultaneously. The other of the first and second ends is supported to create tension in the actuating strand during application of the actuation force F. Thus, it can be said that at least one of the first and second portions 41, 43 can define an actuation force F to move the expandable portion 36 from the first configuration to the actuation portion 131 of the extended configuration. The actuation force f creates a pleat 86 such that the actuation strand 38 can bias the second aperture 84b toward and through the first aperture 84a along the proximal end of the path defined by the actuation strand 38. When the second eye 84b is moved proximally, the attachment member 82 actuates the expandable portion 36 from the first configuration to the extended configuration. It should be further understood that at least one or both of the first and second portions 41, 43 may be defined to be attached to the second anchor (refer to, for example, the second U 2 32 201210564 connection portion 133. Alternatively, the second The eyelet 84b can be extended by the first eyelet 84a and if further away from the anatomical structure 24, the actuation strand 38 can be removed by the eyelet 84b, and the connecting member (eg, the connecting strand) can then be fed through the second eyelet 84b and Attached directly or indirectly to the second anchor to attach the anchor 22 to the second blessing as desired. As shown in Figure 6C, the attachment member 82 can be in the form of a substrate, which in one embodiment can be A line having first and second opposite ends 7, 79b, such as a suture or a line 79 formed in any alternative manner. The opposite ends 79a, 79b can be attached as desired such that the attachment member 82 can define a continuous coil 83. As shown in Fig. 6D, the coils 83 can be configured to define first and second apertures 84 & 84b that are alignable with the first and second selected apertures 45a, 45b, for example, at opposite ends of the coil 83. The first and second apertures 84a, 84b can each be inserted into the selected aperture 45a 45b as shown in Figure 6E. It will be appreciated that the body portion 85 can be further woven through at least the aperture 40 disposed between the first and second selected apertures 45a, 45b (e.g., the plurality of intermediate apertures 4〇c) as desired. As described above, the actuation strand 38 can be separate or uncoupled from the substrate 42 of the anchor body 28 and attached to the Na 28, it being understood that the actuation member 37 can alternatively be integrated with the anchor body 28. Thus, the actuation strands are % Alternatively, it can be integrated with the substrate 42, such as the anchor strands 44, and thus also with the expandable portion 36. For example, please refer to Figures 7A through 7C, actuating the strands 38 to pin the strands One of the first and second end portions 52, 54 of 44 defines 'a brocade strand 44! and is as described above in the description of paragraphs 3a 33 201210564 to 3C, or otherwise. a embodiment, the C-common strand 38 projecting from the proximal end of the anchor body 28, and the 卩52 projecting from the distal end of the anchor body 28, swayed closest to the anchor body 28 (eg, closest to the expandable end) The 卩 54 may end at the position of the confrontation, the soil end 39b) of the secluded portion 36 such that the long-term production of the second end portion 54 is attached to the anchor of the second anchor And, as described above in the description of FIGS. 3A to 3C, the first end portion 52 of the body strand 44 may end at the position closest to the nearest two coils 57 of the coil 31, the first end. The portion 52 can alternatively define an actuation strand that extends distally from the proximal end 39a of the = extension portion 36 and can be woven therethrough to extend through the aperture 40 and the distal end of the expandable portion 36 proximal end 39a The spaced apart at least one selected opening 45ae can be selected as the most distal opening 40b, or alternatively one of the opening 40c. Actuating strands 38 can extend through selected openings 45a to define coils 53' including first and second portions 41,43. For example, the first portion 41 can be extended from the distal end of the first portion 52 to the first selected aperture 45a. The second portion 43 can project proximally away from the anchor body 28 and away from the anatomy 24 by the first selected opening 45a. For example, in accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the second portion 43 can be woven therethrough to extend through at least one opening 4'', such as a plurality of selected openings 40, configurable between the proximal end 39a and the selected opening 45a. For example, the second portion 43 of the actuation strand 38 can be woven through at least one of the intermediate aperture (e.g., the plurality of intermediate apertures 40c). The second portion 43 can extend beyond the expandable portion 36 of the anchor body 28 through the second selected opening 45b' in the opening 40, for example, it can be the proximal end opening 4a of the proximal end stop 46. 34 201210564 Therefore, in the expandable portion 36 (for example, = for example, the first portion 41 is applied to the actuation 4 1 , and the first - to the movement to the extended configuration. Therefore, the first portion can be integrated The actuating portion 13 of the moving strand 38, in particular, the expandable portion 36 slides along the elongated direction 3 to form a second distance history IT along the elongated direction 34, such as the 'second portion 43'. When the expandable portion 36~the actuating strand 38 is folded, the 'expandable portion% becomes entangled in the second direction when traveling along the second=part C or the other side ^^' causes the expandable portion The portion 36 is expanded in the second direction 35 by an initial maximum = degree τι to an expanded maximum = T2 greater than the initial maximum A thickness T1. However, the posterior portion 41 may be at the position closest to Na 28, such as cutting and burning the hair, or alternatively may define an attachment portion 133 attachable to the second error, for example, as herein The use is coupled to the second wrong complementary connecting member in any desired manner. Thus, it should be noted that the first portion of the anatomical structure 24 extending from the anchor body 28 can define at least one of the actuation portion 131 and the attachment portion 133. Alternatively, as shown in Figures 8A-8B, the anchor 22 can be configured as described above in the description of Figures 7A-7C, although the second end 54 of the anchor strand 44 can be The distal end 9b of the expanded portion 36 extends a sufficient distance to define an attachment portion 133 that is configured to be attachable to the second face to attach the anchor 22 to the second anchor. For example, the attachment portion 133 can be attached to the anchor line of the second anchor. The attachment portion 35 201210564 133 may be integrated with the layup of the second seedling, or the wrong assembly 20 may include a connection that attaches the attachment portion 133 to the second anchor (eg, the actuation strand of the second anchor) Device. The connector can be coupled to at least one or both of the actuation strand 38 and the actuation strand of the second anchor, or can be detached and attached to the actuation strand 38 and the actuation strand of the second anchor At least one or two. During operation, the actuation force F can be applied to the first portion 41, which defines the actuation portion 131 as described above. It will be appreciated that the actuation force F can be offset at least in part by the attachment portion 133 (defined in the illustrated embodiment by the second portion 43). Moreover, as described above in the description of FIG. 1D, the opposing first and second ends of the actuation strand 38 (each of which may be defined by the actuation portion 131 and the attachment portion 133) may be knotted, stitched, or Other means are secured to the other anatomical structure 27 to create tension of the actuation strand 38 and to secure the auxiliary structure 25 between the actuation strand 38 and the anatomy 24. Referring to Figure 9A, and as described above, the anchor body 28 can include an eyelet 90 extending from the expandable portion 36. According to the illustrated embodiment, the eyelet 90 can be disposed at the distal end 32 of the anchor 28 when the expandable portion 36 is in the first configuration. The eyelet 90 can be configured as described herein or alternatively can include a selected one of the coils of the cat body 28, such as one or more of the other coils defined by the tin body 28. The tin 22 can include an auxiliary strand 33 that can define an actuating strand that is configured to cause the anchor 22 to be in the first configuration, extended configuration, as described above, when the anchor is implanted into the target anatomy 24. Exercise between. Alternatively or additionally, the auxiliary strands 33 may define a deployment strand configured to assist in the attachment of the anchor 22 to another brocade, as described in the following paragraph 36 201210564, for example, in the description of Figures 37A through 37D Mentioned in the figure. The auxiliary fiber strands 33 may define the first and second portions 41, 43 and the joint position 'for example, disposed between the first and second portions 4 and 43 and the ', I σ attached. . The defective stack 86 can extend through the aperture 90 to attach the auxiliary strand 33 to the aperture 9G such that the first and second portions 4 are 43 by the eyelet = proximal when the expandable portion 36 is in the first configuration Extending through at least one of the selected openings 45, such as the opening 4, the opening 45. The selected opening 45 can include at least one intermediate hole 4〇C' and can further include a proximal opening 40a. If the auxiliary strands 33 are to be more knotted or otherwise attached to the eyelets, According to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second portions 41, 43 extend through a plurality of selected openings 45 in the opening 40, and further extend = the same opening 4". For example, the first and second portions 41, 43 may be perforated (10) in the proximal direction every other opening 4G, and every other two, the opening 40 is along the proximal direction by the aperture 90, each opening 40 along The near direction is traversed by the eyelet 9' or extends through the eyelet 40 in any regular repeating pattern or any irregular repeating pattern as desired. Referring to FIG. 9B, since the first and second portions 41, 43 extend through the same selected opening 45 in the proximal direction by the eyelet 90, the first and second portions 41, 43 are defined at the actuation force ρ. When the first and second portions 41, 43 are applied, the aperture 9 〇 passes through the path of travel of the selected aperture 45. Therefore, when the first and second portions 41, 43 of the auxiliary strands 33 travel through the selected opening 45 of the anchor body 28 in response to the applied actuation force ρ, the aperture 90 and the actuating member 38 are in the expandable portion. Traveling through the selected aperture 45 together from the first configuration movement to the extended configuration. Conclusion 37 201210564 =行=C charging Figure 2 shows that the configuration is relatively extended at the expandable portion 36. Therefore, when the configurable coil 86 can be placed at approximately 9 〇 and the expandable portion 36° H is in the extended state, the connection structure of the hole member hole is directly connected (for example, via the second pin or not) The integration and attachment n is separated from the second shop to the second I-connecting member) attached to the second two-hole 90 to be attached to the thin 22-attached strand, (4): the thread-receiving line may be the second anchor Actuating the eye's actuation strands directly or indirectly attached to the apertures 28 can be constructed in any manner as desired, for example by making an expandable ^ and further by making any suitable means in any suitable manner as needed 36. Thus, the anchor strands 44 can be knotted to define a definition of "丨" or welded, stitched or otherwise attached to itself to facilitate the aperture 9 〇. The r-body embodiment, generally referring to the 1GA-to-c diagram, 2::44, is foldable and stitched through itself to define the first and second segments A @ of the coil 99 which are respectively extended from opposite sides of the coil 91. The tip end of the needle 94 can be inserted through the first segment 92a to define a first channel of the extended segment 92a. The second end of the second paragraph can feed the person through the eyelet of the needle 94. Then, the movement can be made to pass through the first segment 92a such that the second segment 92b is pulled through 38 201210564 through the hole made by the needle 94 in the first segment 92a, thereby closing the coil 91, as shown in FIG. 10B. And define the first stitch 93. The coil 91 is extended from the distal end of the first suture 93. As shown in Fig. 10C, the second segment 92b can be translated back through the first segment 92a to adjust the size of the coil 91 as desired. According to an embodiment, the adjustable coil 91 as taught in Figure ii is approximately 5 millimeters in length. Next, referring to Figures 10D through 10E, the tin body strand 44 can be stitched through itself for a second time. For example, at the distal end position of the second suture 93, the tip end of the actuating needle 94 can be passed through the segments 92a, 92b' of the malformed rope win 44 to form a distal end weight at the first suture 93, each extending through the first and The second and third lanes of the second segment 92a, 92b. As shown in Fig. 10E, the second segment 92b can be fed through the aperture of the needle 94, and then the needle 94 can be translated forward through the second and third apertures such that the second segment 92b is pulled through the side of the coil 91. The first segment 92a is itself pulled out, as well as on the opposite side of the coil 91, to define a second stitch 95 at the distal end of the first slot 93. The first and second stitches 93, 95 define the base of the coil 91. The second segment 92b further defines a coil 96 extending from the first and second stitches 93,95. It will be appreciated that the size of the coil 91 will be reduced after the second stitch 95 is made. Referring to Figures 10F through 10G, the Fukui Township 44 is knotted 97 at the first and second stitches 93, 95 to fix the size of the stitch 91 defining the eyelet 90. For example, the second segment 92b can define a free end 92c that extends through the coil % of the third channel of the second segment 92b and is subsequently tightened to define the knot 97. Therefore, the junction 97 is placed at the base of the coil. It will be appreciated that prior to making the knot 97, the second segment 92b can be stitched through the coil 91 to secure the coil 91 as desired by 39 201210564. Thus, it will be appreciated that the eyelet 9 can be made by suturing the anchor strand 44 through itself to make at least a stitch, such as two stitches, to define the stitch, and then to knot a knot 97 around the base of the coil for fixation. Eye 90. A method of constructing an expandable portion will be described hereinafter with reference to Figs. 11A through UH, which includes braiding actuating strands 44. For example, if the first:=: indicates that one end of the '_ strand 44 is used: what is the replacement of the closing member (for example, the perforation 90 of the base defined in the 5A to 5D drawings Z. The pin body 44 is in this manner The sinusoidal aperture 90 is lean _52, and extends from the aperture 90: a first or proximal portion or distal portion 54 on the segment 92. The second tin body 28 that may be included and may include the first segment Scalable ~ ^ The division of the distal end of the division: The construction method of the second 36 generally consists of a plurality of coils 9954 under the order to define the direction of the formation in the same way 34 1% Μ μ RX special coils " If the coils 99 and the handles B are not known, the direction of the directional component _ ^ the hole 4G is separated along the elongated direction Μ in the elongated direction 34 " and opening 4G can be said to be a plurality of openings in each of the openings 4G"

圖所示,該方法可進上述。例如,如第UA 绝._ , 步包含下列步驟:使第二端部 54通過第-先㈣_ 端部54定義在結86 使传弟- 圈,例如第一線圈99a孔^ 9〇之間延,的第一新線 第一線圈99a定義各自的開 孔40,以及包含第一段101a與第二段101b。第一線 圈99a的第一段101a由結97伸出,以及第二段101b 由第一段l〇la遠端伸出以便定義第一線圈99a。第二 端部54可定義由第二段101b遠端伸出的自由端 100,使得第二端部54的自由端100與第一線圈99a 在孔眼90的兩對邊上。 接下來,如第11B圖所示,可折疊第二端部54 以便定義第二新線圈,例如第二線圈99b,其係定義 各別的開孔40以及包含第一段103a與第二段103b。 可拉第二線圈99b穿過可由第一線圈99a定義的第二 先前線圈,藉此相對於第二段l〇3b,配置第一段103a 於近端。替換地,自由端100可在第一方向饋入穿過 第一線圈99a,折疊它以便定義第二線圈99b,以及沿 著與第一方向相反的第二方向反向穿過第一線圈 99a。因此,第一段103a由孔眼90伸出,以及第二段 103b由第一段103a伸出以便定義第二線圈99b。第二 端部54的自由端100由第二段103b遠端伸出,使得 第二端部54的自由端100與第二線圈99b在第一線圈 99a的兩對邊上。如第11C圖所示,張力可施加至第 二線圈99b的第一段103a,這導致第一線圈99a的大 小減少以及繞著第二線圈99b收緊。 接下來,如第11D圖所示,再度折疊第二端部54 以便定義新線圈(例如,第三線圈99c),其係定義開孔 40以及包含第一段105a與第二段105b。可拉第三線 圈99c穿過先前線圈(例如,第二線圈99b)的開孔40, 201210564 藉此相對於第二段105b,配置第一段105a於近端。 替換地,自由端100可在第一方向饋入穿過第二線圈 99b,折疊它以便定義第三線圈99c,以及沿著與第一 方向相反的第二方向反向穿過第二線圈99b。因此, 第一段105a由第一線圈99a伸出,以及第二段105b 由第一段l〇5a伸出以便定義第三線圈99c。第二端部 54的自由端100由第二段105b遠端伸出,使得第二 端部54的自由端100與第三線圈99c在第二線圈99b 的兩對邊上。請參考第11E圖,第一段105a係收緊, 這造成第二線圈99b的大小減少以及繞著第三線圈 99c收緊。 接下來,如第11F圖所示,可再度折疊第二端部 54以便定義新線圈(例如,第四線圈99d),其係定義 各別的開孔40以及包含第一段107a與第二段107b。 可拉第四線圈99d穿過先前線圈(例如,第三線圈99c) 的開孔40,藉此相對於第二段107b,配置第一段107a 於近端。替換地,自由端100可在第一方向饋入穿過 第三線圈99c,折疊它以便定義第四線圈99d,以及沿 著與第一方向相反的第二方向反向穿過第三線圈 99c。因此,第一段107a由第二線圈99b伸出,以及 第二段107b由第一段107a伸出以便定義第四線圈 99d。第二端部54的自由端100由第二段107b遠端伸 出,使得第二端部的自由端1〇〇與第四線圈99d在第 三線圈99c的兩對邊上。請參考第11G圖,第一段107a 係收緊,從而造成第三線圈99c的大小減少以及繞著 42 201210564 弟四線圈99d收緊。 因此 包含下列重覆份 後續線圈、先前線圈的一邊: 圈對邊上的後續線圈"伸出,以 線圈99的第-段以便減少先前線 圈的大小。如第11Η圖所 ⑴蜾 及職體28的擴展能=決於例如想要的長度 掣布踉相亚—样々、力重覆該等方法步驟以便 :楚: 的線圈99。-旦最終線圈99製成 後,第二端部54的自由媳1ΠΛ 衣或 可饋人穿過最終線圈並 收緊以便疋義封閉可擴展部份36之遠端39b的結。 然後’第二端部54的其餘部份可在最靠近可擴展 36遠端39b的位置結尾,或可由可擴展部份近端伸出 以便定義與銷體28整合及可編織穿過選定開孔4〇的 致動繩股38,如以上在說明第7A圖至第8B圖時所 述’或替換地可定義經組態成可使錨22附接至另—錨 的整合連接繩股,如以下在說明第42A圖至第42c圖 時所述。應瞭解,根據圖示實施例,最終線圈99可不 具開孔40。在一實施例中,可擴展部份36可包含各 有開孔40的15個線圈99。在另一實施例中,可擴展 部份36可包含各有開孔40的8個線圈99。在又一實 施例中’可擴展部份36可定義8個開孔40。 儘管包含可擴展部份36及孔眼90的錨體22可用 上述方式構成’應瞭解,可用任何適當的替代方法製 成可擴展部份36與孔眼90。例如,替換地可按需要 43 201210564 用任何替代方式'編結錨體繩股44 部份36的㈣28,該可擴展部份 ^有可擴展 第一組態致動至擴展組態,如本=、錢態成可由 展部份36可由雜體繩股44製 述如另外,可擴 繩股44分離或不整人 艮90可由與錨體 至可_们6 、=一可附接 或任何適當替代附件1此,、,=^ee)、結、 44整合,從而與可擴展部份3 體繩股 份36分離或不整合及與其附接。此口外=與致動部 例,儘管可擴展部份3 6的線圈5 ^圖不貫施 版4構成攸而相互整合,可擴展部份36可 或更多錯體繩股’它們可單獨及/或一起定義可用以下 方式連結的數個編結分段或線圈56,例 第冗圖)、谭接(參考第5〇圖)、打結、絞接、口或二盆 他方式附接在一起。 八 請參考第12Λ圖至第12B圖’輔助繩股33可延 伸穿過孔眼90,以及在可擴展部份36處於第一組態 時’可進一步延伸穿過至少開孔40中的選定開孔45, 例如,複數個選定開孔40。例如,輔助繩股33的第 一及第二部份41、43中之一個可饋入穿過孔眼9〇。 針(例如,針94)可饋入穿過被確認為辅助繩股33將會 延伸穿過之開孔40的選定開孔40。可擴展部份36的 開孔40中之任一或更多至所有可定義選定開孔4〇。 例如,針94玎遠端延伸穿過第二線圈99的開孔4〇, 及每一個第四後續線圈99。第一及第二部份* 1、43 201210564 可饋入穿過針94之眼,以及針94町近端平移穿過可 擴展部份36,從而針織第一及第二部份41、43由孔 眼90近端穿過至少一開孔4〇,例如選定開孔45中之 每一。一旦針94眼穿過可擴展部份36後,接著第一 及第二部份41、43可由針94移除,如第9A圖所示。 請參考第11H圖與第12A、B圖,至少複數個開 孔40至所有開孔4〇中之每一被分割成可定義第一部 份102a與第二部份1〇2b,該第二部份l〇2b實質沿著 第二方向與第一部份102a毗鄰以及被延伸穿過開孔 40的線104分開以及與錨體繩股44整合。根據一實 施例’第一及第二部份4卜43交替延伸穿過第一及第 二部份102a、l〇2b中順序穿過選定開孔45的選定者。 此外’第一及第二部份41、43延伸穿過相同的部份 102a、102b。例如’第一及第二部份41、43都延伸穿 過第一選定開孔45的第一及第二部份i〇2a、l〇2b中 之第一個,都穿過第二選定開孔的第一及第二開孔 102a、102b中之第二個,以及後續選定開孔的第一及 第二部份102a、102b依序繼續交替。 再參考第9A圖至第9C圖’應瞭解,輔助繩股 33的第一及第二部份41、43附接至孔眼90,由孔眼 90伸出穿過同一個開孔40,延伸穿過開孔4〇的同一 部份102a、102b,以及伸出錨體28,例如近端伸出錨 體28 ’以及離開目標解剖位置。因此,在致動力ρ施 加至辅助繩股33(特別是,第一及第二部份41、43中 之至少一者)時,輔助繩股33(特別是,第一及第二部 45 201210564 份41、43)定義孔眼90的行進路徑。因此,第一及第 二部份41、43中之至少一或兩者可定義致動部份 131,以及第一及第二部份41、43中之至少一或兩者 可定義附接部份133。因此’當致動力F施加至第一 及第二部份41、43中之至少一者同時可擴展部份36 的近端39a對於致動力F有支# ’孔眼90近端行進穿 過可擴展部份36,這造成可擴展部份36由第一組態 運動至擴展組態。致動力F可施加至輔助繩股33直 到孔眼90由擴展後的致動主體36近端伸出。 如以下所詳述的,孔眼9 0可定義經組態成可使錫 22直接或間接地附接至第二錨的連接構件63。例如, 错22的輔助繩股33可附接至第二錨。例如,辅助繩 股33可與第二錨的致動繩股整合或與第二錨的致動 繩股分開以及與其直接或間接地附接,或可替換地直 接附接至第二|苗的錫體,例如,如果致動繩股在第二 錨已由第一組態運動至擴展組態後由第二錨卸下的 話。替換地’辅助繩股33可由錨22卸下,以及另一 線(例如,另一錨的輔助繩股)可插進孔眼90以便使錨 22附接至另一錨以及在錨22植入解剖結構時提供致 動繩股,如下文所詳述的。 5月參考第13A圖至第13B圖,以及如上述,|苗體 繩股44可為多孔塑以便定義開孔40,或為非多孔型 而在錨體繩股44中形成開孔4〇β例如’該等開孔可 用雷射切割,用針插穿錨體繩股44來產生,或按需要 以其他方式形成。錨體的中軸線29也可定義錨體繩股 46 201210564 44的中軸線。錨體繩股44可定義實質垂直於中軸線 29的橫截面尺寸C1。根據一實施例,横截面尺寸C1 可為錨體繩股44的直徑。致動繩股38同樣可定義與 其中軸線110垂直的橫截面尺寸C2❶橫截面尺寸C2 小於錨體繩股44的橫截面尺寸ci。換言之,致動繩 股38比錨體繩股44薄些。根據一實施例,致動繩股 38的橫截面尺寸C2可為致動繩股38的直徑。 因此,錨體繩股38可插穿從而延伸穿過至少一開 孔40,例如複數個開孔4〇。在固定位置115的接點 108,致動繩股38可固定至錨體繩股44。接點1〇8可 由致動繩股38定義或可由附接至致動繩股的辅助繩 股定義。根據圖示實施例,接點108可為結、繞斷, 或其類似物。接點108可配置於錨體繩股44外以及尺 寸經製作成大於®比鄰的開孔4〇,使得該接點抵頂致動 繩股44的外表面而在拉力施加至致動繩股38時不行 進穿過開孔40。替換地,在錨體繩股44外或在錨體 繩股44内,接點1〇8可焊接、縫合、絞接、或以其他 方式固定至錫體繩股44。在這點上,應瞭解,相對於 錯體28上致動繩股38離開錨體28的位置,錨體繩股 %在遠端位置可附接至,例如,打結、焊接、縫合、 絞接、或以其他方式附接至上述錨體28中之任—。 致動繩股38延伸穿過錨體繩股44以及在對於接 點108是在近端的離開位置119處離開錨體繩股44。 請參考第13C圖,在操作期間,當在可擴展部份36 的近端39a有支撐時致動力F施加至致動繩股,可擴 47 201210564 展部份36的固定位置115向離開位置U9近端平移, 從而使可擴展部份36由第—組態運動至擴展組態^ 如,可擴展部份36可折疊成有實質手風琴形狀的結 請參考第14A圖,應暸解,上述之錨22可用兩 段式錨線44構成。例如,可折疊錨線44以便定義第 一及第二錨線段44a、44b,它們可一起定義相對的端 部52、54。例如,如圖示,錨線44的折疊端可定義 第一端部52,以及錨線段44a、44b的自由端可定義 第一端部54。替換地,錫線44的折疊端可定義第二 端部54 ’以及錨線段44a、44b的自由端可定義第一 端部52。如上述相對於錨線44 ’可一起操縱錨線段 44a、44b以便根據各種具體實施例來構造錨22。應瞭 解,可依所欲次數折疊錨線44以便製成有想要數目可 像上述方式一起操縱的錨線。替換地及另外’如第14B 圖所示’錨線段44a、44b,或有所欲數目的錨線,可 用分開不整合的錯線44定義。因此,應瞭解,錨體 28可為兩段式’或以其他方式定義多段的線。 請參考第15A圖至第15D圖,以及如上述,可編 織錨體28的基材42以及因而製成後可定義開孔40。 例如’如第15A圖所示,錨體28的基材42,包括可 擴展部份36,可定義複數個錨體纖維109,彼等被交 又編織成可定義網目111。應瞭解,纖維109替換地 可定義編織結構,例如編結物、織物、網目、針織物。 基材42定義複數個開孔40,彼等係延伸穿過網目1Π 48 201210564 以及實質沿著長形方向34及實質沿著第二方向35隔 開。 根據一實施例’如第15B圖所示,致動繩股36 可與網目111整合,以及可用上述方式編織穿過開孔 4〇的選定開孔45,如在說明第7A圖至第7C圖時所 迷。例如’致動繩股38可由錨體28近端伸出,例如, 雀田體28的近端30,以及可編織穿過以便延伸穿過開 孔40中之選定者。當致動繩股38編織穿過開孔40 時,網目111的錨體纖維109可分開或斷裂以便放大 接受致動繩股38的開孔40。根據圖示實施例,錨線 38可穿過第一選定開孔45成圈,以及接著近端編織 穿過Ά者長形方向34隔開的至少一附加選定開孔 45,例如複數個選定開孔45。例如,致動繩股%可 由可擴展部份36近端伸出,使得在致動力F施加至 欵動繩股38時’致動繩股38可使可擴展部份36由第 〜組態運動至擴展組態,如上述。 請參考第15C圖,如上述,錨體28的基材42可 為織布或不織布,以及在針織穿過基材42的致動繩股 之刖,開孔40可切穿基材42。例如,可雷射切割、 機蜮切割,化學切割,或用任何適當替代方法按需要 來切割該等開孔40。開孔4〇可實質沿著長形方向% 隔開。致動繩股38可與錨體28整合以及可編織穿過 =孔40使得在致動力F施加至致動繩股%時致動繩 =38可使可擴展部份%由第—㈣運動至擴展組 L,如上述。 49 201210564 請參考第15D圖,錨體28的基材42可定義可為 織布或不織布的至少一錨體繩股,例如複數個錨體繩 股44,以及製成後編結成可定義複數個開孔4〇的編 結繩股。該等開孔40可實質沿著長形方向34隔開\ 致動繩股38可與錨體28整合以及可編織穿過開孔4〇 使得在致動力F施加至致動繩股38時,致動繩股% 可使可擴展部份3 6由第一組態運動至擴展組態,如上 請參考第16A圖,錨體28的基材42,包括可擴 展部份36,可定義複數個錨體纖維1〇9,彼等係交又 編織成可定義網目111,如以上在說明第15八圖時所 述。基材42定義複數個開孔4G,㈣係延伸穿過 網目以及可實質沿著長形方向34以及實質沿著第;; 方向35隔開。娜28可進—步定義在可擴展部份3一6 處於第—組態勒可擴展部份36伸出的孔眼! 12 如’孔眼112可由可擴展部份36遠端伸出,以及 述,:目:於魏90,可杈它近端穿過可擴展部份。 根:-貫施例,如第16B圖所示 可與錫體28分離或不整合,可延伸穿過孔眼二以 及可進-步延伸穿過至少1孔4〇,例如 40。例如,致動繩股36可定義第一及第二部份Μ、 43’以及配置於第-及第二部份4卜43之間及與盆整 合附接的摺疊86,如以上在說明第9A圖至第9CS1 時所达。第-及第二部份41、43可沿著在孔眼ιΐ2 近側的方向賴穿過複數個開孔4Q以便在驅使可擴 201210564 展部份36至擴展組態時定義孔眼112的行進路_ 以上在說明第9A圖至第9C圖時所述。因此,如 展部份處於擴展組態時,孔眼丨12可由可擴屏二^ 近端伸出。 〜。1伪36 替換地,在可擴展部份36處於第一組態時,孔 112或孔眼90可由各自的可擴展部份36近端伸出'" 以及致動繩股38可延伸穿過可擴展部份%的複數個 開孔40以便接受致動力以驅使可擴展部份36由第一 組態至擴展組態,如上述。因此,在已驅使可擴展部 份至擴展組態後,孔眼112及90可由可擴展部"份 近端伸出。 請參考第16C圖,如上述,錨體28的基材42可 為織布或不織布,以及在針織致動繩股38穿過基材 42之前’開孔40可切穿基材42,如以上在說明第15C 圖時所述。例如,可雷射切割,機械切割,化學切割, 或用任何適當替代方法按需要來切割該等開孔4〇。開 孔40可實質沿著長形方向34隔開錨體28可進一步 包含在可擴展部份36處於第一組態時由可擴展部份 36例如遠端伸出的孔眼112。根據一實施例,該致動 繩股可與錯體28分離或不整合,可延伸穿過孔眼 112,以及可進一步延伸穿過至少一開孔4〇,例如複 數個開孔40 ’如以上在說明第9A圖至第9C圖、第 3A圖至第3C圖及第16A圖至第16B圖時所述。因 此’在可擴展部份處於擴展組態時,孔眼112可由可 擴展部份36近端伸出。 51 201210564 請參考帛17A圖至第17B_,銷組件2〇可包含 連接複數個錯構件114 @致動構件37,例如共同致動 38轉複數個錯構件114可沿著共同致動繩股 38相對滑動。可定義㈣件114為預先打好的結,以 及各個孔眼116被組態成可使錨構件ιΐ4中之每一可 滑動地麵合至共同致動繩股38。例如,娜件114中 之每一可插到共同目標解剖位置,例如通過例如,在 主入知構件114於共同目標解剖位置時共同目標解剖 位置可形成或因組織之缺損而可形成的的開孔,如以 上在說明第1A圖至第1B圖時所述金。 共同致動繩股38的第一部份41可定義孔眼 、7 係疋義允許第一部份43相對於第一部份41 平移穿過孔眼m的滑動構件47,例如滑結(僅叩 knot),使得致動繩股38可定義線圈ιΐ8。因此,第一 及第二部份41、43可滑動地相互附接。當致動力F %加至第二部份43時,它會拉第二部份43穿過孔眼 117 ’減少線圈118的大小,這造成銷構件1 μ沿著共 同致動繩股38滑動及聚在一起以便定義由數個聚集 結組成的族(cluster) 120。因此,第二部份43可定義致 動部份131,以及也可附接至第二錨以便定義附接部 伤133。簇120的尺寸經製作成可定義大於各個個別 錨構件114之最大厚度T1的最大厚度T2,以及至少 等於或大於在共同目標解剖位置的開孔。 因此’簇120可定義橫越間隙24c可附接至另一 錨的錨22以便使具有以上在說明第1A圖至第iB圖 52 201210564 時二述之類型的間隙24c接近。替換地,錨構件114 可定義根據上述具體實施例中之任一構成的錨體 28,它不是處於第—組態就是處於擴展組態。用本文 所述的任何方式,簇120可附接至第二錨22。例如, 共同致動繩股38可直接或間接地附接至第二錨。例 如’共同致動繩股38可直接或間接地附接至第二錨的 致動繩股。根據一實施例,共同致動繩股與第二錨的 致動繩股整合。 請參考第18A圖至第18C圖,以及大體如以上在 說明第1A圖至第1B圖時所述,錯組件2〇可包含第 一及第二錯22a、22b。第一錯22a包含第一錯體28a, 其係貫質沿著長形方向34延伸以及定義延伸穿過第 一錨體28a的第一複數個開孔40a。第一錨22a更包 含第一致動繩股38a,其係延伸穿過至少一開孔4〇a, 例如複數個開孔,以及經組態成可接受造成第一錯體 28a以上述方式由第一組態運動至擴展組態的致動力 F。第一致動繩股38a可與第一錨體28a分離及附接至 第一錯體28a,例如編織穿過,如以上在說明第2A圖 至第2H圖時所述’或可與第一錯體28a整合,如以 上在說明第7A圖皇第7C圖時所述。 第二錨22b包含第二錨體28b,其係實質沿著長 形方向34延伸及定義延伸穿過第二錨體28b之第二複 數個開孔40b。第二描22b更包含第二致動繩股38b, 其係延伸穿過至少〆開孔,例如複數個開孔,以 及經組態成可接受造成第二錨體28b以上述方式由第 53 201210564 一組態運動至擴展組態的致動力F。第二致動繩股38b 可與第二錨體28b分離及附接至第二錨體28b,例如 編織穿過,如以上在說明第2A圖至第2H圖時所述, 或可與第·一銷體28b整合’如以上在說明第7 a圖至 第7 C圖時所述。 弟一銷22a與第二錫22b兩者可各自包含第一及 第一錫體28a、28b與第一及第二致動構件37a、37b, 例如與第一及第二I苗體28a、28b整合的致動繩股38a 及38b。第一及第二錨體28a、28b每一各自包含如上 述經組態成可由第一組態運動至第二擴展組態的第一 及第一可擴展部份36a、36b。 根據圖示於第18A圖至第18B圖的具體實施例, 第一及第二致動繩股38&及與各自的第一及第二 錨體28a、28b整合。根據其他具體實施例,第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b圖示成各自與第一及第二錨體 28a、28b分離及附接至第一及第二錨體28a、28b。也 根據其他具體實施例,第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b 中之一個與各自的錨體整合,.以及第一及第二致動繩 股38a及38b中之另一個各自與錨體分離及附接。根 據其中第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b圖示及描述成 是各自與第一及第二錨體28a、28b整合的具體實施 例’應瞭解,第一及第二致動繩股3如及38b替換地 可各自與第一及第二錨體28a、28b分離及附接,除非 另有說明。此外,根據其中第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b圖示及描述成是各自與第一及第二錨體28a、 54 201210564 28b分離及附接的具體實施例,應瞭解,第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b替換地可各自與第一及第二錨體 28a、28b整合,除非另有說明。 繼績參考第18C圖,鋪組件20可包含經組態成 可連結銷22以及允許偏壓力施加至銷22a、22b中之 至少一者把錨22a、22b拉在一起的至少一連接構件 63,從而使解剖缺損24接近。連接構件63可與第一 及第二錫22a、22b中之一或兩者整合,例如與第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一或兩者整合,可與第 一及第二錯體中之一或兩者整合,或可與第一及第二 |苗22a、22b中之一或兩者分離及附接(直接或間接 地)。例如,連接構件63可與第一及第二錨22a、22b 分離及附接於弟一及第二錯22a、22b之間,如以下所 詳述的。儘管根據不同具體實施例在此描述連接構件 63,應瞭解,錨組件20替換地可包含經組態成可使第 一知22a附接至第一銷22b的任何適當連接構件。致 動繩股中之至少一或兩者,或在已由孔眼9〇卸下致動 繩股38後可附接至例如孔眼9〇或任何適當替代孔眼 的連接繩股經組態成可接受將第一及第二錨22a、22b 中之至少一者向另一個偏壓以便使間隙2 4 c接近的接 近力AF。 錨組件2 0可包含與對應致動繩股3 8 a及3 8 b整合 的連接構件63。如上述,第一及第二銷體娜、m 中之每一可各自植入在間隙24c兩對邊上的第一及第 二目標解剖位置24a、24b,如第18A圖所示。第一及 55 201210564 第二致動繩股38a及38b中之每一可接受實質沿著長 形方向34的致動力F’這造成各自的第一及第二錨體 28a、28b,特別是各自的可擴展部份36a、361)由第一 組態運動至擴展組態以便固定第一及第二錨體28a、 28b於各自的第一及第二目標解剖位置24a、24b。施 加至致動繩股38a、38b中之每一的致動力f的形式可 為不同的致動力,或如以下所詳述的,可為相同的致 動力。 請參考第18B圖,一旦第一及第二錯體28a、28b 固定於各自的第一及第二目標解剖位置24a、24b,接 近力AF可施加至第一及第二致動段38a及38b中之 至少一或兩者,其方向係實質沿著朝向第一及第二錨 體28a、28b中之另一個,它也可朝向各自的間隙24c。 因此’接近力AF有方向分量是朝向第一及第二錨體 28a、28b中之另一個,例如可經定向成純然朝向第一 及第二I苗體28a、28b中之另一個。同樣,接近力AF 有朝向間隙24c的方向分量,例如經定向成純然朝向 間隙24c。因此,接近力AF向4苗體28a、28b中之另 一個偏壓錨體28a、28b中之至少一或兩者至各自使間 隙24c接近的偏壓位置。 再參考第18C圖,可定義滑動構件47與鎖定構 件64中之至少一者的連接構件63,其係例如在連接 點125使第一及第二連接器致動繩股38a及38b附接 在一起。因此,應瞭解,滑動構件47與鎖定構件64 中之至少一者同樣可使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二 56 201210564 致動繩股38b。根據一實施例,在第一及第二致動繩 股38a及38b已受到張力以便維持間隙24c處於接近 狀態後,連接構件63可附接第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b。可驅使構件63至鎖定組態以便防止或抵抗第 一及第二錨22a、22b分離而造成間隙24c由接近狀態 打開。替換地或附加地,在施加接近力AF至致動繩 股38a及38b之前,連接構件63可使第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b彼此附接,以及使致動繩股38a及38b 受拉,以及是在使間隙24c接近之前。As shown in the figure, the method can be further described above. For example, as in the UA s. _, the step includes the steps of: having the second end 54 defined by the first-first (four) _ end 54 at the junction 86 to extend the pass-ring, for example, the first coil 99a. The first new line first coil 99a defines a respective opening 40 and includes a first segment 101a and a second segment 101b. The first segment 101a of the first coil 99a is extended by the knot 97 and the second segment 101b is extended from the distal end of the first segment 10a to define the first coil 99a. The second end portion 54 defines a free end 100 that projects from the distal end of the second segment 101b such that the free end 100 of the second end portion 54 and the first coil 99a are on opposite sides of the eyelet 90. Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, the second end 54 can be folded to define a second new coil, such as a second coil 99b, which defines a respective opening 40 and includes a first segment 103a and a second segment 103b. . The second pullable coil 99b passes through a second previous coil that may be defined by the first coil 99a, whereby the first segment 103a is disposed at the proximal end relative to the second segment 10b. Alternatively, the free end 100 can be fed through the first coil 99a in a first direction, folded to define a second coil 99b, and reversely passed through the first coil 99a in a second direction opposite the first direction. Thus, the first segment 103a is extended by the eyelet 90 and the second segment 103b is extended by the first segment 103a to define the second coil 99b. The free end 100 of the second end portion 54 projects from the distal end of the second segment 103b such that the free end 100 of the second end portion 54 and the second coil 99b are on opposite sides of the first coil 99a. As shown in Fig. 11C, tension can be applied to the first segment 103a of the second coil 99b, which causes the size of the first coil 99a to decrease and tighten around the second coil 99b. Next, as shown in Fig. 11D, the second end portion 54 is again folded to define a new coil (e.g., the third coil 99c) which defines the opening 40 and includes the first segment 105a and the second segment 105b. The pullable third coil 99c passes through the opening 40 of the previous coil (e.g., the second coil 99b), thereby thereby configuring the first segment 105a at the proximal end relative to the second segment 105b. Alternatively, the free end 100 can be fed through the second coil 99b in a first direction, folded to define a third coil 99c, and reversed through the second coil 99b in a second direction opposite the first direction. Therefore, the first segment 105a is extended by the first coil 99a, and the second segment 105b is extended by the first segment 105a to define the third coil 99c. The free end 100 of the second end portion 54 projects from the distal end of the second segment 105b such that the free end 100 of the second end portion 54 and the third coil 99c are on opposite sides of the second coil 99b. Referring to Fig. 11E, the first segment 105a is tightened, which causes the size of the second coil 99b to decrease and tighten around the third coil 99c. Next, as shown in FIG. 11F, the second end portion 54 can be folded again to define a new coil (eg, the fourth coil 99d) that defines the respective aperture 40 and includes the first segment 107a and the second segment 107b. The pullable fourth coil 99d passes through the opening 40 of the previous coil (e.g., the third coil 99c) whereby the first segment 107a is disposed at the proximal end relative to the second segment 107b. Alternatively, the free end 100 can be fed through the third coil 99c in a first direction, folded to define a fourth coil 99d, and reversely passed through the third coil 99c in a second direction opposite the first direction. Therefore, the first segment 107a is extended by the second coil 99b, and the second segment 107b is extended by the first segment 107a to define the fourth coil 99d. The free end 100 of the second end portion 54 extends from the distal end of the second segment 107b such that the free end 1〇〇 of the second end and the fourth coil 99d are on opposite sides of the third coil 99c. Referring to Fig. 11G, the first segment 107a is tightened, causing the size of the third coil 99c to decrease and tightening around the 42 201210564 brother four coil 99d. Therefore, the following sub-coils are included, one side of the previous coil: the subsequent coil on the opposite side of the circle " extends to the first segment of the coil 99 to reduce the size of the previous coil. For example, in Figure 11 (1), the expansion of the body 28 can be determined by, for example, the length of the desired 掣 踉 々 々 々 々 力 力 力 力 力 力 力 力 力 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Once the final coil 99 is made, the free end of the second end portion 54 or the feedable person can pass through the final coil and tighten to close the knot of the distal end 39b of the expandable portion 36. The remainder of the second end 54 can then end at the position closest to the expandable distal end 39b or can be extended from the proximal end of the expandable portion to define integration with the pin body 28 and to be woven through the selected opening. 4 turns of actuating strands 38, as described above in the description of Figures 7A-8B, or alternatively may define integrated connecting strands configured to attach anchor 22 to another anchor, such as The following is described in the description of Figs. 42A to 42c. It will be appreciated that the final coil 99 may have no openings 40 in accordance with the illustrated embodiment. In one embodiment, the expandable portion 36 can include 15 coils 99 each having an opening 40. In another embodiment, the expandable portion 36 can include eight coils 99 each having an opening 40. In yet another embodiment, the expandable portion 36 defines eight openings 40. Although the anchor body 22 including the expandable portion 36 and the eyelet 90 can be constructed in the manner described above, it will be appreciated that the expandable portion 36 and the eyelet 90 can be formed by any suitable alternative. For example, alternatively, the (four) 28 of the anchor strand 44 portion 36 can be 'wrapped' in any alternative manner as needed, and the expandable portion has an expandable first configuration actuation to an extended configuration, such as this =, The money portion can be made available from the hybrid strands 44. Alternatively, the expandable strands 44 can be separated or not. 90 can be attached to the anchor body, can be attached, or can be attached as appropriate. 1 , , , = ^ ee ) , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , This out-of-mouth = and actuation section, although the coils 5 of the expandable section 36 are integrated with each other, the expandable section 36 can be more or more of the wrong strands. / or together define a number of braided segments or coils 56 that can be joined in the following manner, such as the second redundant diagram), tan (refer to Figure 5), knotted, spliced, mouth or two pots attached together . 8 Referring to Figures 12 through 12B, the 'auxiliary strands 33 can extend through the apertures 90, and when the expandable portion 36 is in the first configuration' can extend further through the selected openings in at least the apertures 40. 45, for example, a plurality of selected apertures 40. For example, one of the first and second portions 41, 43 of the auxiliary strands 33 can be fed through the aperture 9'. A needle (e.g., needle 94) can be fed through a selected opening 40 that is identified as an opening 40 through which the auxiliary strand 33 will extend. Any one or more of the apertures 40 of the expandable portion 36 to all may define a selected aperture 4〇. For example, the distal end of the needle 94 extends through the opening 4 of the second coil 99, and each of the fourth subsequent coils 99. The first and second portions* 1, 43, 201210564 can feed the eye through the needle 94, and the proximal end of the needle 94 translates through the expandable portion 36, thereby knitting the first and second portions 41, 43 The proximal end of the aperture 90 extends through at least one aperture 4, such as each of the apertures 45. Once the needle 94 has passed through the expandable portion 36, the first and second portions 41, 43 can then be removed by the needle 94, as shown in Figure 9A. Referring to FIG. 11H and FIGS. 12A and B, at least a plurality of openings 40 to all of the openings 4 are divided into a definable first portion 102a and a second portion 1〇2b, the second The portion l2b is substantially adjacent to the first portion 102a along the second direction and is separated from the line 104 extending through the aperture 40 and integrated with the anchor strands 44. According to an embodiment, the first and second portions 4b 43 alternately extend through the selected ones of the first and second portions 102a, 102b sequentially through the selected opening 45. Further, the first and second portions 41, 43 extend through the same portions 102a, 102b. For example, the first and second portions 41, 43 extend through the first of the first and second portions i 〇 2a, l 〇 2b of the first selected opening 45, all passing through the second selected opening The second of the first and second apertures 102a, 102b of the aperture, and the first and second portions 102a, 102b of the subsequently selected aperture, continue to alternate in sequence. Referring again to FIGS. 9A through 9C, it should be understood that the first and second portions 41, 43 of the auxiliary strands 33 are attached to the eyelets 90, and the eyelets 90 extend through the same opening 40 and extend through The same portion 102a, 102b of the opening 4 is extended, and the anchor body 28 is extended, for example, the proximal end projects out of the anchor body 28' and away from the target anatomical location. Therefore, when the actuation force ρ is applied to the auxiliary strands 33 (in particular, at least one of the first and second portions 41, 43), the auxiliary strands 33 (in particular, the first and second portions 45 201210564 Parts 41, 43) define the path of travel of the aperture 90. Thus, at least one or both of the first and second portions 41, 43 may define an actuation portion 131, and at least one or both of the first and second portions 41, 43 may define an attachment portion 133. Thus, when the actuation force F is applied to at least one of the first and second portions 41, 43 while the proximal end 39a of the expandable portion 36 has a support for the actuation force F, the proximal end of the aperture 90 travels through the expandable Part 36, which causes the expandable portion 36 to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. The actuation force F can be applied to the auxiliary strands 33 until the apertures 90 extend from the proximal end of the expanded actuation body 36. As detailed below, the eyelet 90 can define a connecting member 63 that is configured to attach the tin 22 directly or indirectly to the second anchor. For example, the auxiliary strands 33 of the error 22 can be attached to the second anchor. For example, the auxiliary strands 33 may be integral with or separate from the actuation strands of the second anchor and attached directly or indirectly thereto, or alternatively directly attached to the second | The tin body, for example, if the actuating strand is unloaded by the second anchor after the second anchor has been moved from the first configuration to the expanded configuration. Alternatively, the auxiliary strand 33 can be unloaded by the anchor 22, and another line (eg, an auxiliary strand of another anchor) can be inserted into the eyelet 90 to attach the anchor 22 to another anchor and implant the anatomy at the anchor 22. The actuating strands are provided as detailed below. Referring to Figures 13A through 13B in May, and as described above, the seedling strand 44 may be porous to define the opening 40, or may be non-porous to form an opening 4 in the anchor strand 44. For example, the openings may be laser cut, inserted through the anchor strands 44, or otherwise formed as desired. The central axis 29 of the anchor body may also define the central axis of the anchor strand 46 201210564 44. The anchor strands 44 can define a cross-sectional dimension C1 that is substantially perpendicular to the central axis 29. According to an embodiment, the cross-sectional dimension C1 may be the diameter of the anchor strands 44. The actuating strands 38 can also define a cross-sectional dimension C2 that is perpendicular to the axis 110 therein, and a cross-sectional dimension C2 that is less than the cross-sectional dimension ci of the anchor strands 44. In other words, the actuating strands 38 are thinner than the anchor strands 44. According to an embodiment, the cross-sectional dimension C2 of the actuation strand 38 can be the diameter of the actuation strand 38. Thus, the anchor strands 38 can be inserted through to extend through at least one opening 40, such as a plurality of openings 4. At the contact 108 of the fixed position 115, the actuation strand 38 can be secured to the anchor strand 44. Contact 1〇8 may be defined by actuating strands 38 or may be defined by auxiliary strands attached to the actuating strands. According to the illustrated embodiment, the contacts 108 can be knots, turns, or the like. The joint 108 can be disposed outside of the anchor strand 44 and can be sized to be larger than the adjacent opening 4, such that the contact abuts the outer surface of the actuating strand 44 and is applied to the actuating strand 38 at a pulling force. It does not travel through the opening 40. Alternatively, the contacts 1〇8 may be welded, stitched, spliced, or otherwise secured to the tin body strands 44 outside of the anchor strands 44 or within the anchor strands 44. In this regard, it will be appreciated that the anchor strand % can be attached to the distal end position, for example, knotted, welded, stitched, twisted, relative to the position on the wrong body 28 that actuates the strand 38 away from the anchor body 28. Attached to, or otherwise attached to, any of the anchors 28 described above. The actuation strand 38 extends through the anchor strand 44 and exits the anchor strand 44 at a proximal exit position 119 for the joint 108. Referring to Figure 13C, during operation, when the actuation force F is applied to the actuation strand at the proximal end 39a of the expandable portion 36, the fixed position 115 of the portion of the extension portion 36 of the 201210564 can be extended to the exit position U9. The proximal end is translated so that the expandable portion 36 is moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration. For example, the expandable portion 36 can be folded into a shape having a substantial accordion shape. Referring to Figure 14A, it should be understood that the anchor is 22 can be constructed with a two-section anchor line 44. For example, anchor line 44 can be folded to define first and second anchor line segments 44a, 44b, which together define opposing ends 52,54. For example, as illustrated, the folded end of the anchor line 44 can define a first end 52, and the free end of the anchor line segment 44a, 44b can define a first end 54. Alternatively, the folded end of the tin wire 44 can define a second end 54' and the free end of the anchor segment 44a, 44b can define a first end 52. The anchor line segments 44a, 44b can be manipulated together with respect to the anchor line 44' as described above to construct the anchor 22 in accordance with various embodiments. It should be understood that the anchor wire 44 can be folded as many times as desired to produce an anchor wire having a desired number that can be manipulated together as described above. Alternatively and additionally, the 'anchor segments 44a, 44b, as shown in Fig. 14B, or a desired number of anchor lines, may be defined by separate unconformed staggered lines 44. Thus, it should be understood that the anchor body 28 can be a two-segment' or otherwise define a plurality of segments of wire. Referring to Figures 15A through 15D, and as described above, the substrate 42 of the anchor body 28 can be woven and thus the opening 40 can be defined. For example, as shown in Fig. 15A, the substrate 42 of the anchor body 28, including the expandable portion 36, defines a plurality of anchor fibers 109 that are woven into a definable mesh 111. It will be appreciated that the fibers 109 alternatively may define a woven structure, such as a braid, fabric, mesh, knit. The substrate 42 defines a plurality of openings 40 that extend through the mesh 1Π 48 201210564 and are substantially separated along the elongated direction 34 and substantially along the second direction 35. According to an embodiment, as shown in Fig. 15B, the actuation strand 36 can be integrated with the mesh 111 and the selected aperture 45 can be woven through the aperture 4〇 in the manner described above, as illustrated in Figures 7A through 7C. I am lost. For example, the actuation strand 38 can be extended from the proximal end of the anchor body 28, for example, the proximal end 30 of the bird body 28, and the selected one that can be woven through to extend through the aperture 40. When the actuation strands 38 are woven through the apertures 40, the anchor fibers 109 of the mesh 111 can be separated or broken to amplify the apertures 40 that receive the actuation strands 38. According to the illustrated embodiment, the anchor line 38 can be looped through the first selected aperture 45, and then the proximal end is woven through at least one additional selected aperture 45 spaced apart by the elongated direction 34, such as a plurality of selected openings Hole 45. For example, the actuation strand % can be extended from the proximal end of the expandable portion 36 such that when the actuation force F is applied to the sway strand 38, the actuation strand 38 can cause the expandable portion 36 to move from the first configuration to the configuration To the extended configuration, as described above. Referring to Figure 15C, as described above, the substrate 42 of the anchor body 28 can be woven or non-woven, and the opening 40 can cut through the substrate 42 after knitting through the actuation strands of the substrate 42. For example, the openings 40 can be cut as desired by laser cutting, machine cutting, chemical cutting, or by any suitable alternative. The openings 4 〇 can be substantially separated by the lengthwise direction %. The actuation strand 38 can be integrated with the anchor body 28 and can be woven through the aperture 40 such that when the actuation force F is applied to the actuation strand %, the actuation cord = 38 can cause the expandable portion % to be moved from the first (fourth) to Expand group L as above. 49 201210564 Referring to Figure 15D, the substrate 42 of the anchor body 28 can define at least one anchor strand, which can be a woven or non-woven fabric, such as a plurality of anchor strands 44, and can be braided to define a plurality of openings after fabrication. The braided strand of the hole 4〇. The apertures 40 can be substantially spaced apart along the elongate direction 34. The actuation strands 38 can be integrated with the anchor body 28 and can be woven through the apertures 4 such that when the actuation force F is applied to the actuation strands 38, Actuating the strand % allows the expandable portion 36 to be moved from the first configuration to the expanded configuration, as described above with reference to Figure 16A, the base 42 of the anchor 28, including the expandable portion 36, which can define a plurality of The anchor fibers 1〇9 are woven into a definable mesh 111 as described above in the description of Figure 15A. The substrate 42 defines a plurality of openings 4G which extend through the mesh and are substantially separable along the elongated direction 34 and substantially along the direction; Na 28 can be further defined in the expandable part 3-6 in the hole of the first configuration expansion part 36! 12 If the eyelet 112 is extendable from the distal end of the expandable portion 36, and as described above, it can be passed through the expandable portion at its proximal end. The root:-through embodiment, as shown in Fig. 16B, may be separated or uncoupled from the tin body 28, may extend through the aperture 2 and may extend further through at least one aperture, such as 40. For example, the actuating strand 36 can define first and second portions Μ, 43' and a fold 86 disposed between the first and second portions 4 and 43 and integrated with the basin, as described above. 9A to 9CS1. The first and second portions 41, 43 may extend through the plurality of openings 4Q in a direction proximal to the aperture ι 2 to define the path of the aperture 112 when driving the expandable 201210564 portion 36 to the extended configuration _ The above is described in the description of Figs. 9A to 9C. Therefore, when the extended portion is in the extended configuration, the eyelet 12 can be extended from the proximal end of the expandable screen. ~. 1 pseudo 36 Alternatively, when the expandable portion 36 is in the first configuration, the aperture 112 or eyelet 90 can be extended from the proximal end of the respective expandable portion 36 and the actuating strand 38 can extend through A portion of the plurality of openings 40 are expanded to receive an actuation force to drive the expandable portion 36 from the first configuration to the extended configuration, as described above. Thus, after the expandable portion has been driven to the expanded configuration, the apertures 112 and 90 can be extended by the proximal portion of the expandable portion. Referring to Figure 16C, as described above, the substrate 42 of the anchor body 28 can be woven or non-woven, and the opening 40 can cut through the substrate 42 before the knitting actuation strands 38 pass through the substrate 42, as above This is described in the description of Figure 15C. For example, laser cutting, mechanical cutting, chemical cutting, or cutting of the openings 4 as desired may be performed by any suitable alternative. The opening 40 can be spaced substantially along the elongated direction 34. The anchor body 28 can further include an eyelet 112 extending from the expandable portion 36, such as the distal end, when the expandable portion 36 is in the first configuration. According to an embodiment, the actuating strand may be separate or uncoupled from the wrong body 28, may extend through the eyelet 112, and may extend further through the at least one opening 4'', such as a plurality of openings 40' as above The descriptions of FIGS. 9A to 9C, 3A to 3C, and 16A to 16B will be described. Thus, the eyelet 112 can be extended from the proximal end of the expandable portion 36 when the expandable portion is in the extended configuration. 51 201210564 Referring to FIGS. 17A through 17B_, the pin assembly 2A can include a plurality of wrong members 114 @actuating members 37, such as a common actuating 38. The plurality of wrong members 114 can be associated along the common actuating strand 38. slide. The definable (four) member 114 is a pre-knotted knot, and each eyelet 116 is configured to engage each of the slidable surfaces of the anchor member ι4 to the common actuating strand 38. For example, each of the nave members 114 can be inserted into a common target anatomical location, such as by, for example, opening of a common target anatomical location when the primary access member 114 is at a common target anatomical location, or which can be formed due to a defect in the tissue. The holes are as described above in the description of Figs. 1A to 1B. The first portion 41 of the co-actuating strand 38 can define an eyelet, and the 7-system can allow the first portion 43 to translate relative to the first portion 41 through the sliding member 47 of the eyelet m, such as a slip knot (only knot ) such that the actuation strand 38 can define the coil ι 8 . Therefore, the first and second portions 41, 43 are slidably attached to each other. When the actuation force F% is applied to the second portion 43, it pulls the second portion 43 through the aperture 117' to reduce the size of the coil 118, which causes the pin member 1i to slide and gather along the common actuation strand 38. Together to define a cluster 120 consisting of a number of aggregated nodes. Thus, the second portion 43 can define the actuation portion 131 and can also be attached to the second anchor to define an attachment lesion 133. The tufts 120 are sized to define a maximum thickness T2 that is greater than the maximum thickness T1 of each individual anchor member 114, and at least equal to or greater than the opening at the common target anatomical location. Thus the 'cluster 120' can define an anchor 22 that can be attached to the other anchor across the gap 24c to approximate the gap 24c of the type described above with reference to Figures 1A through ibB 52 201210564. Alternatively, the anchor member 114 can define an anchor body 28 constructed in accordance with any of the above-described embodiments, either in a first configuration or in an extended configuration. The tuft 120 can be attached to the second anchor 22 in any of the ways described herein. For example, the co-actuated strands 38 can be attached directly or indirectly to the second anchor. For example, the 'co-actuated strands 38 can be attached directly or indirectly to the actuation strands of the second anchor. According to an embodiment, the co-actuating strands are integrated with the actuating strands of the second anchor. Referring to Figures 18A through 18C, and generally as described above with respect to Figures 1A through 1B, the wrong component 2A can include first and second errors 22a, 22b. The first error 22a includes a first body 28a that extends in the elongate direction 34 and defines a first plurality of apertures 40a extending through the first anchor body 28a. The first anchor 22a further includes a first actuating strand 38a extending through at least one opening 4A, such as a plurality of openings, and configured to accept the first wrong body 28a in the manner described above The first configuration moves to the actuation force F of the extended configuration. The first actuating strand 38a can be separated from the first anchor body 28a and attached to the first body 28a, such as woven through, as described above in the description of Figures 2A through 2H. The erroneous body 28a is integrated as described above in the description of Figure 7A. The second anchor 22b includes a second anchor body 28b that extends substantially along the elongated direction 34 and defines a second plurality of apertures 40b that extend through the second anchor body 28b. The second depiction 22b further includes a second actuating strand 38b extending through at least the split aperture, such as a plurality of apertures, and configured to be acceptable to cause the second anchor 28b to be in the manner described above by the 53201210564 A configuration movement to the actuation force F of the extended configuration. The second actuating strand 38b can be separated from the second anchor body 28b and attached to the second anchor body 28b, such as woven through, as described above in the description of Figures 2A through 2H, or A pin body 28b is integrated as described above in the description of Figures 7a through 7C. The first pin 22a and the second tin 22b may each include a first and first tin body 28a, 28b and first and second actuating members 37a, 37b, for example, with the first and second I seed bodies 28a, 28b. Integrated actuation strands 38a and 38b. The first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b each each include first and first expandable portions 36a, 36b configured to be movable from the first configuration to the second expanded configuration as described above. According to the specific embodiment illustrated in Figures 18A through 18B, the first and second actuation strands 38& and are integrated with the respective first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. According to other embodiments, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are illustrated as being separate from and attached to the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, respectively, to the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. According to other embodiments, one of the first and second actuation strands 38 & and 38b is integral with the respective anchor body, and the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are each Separation and attachment of the anchor body. According to a specific embodiment in which the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are illustrated and described as being integrated with the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, it should be understood that the first and second actuation strands 3 and 38b may alternatively be separated and attached to the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, unless otherwise stated. In addition, according to a specific embodiment in which the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are illustrated and described as being separate and attached to the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 54 201210564 28b, it should be understood that the first And the second actuation strands 38a and 38b can alternatively be integrated with the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, respectively, unless otherwise stated. Continuing with reference to Figure 18C, the paving assembly 20 can include at least one connecting member 63 configured to engage the pin 22 and allow biasing force to be applied to at least one of the pins 22a, 22b to pull the anchors 22a, 22b together, Thereby the anatomical defect 24 is brought close. The connecting member 63 can be integrated with one or both of the first and second tins 22a, 22b, for example, with one or both of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, and can be combined with the first and the first One or both of the two complexes are integrated or may be separated and attached (directly or indirectly) to one or both of the first and second seedlings 22a, 22b. For example, the connecting member 63 can be separated from and attached to the first and second anchors 22a, 22b, as will be described in more detail below. Although the connecting member 63 is described herein in terms of various embodiments, it should be understood that the anchor assembly 20 can alternatively include any suitable connecting member configured to attach the first knower 22a to the first pin 22b. At least one or both of the actuating strands, or a connecting strand that can be attached to, for example, the eyelet 9〇 or any suitable alternative eyelet after the actuating strand 38 has been removed by the eyelet 9〇, is configured to be acceptable The proximity force AF that biases at least one of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b toward the other to bring the gap 2 4 c close. The anchor assembly 20 can include a connecting member 63 that is integral with the corresponding actuating strands 38a and 38b. As described above, each of the first and second pins Na, m can be implanted in the first and second target anatomical positions 24a, 24b on opposite sides of the gap 24c, as shown in Fig. 18A. First and 55 201210564 each of the second actuating strands 38a and 38b can receive an actuation force F' substantially along the elongate direction 34 which causes the respective first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, particularly each The expandable portion 36a, 361) is moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration to secure the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b to the respective first and second target anatomical locations 24a, 24b. The actuation force f applied to each of the actuation strands 38a, 38b may be in the form of a different actuation force or, as detailed below, may be the same actuation force. Referring to FIG. 18B, once the first and second wrong bodies 28a, 28b are secured to the respective first and second target anatomical positions 24a, 24b, the proximity force AF can be applied to the first and second actuation segments 38a and 38b. At least one or both of the directions are substantially along the other of the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, which may also face the respective gaps 24c. Thus, the proximity force AF has a directional component that is toward the other of the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, for example, can be oriented to be purely toward the other of the first and second I seed bodies 28a, 28b. Likewise, the proximity force AF has a directional component toward the gap 24c, e.g., oriented toward the gap 24c. Therefore, the proximity force AF is directed to at least one or both of the other biasing anchors 28a, 28b of the four seed bodies 28a, 28b to a biasing position where the gaps 24c are each approached. Referring again to Fig. 18C, a connecting member 63 of at least one of the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64 can be defined, for example, at the connection point 125 to attach the first and second connector actuating strands 38a and 38b together. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that at least one of the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64 can also attach the first actuation strand 38a to the second 56 201210564 actuation strand 38b. According to an embodiment, the connecting member 63 can attach the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b after the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b have been subjected to tension to maintain the gap 24c in a proximate condition. The member 63 can be driven to a locked configuration to prevent or resist separation of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b causing the gap 24c to be opened by the approaching state. Alternatively or additionally, prior to applying the proximity force AF to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, the attachment member 63 can attach the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to each other, and the actuation strands 38a and 38b is pulled and is before the gap 24c is brought close.

根據一些具體實施例’連接構件63用第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b定義以及與其整合。連接構件63 在連接點125定義滑動構件47與鎖定構件64中之至 少一者。根據以下所述的一些具體實施例,連接構件 63可組態成為附接於第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b 之間的輔助連接構件77(例如,參考第20A圖),以及 經組態成可接受兩個或更多線,例如第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b中之任一或兩者與可連接至其他錨或 其他解剖結構的附加線。因此,可以說,連接構件G 可使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b直接或間接地附 接在一起。 在某些實施例中,例如如第18D圖所示,輔助連 接構件77可組態成為連接繩股59,例如連接構件幻 可使連接繩股59附接至本身以便使第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b彼此附接(例如,也參考第32a圖至第 32C圖)。例如,連接繩股59可沿著離開第二錨體2肋 57 201210564 的方向延伸穿過第一錨體28a的第一個開孔40,沿著 朝向第二錨體28b的方向折回穿過第一錨體28a的第 二個開孔40以及穿過第二錨體28b的第一個開孔 40 ’以及折回穿過第二錨體28b的第二個開孔40。連 接繩股59以此方式可定義在第一及第二錨體28a、28b 之間延伸的第一部份120,由第一錨體28a之第二個 開孔40伸出及離開解剖結構24的第二部份121a,以 及由第二錨體2 8 b之第二個開孔4 0伸出及離開解剖結 構24的第三部份121b。應瞭解,如本文所述,錨組 件20可包含使第二部份121a附接至第三部份12沈 的任何適當連接器以便使第一及第二錨22a、22b彼此 附接。更應瞭解’連接繩股59可延伸穿過第一及第二 錨體28a、28b中數目與所欲一樣多的開孔。 替換地,該連接繩股可附接於第一及第二致動繩 知38a及38b之間,使得連接構件63可使連接繩股 59附接至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一或兩 者。因此,錯組件20可包含使第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b附接在一起的至少一連接構件63,從而使 第一及第二錨22a、22b與對應錨體28a、28b附接在 一起。 也參考第19A圖’連接構件63可定義滑動構件 47與使兩錨22a、22b附接及固定在一起的鎖定構件 料。滑動構件47允許第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b 中之至少一者對另一個相對滑動以及產生張力於致動 繩股38a及38b,以及向錨22a、22b中之另一偏壓錯 58 201210564 22a、22b中之至少一或兩者至各自的偏壓位置,從而 使解剖缺損接近。鎖定構件64係經組態成可被驅使以 防致動繩股38a及38b相對平移穿過連接構件,從而 使錨22a、22b中之至少一或兩者各自固定於偏壓位 置。 例如,連接構件63可定義結66,其係可構成如 以上在說明弟4 A圖至第4F圖時所述的以及可用第一 及第一致動绳股38a及38b定義。根據圖示實施例, 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b定義結66,然而應瞭 解,結66可由第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一 選定者以及附接至該選定致動繩股的連接繩股定義。 因此,連接構件63中至少一部份可與致動繩股38a 及38b中之至少一或兩者整合。 第及第致動繩股3 8a及3 8b中之---個可定義 支柱端68 ’以及第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之 另一個可定義自由端70。根據圖示實施例,第一致動 繩股38a定義支柱端68 ’以及第二致動繩股38b定義 自由端70。在施加張力至使第一及第二錨22a、22b 向彼此偏壓的致動繩股38a及38b之前,第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b可打個結66。一旦結66形成後, 以及在結66處於解鎖組態時,接近力af可施加至支 柱線(post strand)68,這造成支柱端68滑動穿過線圈 71A至D ’以及把各自的錨(例如,第一錨22a)拉向另 一個錯,例如第二錯22b。一旦間隙24c已接近,可 使自由端70的自由線70b(例如由第二致動繩股38b 59 201210564 定義的)有張力以便繞著支柱線68或第一致動繩股 38a鎖定線圈71A至D’從而驅使結66至鎖定組態以 及固定有張力的致動繩股38a及38b。 儘管連接構件63可定義組態成為結的鎖定構件 64,應瞭解,連接構件63可用替代方式構成以便按需 要定義鎖定構件64。例如’請參考第19b圖,連接構 件63可組態成為定義鎖定構件64的焊件130。例如, 致動繩股38a及38b可焊在一起,例如加熱在一起或 經由黏著劑相互膠黏’以便定義焊件130用以固定第 一及第二致動繩股38a及38b例如會使銷體28a、28b 分離的相對運動。因此,第一及第二致動竭股38a及 38b中之至少一或兩者可各自接受使錨體28a、28b中 之至少一或兩者向銷體28a、28b中之另一個偏壓至偏 壓位置以便使間隙24c接近的接近力AF。然後,第一 及第二致動繩股38a及38b可彼此焊接以便定義使第 一及第二錨體28a、28b固定彼等之偏壓位置的焊件 130。 請參考第19C圖,連接構件63可組態成為扭結 (twist tie)132,其係定義使第一錨22a附接至第二錯 22b的鎖定構件64。扭結132從而連接構件63可由例 如第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b定義。因此,致動 繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩者可由柔軟可變形的 材料製成,使得第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b在連 接點125可扭在一起以便定義扭結132。因此,在操 作期間’第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一 201210564 或兩者可各自接受使錨體28a、28b中之至少—或 向錨體28a、28b中之另一個偏壓至偏壓位置以便使間 隙24c接近的接近力AF。然後’第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b可扭在一起以便定義使第一及第二錨體 28a、28b固定於彼等之偏壓位置的扭結132。替換地 或附加地’在第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b扭成扭 結132時’接近力AF可施加至第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b中之一或兩者以便使間隙24c接近或進一 步接近。 請參考第19D圖至第19H圖,錨組件20可包含 至少一連接構件63,例如各自在一對連接點125a、 125b使第一致動繩股38a連結至第二致動繩股38b的 一對連接構件63a、63b。例如,連接構件63a、63b 中之每一可組態成為各自由第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b定義的絞結134a、134b。在一實施例中,第一 及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個可編織或以其他 方式絞接穿過致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個。根據 圖示實施例,第二致動繩股38a可編織或以其他方式 絞接穿過第一致動繩股28a以便定義第一絞結134a ’ 以及第一致動繩股38a可編織或以其他方式絞接穿過 第二致動繩股38b以便定義第二絞結134b。可隔開第 一及第二絞結134a、134b,藉此將第一絞結134a配 置成比第二絞結134b還要靠近第一錨22a,以及第二 絞結134b配置成比第一絞結134a還要靠近第二錨 22b。 61 201210564 特別是,第二致動繩股38b可進入第一致動繩股 38a以及在第一致動繩股38a内可沿著第一致動繩股 38a沿著離開對應第二4苗體28b的方向延伸以便在離 開第一致動繩股38a之前定義第一絞結134a。因此, 第一致動繩股38a可沿著第二致動繩股38b的部份長 度圍繞第二致動繩股38b。第二致動繩股38b定義離 開第一致動繩股38a的終端部份135b以及可定義第一 致動繩股38a的致動部份I3la。第二致動繩股38b可 由第一致動繩股38a中有第二致動繩股38b進入的反 面離開第一致動繩股38a。例如,在進入第一致動繩 股38a之前,相對於解剖結構24,第二致動繩股38b 可配置於第一致動繩股38a的内側,以及在離開第一 致動繩股38a之後,相對於解剖結構24,可配置於第 一致動繩股38a的外侧。 第一致動繩股38a可進入第二致動繩股38b,以 及在第二致動繩股38b内沿著離開第一錨體28a的方 向沿著第二致動繩股38b延伸以便在離開第二致動繩 股38b之前定義第二絞結134b。因此,第二致動繩股 38b可沿著第一致動繩股38a的部份長度圍繞第一致 動繩股38a。第一致動繩股38a定義離開第二致動繩 股38b的終端部份135a,以及可定義第一致動繩股38a 的致動部份131a。第一致動繩股38a可由第二致動繩 股38b中有第一致動繩股38a進入的同一面離開第二 致動繩股38b。例如,在進入第二致動繩股38b之前 及離開之後,相對於解剖結構24,第一致動繩股38a 62 201210564 可配置於第二致動繩股38b的外側。 在操作期間,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b各 自可接受造成錨體28a、28b各自由第一組態運動至擴 展組態的致動力F。如圖示,各自在第一及第二終端 部份135a、135b可直接施加致動力F至第一及第二致 動繩股38a及38b,或各自在絞結134b、134a的上游 位置可施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a、38b。接下 來,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的第一及第二終 端部份135a、135b中之每一可各自接受使錨體28a、 28b中之至少一或兩者向錨體28a、28b中之另一個偏 壓至偏壓位置以便使間隙24c接近的接近力AF。例 如’如果致動力F施加至終端部份135a、135b的話, 接近力AF可為致動力F的延續。應瞭解,一旦第一 及第二致動繩股38a及38b有張力,第一致動繩股38a 施加壓縮力CF1至在第一絞結134a的第二致動繩股 38b ’以及第二致動繩股38b施加壓縮力CF2至在第 二絞結134b的第一致動繩股38a。第一壓縮力CF1 足以防止第二致動繩股38b沿著朝向第二錨體28b的 方向由第一絞結134a後退,以及第二壓縮力CF2足 以防止第一致動繩股38a沿著朝向第一錨體28a的方 向由第二絞結134b後退。 因此,第一及第二絞結134a、134b各自定義允許 第一及第二致動織股38a及38b中之一個與第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個相對滑動以便使間 隙24c接近的滑動構件47,以及,進一步定義鎖定構 63 201210564 件64用以固定第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b例如會 使第一及第一銷體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 儘管一些連接構件63被描述成與致動繩股38a 及38b中之至少一或兩者整合使得致動繩股38a及 38b彼此直接附接’應瞭解,替換地或附加地,錯組 件20可包含組態成為輔助連接構件77的連接構件 63 ’其係附接至第一及第二致動繩股38&及中之 一或兩者以便使第一及第二錨22、22b彼此附接。替 換地或附加地’辅助連接構件77可使第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b中之至少一者附接至連接繩股,它也 可定義輔助連接構件77,或例如在致動繩股38a及38b 定義孔眼以及連接繩股延伸穿過孔眼時,可使連接繩 股中有數個部份附接至本身以便使第一致動繩股38a 附接至第二致動繩股38b。辅助連接構件77可由金 屬、塑膠、縫合線、或任何適當替代材料製成,如以 下說明所述。 例如’請參考第20A圖’輔助連接構件77可組 態成為線136 ’其係縫合穿過第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b以便使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互附 接’例如在用上述方式已使間隙24c接近後。線136 可在錨22a、22b之間的位置處縫合穿過第一及第二致 動繩股38a及38b,它可用任何想要方式構成,例如 如第7A圖至第7C圖所示。 替換地或附加地’如第20B圖所示,輔助連接構 件77可組態成為有橫桿14〇與由橫桿14〇伸出之一對 64 201210564 隔開腳部142的U形釘(staple)138。腳部142中之至 少—或兩者可延伸穿過第一及第二致動繩股38a及 以便在用上述方式已使間隙24c接近後使致動繩 股3、8a及38b附接至u形釘138從而相互附接。替換 ,或附加地’如第20C圖所示,腳部142可向橫桿14〇 彎曲以便定義各自的開孔144,以及開孔140中之至 少一或兩者可各自接受第一及第二致動繩股38a及 38b中之一或兩者以便使致動繩股及3肋附接至 U形釘138從而相互附接。例如,腳部142可向橫桿 140變形以便在各個腳部142、橫桿140之間各自夾住 致動繩股38a、38b中之—或兩者。U形釘138在銷 22a、22b之間的位置處可附接至第一及第二 38a 及 38b 〇 請參考第21A圖至第21B ffi,辅助連接構件77 =由任何適§金屬、塑膠、或任何替代生物相容材料 製成’以及可組態成為可撓曲或剛性的塊體146,盆 係經組態成㈣22a、22b<_位置處可附接至第 致動繩股38a及38b中之任_或兩者。例如,第一及 第二致動繩股恤&地中之每一可縫合穿過塊體 146二及:著塊體146打結以便定義可由解鎖組態驅 至鎖疋組態的結148。第—及第二致動繩股他及3此 在結148處於解鎖組態時對於賴146可滑動,以及 在、、’.148處於鎖定組態時固定對於塊體㈣的滑動。 塊體146 需要定義任何形狀,例如實質柱形,以 及按需要可撓曲或實質剛性。 65 201210564 在操作期間’致動繩股38a及38b可沿著離開解 剖結構24的方向縫合穿過塊體146以及燒著塊體146 打結使得結148各自處於解鎖組態。塊體146可經定 向成它的長軸149方向貫質平行於解剖結構24。在致 動繩股38a及38b有張力時,塊體146可沿著朝向解 剖結構24的前頭150方向沿著第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b平移’這造成致動繩股38a及38b沿著以 箭頭152表示的反方向對塊體146平移。當塊體146 沿著致動繩股38a及38b向間隙24c平移時,塊體146 施加致動力F至致動繩股38a及38b,從而造成銷 22a、22b由第一組態運動至擴展組態。 當在錨22a、22b已運動至其擴展組態後塊體146 進一步向間隙24c平移時,塊體146施加接近力AF 至致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩者而把錨 22a、22b中之至少一或兩者向内拉向對方,從而使間 隙24c接近。在這點上,應瞭解,接近力AF可為致 動力F的延續。替換地,致動力F可在塊體146的上 游位置施加至致動繩股38a及38b,或在使致動繩股 38a及38b附接至塊體146之前。然後,結148可收 緊以使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b固定至塊體 146,因而也相互附接以防止第一及第二錨22a、22b 分離。一旦間隙24c已接近,可將塊體146從而結148 配置成是沿著解剖結構24的外表面。替換地,塊體 146的尺寸可製作成一旦間隙24c已接近後可配置部 份塊體146從而結148於接受錨體28a、28b的開孔 66 201210564 23。因此,結148可配置於解剖結構24後面,或可埋 入解剖結構24。 塊體146以此方式可定義滑動構件47,其係允許 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個與第一及第 二致動繩股38a及3 8b中之另一個相對滑動以便使間 隙24c接近,以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b例如會使第一及第二 錨體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 替換地’請參考第21C圖,第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b中之至少一或兩者可編織成塊體146,例如 沿著實質沿著長軸149的反方向。塊體146可組態成 為定義核心的縫合,藉此將致動繩股38a及38b編織 成核心,或成為編結體,例如管,藉此將致動繩股38a 及38b編織成選定的編結體。因此,致動力f及接近 力AF可施加至致動繩股38a及38b中由塊體146伸 出的終端部份135a、135b,這使致動繩股38a及38b 平移穿過塊體146。因此,塊體146可定義滑動構件 47。致動力F造成錨22a、22b中之每一由第一組態運 動至擴展組態,以及進一步造成錨22a、22b被拉在一 起以便使間隙24c接近。致動繩股38a及38b可以磨 擦方式接合塊體146以便防止致動繩股38a及38b沿 著各自朝向錨體28a、28b的方向後退離開塊體146 而允許錨22a、22b分離。因此,塊體146可定義鎖定 構件64。替換地或附加地,致動繩股3如及38b各自 在第一及第二終端部份處可打成結。該等結的尺寸可 67 201210564 製作成足以防止第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b後退 離開塊體146。 應瞭解,將連接構件63組態成允許致動繩股38a 及38b或直接或間接地附接至致動繩股38a、38b中之 一或兩者的連接繩股在其中平移,可以說是定義滑動 構件。此外,經組態成隨後可防止致動繩股38a及38b 或是直接或間接地附接至致動繩股38a、38b中之一或 兩者的連接繩股在其中平移的連接構件63,可以說是 定義鎖定構件64。 請參考第22A圖至第22C圖,輔助連接構件77 可組態成為夾具(clip)154,其係經組態成可附接至第 一及第二致動繩股38a及38b以便在用上述方式間隙 24c已接近後使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互 附接。夾具154可在錨22a、22b之間的位置處附接至 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b。例如,夹具154可 包含可相互附接的一對本體部份156a、156b。根據一 實施例,本體部份156a、156b中之至少一或兩者可包 含腳部158,彼等各自鎖入另一本體部份的開孔以便 把本體部份156a、156b繫在一起。 當本體部份156a、156b相互附接時,夾具154 定義可接受致動繩股38a及38b的孔道160。本體部 伤156a、156b處於第一組態時可相互附接,以及隨後 向對方收緊至第二組態藉此減少孔道的大小。因此, 夾具154可從解鎖組態(第22B圖),在此孔道的 大小使得致動繩股38a及38b可在孔道160内自由移 68 201210564 動’移到鎖定組態(第22C圖),在此孔道160的大小 使得夾具154可固定致動繩股38a及38b以及防止致 動繩股38a、38b彼此及夾具154相對移動。 在夾具154位於第一及第二錨22a、22b之間以及 夾具154處於解鎖組態時,致動繩股38a及38b可實 質沿著長轴149反方向饋入穿過孔道160。致動力F 可施加至致動繩股38a及38b,從而造成錨22a、22b 由第一組態運動至擴展組態。一旦錨22a、22b已致 動,施加接近力AF至致動繩股38a及38b中之至少 一或兩者而把錨22a、22b中之至少一或兩者向内拉向 對方’從而使間隙24c接近。在這點上,應暸解,接 近力AF可為致動力F的延續。替換地,在夾具154 的上游位置或在使致動繩股38a及38b附接至夾具 154之前,致動力f可直接施加至致動繩股38a及 38b。一旦間隙24c已接近,可驅使夾具154至鎖定組 態’從而通過夾具154來固定第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b的平移’因而也使致動繩股38a及38b彼此固 定,以便防止第一及第二錨22a、22b分離。 夾具154以此方式可定義滑動構件47,其係允許 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個與第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個相對滑動以便使間 隙24c接近,以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b例如會使第一及第二 錨體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 請參考第22D圖至第22F圖,夾具154可包含一 69 201210564 體式殼體156’而且可被組態成在第一及第二致動繩 股38a及38b上可卷曲以便在用上述方式間隙24c已 接近後使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b附接至夾具 154 ’因而也相互附接。例如,第一及第二致動繩股 3 8a及3 8b可貫質沿著長軸149反方向插入或穿過孔 道160。替換地或另外,夾具154可定義延伸穿過殼 體156及進入孔道160的開孔161,以及經組態成沿 著角度有偏移的方向(例如,實質垂直於長軸149)可接 受致動繩股38a及38b。 在夾具154處於解鎖組態時,夾具154可接受致 動繩股38a及38b使得致動繩股38a及38b在孔道160 中可滑動(第2E圖)。致動力f可施加至致動繩股38a 及38b ’從而造成錨22a、22b由第一組態運動至擴展 組態。一旦已致動錨22a、22b,接近力AF施加至致 動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩者而把錨22a、22b 中之至少一或兩者向内拉向對方,從而使間隙24c接 近。在這點上,應瞭解,接近力AF可為致動力F的 延續。替換地’在夾具154的上游位置或在使致動繩 股38a及38b附接至夾具154之前,致動力F可施加 至致動繩股38a及38b。一旦間隙24c已接近,可驅 使夾具154至鎖定組態,如第2F圖所示,藉此夾具 154會在第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b上卷曲,從 而防止第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b平移穿過夹具 154’使致動繩股3以及38]3相互固定,以及防止第一 及第二錨22a、22b分離。 201210564 請參考第23A圖至第23D圖,輔助連接構件77 可組態成為包裹第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b的收The connecting member 63 is defined and integrated with the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b in accordance with some embodiments. The connecting member 63 defines at least one of the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64 at the joint 125. According to some embodiments described below, the connecting member 63 can be configured as an auxiliary connecting member 77 (for example, refer to FIG. 20A) attached between the first and second actuating strands 38 & and 38b, and It is configured to accept two or more wires, such as either or both of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b and additional wires that can be coupled to other anchors or other anatomical structures. Therefore, it can be said that the connecting member G can directly or indirectly attach the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b together. In certain embodiments, for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a connecting strand 59, for example, the connecting member can singly attach the connecting strand 59 to itself to enable the first and second ends The movable strands 38a and 38b are attached to each other (for example, also referring to Figs. 32a to 32C). For example, the connecting strand 59 can extend through the first opening 40 of the first anchor body 28a in a direction away from the second anchor body 2 rib 57 201210564, and fold back through the first direction toward the second anchor body 28b. A second opening 40 of an anchor body 28a and a first opening 40' passing through the second anchor body 28b and a second opening 40 folded back through the second anchor body 28b. The connecting strand 59 can define a first portion 120 extending between the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b in this manner, extending from the second opening 40 of the first anchor body 28a and away from the anatomy 24 The second portion 121a extends from the second opening 40 of the second anchor body 28b and away from the third portion 121b of the anatomy 24. It will be appreciated that the anchor assembly 20 can include any suitable connector for attaching the second portion 121a to the third portion 12 as described herein to attach the first and second anchors 22a, 22b to one another. It will be further appreciated that the connecting strands 59 can extend through the number of openings in the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b as many as desired. Alternatively, the connecting strand can be attached between the first and second actuating cords 38a and 38b such that the connecting member 63 can attach the connecting strand 59 to the first and second actuating strands 38a and One or both of 38b. Thus, the wrong assembly 20 can include at least one connecting member 63 that attaches the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b together such that the first and second anchors 22a, 22b and the corresponding anchor bodies 28a, 28b are attached Connected together. Referring also to Fig. 19A', the connecting member 63 can define a sliding member 47 and a locking member for attaching and fixing the two anchors 22a, 22b together. The sliding member 47 allows at least one of the first and second actuation strands 38 & and 38b to slide relative to one another and to create tension to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, and to the other of the anchors 22a, 22b. At least one or both of the faults 58 201210564 22a, 22b are brought to respective biasing positions to approximate the anatomical defect. The locking member 64 is configured to be actuatable to prevent relative actuation of the actuation strands 38a and 38b through the attachment member such that at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b are each secured in a biased position. For example, the connecting member 63 can define a knot 66 that can be constructed as described above in the description of Figures 4A through 4F and can be defined by the first and first actuating strands 38a and 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b define a knot 66, however it will be appreciated that the knot 66 can be selected by one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b and attached to The selected strand of the selected actuating strand is defined. Thus, at least a portion of the connecting member 63 can be integrated with at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b. The other of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b can define a strut end 68' and the other of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b can define a free end 70. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first actuating strand 38a defines a strut end 68' and the second actuating strand 38b defines a free end 70. The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can engage a knot 66 prior to applying tension to the actuation strands 38a and 38b that bias the first and second anchors 22a, 22b toward each other. Once the knot 66 is formed, and when the knot 66 is in the unlocked configuration, the proximity force af can be applied to the post strand 68, which causes the strut end 68 to slide through the coils 71A-D' and the respective anchors (eg, The first anchor 22a) is pulled to the other wrong, for example the second error 22b. Once the gap 24c is approached, the free line 70b of the free end 70 (e.g., as defined by the second actuating strand 38b 59 201210564) can be tensioned to lock the coil 71A about the strut line 68 or the first actuating strand 38a to D' thus drives the knot 66 to the locking configuration and the tensioned actuation strands 38a and 38b. While the connecting member 63 can define a locking member 64 that is configured as a knot, it should be understood that the connecting member 63 can be constructed in an alternative manner to define the locking member 64 as desired. For example, please refer to Fig. 19b, the connecting member 63 can be configured as a weldment 130 defining the locking member 64. For example, the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be welded together, such as heated together or glued to one another via an adhesive to define the weldment 130 for securing the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, for example, a pin. The relative motion of the bodies 28a, 28b separated. Accordingly, at least one or both of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b can each receive at least one or both of the anchor bodies 28a, 28b biased toward the other of the pin bodies 28a, 28b to The proximity position AF is biased so that the gap 24c approaches. The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can then be welded to each other to define a weldment 130 that biases the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b to their biased positions. Referring to Figure 19C, the connecting member 63 can be configured as a twist tie 132 that defines a locking member 64 that attaches the first anchor 22a to the second error 22b. The kink 132 such that the connecting member 63 can be defined by, for example, the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. Thus, at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be made of a soft, deformable material such that the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be twisted together at the attachment point 125 to define the kink 132. . Thus, during operation, at least one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, or both, may each receive at least one of the anchor bodies 28a, 28b or the other of the anchor bodies 28a, 28b. The proximity force AF is biased to the biased position to bring the gap 24c close. The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can then be twisted together to define a kink 132 that secures the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b to their biased positions. Alternatively or additionally, 'the proximity force AF can be applied to one or both of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b when the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are twisted into a kink 132 The gap 24c is brought close to or further close. Referring to Figures 19D through 19H, the anchor assembly 20 can include at least one attachment member 63, such as one that each couples the first actuation strand 38a to the second actuation strand 38b at a pair of attachment points 125a, 125b. Pairs of connecting members 63a, 63b. For example, each of the connecting members 63a, 63b can be configured as a twist 134a, 134b, each defined by the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. In one embodiment, one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be woven or otherwise spliced through the other of the actuation strands 38a and 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the second actuation strand 38a can be woven or otherwise spliced through the first actuation strand 28a to define the first hinge 134a' and the first actuation strand 38a can be woven or Other ways are spliced through the second actuation strand 38b to define the second hinge 134b. The first and second strands 134a, 134b may be spaced apart, whereby the first hinge 134a is disposed closer to the first anchor 22a than the second hinge 134b, and the second hinge 134b is configured to be smaller than the first strand The knot 134a is also closer to the second anchor 22b. 61 201210564 In particular, the second actuating strand 38b can enter the first actuating strand 38a and can be along the first actuating strand 38a along the first actuating strand 38a along the corresponding second slender body 38a. The direction of 28b extends to define a first hinge 134a prior to exiting the first actuation strand 38a. Thus, the first actuating strand 38a can surround the second actuating strand 38b along a portion of the length of the second actuating strand 38b. The second actuating strand 38b defines a terminal portion 135b that exits the first actuating strand 38a and an actuating portion I3la that defines the first actuating strand 38a. The second actuating strand 38b can exit the first actuating strand 38a from the opposite side of the first actuating strand 38a having the second actuating strand 38b. For example, prior to entering the first actuation strand 38a, the second actuation strand 38b can be disposed on the inside of the first actuation strand 38a relative to the anatomical structure 24, and after exiting the first actuation strand 38a With respect to the anatomical structure 24, it may be disposed outside the first actuation strand 38a. The first actuating strand 38a can enter the second actuating strand 38b and extend within the second actuating strand 38b along the second actuating strand 38b in a direction away from the first anchor 28a to exit The second hinge 134b is defined before the second actuation strand 38b. Thus, the second actuation strand 38b can surround the first actuation strand 38a along a portion of the length of the first actuation strand 38a. The first actuating strand 38a defines a terminal portion 135a that exits the second actuating strand 38b, and an actuating portion 131a that defines the first actuating strand 38a. The first actuating strand 38a can exit the second actuating strand 38b from the same side of the second actuating strand 38b that has the first actuating strand 38a. For example, prior to entering and exiting the second actuation strand 38b, the first actuation strand 38a 62 201210564 can be disposed outside of the second actuation strand 38b relative to the anatomy 24. During operation, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are each self-contained to cause the anchor bodies 28a, 28b to each move from the first configuration to the actuation force F of the extended configuration. As illustrated, each of the first and second terminal portions 135a, 135b can directly apply an actuation force F to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, or each can be applied upstream of the hinges 134b, 134a. To the first and second actuation strands 38a, 38b. Next, each of the first and second terminal portions 135a, 135b of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can each receive at least one or both of the anchor bodies 28a, 28b toward the anchor body The other of 28a, 28b is biased to the biasing position to bring the gap 24c close to the force AF. For example, if the actuation force F is applied to the terminal portions 135a, 135b, the proximity force AF may be a continuation of the actuation force F. It will be appreciated that once the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are under tension, the first actuation strand 38a applies a compressive force CF1 to the second actuation strand 38b' at the first hinge 134a and the second The moving strand 38b applies a compressive force CF2 to the first actuating strand 38a at the second strand 134b. The first compressive force CF1 is sufficient to prevent the second actuating strand 38b from retreating from the first strand 134a in a direction toward the second anchor body 28b, and the second compressive force CF2 is sufficient to prevent the first actuating strand 38a from following The direction of the first anchor body 28a is retracted by the second hinge 134b. Accordingly, the first and second hinges 134a, 134b are each defined to allow one of the first and second actuation woven strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b so that The sliding member 47 that approximates the gap 24c, and further defines the locking mechanism 63 201210564 64 for securing the first and second actuation strands 38 & and 38b, for example, to separate the first and first pin bodies 28a, 28b Relative movement. Although some of the connecting members 63 are described as being integrated with at least one or both of the actuating strands 38a and 38b such that the actuating strands 38a and 38b are directly attached to each other 'should be understood, alternatively or additionally, the faulty assembly 20 may A connecting member 63' configured to be an auxiliary connecting member 77 is attached to one or both of the first and second actuating strands 38 & and to attach the first and second anchors 22, 22b to each other . Alternatively or additionally, the auxiliary connecting member 77 may attach at least one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to the connecting strand, which may also define the auxiliary connecting member 77, or for example, in actuation When the strands 38a and 38b define the eyelet and the connecting strand extends through the eyelet, a plurality of portions of the connecting strand can be attached to itself to attach the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b . The auxiliary attachment member 77 can be made of metal, plastic, suture, or any suitable alternative material, as described below. For example, 'Please refer to FIG. 20A', the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a line 136' that is stitched through the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b to cause the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b Attached to each other 'e.g., after the gap 24c has been brought close to it in the manner described above. The wire 136 can be stitched through the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b at a location between the anchors 22a, 22b, which can be constructed in any desired manner, such as shown in Figures 7A through 7C. Alternatively or additionally, as shown in Fig. 20B, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a staple having a crossbar 14 〇 and a pair of legs 64 142 extending from the crossbar 14 2012 20 201210564 (staple ) 138. At least - or both of the feet 142 may extend through the first and second actuation strands 38a and to attach the actuation strands 3, 8a and 38b to the u after the gap 24c has been accessed in the manner described above The nails 138 are thus attached to each other. Alternatively, or additionally, as shown in FIG. 20C, the feet 142 can be bent toward the crossbar 14 to define respective apertures 144, and at least one or both of the apertures 140 can each accept the first and second One or both of the strands 38a and 38b are actuated to attach the actuating strands and the three ribs to the staples 138 for attachment to one another. For example, the foot 142 can be deformed toward the crossbar 140 to clamp each of the actuation strands 38a, 38b, or both, between the respective foot 142, crossbar 140. The staple 138 can be attached to the first and second portions 38a and 38b at a position between the pins 22a, 22b. Referring to Figures 21A through 21B ffi, the auxiliary connecting member 77 = by any suitable metal, plastic, Or any alternative biocompatible material made 'and configurable to be a flexible or rigid block 146, the basin being configured to be attached to the first actuating strands 38a and 38b at (4) 22a, 22b < In the _ or both. For example, each of the first and second actuation tethers & ground can be stitched through the block 146 and the block 146 is knotted to define a knot 148 that can be driven to the lock configuration by the unlock configuration. . The first and second actuating strands and the third are slidable for the 146 when the knot 148 is in the unlocked configuration, and fixed for the block (four) when the , . The block 146 needs to define any shape, such as a substantially cylindrical shape, and can be flexed or substantially rigid as desired. 65 201210564 During operation, the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be stitched through the block 146 and the burnt block 146 in a direction away from the anatomical structure 24 such that the knots 148 are each in an unlocked configuration. The block 146 can be oriented parallel to the anatomy 24 in the direction of its major axis 149. When the actuation strands 38a and 38b are under tension, the block 146 can translate along the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b in a direction toward the front head 150 of the anatomy 24, which causes the actuation strands 38a and 38b translates the block 146 in the opposite direction indicated by arrow 152. As the block 146 translates along the actuation strands 38a and 38b toward the gap 24c, the block 146 applies an actuation force F to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, causing the pins 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the extended set. state. When the block 146 is further translated toward the gap 24c after the anchors 22a, 22b have moved to their expanded configuration, the block 146 applies the proximity force AF to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to anchor the anchor 22a At least one or both of 22b are pulled inward toward each other to bring the gap 24c close. At this point, it should be understood that the proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. Alternatively, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b at the upstream position of the block 146 or prior to attachment of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to the block 146. The knot 148 can then be tightened to secure the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to the block 146 and thus also to each other to prevent separation of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b. Once the gap 24c is approached, the block 146, and thus the knot 148, can be configured to be along the outer surface of the anatomy 24. Alternatively, the block 146 can be sized to position the block 146 once the gap 24c has been accessed so that the knot 148 is open to the opening of the anchor body 28a, 28b 66 201210564 23. Thus, the knot 148 can be disposed behind the anatomy 24 or can be embedded in the anatomy 24. The block 146 can define a sliding member 47 in this manner that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b To allow the gap 24c to approach, and the locking member 64 can be further defined to secure the relative movement of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, for example, to separate the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. Alternatively, please refer to Fig. 21C, at least one or both of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be woven into a block 146, for example along a substantially opposite direction along the major axis 149. The block 146 can be configured as a stitch defining a core whereby the actuating strands 38a and 38b are woven into a core or as a braid, such as a tube, whereby the actuating strands 38a and 38b are woven into a selected braid. . Thus, the actuation force f and the proximity force AF can be applied to the terminal portions 135a, 135b of the actuation strands 38a and 38b that are extended by the block 146, which translates the actuation strands 38a and 38b through the block 146. Therefore, the block 146 can define the sliding member 47. The actuation force F causes each of the anchors 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration, and further causes the anchors 22a, 22b to be pulled together to bring the gap 24c into proximity. The actuating strands 38a and 38b can frictionally engage the block 146 to prevent the actuating strands 38a and 38b from receding away from the block 146 in the direction of each of the anchors 28a, 28b, thereby allowing the anchors 22a, 22b to separate. Thus, block 146 can define locking member 64. Alternatively or additionally, the actuating strands 3, such as and 38b, may each be knotted at the first and second terminal portions. The dimensions of the knots may be made to prevent the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b from retreating away from the block 146. It will be appreciated that the connecting member 63 is configured to allow the actuation strands 38a and 38b or the connecting strands that are directly or indirectly attached to one or both of the actuation strands 38a, 38b to translate therein, which is arguably Define the sliding member. Moreover, the connecting member 63 configured to subsequently prevent the actuation strands 38a and 38b from being translated directly or indirectly to the one or both of the actuation strands 38a, 38b, It can be said that the locking member 64 is defined. Referring to Figures 22A-22C, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a clip 154 that is configured to be attachable to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b for use in the above After the mode gap 24c has approached, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are attached to each other. A clamp 154 can be attached to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b at a location between the anchors 22a, 22b. For example, the clamp 154 can include a pair of body portions 156a, 156b that can be attached to each other. According to one embodiment, at least one or both of the body portions 156a, 156b can include legs 158 that each lock into an opening in the other body portion to tie the body portions 156a, 156b together. When the body portions 156a, 156b are attached to each other, the clamp 154 defines an aperture 160 that can actuate the strands 38a and 38b. The body injuries 156a, 156b can be attached to each other when in the first configuration, and then tightened to the second configuration to the other to thereby reduce the size of the tunnel. Thus, the clamp 154 can be configured from an unlocked configuration (Fig. 22B) where the size of the apertures allows the actuation strands 38a and 38b to move freely within the aperture 160. 201210564 Move to the locked configuration (Fig. 22C), The size of the tunnel 160 is such that the clamp 154 can secure the actuation strands 38a and 38b and prevent the actuation strands 38a, 38b from moving relative to one another and the clamp 154. When the clamp 154 is positioned between the first and second anchors 22a, 22b and the clamp 154 is in the unlocked configuration, the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be fed through the aperture 160 substantially in the opposite direction along the major axis 149. The actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, causing the anchors 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Once the anchors 22a, 22b have been actuated, applying a proximity force AF to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to pull at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b inwardly toward the other' 24c is close. At this point, it should be understood that the proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. Alternatively, the actuation force f can be applied directly to the actuation strands 38a and 38b either upstream of the clamp 154 or prior to attachment of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to the clamp 154. Once the gap 24c is approached, the clamp 154 can be driven to the locking configuration 'to fix the translation of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b by the clamp 154' thus also securing the actuation strands 38a and 38b to each other so that The first and second anchors 22a, 22b are prevented from separating. The clamp 154 can define a sliding member 47 in this manner that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to The gap 24c is proximate, and the locking member 64 can be further defined to secure the relative movement of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, for example, to separate the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. Referring to Figures 22D through 22F, the clamp 154 can include a 69 201210564 body housing 156' and can be configured to be crimped over the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b for use in the manner described above. After the 24c has approached, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are attached to the clamp 154' and thus also attached to each other. For example, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be inserted through or through the aperture 160 in the opposite direction of the major axis 149. Alternatively or additionally, the clamp 154 can define an opening 161 that extends through the housing 156 and into the bore 160, and is configured to be angularly offset (eg, substantially perpendicular to the long axis 149). Moving strands 38a and 38b. When the clamp 154 is in the unlocked configuration, the clamp 154 can accept the actuation strands 38a and 38b such that the actuation strands 38a and 38b are slidable in the tunnel 160 (Fig. 2E). The actuation force f can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b' causing the anchors 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Once the anchors 22a, 22b have been actuated, the proximity force AF is applied to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to pull at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b inwardly toward each other, thereby creating a gap 24c is close. At this point, it should be understood that the proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. Alternatively, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b either upstream of the clamp 154 or prior to attachment of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to the clamp 154. Once the gap 24c is approached, the clamp 154 can be driven to the locked configuration, as shown in Figure 2F, whereby the clamp 154 will curl over the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, thereby preventing the first and second The actuation strands 38& and 38b translate through the clamp 154' to secure the actuation strands 3 and 38]3 to one another and to prevent separation of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b. 201210564 Please refer to Figures 23A through 23D, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured to wrap the first and second actuating strands 38 & and 38b

縮包覆材料(shrink wrap material) 162。例如,如第 23 A 圖至第23B圖所示’收縮包覆材料162可定義在收縮 包覆材料162處於解鎖組態時接受第一及第二致動繩 股38a及38b的孔道164,使得第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b在孔道164内可滑動。應瞭解,收縮包覆 材料162可為實質管狀以便定義接受第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b的孔道164 ’或替換地可包裹第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b以便定義孔道164。 致動力F可施加至致動繩股38a及38b,以便驅 使錨22a、22b由第一組態運動至擴展組態。一旦錯 22a、22b已致動’接近力AF施加至致動繩股38a及 38b中之至少一或兩者而把錨22a、22b中之至少一或 兩者向内拉向對方,從而使間隙24c接近。在這點上, 應瞭解,接近力AF可為致動力F的延續。一旦間隙 24c已接近,可致動收縮包覆材料162,例如加熱,這 造成收縮包覆材料162運動至鎖定組態及繞著第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b收緊,如第23C圖至第23D 圖所示,從而施加壓縮力至第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b,以及使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互 附接以便防止第一及第二錨22a、22b分離。 收縮包覆材料162以此方式可定義滑動構件47, 其係允許第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個相 對於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個滑動 71 201210564 穿過收縮包覆材料162以便使間隙24c接近。收縮包 覆材料162可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定第二= 第二致動繩股38a及38b通過它而會使第一及第_ * 體28a、28b分離來的平移。 培 請參考第24A圖至第24B圖,輔助連接構件77 可組態成為縫合扣片(suture cleat) 166,其係包含主體 168與由主體168的至少一倒刺no,例如一對倒刺 170’以及經組態成可錯定縫合扣片166於解剖結構 24中。根據一實施例,縫合扣片166可組態成為血管 夾(ligating clip) ’其係經組態成在例如解剖結構24為 骨骼時可附接至解剖位置。因此,如第24A圖所示, 致動繩股32a、32b經組態成可接受致動力F以便驅使 第一及第二錨22a、22b中之每一由第一位置至擴展位 置。接下來,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b可固定 於縫合扣片主體168 ’以及縫合扣片166可在鄰近間 隙24c及錨22a、22b之間的位置植入及埋入下面的解 剖位置22。例如,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b在 縫合扣片主體168中可卷曲或按需要以其他方式固定 於縫合扣片主體。 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b各自在錨體 28a、28b與縫合扣片166之間的長度可經製作成當縫 合扣片166植入解剖位置時,縫合扣片166產生張力 於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中,使得接近力AF 施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b,其係偏壓第 一及第二錨22a、22b使它向對方移動而使間隙24c 72 201210564 接近。倒刺170協助縫合扣片166保持在解剖结構24 中,以及防止缝合扣片166後退離開解剖結構24。 請參考第25A圖至第25B圖’輔助連接構件77 可組態成為套環(collar)172 ’其係經組態成可附接至 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b以便用上述方式使第 一及第一致動繩股38a及38b相互附接。套環172在 叙22a、22b之間的位置可附接至第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b。例如,套環172可定義經組態成可接受第 一及第一致動繩股38a及38b中之-'選定者的·-對孔 道174、176。孔道174、176可各自沿著經定向成實 質平行於套%· 172之長轴182的轴線延伸。此外,套 環 I72 定義至少一内棘齒(internal ratchet tooth) 178, 例如複數個棘齒178,以及第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b中之每一可各自定義與套環172之棘齒178互 補的棘齒180a、180b。 根據圖示實施例,棘齒178與棘齒i8〇a、180b 配對以便允許第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b各自沿 著離開第一及第二錨22a、22b的方向滑動穿過套環, 以及互鎖以便防止第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b各 自沿著朝向第—及第二錨22a、22b的方向在套環Π2 中滑動。因此’致動繩股38a及38b實質沿著套環176 之長抽182的反方向可饋入穿過各自的孔道174、 176例如在套環丨被定向成實質平行於下面的解剖 結構24時,以及套環172位在第一及第二錨22a、22b 之間。 73 201210564 致動力F可施加至致動繩股38a及38b,接著造 成錯22a、22b由第一組態運動至擴展組態。例如,在 致動繩股38a及38b插進套環之前,致動力F可施加 至致動繩股38a及38b。替換地,在致動繩股38a及 38b已插入套環後,致動力F可施加至致動繩股38a 及38b ’使得棘齒180a、180b滑過套環172的互補棘 齒178。一旦錨22a、22b已致動後,接近力AF施加 至致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩者,例如至各 自的終端部份135a、135b,這造成在第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b平移離開各自的錨22a、22b時,棘齒 180a、180b滑過套環172的互補棘齒178,從而把錨 22a、22b中之至少一或兩者向内拉向對方以及使間隙 24c接近。在這點上,應瞭解,接近力AF可為致動力 F的延續。套環172的棘齒178與第一及第二致動繩 股38a及38b的棘齒i8〇a、180b互鎖以便防止致動繩 股38a及38b沿著各自朝向錨體28a、28b的方向平移 而會使第一及第二錨22a、22b分離。 套環172以此方式可定義滑動構件47,其係允許 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個與第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個相對滑動以便使間 隙24c接近’以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定 致動繩股38a及38b例如會使第一及第二錨體28a、 28b分離的相對運動。 儘管連接器63在第18A圖至第25B圖中圖示成 是附接於各自與錨體28a、28b整合的第一及第二致動 201210564 繩股38a及38b之間,應瞭解,如上述,連接器a 可替換地附接第一及第二致動繩股38a及/夢此 致動繩股38a及通中之至少一或兩者由各自與^體 28a、28b分離及附接(例如,交又編織)的辅助繩股33 定義。此外,如以上在說明第1A圖至第1B圖時所述, 第-及第二致動繩股38a、38b中之每一可各自定義經 組態成可接受致動力F以及可進—步經組態成可接受 接近力AF的第-或致動部份13la、mb,以及各自 的第二或附接部份133a、133b。 致動繩股38a、38b中之每一的附接部份133a、 133b係經組態成可附接至致動繩股38&及中之另 -的附接部份133a、133b以便使各自的錫22a、22b 相互附接。例如,致動繩股38a及38b的附接部份 133a、133b可彼此整合。替換地,附接部份133&、13扑 的附接可經由可與致動繩股38a、38b中之任一或兩者 整合的任何適當連接器63,或與致動繩股 38a、38b 中之任一或兩者分離及直接或間接地附接。 更應瞭解’致動繩股38a及38b的致動部份 131a、131b可進一步相互附接以便使錨22a、22b相 互附接。因此,不論附接部份133a、133b是否附接, 可以說’致動部份131a、131b的附接使各自的第一及 第一錯相互附接。因此,不論附接部份133a、133b 是否附接’可以說,致動部份131a、131b的附接使各 自的第一及第二鎢22a、22b相互附接。同樣,不論致 動部份13la、13lt)是否附接,可以說,附接部份n3a、 75 201210564 133b的附接使各自的第一及第二銷22a、22b相互附 接。 因此應瞭解’除非另有說明’描述於本文附接致 動繩股38a及38b的連接構件63可應用於致動繩股 38a及38b的連接部份,即使已經附接致動繩股38a 及38b的其他部份,例如經由可包含連接繩股的另一 連接構件63或與其整合。例如連接構件63可使連接 繩股附接至致動繩股38a、38b中之任一或兩者。替換 地,連接構件63可使連接繩股附接至本身以便使第一 及第二致動繩股38a及38b,或鋪體28a、28b相互附 接。 請參考26A圖至第26B圖,以及大體如以上在說 明第1A圖至第1B圖時所述,錨組件20包含可編織 穿過鋪體28a、28b以便各自定義致動繩股38a及38b 的輔助繩股33。第一附接部份133a可與第二附接部 伤133b整合以便越過間隙24c附接致動繩股38a及 38b從而錨22、22b。致動繩股38a及38b進一步定義 各經組態成可接受致動力F的第一及第二致動部份 131a、131b以便驅使錨22a、22b由第一組態運動至 擴展組態’以及接近力AF以便使錨22a、22b向對方 偏壓,從而使間隙24c接近。此外,第一及第二致動 部份131a、133b經組態成可相互附接。 此時請特別參考第26A圖至第26B圖,辅助連接 構件77可組態成為棘輪殼體184,其係經組態成可附 接至第一及第二致動部份131a、131b,從而使第一及 76 201210564 第二致動繩股38a及38b相互附接,以及也使錨22a、 22b相五附接。棘輪殼體184在銷22a、22b之間的位 置可附接至苐一及苐一致動纖股38a及38b。例如, 棘輪殼體184可定義經組態成可接受第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b中之一選定者的一對孔道i86、188。 沿著與離開底下解剖結構24及離開對應錨22a、22b 實質相同的方向,第一及第二致動繩股38a&38b可 插入孔道186、188。棘輪殼體184可經定向成孔道 186、188各自沿著實質平行於棘輪殼體184之中軸線 187的轴線延伸。因此,棘輪殼體184可經定向成可 中袖線187實質垂直於下面的解剖結構24地延伸。 此外’棘輪殼體184定義至少一内棘齒190,例 如複數個棘齒190,以及第一及第二致動繩股38a及 38b中之每一可各自定義與棘輪殼體184之棘齒190 互補的棘齒192a、192b。根據圖示實施例,棘齒190 與棘齒192a、192b配對以便允許棘輪殼體184沿著第 一及第二致動繩股38a及38b在朝向底下解剖結構24 從而朝向間隙24c的方向滑動。棘齒190進一步與棘 齒192a、192b互鎖以便防止棘輪殼體184沿著第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b在離開底下解剖結構24的方 向滑動。因此,在操作期間,致動繩股38a及38b在 離開解剖結構24的方向可饋入穿過各自的孔道184、 186,使得棘齒192a、192b與棘輪殼體184之棘齒19〇 配對。 致動力F可施加至致動繩股38a及38b,從而在 77 201210564 棘齒192a、192b滑過互補棘輪殼體184之棘齒19〇 時造成錨22a、22b由第一組態運動至擴展組態。—旦 I苗22a、22b已致動’接近力AF施加至致動繩股38a 及38b中之至少一或兩者而在棘輪殼體184向解剖結 構24平移時造成棘齒192a、192b滑過互補棘輪殼體 184之棘齒190 ’從而施加接近力AF至第一及第二致 動繩股38a及38b ’從而產生張力於第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b ’包括致動部份131a至b以及附接部 份133a至b。換言之’相對於棘輪殼體184,第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b’特別是致動部份i3ia、131b 的終端部份135a、135b各自平移離開解剖結構24 , 及各自的錨22a、22b。 在這點上,應瞭解’接近力AF可為致動力f的 延續。替換地,在使致動繩股38a及38b附接至棘輪 殼體184之前,致動力F在棘輪殼體184的上游位置 可施加至致動繩股38a及38b,或至附接線133a至b, 或至致動繩股38a及38b。棘輪殼體184之棘齒190 與第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的棘齒192a、192b 互鎖以便防止棘輪殼體184沿著離開錨22a、22b的方 向(這將使第一及第二錨22a、22b分離)平移。 因此’棘輪殼體184可定義滑動構件47,其係允 許第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個與第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個相對滑動以便使 間隙24c接近,以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固 定致動繩股38a及38b例如對於彼此及殼體棘輪殼體 78 201210564 184會使第一及第二錨體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 請參考第27A圖至第27B圖’輔助連接構件77 可被組態成為束帶外管(zip tie housing)194,其係經級 態成可使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互附接。 該束帶軟管(zip tie hosing) 194在錫22a、22b之間的位 置可附接至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b,特別是 致動部份131a至b。例如,束帶軟管194可定義緩組 態成可接受第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一選 定者的一對孔道196、198。束帶軟管194可經定向成 孔道196、198各自沿著實質平行於束帶軟管194之中 轴線197的軸線延伸。因此,束帶軟管194可經定向 成中轴線197實質垂直於下面的解剖結構24地延伸。 此外,束帶軟管194定義至少一内齒(internal tooth)200,例如複數個齒200,以及第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b中之每一可定義齒202a、202b的各個 齒條,其.係與束帶軟管194之齒200互補。如上述, 齒200及202a至b可小於齒190及192a至b,以及 相對於上述的棘齒192a至b,齒202a至b的間隔可 更靠近。替換地,致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或 兩者可呈實質平滑以及用本文所述的方式與束帶外管 194的齒200配對。 根據圖示實施例,嵩200與互補齒202a至b配對 以便允許束帶軟管194沿著第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b在朝向底下解剖結構24從而向間隙24c的方向 滑動。齒200進一步與齒202a、202b互鎖以便防止束 79 201210564 帶軟管194沿著第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b在離 開底下解剖結構24及離開錨體28a、28b的方向滑動。 因此’在操作期間,致動繩股38a及38b在離開各自 之錨體28a、28b的方向可饋入穿過各自的孔道196、 198 ’使得齒202a、202b與束帶軟管194的棘齒200 配對。 在齒202a、202b滑過束帶軟管194的互補齒2〇〇 時,致動力F可施加至致動繩股38a及38b,特別是 致動部份131a至b,從而造成錨體28a、28b,由第一 組態運動至擴展組態。一旦錨22a、22b已致動,在束 帶外管194向解剖結構24平移時,接近力AF可施加 至致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩者而造成齒 202a、202b滑過束帶軟管194的互補齒200,從而產 生張力於致動繩股38a及38b中,包括致動部份i3ia 至b與附接部份133a至b。換言之,相對於束帶軟管 194’第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b平移離開解剖位 置’及各自的錨體28a、28b。 在這點上’應瞭解,接近力AF可為致動力F的 延續。替換地,在使致動部份131a至b附接至束帶軟 管194之前或之後’致動力f可直接施加至致動繩股 38a及38b,包括致動部份i3ia至b與附接部份133a 至b中之任一或兩者。束帶軟管194的齒200與第一 及第二致動繩股38a及38b的齒202a、202b互鎖以便 防止束帶軟管194沿著會使第一及第二錨22a、22b 分離的方向平移。 201210564 因此’束帶軟管194定義滑動構件47,其係允許 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個與第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b中之另一個相對滑動以便使間 隙24c接近’以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b對於彼此及對於束帶 外管194平移而會使第一及第二錨體28a、28b分離。 請參考第28A圖至第28C圖,第一及第二錨22a 至b可各自包含具有如在說明第6A圖至第6E圖時所 述之類型的第一及第二附接構件82a至b。因此,第 一及第二附接構件82a至b各自包含成圈繩股79,其 係各自定義孔眼84a、84b,接著各自定義開孔87a、 87b。輔助繩股33可定義致動繩股38a及38b,其係 各自延伸穿過各自的孔眼84a以及穿過各自的孔眼 84b以便使致動繩股38a及38b可操作地耦合至錨體 28a、28b的各個可擴展部份36。應瞭解,孔眼8仆 可進一步由解剖結構24伸出。 錨組件20包含連接構件63,其係可被組態成可 附接至第一及第二致動部份131a、131b,從而使第一 及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互附接,以及也使錨 22a、22b相互附接。越過間隙24c,可附加輔助繩股 33的附接部份133a至b,例如根據圖示實施例以整合 方式。 如上述,可定義滑動構件47與鎖定構件64中之 至少一的連接構件63例如在連接點I”使第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b附接在一起,如以上在說明第181 201210564 圖時所述。此外,根據圖示實施例,連接構件63可由 輔助繩股33從而由致動繩股38a及38b定義。因此, 根據一實施例,在致動繩股38a及38b有張力時,連 接構件63可使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致動繩股 38b,以便使間隙24c保持接近狀態。替換地或附加 地’應暸解,在使致動繩股38a及38b有張力之前, 因而在使間隙24c接近之前’連接構件63可使第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b相互附接。 根據圖示實施例’連接構件63由第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b定義及與其整合。因此,致動繩股38a 及38b係直接相互附接。連接構件63在連接點125 可定義滑動構件47及鎖定構件64。例如,連接構件 63可定義結66 ’結66可用以上在說明第4A圖至第 4F圖時所述的方式構成以及可由致動繩股3ga及38b 中之一或更多至全部定義’然而應暸解,該結替換地 可由致動繩股38a及38b與連接繩股中之至少一者定 義。替換地,例如在連接繩股附接至致動繩股38a及 38b時,結66可使連接繩股的數個部份相互附接以便 附接致動繩股38a及38b。根據圖示實施例,第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b定義結66。因此,連接構件 63中之至少一部份可與致動繩股38a及38b中之至少 一或兩者整合。 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個可定義 支柱端68 ’以及第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之 另一個可定義自由端70。根據圖示實施例,第一致動 82 201210564 繩股’例如第一致動部份13ia,係定義支柱端68,以 及第二致動繩股38b,例如第二致動部份131b,定義 自由端70。自由端的自由部份7〇b可由第二致動繩股 13%的終端部份13%定義。同樣,第一致動繩股38a 的終端部份135a由結66伸出成為支柱端68。 在施加張力至致動繩股38a及38b使第一及第二 I苗22a、22b向對方偏壓以及使間隙24c接近之前,第 一及第二致動繩股38a及38b可打成結66。一旦結66 形成,以及在結66處於解鎖組態時,致動力f可施 加至致動繩股38a及38b’特別是致動部份i31a至b, 以便驅使各自的可擴展部份36由第一組態運動至擴 展組態。接下來’接近力AF可施加至定義支柱線68 之第一致動繩股38a的終端部份n5a,從而造成支柱 端68滑動穿過結66以及把各自的銷,例如第一錯 22a,向另一錨’例如第二錨22b,拉。一旦間隙24c 已接近,可使自由端7〇(例如,由第二致動繩股38b 的終端部份135b的)的自由線70b有張力以便鎖定結 66以及防止第一致動繩股38a平移穿過結66,從而固 定有張力的致動繩股38a及38b。Shrink wrap material 162. For example, as shown in Figures 23A through 23B, the shrink wrap material 162 can define the channels 164 that receive the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b when the shrink wrap 162 is in the unlocked configuration, such that The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are slidable within the bore 164. It will be appreciated that the shrink wrap material 162 can be substantially tubular to define a channel 164' that accepts the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b or alternatively can wrap the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b for definition Hole 164. Actuator F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b to drive the anchors 22a, 22b from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Once the faults 22a, 22b have actuated, the proximity force AF is applied to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to pull at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b inwardly toward each other, thereby causing the gap 24c is close. At this point, it should be understood that the proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. Once the gap 24c is approached, the shrink wrap material 162 can be actuated, such as by heating, which causes the shrink wrap 162 to move to the locked configuration and tighten around the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, as in 23C to 23D, thereby applying a compressive force to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, and attaching the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to each other to prevent the first and the second The two anchors 22a, 22b are separated. The shrink wrap 162 can define a sliding member 47 in this manner that allows one of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b relative to the other of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b Slide 71 201210564 passes through the shrink wrap material 162 to bring the gap 24c into proximity. The shrink wrap material 162 can further define a locking member 64 for securing translation of the second = second actuating strands 38a and 38b through which the first and the first * 28 bodies 28a, 28b are separated. Referring to Figures 24A through 24B, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a suture cleat 166 that includes a body 168 and at least one barb no by the body 168, such as a pair of barbs 170 And configured to misalign the suture clasp 166 into the anatomy 24. According to an embodiment, the stapling cleat 166 can be configured as a ligating clip' configured to attach to an anatomical location, for example, when the anatomy 24 is a bone. Thus, as shown in Fig. 24A, the actuation strands 32a, 32b are configured to accept an actuation force F to urge each of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b from a first position to an extended position. Next, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be secured to the suture clasp body 168' and the suture clasp 166 can be implanted and embedded beneath the gap 24c and the anchors 22a, 22b. Anatomical position 22. For example, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be crimped in the stitching tab body 168 or otherwise secured to the stapling tab body as desired. The length of each of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b between the anchor bodies 28a, 28b and the stapling cleat 166 can be made such that when the stapling clasp 166 is implanted into the anatomical position, the stapling clasp 166 creates tension In the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, the proximity force AF is applied to the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, which biases the first and second anchors 22a, 22b to each other Move to make the gap 24c 72 201210564 close. The barbs 170 assist in retaining the suture clasp 166 in the anatomy 24 and preventing the suture clasp 166 from receding away from the anatomy 24. Referring to Figures 25A through 25B, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a collar 172' that is configured to be attachable to the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b for use with the above The first and first actuating strands 38a and 38b are attached to each other. The collar 172 is attachable to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b at a position between the 22a, 22b. For example, collar 172 can define a pair of apertures 174, 176 that are configured to accept the one of the first and first actuation strands 38a and 38b. The channels 174, 176 can each extend along an axis that is oriented substantially parallel to the major axis 182 of the sleeve 172. In addition, the collar I72 defines at least one internal ratchet tooth 178, such as a plurality of ratchet teeth 178, and each of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be defined separately from the collar 172. The ratchet teeth 178 are complementary to the ratchet teeth 180a, 180b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the ratchet teeth 178 are mated with the ratchets i8a, 180b to allow the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to each slide in a direction away from the first and second anchors 22a, 22b. The collar, and the interlock, prevents the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b from sliding in the collar Π2 in a direction toward the first and second anchors 22a, 22b. Thus, the 'actuating strands 38a and 38b can be fed substantially through the respective channels 174, 176 in the opposite direction of the long draw 182 of the collar 176, for example when the collar is oriented substantially parallel to the underlying anatomy 24. And the collar 172 is between the first and second anchors 22a, 22b. 73 201210564 The actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, which in turn causes the faults 22a, 22b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. For example, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b prior to actuation of the strands 38a and 38b into the collar. Alternatively, after the actuation strands 38a and 38b have been inserted into the collar, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b' such that the ratchet teeth 180a, 180b slide past the complementary ratchet teeth 178 of the collar 172. Once the anchors 22a, 22b have been actuated, the proximity force AF is applied to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b, for example to the respective terminal portions 135a, 135b, which results in the first and second As the moving strands 38a and 38b translate away from the respective anchors 22a, 22b, the ratchets 180a, 180b slide over the complementary ratchets 178 of the collar 172, thereby pulling at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b inwardly toward each other. And bringing the gap 24c close. At this point, it should be understood that the proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. The ratchet teeth 178 of the collar 172 interlock with the ratchet teeth i8a, 180b of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b to prevent the actuating strands 38a and 38b from being directed toward the anchor bodies 28a, 28b, respectively. Translation causes the first and second anchors 22a, 22b to separate. The collar 172 can define a sliding member 47 in this manner that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b so that The gap 24c is brought close to 'and the locking member 64 can be further defined to secure the relative movement of the actuating strands 38a and 38b, for example, to separate the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. Although the connector 63 is illustrated in FIGS. 18A-25B as being attached between the first and second actuating 201210564 strands 38a and 38b that are each integrated with the anchor bodies 28a, 28b, it should be understood that The connector a can alternatively attach the first and second actuation strands 38a and/or at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and the passages are separated and attached from the respective bodies 28a, 28b (eg, , cross-woven, braided) auxiliary strands 33 definition. Moreover, as described above in describing FIGS. 1A-1B, each of the first and second actuation strands 38a, 38b can each be configured to be capable of accepting an actuation force F and can be advanced. The first or actuating portions 13la, mb configured to accept the proximity force AF, and the respective second or attached portions 133a, 133b. The attachment portions 133a, 133b of each of the actuation strands 38a, 38b are configured to be attachable to the actuation strands 38 & and the other attachment portions 133a, 133b for their respective The tin 22a, 22b are attached to each other. For example, the attachment portions 133a, 133b of the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be integrated with each other. Alternatively, the attachment portions 133 & 13 can be attached via any suitable connector 63 that can be integrated with either or both of the actuation strands 38a, 38b, or with the actuation strands 38a, 38b Either or both of them are separated and attached directly or indirectly. It will be further appreciated that the actuating portions 131a, 131b of the actuating strands 38a and 38b can be further attached to each other to allow the anchors 22a, 22b to be attached to each other. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the attachment portions 133a, 133b are attached, it can be said that the attachment of the actuation portions 131a, 131b causes the respective first and first errors to be attached to each other. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the attachment portions 133a, 133b are attached, it can be said that the attachment of the actuation portions 131a, 131b causes the respective first and second tungsten 22a, 22b to be attached to each other. Also, regardless of whether or not the actuation portions 13a1, 13lt) are attached, it can be said that the attachment of the attachment portions n3a, 75 201210564 133b causes the respective first and second pins 22a, 22b to be attached to each other. Therefore, it should be understood that the connecting member 63, to which the actuating strands 38a and 38b are attached, can be applied to the connecting portions of the actuating strands 38a and 38b, unless otherwise stated, even if the actuating strands 38a have been attached and The other part of 38b is integrated, for example, via another connecting member 63 which may comprise a connecting strand. For example, the attachment member 63 can attach the connecting strand to either or both of the actuation strands 38a, 38b. Alternatively, the connecting member 63 can attach the connecting strand to itself to attach the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, or the paving bodies 28a, 28b to each other. Referring to Figures 26A through 26B, and generally as described above with respect to Figures 1A through 1B, the anchor assembly 20 includes woven fabrics 28a, 28b for defining the actuation strands 38a and 38b, respectively. Auxiliary strands 33. The first attachment portion 133a can be integrated with the second attachment portion injury 133b to attach the actuation strands 38a and 38b and thus the anchors 22, 22b across the gap 24c. The actuation strands 38a and 38b further define first and second actuation portions 131a, 131b each configured to receive an actuation force F to drive the anchors 22a, 22b from the first configuration to the extended configuration' and The force AF is approached to bias the anchors 22a, 22b toward each other, thereby bringing the gap 24c close. Additionally, the first and second actuation portions 131a, 133b are configured to be attachable to each other. In this case, referring specifically to Figures 26A through 26B, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a ratchet housing 184 that is configured to be attachable to the first and second actuating portions 131a, 131b, thereby The first and 76 201210564 second actuating strands 38a and 38b are attached to each other, and the anchors 22a, 22b are also attached to each other. The position of the ratchet housing 184 between the pins 22a, 22b can be attached to the first and second aligned moving fiber strands 38a and 38b. For example, the ratchet housing 184 can define a pair of apertures i86, 188 that are configured to accept one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b. The first and second actuation strands 38a & 38b can be inserted into the channels 186, 188 along substantially the same direction as the bottom anatomical structure 24 and the corresponding anchors 22a, 22b. The ratchet housing 184 can be oriented such that the channels 186, 188 each extend along an axis substantially parallel to the axis 187 of the ratchet housing 184. Accordingly, the ratchet housing 184 can be oriented such that the mid-cuff line 187 extends substantially perpendicular to the underlying anatomy 24. Further, 'the ratchet housing 184 defines at least one internal ratchet 190, such as a plurality of ratchet teeth 190, and each of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can each define a ratchet 190 with the ratchet housing 184. Complementary ratchets 192a, 192b. In accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the ratchet teeth 190 are mated with the ratchet teeth 192a, 192b to allow the ratchet housing 184 to slide along the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b in a direction toward the underlying anatomy 24 toward the gap 24c. The ratchet 190 is further interlocked with the ratchet teeth 192a, 192b to prevent the ratchet housing 184 from sliding along the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b in a direction away from the underlying anatomical structure 24. Thus, during operation, the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be fed through the respective apertures 184, 186 in a direction away from the anatomical structure 24 such that the ratchet teeth 192a, 192b are mated with the ratchet teeth 19 of the ratchet housing 184. The actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b such that when the ratchet teeth 192a, 192b slide over the ratchet teeth 19 of the complementary ratchet housing 184 at 77 201210564, the anchors 22a, 22b are moved from the first configuration to the extended set state. Once the I seed 22a, 22b has actuated, the proximity force AF is applied to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to cause the ratchet teeth 192a, 192b to slip over when the ratchet housing 184 translates toward the anatomy 24. The ratchet teeth 190' of the complementary ratchet housing 184 thereby apply a proximity force AF to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b' to create tension to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b' including the actuation portion Parts 131a to b and attachment portions 133a to b. In other words 'with respect to the ratchet housing 184, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b', in particular the terminal portions 135a, 135b of the actuation portions i3ia, 131b, are each translated away from the anatomical structure 24, and the respective anchor 22a 22b. At this point, it should be understood that the 'proximity force AF' can be a continuation of the actuation force f. Alternatively, the actuation force F may be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, or to the attachment wires 133a-b, upstream of the ratchet housing 184 prior to attachment of the actuation strands 38a and 38b to the ratchet housing 184. , or to actuate the strands 38a and 38b. The ratchet teeth 190 of the ratchet housing 184 interlock with the ratchet teeth 192a, 192b of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to prevent the ratchet housing 184 from moving away from the anchors 22a, 22b (this will make the first And the second anchors 22a, 22b are separated) to translate. Thus, the ratchet housing 184 can define a sliding member 47 that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b so that The gap 24c is approximated, and the locking member 64 can be further defined for securing the relative movement of the actuation strands 38a and 38b, for example, for each other and the housing ratchet housing 78 201210564 184 to separate the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. . Referring to Figures 27A through 27B, the auxiliary connecting member 77 can be configured as a zip tie housing 194 that is graded to enable the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. Attached to each other. The zip tie hosing 194 is attachable to the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, particularly the actuating portions 131a-b, at positions between the tins 22a, 22b. For example, the drawstring hose 194 can define a pair of apertures 196, 198 that are configured to accept one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b. The drawstring hose 194 can be oriented such that the channels 196, 198 each extend along an axis substantially parallel to the axis 197 of the drawstring hose 194. Accordingly, the drawstring hose 194 can extend through the central axis 197 that is substantially perpendicular to the underlying anatomy 24. In addition, the drawstring hose 194 defines at least one internal tooth 200, such as a plurality of teeth 200, and each of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can define respective teeth 202a, 202b. The strip is complementary to the teeth 200 of the drawstring hose 194. As noted above, the teeth 200 and 202a-b can be smaller than the teeth 190 and 192a-b, and the spacing of the teeth 202a-b can be closer relative to the ratchet teeth 192a-b described above. Alternatively, at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b can be substantially smooth and paired with the teeth 200 of the drawstring outer tube 194 in the manner described herein. In accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the ankle 200 is mated with complementary teeth 202a-b to permit the strap hose 194 to slide along the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b toward the underlying anatomy 24 to direction the gap 24c. The teeth 200 are further interlocked with the teeth 202a, 202b to prevent the bundle 79 201210564 belt hose 194 from sliding along the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b in a direction away from the bottom anatomy 24 and away from the anchor bodies 28a, 28b. Thus, during operation, the actuating strands 38a and 38b can be fed through the respective bores 196, 198' in a direction away from the respective anchor bodies 28a, 28b such that the teeth 202a, 202b and the ratchet hose 194 are ratcheted. 200 pairs. When the teeth 202a, 202b slide over the complementary teeth 2 of the drawstring hose 194, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, particularly the actuation portions 131a-b, thereby causing the anchor 28a, 28b, moving from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Once the anchors 22a, 22b have been actuated, the proximity force AF can be applied to at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b as the strap outer tube 194 translates toward the anatomy 24 causing the teeth 202a, 202b to slip past The complementary teeth 200 of the hose 194 are brought up to create tension in the actuation strands 38a and 38b, including the actuation portions i3ia through b and the attachment portions 133a through b. In other words, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are translated away from the anatomical position' and the respective anchor bodies 28a, 28b relative to the strap hose 194'. At this point, it should be understood that the proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. Alternatively, the actuation force f can be applied directly to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, including the actuation portions i3ia to b and attached, before or after the actuation portions 131a-b are attached to the drawstring hose 194. Any one or both of parts 133a to b. The teeth 200 of the drawstring hose 194 interlock with the teeth 202a, 202b of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to prevent the drawstring hose 194 from separating the first and second anchors 22a, 22b. Direction shift. 201210564 Thus the 'tape hose 194 defines a sliding member 47 that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b. In order to bring the gap 24c closer to 'and the locking member 64 can be further defined for securing the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b for translation with each other and for the outer tube 194, the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b separation. Referring to FIGS. 28A-28C, the first and second anchors 22a-b can each include first and second attachment members 82a-b of the type described in the description of FIGS. 6A-6E. . Accordingly, the first and second attachment members 82a-b each include a loop of strands 79 that define apertures 84a, 84b, respectively, and then define apertures 87a, 87b, respectively. The auxiliary strands 33 may define actuating strands 38a and 38b that each extend through respective apertures 84a and through respective apertures 84b to operatively couple the actuation strands 38a and 38b to the anchors 28a, 28b. Each of the expandable parts 36. It will be appreciated that the eyelet 8 may be further extended by the anatomy 24. The anchor assembly 20 includes a connecting member 63 that can be configured to be attachable to the first and second actuating portions 131a, 131b such that the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b are attached to each other, And also the anchors 22a, 22b are attached to each other. Over the gap 24c, the attachment portions 133a-b of the auxiliary strands 33 can be attached, for example in an integrated manner in accordance with the illustrated embodiment. As described above, the connecting member 63, which may define at least one of the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64, for example, attaches the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b together at a connection point I", as explained above in section 181 In addition, according to the illustrated embodiment, the connecting member 63 can be defined by the auxiliary strands 33 and thus by the actuating strands 38a and 38b. Thus, according to one embodiment, there is tension in the actuating strands 38a and 38b. The connecting member 63 can attach the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b to maintain the gap 24c in an approximated state. Alternatively or additionally, it will be appreciated that the actuating strand 38a and Before the tension of 38b is applied, the connecting member 63 can cause the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b to be attached to each other before the gap 24c is brought close. According to the illustrated embodiment, the connecting member 63 is first and second. The movable strands 38a and 38b are defined and integrated therewith. Therefore, the actuating strands 38a and 38b are directly attached to each other. The connecting member 63 can define the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64 at the joint 125. For example, the connecting member 63 can be defined Junction 66 'knot 66 can be used above in the description 4A to 4F are constructed in a manner and may be defined by one or more to all of the actuating strands 3ga and 38b. However, it should be understood that the knot may alternatively be actuated by the actuating strands 38a and 38b and the connecting strand. At least one of the strands is defined. Alternatively, for example, when the connecting strands are attached to the actuating strands 38a and 38b, the knots 66 can attach portions of the connecting strands to each other for attachment of the actuating strands 38a and 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b define a knot 66. Thus, at least a portion of the attachment member 63 can be associated with at least one of the actuation strands 38a and 38b. Or both. The first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b may define a strut end 68' and the other of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b may define a free end 70. In the illustrated embodiment, the first actuation 82 201210564 strands, such as the first actuation portion 13ia, define a strut end 68, and a second actuating strand 38b, such as a second actuating portion 131b, defining a free end 70. The free portion of the free end 7〇b can be defined by 13% of the terminal portion of the second actuating strand 13%. The terminal portion 135a of the coincident movable strand 38a projects from the knot 66 to the strut end 68. The tension is applied to the actuating strands 38a and 38b to bias the first and second seedlings 22a, 22b toward each other and to make the gap 24c Before approaching, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be knotted 66. Once the knot 66 is formed, and when the knot 66 is in the unlocked configuration, the actuation force f can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b' In particular, the portions i31a to b are actuated to drive the respective expandable portions 36 from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Next, the proximity force AF can be applied to the terminal portion n5a of the first actuation strand 38a defining the strut line 68, thereby causing the strut end 68 to slide through the knot 66 and the respective pin, such as the first error 22a, toward Another anchor 'such as the second anchor 22b, pulled. Once the gap 24c is approached, the free end 7b (e.g., by the end portion 135b of the second actuation strand 38b) can be tensioned to lock the knot 66 and prevent the first actuation strand 38a from shifting. The knot 66 is passed through to secure the tensioned actuation strands 38a and 38b.

儘管連接構件63可組態成為結66,應瞭解,替 換地’可按需要根據描述於本文的任何實施例來組態 連接構件63或任何適當替代連接器。此外,儘管錯 22a、22b中之每一圖示成含有各自的附接構件82,應 瞭解,該等錨中之一個可包含附接構件82同時另一個 在苗直接搞合至各自的致動繩股38。更應瞭解,如第28D S3 201210564 圖所示“需要,錯22a、22b中之一或兩者的孔眼 84b可伸出解剖結構24。 請參考第29A圖至第29B圖,錨組件20可包含 經組恕成可附接致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩 者的複數個連接構件63。根據圖示實施例,致動繩股 38a及38b由共同繩股(例如,辅助繩股33)定義,使 得各自的附接部份133a、133b相互整合。因此,根據 圖不實施例,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互整 合° 1苗組件20可包含經組態成可使致動部份131a、 131b附接至共同繩股之其他位置從而相互附接的第 一及第二連接構件63a、63b。根據圖示實施例,第一 連接構件63a可使對應的第一致動部份131a附接至辅 助繩股33中與第一致動部份131a隔開的另一位置。 同樣’第二連接構件63b可使對應的第二致動部份 131b附接至輔助繩股33中與第二致動部份13讣隔開 的另一位置。例如,根據圖示實施例,第一連接構件 63a使第一致動部份131a附接至第一附接部份n3a, 以及第二連接構件6 3 b使第二致動部份131 b附接至第 一附接部份13 3 b。 因此,可以說’至少一連接構件,例如第一及第 二連接構件63a、63b,可使第一及第二致動部份 131a、131b各自附接至輔助繩股33的其他位置以便 使第一及第二致動部份l31a、1311)相互附接,例如通 過附接部份133a、133b的至少一或兩者以間接方式。 更可以說’第一連接構件63a使第一致動繩股38a的 84 201210564 及=二可操作地附接至致動繩股38a的另—位置,以 連接構件63b使第二致動繩股38b的一部份可 接至第二致動繩股38b的另—位置。替換 的第二瞭解,第—及第二連接構件63a、63b可使各自 例如:ί苐二致動部份131&、131b附接至錨體28, 及、及第—末端部52、54。儘管圖示致動繩股38a 為彼此分開,致動繩股38a及38b替換地可相 接,例如經由有本文所述之類型的任何適當連接 件63 ’以便定義外部連接繩股。 ,據圖*實施例,第—及第二連接構件63a、63b 之母可各自組態成為由辅助繩股33定羞的έ士 6如、触。結66a、66b用以上在說明第从圖疋至義二 圖時所述的方式構成,或按需要可用替代方式構成。 根據圖不實施例,第一結恤包含可由第—致動繩股 38a之致動部份131a定義的支柱端砧及自由端7〇, 該自由端70可包含由第一附接部份133a之第一末端 137a定義之靜態部份7〇a與由第一附接部份133&之 第二末端139a定義之自由部份70b。第一末端137a 可配置於結66a、第一錫體28a之間,以及第二末端 139a可配置於結66a、第二連接構件63b之間。替換 地’自由部份70b可由第二致動繩股38b的附接部份 133b定義。 根據一實施例,第二結66a包含可由第二致動繩 股38b之致動部份131b定義的支柱端68,以及自由 端70 ’該自由端70可包含由第二附接部份133b之第 85 201210564 一末端137b定義的靜態部份70a與由第二附接部份 133b之第二末端139b定義的自由部份7〇b。第一末端 137b可配置於結66b、第二錨體28b之間,以及第二 末端139b可配置於結66b、第一連接構件63a之間。 替換地,自由部份70b可由第一致動繩股38a的附接 部份133a定義。附接部份133a、133b圖示成相互整 合,然而應瞭解,附接部份133a、133b可分離及相互 附接,例如在錨組件20定義各自可操作地耦合至第一 及第二錨22a、22b的第一及第二輔助繩股33&、331)(例 如’參考第30A圖至第3〇D圖)時。 第一及第二結66a、66b卡之每一可各自定義滑動 構件47,其係允許各自的支柱端68相對於自由端7〇 平移通過它。因此,在結66a、66b處於解鎖組態時, 滑動構件47允許第一及第二致動部份131a、131b對 於第一及第二附接部份133a、133b平移,例如以回應 外加致動力F,從而驅使各自的錨體2如、2此由第一 組態運動至擴展組態。每個結66更定義可致動至鎖定 組態的鎖定構件64以便使錨22a、22b中之至少一或 兩者固定於各自的偏麗位置。例如,拉伸鎖定力可施 加至結66a、66b之自由端的自由部份7〇b以便防止致 動部份131a、131b相對於附接部份133a、133b平移 通過結66a、66b。 第一及第二結66a、66b可沿著輔助繩股33隔開 一段固定距離L,藉此在錨體22a、22b各自插入目標 解剖位置24a、24b時使間隙24c保持接近。例如,在 86 201210564 結66a、66b注入各自的目標解剖位置24a、24b之前, 可使間隙24c接近。在操作期間,一旦第一及第二目 標解剖位置24a、24b各自植入第一及第二錨22a、22b 後,結66a至b可處於解鎖組態使得致動力F施加至 各自的致動繩股38a至b,例如致動部份131 a至b, 會造成各自的錨體28a至b由第一組態運動至擴展組 態。接下來,拉伸鎖定力可反抗對應結66a至b施加 至各自的附接部份133a至b,以便驅使結66a運動至 b至鎖定組態以及使錨22a至b保持擴展組態。 第一及第二結66a、66b的距離L可大體等於或 小於目標解剖位置24a、24b的距離,使得間隙2物 在第一及第二錨22a、22b在解剖位置後面擴展以及用 辅助繩股33連結時接近,使得產生於致動繩股38a 及38b的張力可維持間隙24c的接近。儘管第一及第 二連接構件63a至b可各自組態成為結66,應瞭解, 第一及第二連接構件63a、63b中之任一或兩者替換地 可被組態成為有本文所述之類型的任何適當鎖定構件 63或以替代方式構成的任何適當鎖定構件。例如,連 接構件03a至b的至少一或兩者可定義絞結,藉此致 動繩股38a至b可各自絞接穿過致動繩股38a至b中 之另一或本身,以及在錨22a、22b的致動後使連接繩 股有張力以便施加防止錨線38a至b平移的壓縮力。 上文在說明第19D至Η圖時有描述一絞結實施例。 如以上在說明第29Α圖至第29D圖時所述,第一 及第二附接部份133a、133b可彼此整合以便附接皆與 87 201210564 共同辅助繩股33整合的第一及第二致動繩股38a及 3此。替換地,如第30A圖至第3〇B圖所示,錨組件 20可包含定義第一致動繩股38a的第一辅助繩股 33a,以及定義第二致動繩股38b以及與第一辅助繩股 33a分開的第二辅助繩股33b。因此,第一及第二附接 部份133a、133b可彼此分開。錨組件2〇可包含用以 ,在說明第29A圖至第29D圖時提及之方式可使致動 部份131a、i3ib各自附接至附接部份133a、13沘的 第及第一連接構件63a至b。4苗組件20可進一步包 含至少一連接構件,例如一對第三及第四連接構件 63c至d,其係經組態成可使致動繩股38&及3沾,例 如附接部份l33a、133b,從而第一及第二錨22a、22b, 相互附接。 根據圖示實施例,第三及第四連接構件63c、63d 中之每一可由第一及第二輔助繩股33a定義。例如, 第一附接部份133a由第一連接構件63a向第二連接構 件36b伸出’從而也向第二附接部份13汕伸出。同樣, 第二附接部份133b由第二連接構件63b向第一連接構 件36a伸出,從而也向第一附接部份133a伸出。 根據圖示實施例,第二致動繩股38b,特別是第 —附接部份133b編織或以其他方式絞接穿過第一致 ,繩股38a ’特別是第一附接部份133a,以便定義使 第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致動繩股38b的第三連 接構件63c。因此,第三連接構件63c可組態成為絞 、、、。134c。第一附接部份133b可編織或以其他方式絞 88 201210564 接依所欲次數穿過附接部份l33a以便在第一位置定 義使第一錨22a附接至第二錨22b的第三連接構件 63c。根據圖示實施例’附接部份133b沿著由第一連 接構件63a向第二連接構件的方向,從而也沿著由第 一錨體28a向第二錨體28b的方向,編織穿過第一附 接部份133a。不過,應瞭解,沿著由第二連接器6邛 向第一連接器63a的方向,從而沿著由第二錨體2肋 向第一錨體38a的方向,第二附接部份133b可編織穿 過第一附接部份133a。第二附接部份133b可離開第 一附接部份133a以便定義第二終端部份丨35b。 根據圖示實施例,第一致動繩股38a,特別是第 一附接部份133a,編織或以其他方式絞接穿過第二致 動繩股38b,特別是第二附接部份133b,以便定義使 第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致動繩股38b的第四連 接構件63d。因此,第四連接構件63c可組態成為絞 結134d。第一附接部份133a可依所欲次數編織或以 其他方式絞接穿過第二附接部份133b以便在第一位 置定義使第一錨22a附接至第二錨22b的第四連接構 件63d。根據圖示實施例,沿著由第二連接構件 向第一連接構件63a的方向,從而也沿著由第二錨體 28b向第一錨體28a的方向,第一附接部份133&編織 穿過第二附接部份133b。不過,應瞭解,沿著由第一 連接器63a向第二連接器63b的方向,從而沿著由第 一錨體28a向第二錨體38b的方向,第一附接部份 133a可編織穿過第二附接部份133b。第一附接部份 89 201210564 133a可離開第二附接部份133b以便定義第一終端部 份 135a。 第一終端部份135a與第二終端部份135b隔開。 例如,可將第二終端部份135b配置成比第一終端部份 135a還要靠近第一 4苗體28a ’以及可將第一終端部份 135a比第二終端部份135b還要靠近第二錨體28b,然 而應瞭解’第一及第二終端部份135a、135b可隔開以 便按需要定義對於彼此及第一及第二銷體28a、28b 有任何適當的空間關係。例如,錫組件2〇可進一步包 含使第一及第二終端部份135a、135b附接在一起的連 接構件。例如’第一及第二終端部份135a、135b可打 結以便定義適當的結,例如結66(例如,如在說明第 33A圖至第33C圖之第一及第二連接繩股59a、59b 時所述;^ 在插作期間’第一及第一結66a至b可各自處於 解鎖組態使得致動力F施加至第一及第二致動部份 131a至b中之每一會造成各自的第一及第二錨體28a 至b由第一組態運動至擴展組態。接下來,拉伸鎖定 力可施加至第一及第二附接部份133a至b以便用以上 在說明第29A圖至第29D圖時提及的方式鎖定第一及 第二結66a至b。 根據圖示實施例,接近力AF施加至第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b的第一及第二終端部份U5a至 b。當接近力AF施加至第二終端部份時,第二 致動繩股38b的第二附接部份133b平移通過第一致& 201210564 繩股38a的第一附接部份133a,例如在由第三連接構 件63c定義的絞結處。當接近力AF施加至第一終端 部份135a時’第一致動繩股38a的第一附接部份133a 穿過第二致動繩股38b的第二附接部份133b,例如在 由第四連接構件63d定義的絞結處。因此應瞭解,第 三及第四連接構件63c、63d可定義滑動構件47及 47,其係允許第一及第二附接部份133a、133b,從而 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b,彼此相對平移。接 近力AF產生張力於致動繩股38a及38b中而可施加 鎖定力至結66的自由部份70b,從而驅使結66至鎖 定組態。因此,接近力AF可定義用於結60的鎖定力。 此外,產生於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的張力 使第一及第二錨22a、22b中之至少一或兩者向對方偏 壓’從而使間隙24c接近。 應瞭解,產生於第一附接部份133a的張力以回應 接近力AF施加至各自的第一終端部份13元可造成第 了附接部份13 3 a在第三連接構件6 3 c處施加壓縮力至 第二附接部份133b。該壓縮力防止第二附接部份133b 在疋義第二連接構件63e的絞結處與第一附接部份 133&=目對平移。因此,應瞭解,第三連接構件63c可 進一步疋義各自的第三鎖定構件64c。同樣,產生於 第-附接部份l33b的張力以回應接近力AF施加至各 2第—終端部份⑽可造成第二附接部份133b在 四連接構件63d處施加壓縮力至第一附接部份 133& °亥壓縮力防止第一附接部份133a在定義第四連 91 201210564 接構件63d的紋結處與第二附接部份⑽相對平移。 因此,應瞭解’第四連接構件63d可進-步定義各自 的第四鎖定構件64d。 儘管第三及第四連接構件63c、63d中之每-被組 態成為絞結’藉此第—及第二致動繩股38a至b中之 -個絞接穿過第-及第二致動繩股他至b中之另 -,應暸解1三及第四連接構件63c、63d可組態成 為有本文所述之㈣的任何適當連接構件或經組態成 可使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致動繩股38b的任 二適=連接構件。例如,第三及第四連接構件 ^之至少—或兩者可各自組態成為結,例如 有上述麵的f 66 ’或任何適料代狀構件。 、同,儘&第一及第二連接構件63a、63b中之每 ^f組態f為結66 ’藉此第—及第二致龍股38a至 之第—及第二致動繩股38a至b中之另-Although the connecting member 63 can be configured as the knot 66, it should be understood that the connecting member 63 or any suitable alternative connector can be configured as desired in accordance with any of the embodiments described herein. Moreover, although each of the errors 22a, 22b is illustrated as containing a respective attachment member 82, it will be appreciated that one of the anchors may include the attachment member 82 while the other is directly engaged to the respective actuation. Strand 38. It should be further appreciated that the aperture 84b of one or both of the errors 22a, 22b may extend beyond the anatomy 24 as shown in Figure 28D S3 201210564. Referring to Figures 29A-29B, the anchor assembly 20 may include The plurality of connecting members 63 are attached to attach at least one or both of the actuating strands 38a and 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the actuating strands 38a and 38b are joined by a common strand (eg, an auxiliary strand) The strands 33) are defined such that the respective attachment portions 133a, 133b are integrated with one another. Thus, according to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are integrated with one another. The first and second connecting members 63a, 63b can be attached to the other positions of the common strand so as to be attached to each other. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first connecting member 63a can make a corresponding The first actuating portion 131a is attached to another position of the auxiliary strand 33 spaced apart from the first actuating portion 131a. Similarly, the second connecting member 63b can attach the corresponding second actuating portion 131b To another position in the auxiliary strand 33 that is spaced apart from the second actuating portion 13A. For example, according to the illustration In an embodiment, the first connecting member 63a attaches the first actuating portion 131a to the first attaching portion n3a, and the second connecting member 633b attaches the second actuating portion 131b to the first attaching portion The connecting portion 13 3 b. Therefore, it can be said that 'at least one connecting member, such as the first and second connecting members 63a, 63b, can respectively attach the first and second actuating portions 131a, 131b to the auxiliary strand The other positions of 33 are such that the first and second actuation portions l31a, 1311) are attached to each other, for example by at least one or both of the attachment portions 133a, 133b in an indirect manner. 63a operatively attaches 84 201210564 and =2 of the first actuating strand 38a to another position of the actuating strand 38a to connect the member 63b to connect a portion of the second actuating strand 38b to Another position of the second actuating strand 38b. Alternatively to the second understanding, the first and second connecting members 63a, 63b can each attach, for example, a second actuating portion 131&, 131b to the anchor body 28 , and, and the first end portions 52, 54. Although the actuating strands 38a are shown as being separated from each other, the actuating strands 38a and 38b may alternatively be Connected, for example, via any suitable connector 63' of the type described herein to define an outer connecting strand. According to the embodiment of the figure *, the mothers of the first and second connecting members 63a, 63b can each be configured to be assisted The scorpion 33 is stunned by the gentleman 6 as a touch. The knots 66a, 66b are constructed in the manner described above in the description of Fig. 2 to Fig. 2, or may be constructed in an alternative manner as needed. The first tie includes a post anvil and a free end 7'' defined by the actuation portion 131a of the first actuation strand 38a, the free end 70 can be defined by the first end 137a of the first attachment portion 133a The static portion 7A is a free portion 70b defined by the second end 139a of the first attachment portion 133 & The first end 137a may be disposed between the junction 66a and the first tin body 28a, and the second end 139a may be disposed between the junction 66a and the second connecting member 63b. Alternatively, the free portion 70b can be defined by the attachment portion 133b of the second actuation strand 38b. According to an embodiment, the second knot 66a includes a strut end 68 that can be defined by the actuating portion 131b of the second actuating strand 38b, and the free end 70' can include the second attachment portion 133b The 85th 201210564 one end 137b defines a static portion 70a and a free portion 7b defined by the second end 139b of the second attachment portion 133b. The first end 137b may be disposed between the junction 66b and the second anchor body 28b, and the second end 139b may be disposed between the junction 66b and the first connecting member 63a. Alternatively, the free portion 70b can be defined by the attachment portion 133a of the first actuation strand 38a. The attachment portions 133a, 133b are illustrated as being integrated with one another, however it will be appreciated that the attachment portions 133a, 133b can be detached and attached to each other, for example, each of the anchor assemblies 20 are operatively coupled to the first and second anchors 22a. The first and second auxiliary strands of 22b, 33&, 331) (for example, 'refer to Figs. 30A to 3D). Each of the first and second junctions 66a, 66b can each define a sliding member 47 that allows the respective strut end 68 to translate therethrough relative to the free end 7〇. Thus, when the knots 66a, 66b are in the unlocked configuration, the slide member 47 allows the first and second actuating portions 131a, 131b to translate for the first and second attachment portions 133a, 133b, for example in response to an applied actuation force F, thereby driving the respective anchors 2, 2, to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Each of the knots 66 further defines a locking member 64 that is actuatable to the locking configuration to secure at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b to their respective biased positions. For example, a tensile locking force can be applied to the free portion 7b of the free ends of the knots 66a, 66b to prevent the actuation portions 131a, 131b from translating through the knots 66a, 66b relative to the attachment portions 133a, 133b. The first and second knots 66a, 66b can be spaced a fixed distance L along the auxiliary strands 33, thereby maintaining the gap 24c close as the anchor bodies 22a, 22b are each inserted into the target anatomical locations 24a, 24b. For example, gap 86c may be brought into close proximity before 86 201210564 knots 66a, 66b are injected into respective target anatomical locations 24a, 24b. During operation, once the first and second target anatomical locations 24a, 24b are implanted into the first and second anchors 22a, 22b, respectively, the knots 66a-b can be in an unlocked configuration such that the actuation force F is applied to the respective actuation cord The strands 38a-b, such as the actuating portions 131a-b, cause the respective anchor bodies 28a-b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Next, the tensile locking force can be applied against the respective attachment portions 133a-b against the corresponding knots 66a-b to drive the knot 66a to the b-lock configuration and the anchors 22a-b to maintain the expanded configuration. The distance L of the first and second junctions 66a, 66b may be substantially equal to or less than the distance of the target anatomical locations 24a, 24b such that the gap 2 expands behind the anatomical locations of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b and the auxiliary strands 33 is brought close to each other so that the tension generated by the actuating strands 38a and 38b maintains the approach of the gap 24c. Although the first and second connecting members 63a-b can each be configured as a knot 66, it will be appreciated that either or both of the first and second connecting members 63a, 63b can alternatively be configured as described herein. Any suitable locking member 63 of the type or any suitable locking member that is constructed in an alternative manner. For example, at least one or both of the connecting members 03a-b can define a twist, whereby the actuating strands 38a-b can each be hinged through the other or itself of the actuating strands 38a-b, and at the anchor 22a After actuation of 22b, the connecting strands are tensioned to apply a compressive force that prevents translation of the anchor lines 38a-b. A twisted embodiment has been described above in connection with the description of Figures 19D to Η. As described above in the description of Figures 29 to 29D, the first and second attachment portions 133a, 133b may be integrated with each other for attachment to the first and second of the integration of the 87 201210564 common auxiliary strands 33. The moving strands 38a and 3 are here. Alternatively, as shown in Figures 30A-3B, the anchor assembly 20 can include a first auxiliary strand 33a defining a first actuation strand 38a, and a second actuation strand 38b and first The second auxiliary strand 33b is separated by the auxiliary strands 33a. Therefore, the first and second attachment portions 133a, 133b can be separated from each other. The anchor assembly 2 can include first and first connections for attaching the actuation portions 131a, i3ib to the attachment portions 133a, 13A, respectively, as described in the description of Figures 29A through 29D. Members 63a to b. The 4 seedling assembly 20 can further comprise at least one connecting member, such as a pair of third and fourth connecting members 63c to d, configured to enable actuation of the strands 38 & and 3, such as attachment portion l33a , 133b, whereby the first and second anchors 22a, 22b are attached to each other. According to the illustrated embodiment, each of the third and fourth connecting members 63c, 63d may be defined by the first and second auxiliary strands 33a. For example, the first attachment portion 133a protrudes from the first connecting member 63a toward the second connecting member 36b so as to also protrude toward the second attachment portion 13b. Similarly, the second attachment portion 133b is extended from the second connecting member 63b toward the first connecting member 36a so as to also protrude toward the first attaching portion 133a. According to the illustrated embodiment, the second actuation strand 38b, and in particular the first attachment portion 133b, is woven or otherwise spliced through the first, strands 38a', particularly the first attachment portion 133a, In order to define a third connecting member 63c that attaches the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b. Therefore, the third connecting member 63c can be configured as a twisted pair, . 134c. The first attachment portion 133b can be woven or otherwise twisted 88 201210564 through the attachment portion l33a as desired to define a third connection for attaching the first anchor 22a to the second anchor 22b in the first position Member 63c. According to the illustrated embodiment, the attachment portion 133b is woven along the direction from the first connecting member 63a toward the second connecting member, and thus also in the direction from the first anchor body 28a to the second anchor body 28b. An attachment portion 133a. However, it should be understood that the second attachment portion 133b may be along the direction of the first connector 63a by the second connector 6 so as to be along the direction of the second anchor body 2 toward the first anchor body 38a. Braiding through the first attachment portion 133a. The second attachment portion 133b can leave the first attachment portion 133a to define the second terminal portion 丨 35b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first actuating strand 38a, in particular the first attachment portion 133a, is woven or otherwise spliced through the second actuating strand 38b, in particular the second attachment portion 133b To define a fourth connecting member 63d that attaches the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b. Therefore, the fourth connecting member 63c can be configured as the twist 134d. The first attachment portion 133a can be woven or otherwise spliced through the second attachment portion 133b as desired to define a fourth connection for attaching the first anchor 22a to the second anchor 22b at the first location. Member 63d. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first attachment portion 133& woven along the direction from the second connecting member to the first connecting member 63a, and thus also in the direction from the second anchor body 28b toward the first anchor body 28a Pass through the second attachment portion 133b. However, it should be understood that the first attachment portion 133a can be woven along the direction from the first connector 63a to the second connector 63b, and thus in the direction from the first anchor body 28a to the second anchor body 38b. Passing through the second attachment portion 133b. The first attachment portion 89 201210564 133a can exit the second attachment portion 133b to define the first terminal portion 135a. The first terminal portion 135a is spaced apart from the second terminal portion 135b. For example, the second terminal portion 135b can be disposed closer to the first 4 seed body 28a' than the first terminal portion 135a and the first terminal portion 135a can be closer to the second terminal portion 135b than the second terminal portion 135b. The anchor body 28b, however, should be understood that the 'first and second terminal portions 135a, 135b can be spaced apart to define any suitable spatial relationship to each other and to the first and second pin bodies 28a, 28b as desired. For example, the tin component 2 can further include a connecting member that attaches the first and second terminal portions 135a, 135b together. For example, the first and second terminal portions 135a, 135b can be tied to define an appropriate junction, such as junction 66 (e.g., first and second connecting strands 59a, 59b as illustrated in Figures 33A through 33C). At the time of insertion, the first and first junctions 66a to b may each be in an unlocked configuration such that actuation force F is applied to each of the first and second actuation portions 131a-b to cause a respective The first and second anchor bodies 28a to b are moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Next, a tensile locking force can be applied to the first and second attachment portions 133a to b for use in the above description. The first and second junctions 66a-b are locked in the manner mentioned in Figures 29A through 29D. According to the illustrated embodiment, the proximity force AF is applied to the first and second of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b. Two terminal portions U5a to b. When the proximity force AF is applied to the second terminal portion, the second attachment portion 133b of the second actuation strand 38b translates through the first of the first & 201210564 strands 38a The attachment portion 133a, for example, at the hinge defined by the third connection member 63c. When the proximity force AF is applied to the first terminal portion 135a, 'first The first attachment portion 133a of the moving strand 38a passes through the second attachment portion 133b of the second actuation strand 38b, such as at the hinge defined by the fourth attachment member 63d. Thus, it should be understood that the third And the fourth connecting members 63c, 63d may define sliding members 47 and 47 that allow the first and second attachment portions 133a, 133b such that the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b translate relative to each other. The proximity force AF creates tension in the actuation strands 38a and 38b to apply a locking force to the free portion 70b of the knot 66, thereby driving the knot 66 to the locked configuration. Thus, the proximity force AF can define a lock for the knot 60. Further, the tension generated by the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b biases at least one or both of the first and second anchors 22a, 22b toward each other to cause the gap 24c to approach. The tension generated in the first attachment portion 133a in response to the application of the proximity force AF to the respective first terminal portion 13 may cause the first attachment portion 13 3 a to apply compression at the third connection member 633 The force is applied to the second attachment portion 133b. The compressive force prevents the second attachment portion 133b from being in the second connection The hinge of the piece 63e is translated with the first attachment portion 133&=. Therefore, it should be understood that the third connection member 63c can further disambiguate the respective third locking member 64c. Also, the first attachment is generated. The tension of the portion l33b in response to the proximity force AF applied to each of the 2nd terminal portions (10) may cause the second attachment portion 133b to apply a compressive force at the four connecting members 63d to the first attachment portion 133& The force prevents the first attachment portion 133a from being relatively translated with respect to the second attachment portion (10) at the knuckle defining the fourth connection 91 201210564 connector member 63d. Therefore, it should be understood that the fourth connecting member 63d can further define the respective fourth locking members 64d. Although each of the third and fourth connecting members 63c, 63d is configured to be twisted 'by the first and second of the second actuating strands 38a-b through the first and second From the other, it is to be understood that the first and fourth connecting members 63c, 63d can be configured to have any suitable connecting member (4) as described herein or configured to enable the first actuating rope. The strand 38a is attached to any of the second actuating strands 38b. For example, at least - or both of the third and fourth connecting members ^ can each be configured as a knot, such as f 66 ' having any of the above faces or any suitable shaped member. And, the configuration of each of the first and second connecting members 63a, 63b is a knot 66 'by the first and second strands 38a to the first - and the second actuating strand Another of 38a to b -

Si右t ::、第一及第二連接構件63a、63b可組態 可使第-及帛IS任何適#連接構件或經組態成 叮使弟及第一致動部份131 第二附接部份133a至… 弟 ,H览 至b的任何適當替代連接構件。例 口,第及第一連接構件63a 6 可各自組態成為絞沾m士丄 134c至d’或任何適當替代鎖定構件。 請參考第31A圖至坌1 組態成為第-及第ι66 : 組件2〇可包含 # 63a、,甘 6邰的第一及第二連接構 ”係使致動部份Ula至b附接至對應 92 201210564 的附接部份133a至b,如以上在說明第3〇A圖至第 30C圖時所述。此外’如以上在說明第3〇A圖至第3〇c 圖%所述,第二及第四連接構件63C、63d可組態成為 有本文所述類型的任何適當連接器或任何適當替代連 接器。例如,第三連接構件63c可由第二致動繩股38b 疋義,以及可組fe成為孔眼,例如有本文在說明第2h 圖時所述類型的孔眼72,然而應瞭解,根據描述於本 文的任何實施例或任何適當替代實施例,可用替代方 式構成該孔眼。因此,第三連接構件63c的孔眼可由 致動繩股38b、錨體28b、或附接構件(例如,經組態 成可附接至錨體28b的附接構件82(參考第6A圖至第 6B圖))疋義。根據圖示實施例,第二附接部份U3b 可由第二連接構件63b伸出以便用上述方式定義第二 結66b的自由部份70b。第二附接部份n3b可進一步 定義孔眼72。 因此,第二連接構件63c被組態成可使第二致動 繩股38b附接至第一致動繩股38a。例如,如圖示, 第一致動繩股38a,特別是第一附接部份133a之第一 末端137a’在朝向第三連接構件6孔從而朝向第二錨 22b的第一方向,可由第一連接構件63a伸出,從而 由第一錨體28a伸出。第一附接部份133a可延伸穿過 孔眼72,使得第一附接部份133a之第二末端139a沿 著與第一方向實質相反的第二方向朝第一連接構件 63a從而朝第—錨體28a向後延伸以便使第一附接部 伤133a附接至孔眼72,從而附接至第二附接部份 93 201210564 133b。由於第一附接部份133a,從而第一致動繩股 38a,相對於第二附接部份133b,從而第二致動繩股 38b可滑動,穿過孔眼72,可以說第三連接構件63c 定義滑動構件47。 第四連接構件63d可組態成為結,例如有上述類 型的結66d,它可由致動繩股38a定義,例如第一附 接部份133a,特別是第一附接部份133a的第一及第 二末端137a、137b。因此,第四連接構件63d可定義 滑動構件47與鎖定構件64,該鎖定構件64使致動繩 股38a附接至本身以便附接第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b。結66d可包含可由第一附接部份133a之第二 末端139a定義的支柱端68,以及自由端70,該自由 端70包含由第一附接部份133a之第一末端137a定義 的靜態部份70a,以及由配置於第一連接構件63a、第 四連接構件63d之間的附接部份133a定義的自由部份 70b。因此’第一致動繩股的第一終端部份135a也由 結66d伸出以及定義一部份支柱端68。 因此,在操作期間,在各個結66a、66b處於解鎖 組態時,致動力F可施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b的致動部份131a、131b’使得致動部份i3ia、 131b各自相對於附接部份133a、133b可滑動穿過結 66a、66b。因此,當致動力F各自施加至第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b的致動部份131a、131b時,用上 述方式驅使對應的錨體28a、28b由第一組態運動至擴 展組態。 94 201210564 接下來,鎖定力可施加至結66a、66b的自由部份 70b以便驅使結66a、66b至鎖定組態以及使錨體28a、 28b固定於擴展組態。例如,鎖定力可直接施加至結 66a、66b的自由部份70b。替換地,接近力AF可施 加至第一致動繩股38a的第一終端部份135a以便產生 張力於致動繩股38a及38b中,從而造成鎖定力施加 至第一及第二結66a、66b的自由部份70b。 例如,如上述,可組態成處於解鎖組態的結66d, 使得第一附接部份133a之第二末端139a相對於第一 附接部份133a之第一末端137a可平移穿過結66d。 因此’接近力AF可施加至第一致動繩股38a的第一 終端部份135a以便產生張力於致動繩股38a及38b 中,致動繩股38a及38b各自施加偏壓力至第一及第 二錨體28a、28b而造成錨體28a、28b向對方平移, 從而使間隙24c接近。此外,一旦間隙24c已接近, 持續施力至終端部份135a可造成足夠的張力累積於 致動繩股38a及38b,使得結66a、66b及66d的自由 部份70b可施加鎖定力至結66a、66b及66d,從而驅 使結66a、66b及66d至鎖定組態,從而使間隙24c 保持接近狀態。The Si right t::, first and second connecting members 63a, 63b can be configured to enable any of the first and second connection members of the first and second ports to be configured as the second and second actuation portions 131 From 133a to ..., any of the appropriate alternative connecting members of b to b. For example, the first and first connecting members 63a 6 may each be configured to twist the wires 134c to d' or any suitable alternative locking member. Please refer to FIG. 31A to FIG. 1 to be configured as the first and the first ι66: the component 2 can include the #63a, the first and second connection structures of the ”6邰, so that the actuation portions Ula to b are attached to Corresponding to the attachment portions 133a to b of 201210564, as described above in the description of Figures 3A to 30C. Further, as described above in the description of Figures 3A to 3D, The second and fourth connecting members 63C, 63d can be configured as any suitable connector of the type described herein or any suitable alternative connector. For example, the third connecting member 63c can be decoupled by the second actuating strand 38b, and The apertures 72 can be formed, for example, with the apertures 72 of the type described herein in the description of Figure 2h, however it will be appreciated that the apertures can be constructed in an alternative manner in accordance with any of the embodiments described herein or any suitable alternative embodiment. The eyelet of the third connecting member 63c may be actuated by the actuating strand 38b, the anchor body 28b, or an attachment member (eg, an attachment member 82 configured to be attachable to the anchor body 28b (refer to Figures 6A-6B) )). According to the illustrated embodiment, the second attachment portion U3b can be connected by the second connection The member 63b extends to define the free portion 70b of the second knot 66b in the manner described above. The second attachment portion n3b can further define the eyelet 72. Thus, the second connecting member 63c is configured to enable the second actuating cord The strand 38b is attached to the first actuating strand 38a. For example, as shown, the first actuating strand 38a, and particularly the first end 137a' of the first attachment portion 133a, is oriented toward the third connecting member 6 Thereby, the first direction toward the second anchor 22b can be extended by the first connecting member 63a so as to protrude from the first anchor body 28a. The first attachment portion 133a can extend through the eyelet 72 such that the first attachment portion The second end 139a of the portion 133a extends toward the first connecting member 63a in a second direction substantially opposite the first direction to extend rearwardly toward the first anchor body 28a to attach the first attachment portion injury 133a to the eyelet 72, thereby Attached to the second attachment portion 93 201210564 133b. Due to the first attachment portion 133a, thereby the first actuation strand 38a, relative to the second attachment portion 133b, the second actuation strand 38b can Sliding through the eyelet 72, it can be said that the third connecting member 63c defines the sliding member 47. The connecting member 63d can be configured as a knot, such as a knot 66d of the type described above, which can be defined by actuating strands 38a, such as first attachment portion 133a, particularly first and second portions of first attachment portion 133a The ends 137a, 137b. Thus, the fourth connecting member 63d can define a sliding member 47 and a locking member 64 that attaches the actuating strands 38a to itself for attaching the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. The junction 66d can include a strut end 68 that can be defined by the second end 139a of the first attachment portion 133a, and a free end 70 that includes the first end 137a defined by the first attachment portion 133a. The static portion 70a, and the free portion 70b defined by the attachment portion 133a disposed between the first connecting member 63a and the fourth connecting member 63d. Thus, the first terminal portion 135a of the first actuating strand also extends from the knot 66d and defines a portion of the strut end 68. Thus, during operation, when each of the junctions 66a, 66b is in the unlocked configuration, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation portions 131a, 131b' of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b such that the actuation portion The i3ia, 131b are each slidable through the junctions 66a, 66b with respect to the attachment portions 133a, 133b. Thus, when the actuation forces F are each applied to the actuation portions 131a, 131b of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, the corresponding anchor bodies 28a, 28b are driven from the first configuration to the extension in the manner described above. configuration. 94 201210564 Next, a locking force can be applied to the free portion 70b of the knots 66a, 66b to drive the knots 66a, 66b to the locked configuration and to secure the anchors 28a, 28b to the expanded configuration. For example, the locking force can be applied directly to the free portion 70b of the knots 66a, 66b. Alternatively, the proximity force AF may be applied to the first terminal portion 135a of the first actuation strand 38a to create tension in the actuation strands 38a and 38b, thereby causing a locking force to be applied to the first and second junctions 66a, Free part of 66b 70b. For example, as described above, the knot 66d can be configured to be in an unlocked configuration such that the second end 139a of the first attachment portion 133a can translate through the knot 66d relative to the first end 137a of the first attachment portion 133a. . Thus, the 'proximity force AF' can be applied to the first terminal portion 135a of the first actuating strand 38a to create tension in the actuating strands 38a and 38b, each of which actuates the biasing force to the first and The second anchor bodies 28a, 28b cause the anchor bodies 28a, 28b to translate toward each other, thereby bringing the gap 24c into proximity. Moreover, once the gap 24c is approached, continued application of force to the terminal portion 135a may cause sufficient tension to build up on the actuation strands 38a and 38b such that the free portions 70b of the knots 66a, 66b and 66d can apply a locking force to the knot 66a. , 66b and 66d, thereby driving the junctions 66a, 66b, and 66d to the locked configuration, thereby maintaining the gap 24c in an approximated state.

參考第32A圖至第32B圖,錨組件20可包含 組怨成為第—及第二結66a、66b的第一及第二連接構 a 63b,其係使致動部份i3ia至b附接至對應 ^附接部份133a至b,如以上在說明第31A圖至第 C圖時所述。此外,如以上在說明第31A圖至第31C 95 201210564 圖時所述’第三及第四連接構件63c、63_態成為 有本文所述之麵的任何騎連捿n或任何適當替代 連接器。 —例如’第三連接構件63c可由第二致動繩股m 定義’以及可組態成為孔眼’例如有以上在說明第2h 圖時提及之類型的孔眼72,然而應瞭解,根據描述於 本文的任何實施例或任何適當替代實施例可用替代方 式構成該孔眼,如以上在說明第31A圖至第3ic圖時 所述。因此,第三連接構件63e&孔眼可由致動繩股 38b、銘體28b、或附接構件定義,例如經組態成可附 接至錫體28b的附接構件82(參考第6a圖至第6b 圖)。根據圖示實施例,第二附接部份133b可由 連接構件63b伸出以便用上述方式定義第二結_的 自由部份m。第二附接部份133b可進一步定義孔眼 72 °因此’第三連接構件63e被組態成可使第二致動 繩股猶用上述直接方式或用如第32A圖至第如圖 所示的間接方式附接至第一致動絕股。 —此外第四連接構件63d可由第一致動繩股38a 疋義ffii且也可組態成為孔眼,例如有以上在說明第 Μ圖時提及之類型的孔眼72,然而應瞭解,根據描 边於本文的任何實施例或任何適當替代實施例可用替 代方式構成該孔眼,如以上在說明第31Α圖至第31C 圖寺戶斤述g)此,第四連接構件㈣的孔眼可由致動 ,股38a、第-錯體28a、或附接構件定義,例如經組 二成了附接至錯體28a的附接構件82(參考第28A圖 96 201210564 至第28C圖)。根據圖示實施例,第一附接部份133a 可由第一連接構件63a伸出以便用上述方式定義第一 結66a的自由部份7〇b。第一附接部份133&可進一步 定義孔眼72。因此,第四連接構件63d被組態成可使 第一致動繩股38b用上述直接方式或用如第32A圖至 第32C圖所示的間接方式附接至第-致動繩股38a。 特別是,錨組件20可包含至少一連接構件,例如 第五連接構件63e,其係組態成為輔助連接構件77, 例如附接於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b之間的連 接繩股59。連接繩股59可裝設成為缝合線或按需要 以任何替代方式構成的線。因此,錨組件2〇可包含至 少一連接構件,例如第六連接構件63f,它可組態成 可使連接繩股59附接及固定至第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b,從而使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b 相互附接及固定。根據圖示實施例,第六連接構件03f 使連接繩股59的第一部份120附接至連接繩股59的 第二部份121以便使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b 經由連接繩股59間接地附接在一起。因此,除非另有 說明,應瞭解,可使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致 動繩股38b的上述任一連接構件63也可使連接繩股 59的第一部份120附接至連接繩股的第二部份121。 替換地或附加地,錨組件2〇可包含使連接繩股59的 第一部份120附接至第一錨體28a的連接器,以及使 連接繩股59之第二部份121附接至第二錨體28b的第 二連接構件。例如,第一致動繩股38a的孔眼72可使 97 201210564 連接繩股59附接至第一錨體28a,以及第二致動繩股 38b的孔眼72可使連接繩股59附接至第二錨體28b。 根據圖示實施例,連接繩股59的第一部份no 延伸穿過第一致動繩股38a的孔眼72,以及連接繩股 的第二部份121延伸穿過第二致動繩股38b的孔眼 72,使得第一及第二部份12〇、121可滑動地附接至各 自的孔眼72,從而定義滑動構件47。第六連接器63e 使連接繩股59的第一部份120附接至連接繩股59的 第二部份121,從而使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二 致動繩股,從而使第一錨22a附接至第二錨22a。 應瞭解,第六連接構件63f可組態成為有本文所 述之類型的任何適當連接構件或任何適當替代連接構 件,其係係經組態成可使連接繩股59的第一部份12〇 附接至連接繩股59的第二部份121。根據圖示實施 例,第六連接構件63f包含結,例如有上述類型的結 66f。特別是,連接繩股59的第一及第二部份中之一 個,例如第-部份120,可定義結66的支柱端附, 以及連接繩股59的第一及第二部份中之另一個可定 義結66的自由端7〇f。因此,連接繩股%及可與連 接繩股/9整合或與連接繩股59分離及附接的連接器 63f可定義封閉線圈204。相對於第二部份121,第一 部份120可平移穿過結66f,以便在結66f處於解鎖組 態時’減少線圈204的大小。 因此,在操作期間,在各個結66a、66b處於解鎖 組態時’致動力F可施加至第—及第二致動繩股他 98 201210564 及38b的致動部份131a、131b,使得致動部份131a、 131b各自相對於附接部份133a、133b可各自滑動穿 過結66a、66b。因此,當致動力f各自施加至第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b的致動部份I31a、13lb時, 用上述方式驅使對應的錯體28a、28b由第一組態運動 至擴展組態。 接下來’鎖定力可施加至結66a、66b的自由部份 70b以便驅使結66a、66b至鎖定組態以及使錨體2如、 28b固定於擴展組態。例如,鎖定力可直接施加至結 66a、66b的自由部份70b。替換地,接近力AF可施 加至致動繩股38a及38b,從而造成鎖定力可施加至 弟一及第二結66a、66b的自由部份70b。 例如,如上述,可組態處於解鎖組態的結66f, 使知相對於連接繩股的第二部份121,連接繩股59的 第一部份120可平移穿過結66f,從而減少線圈2〇4 的大小以及產生張力於線圈204中。因此,連接繩股 %施加接近力AF至第一及第二致動繩股38&至b, 特另】疋至弟一及第二致動繩股至b的附接部份 133a、l33b。因此’接近力AF可造成可定義結66&、 66b之自由部份70b的第一及第二附接部份133a、133b 施加拉伸鎖定力至結66a至b,從而驅使結66a至b 至各自的鎖定組態。接近力AF進一步偏壓第一及第 了致動繩股38a至b,從而第一及第二錨體28a、28b 以使它向對方移動,從而使間隙24c接近。此外,一 一間隙24c已接近,持續施力至連接繩股%的第一部 99 201210564 份120可造成線圈204中有足夠的張力而造成第一及 第二錨體28a、28b在第一及第二錨體28a、28b之間 的位置處可施加壓縮力至解剖結構24。因此,錨體 28a、2訃施加壓縮力至間隙24c,可使間隙2如保持 接近狀態。拉伸鎖定力可施加至連接繩股59的第二部 份121以便驅使結66f至鎖定組態,從而固定線圈2糾 的大小以及維持反抗錨22a、22b的偏壓力。 5月參考第33A圖至第33B圖,錯組件2〇可包含 組態成為第一及第二結66a、66b的第一及第二連接構 件63a、63b,其係使致動部份131a至b附接至對應 的附接部份133a至b如以上在說明第32A圖至第32(: 圖時所述。此外,如上述,第三及第四連接構件6沘 至d可由第二致動繩股38b定義,以及.可組態成為孔 眼,例如例如有以上在說明第2H圖時提及之類型的 孔眼72,然而應瞭解,根據描述於本文的任何實施例 或任何適當替代實施例可用替代方式構成該孔眼。 特別是,錨組件20可包含附接於第一及第二致動 繩股38a及38b之間的至少一連接構件。例如,可組 態成為第五連接構件63e的至少一連接器可包含至少 連接繩如,例如相互附接且進一步附接於第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b之間的第一連接繩股與第 二連接繩股59b。因此,可以說,錨組件2〇可包含經 組態成可直接或間接地附接至第一及第二致動繩股中 之至少一或兩者的至少一連接繩股5 9。例如,根據圖 示實施例,第一連接繩股59a直接附接至第一致動繩 100 201210564 股38a,以及第二連接繩股59b直接附接至第二致動 繩股38b。根據圖示實施例,第一及第二連接繩股59a 至b各自附接至定義滑動構件47之第一及第二致動繩 股38a至b的孔眼72,如上述,滑動構件47允許第 一及第二致動繩股59a至b各自與致動繩股38a至b 相對滑動。因此,第一連接繩股59a經由第二連接繩 股59b間接附接至第二致動繩股38b,以及第二連接 繩股59b經由第二連接繩股59a間接附接至第二致動 繩股38b。儘管連接構件63c、63d與各自的致動繩股 整合’應瞭解,連接構件63c、63d替換地或附加地可 與各自的連接繩股59a、59b整合。更應瞭解,錨組件 20可包含與第一連接繩股59a、第一致動繩股38a分 離及與附接於其間的輔助連接構件77,以及與第二連 接繩股59b、第二致動繩股38b分離及與附接於其間 的輔助連接構件77。 因此,錨組件20可包含至少一線,其係經組態成 可直接或間接地使第一及第二錨22a、22b(包括各自 的第一及第二錨體28a、28b,包含各自的第一及第二 可擴展部份36a、36b)越過間隙24c相互附接。該至少 一線可為錨22a、22b中之至少一或兩者的致動繩股, 或可為與致動繩股38a及38b分離的線。例如,應瞭 解’在有些具體實施例中’致動繩股38a及38b在錨 體28a、28b已由第一組態致動至擴展組態後可移除, 以及至少一連接構件可直接或間接地附接至第一及第 一錨體28a、28b中之至少一或兩者以便越過間隙24c 101 201210564 附接錨體28a、28b。 根據圖示實施例,錯組件20可包含至少一(例如 複數個)連接構件63,其係可使第—及第三連接繩股 59a 59b的伤相互附接。根據圖示實施例,第一連 接繩股59a定義第-部份12Ga與第二部份i2u,以 及第二連接繩股59b定義第一部份i2〇b與第二部份 121b。s亥至少一連接構件可使第一連接繩股5如的第 一及第二部份120a、12la中之至少一或兩者附接至第 二連接繩股59b的第一及第二部份12〇b、121b中之至 少一或兩者,從而使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b 經由連接繩股59a至b間接地附接在一起。 根據圖示實施例,第一連接繩股59a被折疊穿過 從而延伸穿過第一致動繩股38a的孔眼72以便定義第 一連接繩股59a中相互隔開的第一及第二部份12〇a、 121 a ’使得第一致動繩股38a的孔眼72可分開第一及 第二部份120a、121a。同樣’第二連接繩股5%被折 疊穿過從而延伸穿過第二致動繩股38b的孔眼72以便 疋義弟一連接繩股59b中相互隔開的第一及第二部份 120b、121b ’使得第二致動繩股38b的孔眼72可分開 第一及第二部份120b、121b。第一連接繩股59a的第 一及第二部份120a、121a向第二錯22b延伸,以及第 二致動繩股38b的第一及第二部份120b、121b向第— 錨22a延伸。應瞭解,連接繩股59a、59b中之任一或 兩者可與各自的致動繩股38a及38b整合’以及可延 伸穿過錨之孔眼,例如孔眼90或以任何替代方式構成 102 201210564 之孔眼,如本文所述。 第一及第二連接繩股59a至b經由有本文所述之 類型的任何適當連接器在一或更多位置可相互附接。 例如,第一連接繩股59b可編織穿過另一線,例如第 二連接繩股59b,以便使第一錨22a附接至第二錨 22b。應瞭解,例如在其中第二致動繩股38b不定義孔 眼的具體實施例中,第一連接繩股59a可編織穿過第 二致動繩股38b以便附接第一及第二錨22a至b。根 據圖示實施例,在兩個不同的位置,第二連接繩股59b 的第一部份120b可編織或以其他方式絞接穿過第一 連接繩股59a的第一部份120a以便定義各自的第一及 第二絞結134a至b,以及兩個不同的位置,第一連接 繩股59a的第一部份120a可編織或以其他方式絞接穿 過第二連接繩股59b的第一部份120b以便定義各自的 第三及第四絞結134c至d。因此,應瞭解,錨組件20 可包含在一或更多位置可相互附接的至少一(例如複 數個)連接繩股。例如,複數個連接繩股中之每一可在 一或更多絞結(例如,絞結134a至d)相互附接。 根據圖示實施例,第一絞結134a可由第二連接繩 股59b的第一部份120b以及第一連接繩股59a的第一 部份120a定義。特別是,依所欲次數,沿著例如離開 對應第一錨體28a及朝向第二錨體28b的方向,第二 連接繩股59b的第一部份i2〇b可編織穿過第一連接繩 股59a的第一部份i2〇a以便定義附接第一及第二連接 繩股59a至b從而也附接第一及第二錨22a至b的第 103 201210564 一絞結134a。儘管如圖示第二連接織股59b的第一部 份120b可編織穿過第一連接繩股59a的第一部份 120a,應瞭解,第二連接繩股59b的第—部份12〇b 中之一段可在第一連接繩股59a的第一部份12〇a内沿 著第一部份120a的延伸方向延伸’使得第—部份12〇a 沿著第一部份120b中之該段的長度圍繞該段,例如如 以上在說明第19G圖至第19H圖時所述。第二連接繩 股59b的第一部份120b離開第一連接繩股59a的第一 部份120a以便定義第二連接繩股59b的第一終端部份 141b。 第二絞結134b可由第二連接繩股59b的第二部份 121b及第一連接繩股59a的第二部份I21a定義,例 如,依所欲次數,沿著例如離開對應第一錨體28a以 及朝向第二錨體28b的方向,第二連接繩股59b的第 二部份121b可編織穿過第一連接繩股59a的第二部份 121a以便定義附接第一及第二連接繩股59a至b從而 也附接第一及第二錨22a至b的第二絞結134b。儘管 如圖示第二連接繩股59b的第二部份121b可編織穿過 第一連接繩股59a的第二部份121a,應瞭解,第二連 接繩股59b的第二部份121b中之一段可在第一連接繩 股59a的第二部份121a内沿著第二部份121a的延伸 方向延伸,使得第二部份121a沿著第二部份121b中 之該段的長度圍繞該段,例如如以上在說明第19G圖 至第19H圖時所述。第二連接繩股59b的第二部份 121b離開第一連接繩股59a的第二部份121a以便定 104 201210564 義第二連接繩股59b的第二終端部份141b,。 第一及第二終端部份141b及141b,可定義彼此分 離及隔開的自由端’亦即彼此脫離,或替換地直接^ 經由有本文所述之類型的任何適當連接構件63或^ 何適當以替代方式構成之連接構件63間接地相互附 接。例如,根據圖示實施例,錯組件2〇可定義由第一 及第二終端部份14沁及141b,定義的結,例如有上: 類型的結66。例如,終端部份中之一個,例如第一終 端部份141b可定義結66的支柱端68,以及終端部份 中之另-個’例如第二終端部份141b,可定義結66的 自由端。因此,當結66處於解鎖组態時,第一終端部 伤141b相對於第一終端部份141b,可平移穿過結%。 鎖疋力用上述方式可施加至由第二終端部份141b,定 義的自由部份70b以便驅使結66至鎖定組態使得第一 終端部份141b通過結66可平移地固定於第二終端部 份 141b1。 第二纹結134c可由第—連接繩股的第一部份 120a及第二連接繩股59b的第一部份12〇b定義。特 別是,依所欲次數,沿著例如離開對應第二錨體28b 及朝向第一錨體28a的方向,第一連接繩股59&的第 一部份120a可編織穿過第二連接繩股5%的第 一部份 120b以便定義附接第-及第二連接繩股別至b從而 也附接第一及第一錨22a至b的第三絞結i34c。儘管 如圖不第一連接繩股59a的第一部份12〇a可編織穿過 第二連接繩股59b的第一部份12〇b,應瞭解,第一連 105 201210564 接繩股59a的第一部份12〇a中之—段可在第二連接繩 股59b的第一部份i2〇b内沿著第一部份12〇b的延伸 方向延伸,使得第一部份120b沿著第一部份i20a中 之5玄段的長度圍繞該段,例如如以上在說明第19G圖 至第19H圖時所述。第一連接繩股59a的第一部份 120a離開第二連接繩股5%的第一部份120b以便定 義第一連接繩股59a的第一終端部份i41a。 該第四絞結134d可由第一連接繩股59a的第二部 份121a及第二連接繩股59b的第二部份121b定義。 例如’依所欲次數,沿著例如離開對應第二錨體28b 及朝向第一i苗體28a的方向,第一連接繩股59a的第 二部份12la可編織穿過第二連接繩股59b的第二部份 121b以便定義附接第一及第二連接繩股5如至b從而 也附接第一及第二錨22a至b的第四絞結I34d。儘管 如圖示第一連接繩股59a的第二部份i2la可編織穿過 第一連接繩股59b的第二部份121b,應瞭解,第一連 接繩股59a的第二部份121a中之一段可在第二連接繩 股59b的第二部份121b内沿著第二部份12lb延伸方 向延伸’使得第二部份121b沿著第二部份121a中之 該段的長度圍繞該段,例如如以上在說明第19G圖至 第19H圖時所述。第一連接繩股59a的第二部份121a 離開第二連接繩股59b的第二部份121b以便定義第一 連接繩股59a的第二終端部份141a'。 第一及第二終端部份141a及141a,可定義彼此分 離及隔開的自由端’亦即彼此脫離,或替換地直接或 106 201210564Referring to Figures 32A through 32B, the anchor assembly 20 can include first and second attachments a 63b that become the first and second junctions 66a, 66b that attach the actuation portions i3ia through b to Corresponding to the attachment portions 133a to b, as described above in the description of FIGS. 31A to C. Further, as described above in the description of FIGS. 31A to 31C 95 201210564, the 'third and fourth connecting members 63c, 63_ state become any riding device or any suitable replacement connector having the surface described herein. . - for example, 'the third connecting member 63c may be defined by the second actuating strand m' and configurable as an eyelet' for example having the eyelet 72 of the type mentioned above in the description of Figure 2h, however, it should be understood that Any of the embodiments or any suitable alternative embodiment may constitute the aperture in an alternative manner, as described above in the description of Figures 31A through 3ic. Thus, the third connecting member 63e& eyelet may be defined by the actuating strand 38b, the inscription 28b, or the attachment member, such as the attachment member 82 configured to be attachable to the tin body 28b (refer to Figures 6a through 6b figure). According to the illustrated embodiment, the second attachment portion 133b can be extended by the connecting member 63b to define the free portion m of the second junction _ in the above manner. The second attachment portion 133b can further define the aperture 72° such that the 'third connection member 63e is configured such that the second actuation strand can be used in the direct manner described above or as shown in FIG. 32A to FIG. Indirect means attached to the first actuating stock. In addition, the fourth connecting member 63d can be defined by the first actuating strand 38a and can also be configured as an eyelet, for example with the eyelet 72 of the type mentioned above in the description of the figure, however, it should be understood that according to the stroke Any of the embodiments herein or any suitable alternative embodiment may constitute the aperture in an alternative manner, as described above in the description of FIGS. 31 to 31C. The aperture of the fourth connecting member (four) may be actuated. 38a, the first-displaced body 28a, or an attachment member definition, for example, the attachment member 82 attached to the wrong body 28a via the group 2 (refer to Figure 28A Figure 96 201210564 to Figure 28C). According to the illustrated embodiment, the first attachment portion 133a can be extended by the first connecting member 63a to define the free portion 7b of the first knot 66a in the manner described above. The first attachment portion 133& can further define the aperture 72. Accordingly, the fourth connecting member 63d is configured to allow the first actuating strands 38b to be attached to the first actuating strands 38a in the direct manner described above or in an indirect manner as shown in Figs. 32A through 32C. In particular, the anchor assembly 20 can include at least one connecting member, such as a fifth connecting member 63e, configured as an auxiliary connecting member 77, such as a connection between the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. Rope 59. The connecting strands 59 can be provided as sutures or as a line of any suitable construction as desired. Accordingly, the anchor assembly 2 can include at least one connecting member, such as a sixth connecting member 63f, which can be configured to attach and secure the connecting strands 59 to the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, thereby The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are attached and fixed to each other. According to the illustrated embodiment, the sixth connecting member 03f attaches the first portion 120 of the connecting strand 59 to the second portion 121 of the connecting strand 59 to pass the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b via The connecting strands 59 are indirectly attached together. Thus, unless otherwise stated, it will be appreciated that any of the aforementioned connecting members 63 that can attach the first actuation strand 38a to the second actuation strand 38b can also attach the first portion 120 of the connecting strand 59. Connected to the second portion 121 of the connecting strand. Alternatively or additionally, the anchor assembly 2A can include a connector that attaches the first portion 120 of the connecting strand 59 to the first anchor body 28a, and attaches the second portion 121 of the connecting strand 59 to a second connecting member of the second anchor body 28b. For example, the eyelet 72 of the first actuating strand 38a can attach the 97 201210564 connecting strand 59 to the first anchor body 28a, and the eyelet 72 of the second actuating strand 38b can attach the connecting strand 59 to the first Two anchor bodies 28b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first portion no of the connecting strand 59 extends through the eyelet 72 of the first actuating strand 38a, and the second portion 121 of the connecting strand extends through the second actuating strand 38b The apertures 72 are such that the first and second portions 12, 121 are slidably attached to the respective apertures 72, thereby defining the sliding member 47. The sixth connector 63e attaches the first portion 120 of the connecting strand 59 to the second portion 121 of the connecting strand 59, thereby attaching the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand, thereby The first anchor 22a is attached to the second anchor 22a. It will be appreciated that the sixth connecting member 63f can be configured as any suitable connecting member of the type described herein or any suitable alternative connecting member that is configured to enable the first portion 12 of the connecting strand 59 to be Attached to the second portion 121 of the connecting strand 59. According to the illustrated embodiment, the sixth connecting member 63f includes a knot, such as a knot 66f of the type described above. In particular, one of the first and second portions of the connecting strand 59, such as the first portion 120, defines the post end of the knot 66 and the first and second portions of the connecting strand 59. The other can define the free end 7〇f of the junction 66. Thus, the connecting strands % and the connector 63f that can be integrated with or disconnected from the connecting strands 9 can define the closed coil 204. Relative to the second portion 121, the first portion 120 can translate through the junction 66f to reduce the size of the coil 204 when the junction 66f is in the unlocked configuration. Thus, during operation, the actuation force F can be applied to the actuation portions 131a, 131b of the first and second actuation strands 98 201210564 and 38b when the respective knots 66a, 66b are in the unlocked configuration, such that actuation Portions 131a, 131b can each slide through knots 66a, 66b relative to attachment portions 133a, 133b. Therefore, when the actuation forces f are each applied to the actuation portions I31a, 13lb of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, the corresponding dislocations 28a, 28b are driven from the first configuration to the extension in the manner described above. configuration. Next, a locking force can be applied to the free portion 70b of the knots 66a, 66b to drive the knots 66a, 66b to the locked configuration and to secure the anchors 2, 28b to the expanded configuration. For example, the locking force can be applied directly to the free portion 70b of the knots 66a, 66b. Alternatively, the proximity force AF can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, thereby causing a locking force to be applied to the free portions 70b of the first and second junctions 66a, 66b. For example, as described above, the knot 66f in the unlocked configuration can be configured such that the first portion 120 of the connecting strand 59 can translate through the knot 66f relative to the second portion 121 of the connecting strand, thereby reducing the coil The size of 2〇4 and the tension generated in the coil 204. Therefore, the connecting strands % apply the proximity force AF to the first and second actuating strands 38 & to b, and in particular to the attachment portions 133a, l33b of the first and second actuating strands to b. Thus, the proximity force AF can cause the first and second attachment portions 133a, 133b of the free portion 70b of the definable knot 66 & 66b to exert a tensile locking force to the knots 66a-b, thereby driving the knots 66a-b to The respective lock configuration. The proximity force AF further biases the first and second actuating strands 38a-b such that the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b move it toward each other, thereby bringing the gap 24c into proximity. In addition, the gaps 24c are close to each other, and the first portion 99 of the connecting strands is continuously applied to the first portion 99 201210564 parts 120, which may cause sufficient tension in the coil 204 to cause the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b to be in the first A compressive force can be applied to the anatomical structure 24 at a location between the second anchor bodies 28a, 28b. Therefore, the anchor bodies 28a, 2 讣 apply a compressive force to the gap 24c, so that the gap 2 can be kept close. A tensile locking force can be applied to the second portion 121 of the connecting strand 59 to drive the knot 66f to the locked configuration, thereby fixing the size of the coil 2 and maintaining the biasing force against the anchors 22a, 22b. Referring to Figures 33A through 33B in May, the wrong component 2A can include first and second connecting members 63a, 63b configured as first and second junctions 66a, 66b, such that the actuating portion 131a is b attached to the corresponding attachment portions 133a to b as described above in the description of FIGS. 32A to 32 (: FIG. Further, as described above, the third and fourth connecting members 6A to d may be second The wick 38b is defined, and can be configured as an aperture, such as, for example, the aperture 72 of the type mentioned above in the description of FIG. 2H, however, it should be understood that any embodiment or any suitable alternative embodiment described herein can be used. The eyelet may be constructed in an alternative manner. In particular, the anchor assembly 20 may include at least one connecting member attached between the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. For example, it may be configured as a fifth connecting member 63e. The at least one connector may include at least a connecting cord such as, for example, a first connecting strand and a second connecting strand 59b that are attached to each other and further attached between the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. It can be said that the anchor assembly 2 can be configured to be directly or indirectly Attached to at least one connecting strand 59 of at least one or both of the first and second actuating strands. For example, according to the illustrated embodiment, the first connecting strand 59a is directly attached to the first actuation The cord 100 201210564 strand 38a, and the second connecting strand 59b are directly attached to the second actuating strand 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second connecting strands 59a-b are each attached to a defined sliding member 47. The apertures 72 of the first and second actuation strands 38a-b, as described above, allow the first and second actuation strands 59a-b to slide relative to the actuation strands 38a-b, respectively. The first connecting strand 59a is indirectly attached to the second actuating strand 38b via the second connecting strand 59b, and the second connecting strand 59b is indirectly attached to the second actuating strand 38b via the second connecting strand 59a Although the connecting members 63c, 63d are integrated with the respective actuating strands, it should be understood that the connecting members 63c, 63d may alternatively or additionally be integrated with the respective connecting strands 59a, 59b. It will be appreciated that the anchor assembly 20 may comprise Separating from and attached to the first connecting strand 59a, the first actuating strand 38a The connecting member 77, and the auxiliary connecting member 77 separated from and attached to the second connecting strand 59b, the second actuating strand 38b. Accordingly, the anchor assembly 20 can include at least one wire configured to be Directly or indirectly, the first and second anchors 22a, 22b (including the respective first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b, including the respective first and second expandable portions 36a, 36b) are attached to each other across the gap 24c. The at least one line may be an actuating strand of at least one or both of the anchors 22a, 22b, or may be a separate line from the actuating strands 38a and 38b. For example, it should be understood that in some embodiments 'The actuation strands 38a and 38b are removable after the anchor bodies 28a, 28b have been actuated from the first configuration to the expanded configuration, and at least one connecting member can be attached directly or indirectly to the first and first anchors At least one or both of the bodies 28a, 28b are adapted to attach the anchors 28a, 28b across the gap 24c 101 201210564. According to the illustrated embodiment, the faulty assembly 20 can include at least one (e.g., a plurality) of connecting members 63 that can attach the injuries of the first and third connecting strands 59a 59b to one another. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first connecting strand 59a defines the first portion 12Ga and the second portion i2u, and the second connecting strand 59b defines the first portion i2〇b and the second portion 121b. At least one connecting member of the first connecting strand, such as at least one or both of the first and second portions 120a, 12la of the first connecting strand 5, is attached to the first and second portions of the second connecting strand 59b At least one or both of 12〇b, 121b such that the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are indirectly attached together via the connecting strands 59a-b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the first connecting strand 59a is folded through to extend through the eyelet 72 of the first actuating strand 38a to define first and second portions of the first connecting strand 59a that are spaced apart from each other. 12A, 121a' allows the apertures 72 of the first actuation strand 38a to separate the first and second portions 120a, 121a. Similarly, the second connecting strand 5% is folded through to extend through the eyelet 72 of the second actuating strand 38b so that the first and second portions 120b, 121b of the connecting strand 59b are spaced apart from each other. 'The aperture 72 of the second actuation strand 38b is such that the first and second portions 120b, 121b can be separated. The first and second portions 120a, 121a of the first connecting strand 59a extend toward the second error 22b, and the first and second portions 120b, 121b of the second actuating strand 38b extend toward the first anchor 22a. It will be appreciated that either or both of the connecting strands 59a, 59b can be integrated with the respective actuating strands 38a and 38b and can extend through the aperture of the anchor, such as the aperture 90 or in any alternative form 102 201210564 Eyelet, as described herein. The first and second connecting strands 59a-b can be attached to each other at one or more locations via any suitable connector of the type described herein. For example, the first connecting strand 59b can be woven through another line, such as the second connecting strand 59b, to attach the first anchor 22a to the second anchor 22b. It will be appreciated that, for example, in a particular embodiment in which the second actuation strand 38b does not define an eyelet, the first attachment strand 59a can be woven through the second actuation strand 38b to attach the first and second anchors 22a to b. According to the illustrated embodiment, at two different locations, the first portion 120b of the second connecting strand 59b can be woven or otherwise spliced through the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59a to define a respective First and second strands 134a-b, and two different positions, the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59a can be woven or otherwise spliced through the first of the second connecting strand 59b Portion 120b is used to define respective third and fourth strands 134c through d. Accordingly, it should be appreciated that the anchor assembly 20 can include at least one (e.g., a plurality) of connecting strands that can be attached to one another at one or more locations. For example, each of the plurality of connecting strands may be attached to each other at one or more strands (e.g., strands 134a through d). According to the illustrated embodiment, the first hinge 134a can be defined by the first portion 120b of the second connecting strand 59b and the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59a. In particular, the first portion i2〇b of the second connecting strand 59b can be woven through the first connecting strand in a direction away from, for example, the corresponding first anchor body 28a and toward the second anchor body 28b, as desired. The first portion i2〇a of the strand 59a is defined to define a 103 201210564 twisted knot 134a that attaches the first and second connecting strands 59a-b to thereby also attach the first and second anchors 22a-b. Although the first portion 120b of the second connecting woven strand 59b can be woven through the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59a as illustrated, it should be understood that the first portion 12b of the second connecting strand 59b One of the segments may extend along the extending direction of the first portion 120a in the first portion 12a of the first connecting strand 59a such that the first portion 12a is along the first portion 120b. The length of the segment surrounds the segment, for example as described above in the description of Figures 19G through 19H. The first portion 120b of the second connecting strand 59b exits the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59a to define the first terminal portion 141b of the second connecting strand 59b. The second hinge 134b may be defined by the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b and the second portion I21a of the first connecting strand 59a, for example, along the desired number of times, for example, away from the corresponding first anchor body 28a And in a direction toward the second anchor body 28b, the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b can be woven through the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a to define the attachment of the first and second connecting strands 59a to b thus also attach the second hinge 134b of the first and second anchors 22a to b. Although the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b can be woven through the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a, it should be understood that the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b is One segment may extend along the extending direction of the second portion 121a in the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a such that the second portion 121a surrounds the segment along the length of the segment in the second portion 121b For example, as described above in the description of the 19Gth to 19thth drawings. The second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b exits the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a to define the second terminal portion 141b of the second connecting strand 59b. The first and second terminal portions 141b and 141b may define free ends that are separated and spaced apart from each other, i.e., detached from one another, or alternatively directly via any suitable connecting member 63 of the type described herein or suitably The connecting members 63 which are formed in an alternative manner are indirectly attached to each other. For example, in accordance with the illustrated embodiment, the faulty component 2 can define a junction defined by the first and second terminal portions 14A and 141b, such as a junction 66 of the type: For example, one of the terminal portions, for example, the first terminal portion 141b can define the leg end 68 of the junction 66, and the other terminal portion of the terminal portion, such as the second terminal portion 141b, can define the free end of the junction 66. . Thus, when the junction 66 is in the unlocked configuration, the first terminal portion injury 141b can be translated through the junction % relative to the first terminal portion 141b. The locking force can be applied to the free portion 70b defined by the second terminal portion 141b in the manner described above to drive the junction 66 to the locked configuration such that the first terminal portion 141b is translatably fixed to the second terminal portion by the junction 66. Part 141b1. The second knot 134c can be defined by the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand and the first portion 12〇b of the second connecting strand 59b. In particular, the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59& can be woven through the second connecting strand, along the desired number of times, for example, away from the corresponding second anchor body 28b and toward the first anchor body 28a. The first portion 120b of 5% defines a third yoke i34c that attaches the first and second connecting strands to b to also attach the first and first anchors 22a-b. Although the first portion 12〇a of the first connecting strand 59a can be woven through the first portion 12〇b of the second connecting strand 59b, it should be understood that the first joint 105 201210564 is connected to the strand 59a. The first portion 12a can extend along the extending direction of the first portion 12〇b in the first portion i2〇b of the second connecting strand 59b such that the first portion 120b follows The length of the 5th segment in the first portion i20a surrounds the segment, for example as described above in the description of Figures 19G through 19H. The first portion 120a of the first connecting strand 59a exits the first portion 120b of the second connecting strand 5% to define the first terminal portion i41a of the first connecting strand 59a. The fourth hinge 134d can be defined by the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a and the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b. For example, the second portion 12la of the first connecting strand 59a may be woven through the second connecting strand 59b along the direction of, for example, leaving the corresponding second anchor body 28b and toward the first i-body 28a, as desired. The second portion 121b defines a fourth hinge I34d that attaches the first and second connecting strands 5, such as to b, thereby also attaching the first and second anchors 22a-b. Although the second portion i2la of the first connecting strand 59a can be woven through the second portion 121b of the first connecting strand 59b as illustrated, it should be understood that the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a is A section may extend along the direction in which the second portion 12b extends in the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b such that the second portion 121b surrounds the segment along the length of the segment in the second portion 121a, For example, as described above in the description of the 19Gth to 19thth drawings. The second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a exits the second portion 121b of the second connecting strand 59b to define a second terminal portion 141a' of the first connecting strand 59a. The first and second terminal portions 141a and 141a may define free ends that are separated and spaced apart from each other, i.e., detached from each other, or alternatively directly or 106 201210564

66。鎖定力用上述方式可施加至由第:終端部份ΐ4ι&, 定義的自由部份70b以便驅使結66至鎖定組態使得第 使得第 二終端 —終端部份141a通過結66可平移地固定於第 部份141a'。 在操作期間,第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b各 自可接受致動力F而造成在結66a、66b各自處於解鎖 組態時錨體28a、28b各自由第一組態運動至擴展組 態。如圖示,致動力F分別在第一及第二致動部份 131a、131b可直接施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a及 38b,或分別第一及第二連接構件63a、63b的上游位 置可施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a、38b。然後,藉 由施加拉伸鎖定力分別至致動繩股38的附接部份 133a至b ’可鎖定結66a至b。替換地,該拉伸鎮定 力可由接近力AF施加,此時將加以描述。 例如’一旦錨體28a、28b已各自致動至擴展組態 後’第一及第二連接繩股59a、59b的第一及第二終端 107 201210564 部份141a、141b中之每一各自可接受產生連接繩股 59a、59b中之張力的接近力AF,從而施加接近力AF 至致動繩股38a及38b以及使錨22a至b中之至少一 或兩者從而各自的錨體28a至b向對方偏壓至偏壓位 置以便使間隙24c接近。應瞭解,產生於連接繩股 59a、59b的張力進一步使孔眼72有張力。由於孔眼 72由各自的附接部份133a至b定義,產生於孔眼72 的張力會反抗各自的結66a至b產生驅使結66a至b 至鎖定組態的拉力。 此外,由於第一及第二連接繩股59a至b在張力 上回應接近力AF的施加,第一連接繩股59a例如在 第一及第二絞結134a至b處可施加壓縮力至第二連接 繩股59b。特別是,第一連接繩股59a的第一部份i2〇a 在第一纹結134a處可施加壓縮力至第二連接繩股5外 的第一部份120b,以及第一連接繩股59a的第二部份 121a在第二絞結i34b處可施加壓縮力至第二連接繩 股59b的第二部份nib。由第一連接繩股59a施加至 第二連接繩股59b的壓縮力可減少或防止第二連接繩 股59b在絞結134a至b處對於第一連接繩股的平 移。 另外,第二連接繩股59b例如在第三及第四絞結 134c至d處可施加壓縮力至第一連接繩股59a。特別 是,第二連接繩股59b的第—部份12Gb在第三絞結 134c處可施加壓縮力至第一連接繩股的第一部份 120a,以及第二連接繩股59b的第二部份i2ib在第四 108 201210564 =結134a處可施加壓縮力至第一連接繩股59&的第二 飾121a。自第二連接繩股59以加至第一連接繩股 祝的壓縮力可減少或防止第一連接繩股他各自在 以結134c至d處對於第二連接織股5%的平移。 旦間隙24c已接近,各自附接第一連接繩股5如 之第-及第二終端部份141&及14la,的結66可致動至 鎖定組態’藉此防止第一及第二部份12〇&、121&相對 ,移穿過結66。同樣’各自附接第二連接繩股59b之 第-及第二終端部份141b及141b,的結66可致動至 鎖疋組態,藉此防止第一及第二部份12〇b、db相對 平移穿過結66。 儘管圖不錨組件2〇包含可包含孔眼的至少一 麵,其係經由至少一整合連接構件越過缺損附接至第 二錨,應瞭解,該錨組件替換地或附加地可包含有本 文所述之類型的辅助連接構件以便使一錨的孔眼越過 解剖缺損附接至第二錯。 例如,請參考第34A圖至第34B圖,第一及第二 在田22a、22b中之至少一或兩者可包含有本文所述之類 型的任何適當孔眼或以任何替代方式構成的孔眼,例 如圖示實施例的孔眼72。錨組件1〇可進一步包含使 第一銷22a附接至第二錨22b的輔助連接構件77。例 如’辅助連接構件77可組態成為使第一錨22a附接至 第二錨22b的至少一鉤子,例如一對鉤子21〇a、21〇b。 根據一實施例’第—鉤子21〇a可定義對應的第一附接 端212a及第二嚙合端(engagement end)214a,以及第 109 201210564 二鉤子210b可定義第二附接端212b與第二嚙合端 214b。第一及第二附接端212a、212b可各自附接至致 動繩股38a及38b,例如由第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b定義的孔眼72。根據一實施例,附接端212a 至b可定義孔眼,以及各自的致動繩股38a至b,例 如附接部份131a至b,在構造各自的孔眼72期間, 可饋入穿過第一及第二附接端212a至b。替換地,第 一及第二附接端212a、212b可附接至預製孔眼72, 例如夾上’用黏著劑黏著或以其他方式附接。 嚙合端214a至b經組態成可相互配對以便使第一 鉤子210a附接至第二鉤子21 Ob,從而也使第一 |苗22a 附接至第二錫22b ’例如在鋪22a、22b已致動至擴展 組態後。根據一實施例,鉤子210a、210b可由形狀記 憶材料製成,例如你提諾(Nitinol),使得一旦鉤子 210a、210b配對’鉤子210a、210b會回復到與鉤子 210a、210b配對時之形狀不同的形狀。因此,鉤子21〇a 至b可定義配對時的第一形狀,以及在鉤子2i〇a至b 配對後與第一形狀不同的第二形狀。 例如’鉤子210a、210b可實質平放越過解剖結構 24。替換地,鉤子210a、210b可彼此配對後可保持它 們的形狀。鉤子210a至b可定義在錨22a至b之間延 伸的足夠長度使得鉤子210a至b在配對後即可施加接 近力至致動繩股38a至b而使錨體28a、28b中之至少 一或兩者向對方偏壓以便使間隙24c接近。替換地或 附加地,例如如果鉤子210a至b由形狀記憶材料製 110 201210564 成,例如你提諾’鉤子210a至b在錨22a至b之間的 長度在配對後可減少以便施加接近力至致動繩股38a 至b。因此應瞭解,輔助連接構件77可定義可使第一 及第二致動繩股38a、38b相互固定附接的鎖定構件, 以及也可施加接近力使錨22a、22b向對方偏壓以便使 間隙24c接近’以及使間隙24c保持接近狀態。 請參考第35A圖至第35C圖,辅助附接構件77 可組態成為實質如上述的連接繩股59,它可定義與連 接繩股之第一及第二部份12〇、121整合的連接構件 63。根據圖示實施例,連接繩股59可定義第一及第二 致動繩股38a至b的孔眼72之間延伸的中間部份 123。連接繩股59饋入穿過或以其他方式延伸穿過孔 眼72使得第一及第二部份12〇、121由孔眼72伸出以 及被組悲成可相互附接。例如’第一及第二部份12〇、 121中之至少一者,例如如圖示的第一部份12〇,可帶 有倒刺,從而定義向外突出各有前端216a與尾端216b 的棘齒216。第一及第二部份120、121中之另一,例 如如圖示的第一部份121,可定義至少一擎子構件 218’其係經組態成可與棘齒216配對以便使第一部份 120附接至第二部份12卜例如,掣子構件us可組態 成為由第—及第二部份120、121中之-個定義的孔口 孔二220可切穿第二部份121,如第35B圖所示, 它可=第二部份丨21的纖維之間的空隙222定義,例 如在第一°卩份為網目223或編結結構,或適合接受帶 有倒刺之第1份12G之空隙222的任何替代結構 111 201210564 時。應暸解,替換地可按需要組態掣子構件218。 在操作期間,第一及第二錨22aib可用上述方 式致動至擴展組態,以及在錨22&至b致動之前或之 後,連接繩股59可饋入穿過各自的孔眼72。第一部 伤120的棘齒216可與第二部份21〇的掣子構件218 配對使得連接繩股59定義封閉線圈2〇4。例如,帶有 倒刺的第一部份210可饋入穿過第二部份121的孔口 220以便使第一部份12〇附接至第二部份121,從而也 使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致動繩股38b。可組 態棘齒216的前端216a及尾端216b以便允許第一部 伤120貫質沿著造成線圈204之大小減少的方向相對 於第二部份121行進,以及防止第一部份12〇實質沿 著造成線圈204之大小增加的反方向相對於第二部份 121行進。隨者線圈204的大小減少,連接繩股59施 加接近力至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b而使第一 及第二錨向對方偏壓以便使間隙24c接近。因此應瞭 解,圖示於第34A圖至第34B圖的連接構件可定義有 本文所述之類型的滑動構件及鎖定構件。 請參考第35D圖,輔助附接構件77可組態成為 彈簧構件224,其係經組態成可附接於第一及第二致 動繩股38a及38b之間,從而於第一及第二錨22a、 22b之間。彈簧構件D4可組態成為如圖示的盤簧, 或以任何替代方式構成的彈簧構件而在附接於鐵 22a、22b之間時’其彈簧常數可使錨22a、22b向辦 方偏壓。例如,彈簧構件224可組態成為彈性線或住 112 201210564 何替代方式適當構成的彈簧構件224。彈簀構件224 可定義第一及第二附接端224a、224b,其經組態成可 各自附接至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b。例如, 附接端224a至b可定義孔眼,及各自的致動繩股38a 至b’例如附接部份131a至b,在各個孔眼72的構造 期間,它可饋入穿過第一及第二附接端212a至b。替 換地’第一及第二附接端212a、212b可附接至預製孔 眼72 ’例如夾上、黏著劑黏著,或以其他方式附接。 替換地’第一及第二附接端214a至b可與致動繩股 38a及38b整合’藉此將彈簣構件224定義成為辅助 繩股構件33(定義可彼此整合之第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b)的彈性部份。 在操作期間,第一及第二錨22a至b可用上述方 式致動至擴展組態,以及在錯22a至b致動之前或之 後’彈簧構件224可附接至致動繩股38a及38b,從 而附接至銷體28a至b。彈簧構件224施加定義接近 力的彈簧力至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b而使第 一及第二錨向對方偏壓以便使間隙24c接近。 應瞭解’有本文所述之類型的連接構件63被組態 成可使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b相互附接,使 得接近力可施加至錨22a、22b而使錨22a、22b向對 方偏壓以便使間隙24c接近。請參考第36A圖至第36B 圖’也應瞭解,致動繩股38a及38b中之一個可與各 自的錨體28a、28b整合,以及致動繩股38a及38b 中之另一個可與各自的錨體28a、28b分離以及編織穿 113 201210564 過它以便使致動繩股附接至錨體。根據圖示實施例, 第二致動繩股38b與銷體28b整合,以及第一致動繩 股38a定義與第一銷體38a有關的辅助繩股33a。因 此,第二錨22b的整合致動繩股3补可定義第一錨的 辅助致動繩股38a。因此,如以上在說明第7A圖至第 7B圖時所述’第二猫體22b的第一部份41可定義各 自的致動部份131b及附接部份133b。此外,在輔助 繩股33移除後’有本文所述之類型的連接構件63可 直接附接至有本文所述之類型的任何孔眼,例如孔眼 90’如下文在說明第37A圖至第37B圖時所詳述的: 第二致動繩股38b的附接部份丨33b可與第一致動 繩股38a的附接部份133a整合。第一致動繩股38&可 用上述方式編織穿過錫體,使得第一鋪22a的第一致 動部份131a由第一錨體28a伸出以及用上述方式與第 一附接部份133a隔開。銷組件20可包含使第—致動 部份131a附接至輔助繩股33a之另一位置(例如,第 一及第二附接部份133a、133b中之任一或兩者)的連 接構件63。根據圖示貫施例’連接構件63使第—致 動部伤131a附接至第·~~附接部份133b°根據本文所 述任一具體實施例’可將連接構件63組態成適於使第 一致動部份131a直接或間接地附接至辅助繩股33a 的另一目標位置,例如第一及第二附接部份133a、 133b中之至少一或兩者。 根據圖示實施例,連接構件63被組態成為由第— 致動部份131a以及辅助繩股33a(可為第二附接部份 114 201210564 133b)的目標位罟& ★置疋義的結όό,如上述。第一致動部 1&可&義結66的紐端68,使得終端部份135a ώ I j伸出,以及第二致動繩股38b可定義結66的 自由端7 0。例如,哲一 rA & 戈弟二致動繩股38b中配置於結66、 二3之間的部份可定義自由端7G的靜態部份 :一致動繩股38b中配置於結66、第一錨體28a ,P伤可疋義自由端7〇的自由部份働。 =作期間,職可處於解鎖組減得支柱端 " 致動部份131a,相對於自由端7〇或第二致 動繩股38b,可湣叙认 J '月動穿過結66。因此,致動力F可施 加至第:致動部份131a,特別是施加至第—終端部份 5&這產生張力於第一及第二致動绳股38a及38b 中’從而驅使第-及第二錯22a、22b各自由第一組態 運動至擴展植態°接近力AF施加至第一致動部份 131a’,別是施加至第一終端部份13兄,進一步產生 張力於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中,從而使第 一及第一錨22a、22b向對方偏壓以及使間隙24c接 近。因此,接近力AF可為致動力F的延續。 如上述,錨組件20可包含附接於第一錨22a之第 一孔眼、第二錨22b之第二孔眼之間的連接構件63。 根據本文所述之任何適當實施例或任何適當替代實施 例’可構成第一及第二孔眼中之至少一或兩者。請參 考第37A圖至第43C圖,第一及第二孔眼中之至少一 或兩者可組態成為如以上在說明第9A圖至第12B圖 時所述的孔眼90。 115 201210564 例如,請參考第37A圖至第37D圖,以及如以上 在說明第9A圖至第9C圖時所述,辅助繩股33可延 伸穿過孔眼90以及可編織穿過錨體28以便定義孔眼 90在錨體28由第一組態致動至擴展組態時穿過錨體 28的路徑。此外,輔助繩股33可組態成為有助於錨 22附接至另一錨的部署線,或替換地或附加地可被組 態成為接受造成該銷一旦植入解剖結構24後即由第 一組態致動至擴展組態之致動力的致動繩股。 根據圖示實施例,錫組件20可包含各有孔眼 9〇a、90b的第一及第二錨22a、22b,其係致動至擴展 組態,如以上在說明第9A圖至第9C圖時所述。接下 來’錨22a至b中之一個的輔助繩股33可由各自的孔 眼90a至b卸下’以及錨22a至b中之另一的辅助繩 股33可饋入穿過錯22a至b中卸下辅助繩股的孔眼 90a至b。因此’錨中之一個的輔助繩股33可定義第 一致動繩股38a及第二致動繩股38b。替換地,錨22a、 22b兩者的輔助繩股90a至b可由各自的孔眼90a至b 卸下,以及新的辅助繩股33可饋入穿過孔眼90a、90b 兩者以便使第一錨22a、22b相互附接。因此,第37A 圖圖示的輔助繩股33係與錨體28a、28b分離以及延 伸穿過各自的孔眼90a、90b以便各自定義相互整合的 致動繩股38a及38b。 如第37B圖所示,可沿著各自的致動繩股38a及 38b,驅使錨體28a、28b各自由擴展組態運動至第一 組態。因此,致動繩股38a及38b延伸穿過錨體28a、 116 201210564 28b的同一個開孔,如以上在說明圖示於第9a圖至第 9C圖之輔助繩股33時所述。因此,致動繩股38a及 各自疋義第一及第二致動部份131a至b與第一及 第二附接部份133a至b。第一及第二致動部份131a 至b經組態成可各自接受用上述方式驅使錨體28a至 b運動至擴展組態的致動力F,以及第二致動部份133a 至b經組態成可相互附接。例如,第一及第二致動部 伤133a至b可彼此整合,或經由有本文所述之類型的 任何適當連接構件可附接。 繼續參考第37A圖至第37D圖,該錨組件可包含 連接構件63,其係可經組態成可附接至第一及第二致 動部份131a、131b ’從而使第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b相互附接’以及也使錨22a、22b相互附接。例 如根據圖示實施例以整合方式越過間隙24c,可附接 辅助繩股33的附接部份133a至b。 如上述’可定義滑動構件47與鎖定構件64中之 至少一者的連接構件63例如在連接點125處使第一及 第一致動繩股38a及38b附接在一起。此外,根據圖 示實施例’連接構件63可由輔助繩股33從而由致動 繩股38a及38b定義。因此,根據一實施例,連接構 件63可使第一致動繩股38a附接至第二致動繩股38b 同時致動繩股38a及38b有張力,以便使間隙24c保 持接近狀態。替換地或附加地,應瞭解,在使致動繩 股38a及38b有張力之前,因而在使間隙24c接近之 前,連接構件63可使第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b 117 201210564 相互附接。 根據圖示實施例,連接構件63由第—及第二致動 繩股38a及38b定義且與其整合。因此,致動繩股38a 及38b係直接相互附接。連接構件63在連接點125 處可定義滑動構件47及鎖定構件64。例如,連接構 件63可定義結66,可用以上在說明第4A圖至第吓 圖時所述的方式構造結6 6以及用致動繩股3 8 a及3 8 b 中之一或更多至所有來定義結66,然而應瞭解,該結 替換地可由致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一者與連接 繩股定義。替換地,例如在連接繩股附接至致動繩股 38a及38b時,結66可使連接繩股的數個部份相互附 接以便附接致動繩股38a及38b。根據圖示實施例, 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b定義結66。因此,至 少一部份連接構件63可與致動繩股38a及38b中之至 少一或兩者整合。 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之一個可定義 支柱端68 ’以及第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之 另一個可定義自由端70。根據圖示實施例,該第一致 動繩股’例如第一致動部份131a,定義支柱端68,以 及第二致動繩股38b,例如第二致動部份131b,定義 自由端70。自由端的自由部份70b可由第二致動繩股 135b的終端部份135b定義。同樣,第一致動繩股38a 的終端部份135a由結66伸出成為支柱端68。 在施加張力至致動繩股38a及38b而使第一及第 二銷22a、22b向對方偏壓以及使間隙24c接近之前, 118 201210564 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b可打成結66。一旦結 66形成,以及在結66處於解鎖組態時,致動力f可 施加至致動繩股38a及38b,特別是致動部份13la至 b,以便驅使各自的可擴展部份36由第一組態運動至 擴展組態。接下來,接近力AF可施加至第一致動繩 股38a的終端部份135a,其係定義支柱線68,從而造 成支柱端68滑動穿過結66以及使各自的錨,例如第 一錨22a,向另一錨拉,例如第二錨22b。一旦間隙 24c已接近,可使自由端70(例如,由第二致動繩股 38b的終端部份135b定義的)的自由線7〇b有張力二 便鎖定結66以及防止第一致動繩股38a平移穿過鈐 66,從而固定有張力的致動繩股38a及3此。 僵官運接構件63可組態成為結66,應瞭解, 換地按需要’根據贿於核的任何實糊或任 當替代連接H ’可組態連接構件63。此外,儘技^ 22a、22b中之每一圖示含有各自_接構件η,= 解,該等錫中之一個可包含附接構件82同時另二古 接辆合至各自的致動繩股38。 田 此外’請參考第37£圖,應瞭解,錯組件跗 之U2可包含用以上在說明第37A圖 圖日守所述之方式延伸穿過孔眼9〇 個或更多)致動繩股38山。例如,—曰=兩 致動至擴展組態使得孔眼9G由可擴展部^體28山已 出,複數個輔助繩股3Mb可插穿孔 ^突 錫體28沿著各自的致動繩請至b由擴展級= 119 201210564 至第一組態。因此,複數條致動繩股38a至b中之每 一延伸穿過銷體28的同一個開孔,如以上在說明圖示 於第9A圖至第9C圖之辅助繩股33時所述。應瞭解, 致動繩股38a至b可被組態成按需要可附接至其他錨 體或解剖位置。在這點上’應瞭解,按需要,複數條 致動繩股38a至b中之至少一者更可被稱為連接繩股。 凊參考第38A圖至第38C圖,如以上在說明第 37A圖至第37D圖時所述的錄組件20可包含經組態 成可附接致動繩股38a及38b中之至少一或兩者的複 數個連接構件63。根據圖示實施例,致動繩股38a及 38b皆由共同繩股定義,例如辅助繩股33,使得各自 的附接部份133a、133b相互整合。因此,根據圖示實 施例’第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b係相互整合。 錨組件20可包含經組態成可使致動部份i31a、131b 附接至共同繩股之其他位置從而相互附接的第一及第 二連接構件63a、63b。根據圖示實施例,第一連接構 件63a可使對應第一致動部份131a附接至辅助繩股33 中與第一致動部份131a隔開的另一位置。同樣,第二 連接構件63b可使對應第二致動部份131b附接至輔助 繩股33中與第二致動部份131b隔開的另一位置。例 如,根據圖示實施例,第一連接構件63a使第一致動 部份131a附接至第一附接部份133a,以及第二連接構 件63b使第二致動部份131b附接至第二附接部份 133b。 因此,可以說,至少一連接構件,例如第一及第 120 201210564 —連接構件63a、63b,可使第一及第二致動部份 13ia、131b各自附接至輔助繩股33的其他位置以便 使第一及第二致動部份13la、13讣相互附接,例如間 接通過附接部份133a、133b中之至少一或兩者。更可 以说,第一連接構件63a使第一致動繩股38a中之一 邛份可操作地附接至致動繩股38a的另一位置,以及 第二連接構件63b使第二致動繩股38b中之一部份可 才呆作地附接至第二致動繩股38b的另一位置。 根據圖示實施例,第一及第二連接構件63a、63b 中之每一可各自組態成為由辅助繩股33在在輔助繩 月又33不同位置處定義的結66a、66b。結66a、66b可 用以上在說明第4A圖至第4F圖時所述的方式構成, 或按需要可用替代方式構成。根據圖示實施例,第一 結66a包含可由第一致動繩股38a之致動部份13匕定 義的支柱端68,以及可包含由第一附接部份133a之 第一末端137a定義之靜態部份70a與由第一附接部份 133a之第二末端139a定義之自由部份7%的自由端 70。第一末端137a可配置於結66a、第一錦體2如之 間,以及第二末端139a可配置於結66a、第二連接構 件63b之間。替換地,自由部份7%可由第二致動繩 股38b的附接部份133b定義。 ' 根據一實施例,第二結66a包含可由第二致動繩 股38b之致動部份i31b定義的支杈端沾,以及可包 含由第二附接部份133b之第—末端1371)定義之靜= 部份70a與由第二附接部份133b之第二末端13二= 121 201210564 義之自由部份70b的自由端70。第一末端137b可配 置於結66b、第二銷體28b之間,以及第二末端139b 叮配置於結66b、第一連接構件63a之間。替換地, 自由部份70b可由第一致動繩股38a的附接部份133& 定義。附接部份133a、133b圖示成相互整合,然而應 瞭解,附接部份133a、133b可分離及相互附接,例如 在錨組件20定義各自與第一及第二錨22a、2沘可操 作地耗合的第一及第一輔助纖股33a、33b時(例如, 參考第30A圖至第3〇D圖)。 第一及第二結66a、66b中之每一可定義各自的滑 動構件47,其係允許各自的支柱端68相對於自由端 70可平移穿過它。因此,滑動構件47允許第一及第 二致動部份131a及131b與第一及第二附接部份 133a、133b相對平移,例如以回應在結66a、66b處 於解鎖組態時可施加至終端部份135a、135b的外加致 動力F,從而驅使各自的錨體“a、28b由第一組態運 動至擴展組態。每個結66更定義可致動至鎖定組態以 便使I苗22a、22b中之至少一或兩者固定於各自的偏壓 位置的鎖定構件64。例如,拉伸鎖定力可施加至結 66a、66b之自由端的自由部份7〇b以便防止致動部份 131a、131b相對於附接部份133a、133b平移穿過結 66a、66b。 第一及第二結66a、66b可沿著輔助繩股33隔開 一段固定距離L ’藉此在錨體22a、22b各自插入目標 解剖位置24a、24b時使間隙24c保持接近。例如,在 122 201210564 結66a、66b注入各自的目標解剖位置24&、2朴之前, 可使間隙24c接近。在操作期間,一旦第一及第二目 標解剖位置24a、24b各自植入第—及第二錨22a、22b 後,結66a至b可處於解鎖組態使得致動力F施加至 各自的致動繩股38a至b,例如致動部份131a至b, 會造成各自的錯體28a至b由第一組態運動至擴展組 態。接下來,拉伸鎖定力可反抗對應結66a至b施加 至各自的附接部份133a至b,以便驅使結66a運動至 b至鎖定組態以及使錨2 2 a至b保持擴展組態。 第一及苐一結66a、66b的距離l可大體等於或 小於目標解剖位置24a、24b的距離,使得間隙24c 在第一及第二錫22a、22b在解剖位置後面擴展以及用 辅助繩股33連結時接近,使得產生於致動繩股38a 及38b的張力可維持間隙24c的接近。儘管第一及第 二連接構件63a至b可各自組態成為結66,應瞭解, 第一及第二連接構件63a、63b中之任一或兩者^替換地 可被組態成為有本文所述之類型的任何適當鎖定構件 63或以替代方式構成的任何適當鎖定構件。例如,連 接構件63a至b中之至少一或兩者可定義絞結,藉此 致動繩股38a至b中之一或兩者可絞接穿過本身戈致 動繩股38a至b中之另一,以及在錨22a、22b的致動 後使連接繩股有張力以便施加防止錨線38a至b平移 的壓縮力。上文在說明第19D至Η圖時有描述一絞結 實施例。 、'° 請參考第39Α圖至第39D圖,輔助繩股33可插 123 201210564 穿從而延伸穿過第一及第二錨體28a、28b的孔眼 90a、90b,如以上在說明第37A圖時所述,以及隨後, 沿著在第一及第二錨體28a、28b之間的方向,在相互 隔開的一個以上位置(例如,兩個位置)可絞接穿過本 身。因此’錨組件20可包含使第一致動繩股38a連結 至第二致動繩股38b的至少一連接構件63,例如一對 連接構件63a、63b。 例如,連接構件63a、63b中之每一可組態成為分 別由第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b定義的絞結 134a、134b。在一實施例中,第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b中之一個可編織或以其他方式絞接穿過辅助繩 股33的另一位置,例如穿過致動繩股38&及38b中之 另一個。根據圖示實施例,第一或第二致動繩股38b 之致動部份131b可編織或以其他方式絞接穿過第二 或第二致動繩股38b的附接部份133b與第二或第一致 動繩股38a的附接部份133a中之至少一或兩者以便定 義第一絞結134a。第二致動繩股38b可進入第一致動 繩股38a以及在第一致動繩股38a内沿著離開對應第 二錨體28b的方向可沿著第一致動繩股38a延伸以便 在離開第一致動繩股38a之前在第一終端部份135b 處定義第一絞結134a。因此’第一致動繩股38a可沿 著第二致動繩股38b的部份長度圍繞第二致動繩股 38b。 此外,第一致動繩股38a可編織或以其他方式絞 接穿過第二致動繩股38b以便定義第二絞結i34b。根 124 201210564 據圖不實施例,第一致動繩股38a的第一或致動部份 131a可編織或以其他方式絞接穿過第二或第一致動 繩月又38a的附接部份133a與第二或第二致動繩股38b ^附接部份133b中之至少一或兩者以便定義第一絞 結l34b。第一及第二附接部份133a、133b可相互附 接’例如以整合方式或經由連接構件以分離式附接。 第一及第二絞結134a、134b可隔開,藉此將第一絞結 U4a配置成比第二絞結134b還要靠近第一錨22a,以 及將第二絞結134b配置成比第一絞結134a還要靠近 第二錯22b。第一致動繩股38a可進入第二致動繩股 38b以及沿著第二致動繩股38b在第二致動繩股38b 内沿著離開第一錫體28a的方向延伸以便在離開第二 致動繩股38b之前在第一終端部份135a處定義第二絞 結134b。因此,第二致動繩股38b可沿著第一致動繩 股38a的部份長度圍繞第一致動繩股38a。 在操作期間,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b, 特別是第一及第二致動端131a、131b,可各自接受造 成錨體28a、28b各自由第一組態運動至擴展組態的致 動力F。如圖示,致動力F分別在第一及第二致動部 份131a、13lb(例如,第一及第二終端部份135a、135b) 處可直接施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b,或 各自在絞結134b、134a的上游位置處可施加至第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b。 接下來,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的第一 及第二致動部份131a、131b各自可接受接近力AF, 125 201210564 其係使4苗體28a、28b中之至少一或兩者向錫體28a、 28b中之另一個偏壓至偏壓位置以便使間隙24c接 近。接近力AF可為致動力f的延續,例如,如果致 動力F施加至致動部份丨3ia、131b的話。應瞭解,一 旦第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b有張力後,第一致 動繩股38a在第一絞結134a處施加壓縮力至第二致動 繩股38b ’以及第二致動繩股38b在第二絞結134b處 施加壓縮力至第一致動繩股38a。第一壓縮力足以防 止第二致動繩股38b沿著朝向第二錨體28b的方向後 退離開第一絞結134a,以及第二壓縮力足以防止第一 致動繩股38a沿著朝向第一錨體28a的方向後退離開 第二絞結134b。 因此’第一及第二絞結134a、134b各自定義滑動 構件47’該滑動構件47允許第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b中之一個與第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中 之另一個相對滑動以便使間隙24C接近,以及進一步 定義鎖定構件64用以固定第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b例如會使第一及第二錨體28a、28b分離的相對 運動。 睛參考第40A圖至第40C圖,在驅使第一及第二 錨體至第一組態之前,輔助繩股33可插穿從而延伸穿 過第一及第二錨體28a、28b的孔眼90a、90b,如以 上在說明第37A圖時所述,以及可進一步絞接穿過本 身。例如,輔助繩股33可包含壓縮構件228,它可定 義編織結構’例如編結物、織物、網目或針織物,或 126 201210564 以替代方式構成的任何適當構件,例如定義至少一開 孔的不織布結構。在沿著第一及第二錨體28a、28b 之間的方向隔開的附接位置230a、230b處,第一及第 二致動繩股38a及38b的第二或附接部份133a、133b 可附接至壓縮構件228,例如壓縮構件228的相對兩 端228a、228b。因此,輔助繩股33可定義用於第一 及第一致動繩股38a及38b以及也用於壓縮構件228 的共同繩股。根據一實施例,用任何想要方式,附接 133a、133b可編織成壓縮構件228,與壓縮構件 228打結,以黏著劑附接至壓縮構件228,焊接至壓縮 構件228,與編織段整合,或以其他方式附接至壓縮 構件228。在這點上,應瞭解,例如當附接部份、 133b與壓縮構件228整合時,輔助繩股33的實質整 體可為編織結構。更應瞭解,壓縮構件228可定義與 輔助繩股33整合或可與辅賴股分離及附接的連接 構件63。 因此’錯組件20可定義各自組態成為絞結134a、 134b的第&第—連接構件63a、63b,其係由辅助繩 股33定義,特別是由第-及第二致動繩股38a及38b 與壓縮構件228定義。在一實施例中,第一致動繩股 38a—的第-致動部份叫可延伸f過壓縮構件挪以 便定義第-絞結134a。第—致動部份ma實質沿 由第-錨體28a朝向第二錨體農的第一方向可延伸 穿過壓縮構件228。因此,壓縮構件228可圍繞第一 致動繩股咖的致動部㈣U 一段長度。第-致動部 127 201210564 份13la在第一終端部份135a處可離開壓縮構件 228 °同樣,第二致動繩股38b的第二致動部份131b 可延伸穿過壓縮構件228以便定義第二絞結134b。因 此’壓縮構件228可圍繞第二致動繩股38b的致動部 份131b —段長度。第二致動部份131b實質沿著由第 二銷體28b朝向第一錨體28a的第二方向可延伸穿過 壓縮構件228。因此,該第二方向可與該第一方向實 質相反。第二致動部份131b在第二終端部份135b處 可離開壓縮構件228。 在操作期間,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b, 特別是第一及第二致動端13la、131b,各自可接受造 成錯體28a、28b由第一組態運動至擴展組態的拉伸致 動力F。如圖示,致動力f各自在第一及第二致動部 份131a、131b(例如,第一及第二終端部份135a、135b) 處可直接施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b,或 分別在絞結134b、134a的上游位置處可施加至第一及 第二致動繩股38a及38b。 接下來,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的第一 及第二致動部份131a、131b中之每一可各自接受造成 第一及第二致動部份131a、131b平移穿過可定義連接 器63之壓縮構件228的拉伸接近力AF,其係沿著使 錨體28a、28b中之至少一或兩者向錨體28a、28b中 之另一個偏壓至偏壓位置以便使間隙24c接近的第一 方向。接近力AF可為致動力F的延續,例如,如果 致動力F施加至致動部份131a、131b的話。應瞭解, 128 201210564 接近力AF使辅助繩股33有張力,從而造成壓縮構件 228在第一绞結134a處施加壓縮力至第一致動繩股 38a(特別是’第一致動部份i31a),以及在第二絞結 134b處施加至第二致動繩股38b,特別是第二致動部 份131b。由壓縮構件228施加至第一及第二致動繩股 38a、38b的壓縮力可防止第一及第二致動繩股38&及 38b沿著與第一方向相反的第二方向向各自的第一及 第二錨體28b後退離開壓縮構件228。 因此,第一及第二絞結134a、134b各自定義滑動 構件47’該滑動構件47允許第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b中之一個與第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中 之另一個相對滑動以便使間隙24c接近,以及進一步 定義鎖定構件64用以固定第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b例如沿著與第一方向實質相反的第二方向而會 使第一及第二錨體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 請參考第41A圖至第41C圖,輔助繩股33可定 義第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b。第一致動繩股38a 定義第一末端232a與另一頭的第二末端234a,以及 第二致動繩股38b定義第一末端232b與另一頭的第二 末端234b。辅助繩股33更定義壓縮構件228,使得各 自在沿著第一及第二錨體28a、28b之間的方向隔開的 附接位置230a、230b處,第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b的第一末端232a、232b皆附接至壓縮構件 228,例如至壓縮構件228的相對兩端228a、228b。 根據一實施例,用任何想要方式,附接部份133a、133b 129 201210564 :、、扁織成壓縮構件228 ’與壓縮構件228打結,以黏 著=附接至壓縮構件228’焊接至壓縮構件228,與編 織丰又查合,或以其他方式附接至壓縮構件228。因此 應瞭解’壓縮構件228可定義與輔助繩股33整合或可 與輔助繩股分離及附接的連接構件63。 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之每一可延伸 穿過第一及第二孔眼9〇a、90兩者,如以上在說明第 圖時所述,在驅使第一及第二錨體至第一組態之 刖。例如,第一致動繩股38a可由第一末端232a伸出, 穿過第一孔眼90a,穿過第二孔眼9〇b,以及第二末端 234a可延伸穿過延伸穿過壓縮構件228的對應開孔 236a。同樣,第二致動繩股38b可由第二末端232& 伸出’牙過第一孔眼90b ’穿過第一孔眼90a,以及第 二末端234b可延伸穿過延伸穿過壓縮構件228的對應 開孔236b。第一及第二致動繩股3如及38b可各自定 義在壓縮構件228下游延伸的終端部份135a、135b。 在各自進入壓縮構件228的開孔236a、236b以及各自 定義終端部份135a、135b之前,在最靠近壓縮構件 228的位置(例如,壓縮構件的上游)處可進一步相互圍 繞折疊第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的第二末端 234a、234b。第一致動繩股38a的第一終端部份135a 在第一位置處離開壓縮構件228 ’以及第二致動繩股 38b的第二終端部份135b在第二位置處離開壓縮構件 228’與該第一位置相比,該第二位置比較靠近第一銷 體28a。應瞭解,輔助繩股33可定義用於第一及第二 130 201210564 致動繩股38a及38b以及也用於塵縮構件228的共同 繩股。 因此’錯組件20可定義組態成為絞結134a、134b 的第一及第二連接構件63a、63b,其係由辅助繩股33 定義’特別是由第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b與壓 縮構件228定義。在一實施例中,第一絞結13乜由第 致動繩股38a在例如在第一開孔236a延伸穿過壓縮 構件228的第二末端234a定義。第二絞結134b由第 一致動繩股3 8 b例如在第一開孔23 6a延伸穿過壓縮構 件228的第二末端234b定義。因此,壓縮構件228 圍繞第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b有一段長度。 在操作期間’第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b, 特別是第一及第二末端135a、135b,各自可接受造成 錨體28a、28b各自由第一組態運動至擴展組態的拉伸 致動力F。如圖示,致動力F各自在第一及第二終端 部份135a、135b處可直接施加至第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b,或各自在絞結134b、134a的上游位置處 可施加至第一及第二致動繩股38&及38b。 接下來’第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的第一 及第二終端部份135a、135b中之每一各自可接受的拉 伸接近力AF ’其係沿著使錨體28a、28b中之至少一 或兩者向錨體28a、28b中之另一個偏壓至偏壓位置以 便使間隙24c接近的第一方向造成第一及第二致動繩 股38a及38b平移穿過壓縮構件228。接近力AF可為 致動力F的延續,例如’如果致動力ρ施加至終端部 131 201210564 份135a、135b的話。應瞭解,接近力AF使辅助繩股 33有張力,從而造成壓縮構件228在第一絞結134a 處可施加壓縮力至第一致動繩股38a,以及在第二絞 結134b處施加至第二致動繩股38b。由壓縮構件228 施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a、38b的壓縮力可防止 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b沿著與第一方向相反 的第二方向各自向第一及第二錨體28b後退離開壓縮 構件228。 因此,第一及第二絞結134a、134b各自定義滑動 構件47,該滑動構件47允許第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b中之一個與第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中 之另一個相對滑動以便使間隙24c接近,以及進一步 定義鎖定構件64用以固定第一及第二致動繩股38a 及38b例如沿著與第一方向實質相反的第二方向而會 使第一及第二錨體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 請參考第42A圖至第42C圖,應瞭解,該錨組件 可包含至少一錨,例如第一及第二錨22a至b,其係 包含有上述類型的孔眼90,以及各自更可包含分別由 錨體28a、28b之端部(例如,對應的第二端部54a、54b) 定義的連接繩股59a、59b。因此,連接繩股59a、59b 與錨體28a、28b整合,以及經組態成可使第一及第二 錨22a、22b中之每一附接至第一及第二錨22a、22b 中之另一。例如,第一連接繩股59a由第一錨體28a 伸出以及可編織穿過第二錨22b的第二孔眼90b。因 此’第一連接繩股59a延伸穿過第二孔眼90b,以及 132 201210564 定義由第一錨體28a延伸至第二孔眼90b的第一部份 120a,以及在與第一部份12〇a隔開的位置處由第二孔 眼90b伸出的第二部份Ula。同樣,第二連接繩股5卯 由第二錯體28b伸出以及可編織穿過第一錨22a的第 一孔眼90a。因此,第二連接繩股59b延伸穿過第一 孔眼90a,以及定義由第二錨體28b延伸至第一孔眼 90a的第一部份i2〇b’以及在與第一部份i20b隔開的 位置由第一孔眼90a伸出的第二部份121b。 一旦第二連接繩股59b已附接至第一孔眼90a 後’從而使第一錨22a附接至第二錨22b,可驅使第 一錯體28a沿著各自的連接繩股59b,特別是沿著第 一及第二部份12〇b、121b,由擴展組態運動至第一組 態。因此’第二連接繩股59b可定義第一錨22a的第 一致動繩股38a。第二連接繩股59b的第一部份120b 可定義第一致動繩股38a的附接部份133a,以及第二 連接繩股的第二部份12lb可定義第一致動繩股38a 的致動部份131a。因此,第一致動繩股38a可定義與 第一錨體28a有關的輔助繩股33a,以及可與第二錨 體28b整合。 同樣’一旦第一連接繩股59a已附接至第二孔眼 90b後,從而使第一錨22a附接至第二錨22b,可驅使 第二錨體28b沿著各自的連接繩股59a,特別是沿著 第一及第二部份120a、121a,由擴展組態運動至第一 組態。因此,第一連接繩股59a可定義第二錨22b的 第二致動繩股38b。第一連接繩股59a的第一部份12〇a 133 201210564 可定義第二致動繩股38b的附接部份133b,以及第一 連接繩股59a的第二部份121a可定義第二致動繩股 38b的致動部份131b。因此,第二致動繩股38b可定 義與第二錯體28b有關的辅助繩股33b,以及可與第 一錨體28a整合。 錨組件2 0可包含使第一致動繩股3 8 a之致動部份 131a附接至第一致動繩股38a之附接部份133a的至 少一連接構件63 ’例如第一連接構件63a。錨組件20 可進一步包含使第二致動繩股38b之致動部份131b 附接至第二致動繩股38b之附接部份133b的第二連接 構件63b。例如,連接構件63a、63b中之每一可組態 成為由第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b定義的絞結 134a、134b。在一實施例中,第一致動繩股38a的附 接部份133a與致動部份131a中之一個可編織或以其 他方式絞接穿過另一個。同樣,第二致動繩股38b的 附接部份133b與致動部份131b中之一個可編織或以 其他方式絞接穿過另一個。根據圖示實施例,例如沿 著由第一錨體28a朝向第二錨體28b的方向,第一致 動繩股3 8 a的致動部份131 a可編織或以其他方式絞接 穿過第一致動繩股38a的附接部份133a,以及例如沿 著由第二錨體28b朝向第一錨體28a的方向,第二致 動繩股3 8 b的致動部份131 b可編織或以其他方式絞接 穿過第二致動繩股38b的附接部份133b。 第一致動繩股38a的致動部份131a因此可延伸穿 過第一致動繩股38a的附接部份133a以便定義第一絞 134 201210564 結134a,使得附接部份133a圍繞致動部份131&有一 段長度。同樣,第二致動繩股38b之致動部份131b 因此可延伸穿過第二致動繩股38b的附接部份133b 以便疋義苐一絞結134b,使得附接部份133b圍繞致 動部份131b有一段長度。第一及第二致動部份131a、 131b定義分別在絞結134a、134b下游延伸的終端部 份 135a、135b。 在操作期間,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b, 特別是第一及第二致動端131a、131b,各自可接受造 成銷體28a、28b由第一組態致動至擴展組態的致動力 F。如圖示’致動力f分別在第一及第二致動部份 131a、131b(例如,第一及第二終端部份135a、135b) 處可直接施加至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b,或 在絞結134b、134a的上游位置處可施加至第一及第二 致動繩股38a及38b。 接下來,第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b的第一 及第二致動部份131a、131b中之每一各自可接受使錨 體28a、28b中之至少一或兩者向錨體28a、28b中之 另一個偏壓至偏壓位置以便使間隙24c接近的接近力 AF 〇接近力AF可為致動力F的延續,例如,如果致 動力F施加至致動部份131a、131b的話。應瞭解,接 近力AF施加至第一及第二致動部份131a、131b會使 第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b有張力,使得第一附 接部份133a在第一絞結134a處施加第一壓縮力至第 一致動部份131a,以及第二附接部份133b在第二絞 135 201210564 結134b處施加第二壓縮力至第一附接部份131b。第 一壓縮力足以防止第一致動部份131a沿著朝向各自 的第一錨體28a的方向後退離開第一絞結134a,以及 第二壓縮力足以防止第二致動部份131b沿著朝向第 二錨體28b的方向後退離開第二絞結134b。 因此,第一絞結134a可定義滑動構件47,其係 允許第一致動繩股38a的第一部份與第一致動繩股 38a的第二部份相對滑動以便致動各自的錨體28a由 第一組態運動至擴展組態,以及也使間隙24c接近, 以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定致動繩股38a 之第一及第二部份例如會使第一及第二錨體28a、28b 分離的相對運動。同樣,第二絞結134b可定義滑動構 件47,其係允許第二致動繩股38b的第一部份與第二 致動繩股38b的第一部份相對滑動以便致動各自的錨 體28b由第一組態運動至擴展組態,以及也使間隙24c 接近,以及可進一步定義鎖定構件64用以固定第二致 動繩股38b之第一及第二部份例如會使第一及第二錨 體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 請參考第43A圖至第43B圖,錨組件20可包含 有孔眼90a的第一錨22a,如以上在說明第37A圖至 第37D圖時所述,以及第二錨22b可包含有整合致動 繩股28b的錨體28b,如以上在說明第36A圖至第36B 圖時所述。因此,如上述,致動繩股38a及38b中之 一個可各自與錨體28a、28b整合,以及致動繩股38a、 38b中之另一個可與錨體28a、28b分離及編織穿過各 136 201210564 自的錨體28a、28b以便使致動繩股附接至錨體。根據 圖示實施例,第二錨22b的整合致動繩股38b定義第 一錨22a的輔助致動繩股38a。因此,如以上在說明 第7A圖至第7B圖時所述,第二錨體22b的第一部份 41可定義各自的致動部份131b及附接部份133b。 第二致動繩股38b的附接部份133b可與第一致動 繩股38a的附接部份133a整合。用以上在說明第9A 圖至第9C圖時所述的方式,第一致動繩股38a可編 織穿過錨體,使得第一致動繩股38a可定義在錨體28a 由第一組態運動至擴展組態時孔眼90a可行進的路 徑。此外,第一或致動部份131a及第二或附接部份 133a由第一錨體28a伸出以及用上述方式彼此隔開。 錨組件20可包含使第一致動部份131a附接至輔助繩 股33a之另一位置(例如,第一及第二附接部份133a、 133b中之任一或兩者)的連接構件幻。根據圖示實施 例,連接構件63使第一致動部份131a附接至第二附 P伤133b。根據本文所述任一具體實施例,可將連 接構件63 '(態成適於使第一致動部份13la直接或間 接地附接至輔助繩股33a的另-目標位置,例如第一 及第二附接部份133a、13扑中之至少一或兩者。 根據圖示實施例,連接構件63被組態成為由第一 133bl份13U以及獅繩股33a(可為第二附接部份 mi目‘位置定義的結66,如上述。第-致動部 ^ Ula可定義結66的支柱端68,使得終端部 a 結66伸出,以及第二致動繩股381)可定義結66的 137 201210564 自由端70。例如,第二致動繩股38b中配置於結66、 錨體28b之間的部份可定義自由端70的靜態部份 70a,第二致動繩股38b中配置於結66、第一錨體28a 之間的部份可定義自由端70的自由部份70b。 在操作期間,結66可處於解鎖組態使得支柱端 68,或第一致動部份131a ’相對於自由端70或第二 致動繩股38b,可滑動穿過結66。因此,致動力ρ可 施加至第一致動部份131 a ’特別是施加至第一終端部 份135a,這產生張力於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b 中,從而驅使第一及第二錨22a、22b各自由第一組態 運動至擴展組態。接近力AF施加至第一致動部份 131a,特別是施加至第一終端部份135a,進一步產生 張力於第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中,從而使第 一及第二錨22a、22b向對方偏壓以及使間隙24c接 近。因此,接近力AF可為致動力F的延續。 儘管連接構件63在第43A圖至第43B圖中圖示 成結66,應瞭解,根據本文所述之任何適當實施例或 任何適當替代實施例,可構成連接構件63。例如,如 第43C圖至第43D圖所示,連接構件63可組態成為 由第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b定義的絞結134。 根據圖示實施例,第一致動繩股38a絞接穿過第二致 動繩股38b以便定義絞結134。 特別是’第一致動部份131a絞接穿過由第二錨體 28b伸出的第二致動繩股38b。因此’如上述,第二致 動繩股38b有一長度可圍繞第一致動繩股38a —段長 138 201210564 度。替換地’依所欲次數第一致動繩股38a可編織穿 過第一致動繩股38b以便定義絞結134。 在操作期間,第一致動繩股38a,特別是致動部 份131a的終端部份135a,可接受造成錨體28a由第 一組態運動至擴展組態的致動力F,以及也產生張力 於第一及第二致動繩股38a至b中。由第一致動繩股 38a產生於第二致動繩股38b的張力施加致動力F至 第二致動繩股38b,從而造成各自的第二錨體28b由 第一組態運動至擴展組態。接下來’第一終端部份 135a可接受接近力AF,其係沿著第一致動繩股38a 傳達至第二致動繩股38b以及使錨體28a、28b中之至 少一或兩者向錨體28a、28b中之另一個偏壓至偏壓位 置以便使間隙24c接近。接近力AF可為致動力F的 延續’例如’如果致動力F施加至終端部份135a的話。 應瞭解’一旦第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b有張力, 第一致動繩股38b在絞結134處施加壓縮力至第一致 動、,股38a ’其係足以防止第一致動繩股3如沿著朝 向第一錨體2 8 a的方向後退離開第二絞結丨3 4 b。 λ ‘、,、人、、,口 ί34定義允許第一双勁颳胧: 與第二致動繩股38b相對平移以便使間隙24e接近的 /月動構件47 ’以及進—步定義鎖定構件64用以固定 第-及第二致動繩股他及娜例如會使第一及第二 錨體28a、28b分離的相對運動。 儘管將有錢接構件63描述成錢動繩股撕 38b中之至J-或兩者整合使得致動繩股恤及 139 201210564 38b彼此直接附接,應瞭解,錨組件2〇替換地或附加 地可包含組態成為輔助連接構件77的連接構件幻, 其係附接至第一及第二致動繩股38a及38b中之—戋 兩者以便使第一及第二錨22、221?相互附接。輔助連 接構件77替換地或附加地可使第一及第二致動繩股 38a及38b中之至少一者附接至連接繩股,它也可定 義辅助連接構件77’或可使連接繩股的數個部份附接 至本身以便使第一致動繩股3 8 a附接至第二致動繩股 38b’例如在致動繩股38a及3訃定義孔眼以及連接繩 股延伸穿過該等孔眼時。輔助連接構件77可由金屬、 塑膠、縫合線、或任何適當替代材料製成。 儘管以上已根據以越過缺損之一對附接錨22a、 22b圖示的具體實施例來描述錨組件2〇,然而應瞭 解,錨組件20可包含跟所欲一樣多的錨,它們可^需 要以任何方式及配置相互附接。例如,請參考第44八 圖,錨組件20可包含附接於間隙24c(可為相同或不 同的解剖缺損)之兩對邊上的多對第一及第二錨22、 2 2 b。可根據本文所述之任一實施例或任何適當替代實 施例來附接每一對錨的第一及第二錨22a、22b。替換 地,請參考第44B圖,可越過間隙24c植入多對第」 及第二錨22a、22b於目標解剖結構24,以及錨組件 2〇可包含組態成可在共同集線器(c〇mm〇n hub)24〇使 錨22、22b中之每一相互附接的連接構件63。連接構 件63可組態成為有本文所述之類型的任何適當連接 構件或任何適當替代連接構件,例如,可使錯22a、 140 201210564 22b的附接部份與錨22a、22b的連接繩股中之至少一 者至所有附接。 5月多考第45A圖,固定套件25〇可包含至少一錄 22與組態成可將錨22注入解剖結構24的插入器 2如第1A圖至第圖所示。應瞭解,固定套件 250可以單獨、相互附接、或根據本文所述之任-且 體實施例組態成可相互附接的方式包含至少一或更多、 至所有描述於本文的錯22。插入器252可包含有中央 開孔256的套管(cannu][a)254與可其軸地插入中央開 孔256的柱塞或推桿258。套管254有漸尖尖端260 以及由尖端260軸向伸出的槽孔268。 此外’插入益252包含有操作槓桿264的握把 262。握把262 #-端可拆卸地附接至套f 254,以及 麵作槓桿2M可拆卸地附接至柱塞⑽。柱塞258的 外徑對應至套管254之巾央開孔256 _徑。在套管 254的中央開孔之尾端以圓錐方式組態使得它在入口 施向套管254的尾端擴大。因此,錨22的錯體28 在第一組態時可插穿錐形入口 266以及進入套管254 的中央開孔256,藉此可壓縮錨體烈。 田藉由壓迫柱塞258向前使錨體28被壓出套管 =時’舰28可徑向擴展,例如在第二方向35(參 t第1A圖至帛1B圖)使得在拉力施加於致動繩股38 打它可被套管254的正面固定以便收緊錨體28。將致 動繩股38 ^入槽孔268使得在套f 254插入解剖結構 24時可沿著套管254引入。在銷22的錯體28已致動 141 201210564 至擴展組態而且固定於解剖結構24時,附接於致動繩 股38之自由端的針270可用來完成手術程序。 睛參考第45B圖,柱塞258的外徑或替代橫截面 尺寸可小於套管254之中央開孔256内徑或橫截面尺 寸。因此,在柱塞258插入套管254的中央開孔256 時,可將錨22的致動繩股38引入套管254的中央開 孔256。藉由啟動在握把262的操作槓桿264,柱塞 258在套管254可推錦22向前遠到銷體28由在套管 254尖端260的中央開孔256離開。一旦錨體28處於 中央開孔256後,可在套管254尾端向後拉致動繩股 38藉此在空腔256中可驅使錨體28至擴展組態。 凊參考第46A圖至第46D圖,柱塞258可定義可 引入錨22之致動繩股38的中心孔272。此外,套管 254有在尖端260與套管254尾端之間延伸的第一縱 向孔口 274藉此插入整個長度的套管254。第二縱向 孔口 276在柱塞258上延伸於柱塞258的前端及尾端 之間藉此也插入整個長度的柱塞258。如第46B圖所 示,當套管254處於相對於柱塞258的第一轉動位置 時,套管254的第一縱向孔口 274與柱塞258的第二 縱向孔口 276直徑對置。在套管254的第一轉動位^ 中,錨22的致動繩股38被中心孔272固定。一旦藉 由向後拉錨22之致動繩股38使錨22的錨體28固定 於患者身體的空腔十,套管254可轉到相對於柱塞258 的第二轉動位置(第46D圖)。在套管254的此一第二 轉動位置時,套管254的第一縱向孔口 274與柱塞258 142 201210564 的第二縱向孔口 276對齊,以及插入器252可由錨22 的致動繩股38釋放。 第47A圖至第47D圖圖示握把262與套管254 附接至第45A圖至第46D圖之插入器252實施例的握 把262。握把262的上端部份包含可插入套管254之 溝槽278與彈簧構件(例如,葉片彈簧279)以便提供經 組態成可使套管254可釋放地附接至握把262的可釋 放彈簧鎖(snap lock)。柱塞258的尾端可扣入配置於 操作槓桿264上端的回彈叉件(fork)28〇。 請參考第48圖,插入器52可包含在套管254上 滑動的深度控制管282與夾緊元件284。藉由將錯22 插入套管254及插上柱塞258可在手術前預備插入器 52。一旦插好錨22及柱塞258,藉由搭扣第一舌片(first tab)286·於套管254的後部上使複數個夾緊元件284中 之任一附接至插入器252的尾端。為了防止柱塞258 無意中相對於套管254的位移,夾緊元件284包含靠 緊套管254尾端的第二舌片288與靠緊在柱塞258尾 端之放大部份的第三舌片290。在使用插入器252之 前’夾緊元件284由套管254卸下以及將握把262附 接至套管254’以及可用本文所述的方式操作插入器 252。 已提出與圖示實施例有關的具體實施例舉例說 明,然而本發明不希望因此受限於該等揭示具體實施 例。此外’上述具體實施例的結構及特徵可應用於本 文所描述的其他具體實施例’除非另有說明。因此, 143 201210564 熟諸此藝者會發現本發明旨在涵蓋落在本發明精神及 範曹内的所有修改及替代配置,例如陳述於隨附申請 專利範圍的。 【圖式簡單說明】 閱讀時結合_可更加明白以上的概述及以下本 申請案示範實施例的詳細說明,圖示於附圖的示範實 施例係僅供圖解說明。不過,應瞭解,本申請案不受 限於圖示的確切配置及工具。 第1A圖的示意側視圖圖示包含越過解剖缺損 (anatomical defect)地植入且處於第—組態之一對錯體 的I苗組件; 第1B圖為» 1圖之錯組件的示意側視圖,其係 圖示處於擴展組悲以及處於接近位置的錯體· 第1C圖的示意側視圖根據一實施例圖示固定於 輔助結構的第1A圖銷組件; 第1D圖的示忍側視圖根據另一實施例圖示固定 於輔助結構的如第1C圖所示之錯組件; 第2A圖為根據一實施例構成之錯的透視圖; 第2B圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 第2C圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 第2D圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 第2E圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 第2F圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 第2G圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 144 201210564 第2H圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖; 第3A圖至第3C圖圖示用於製作錨之錨體的方法 步驟; 第4A圖至第4F圖根據一實施例圖示用於製作第 2G圖所示之4苗之滑結的方法步驟; 第5A圖至第5B圖根據一實施例圖示用於製作第 2H圖所示之錨之孔眼的方法步驟; 第5C圖根據一替代實施例圖示用於製作第2H圖 所示之錨之孔眼的方法步驟; 第5D圖根據一替代實施例圖示用於製作第2H圖 所示之錨之孔眼的方法步驟; 第6A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨的透視圖, 圖中該錨處於第一組態; 第6B圖為圖示於第6A圖之錯的透視圖,圖中該 錨處於擴展組態; 第6C圖至第6E圖的透視圖圖示用於製作圖示於 第6A圖之錯的方法步驟; 第7A圖的透視圖圖示包含致動繩股之錨,該致 動繩股係編織穿過由錨體之可擴展部份定義的複數個 開孔而與錨體整合,該錨體係處於第一組態; 弟7B圖為圖不於弟7A圖之錯的透視圖,該錯體 係處於擴展組態; 第7C圖的透視圖圖示在錨體處於如第7A圖所示 之第一組態時插入穿過開孔的致動繩股; 第8A圖的透視圖根據一替代實施例圖示包含致 145 201210564 動繩股之錯,該致動繩股係編織穿過由銷體之可擴展 部份定義的複數個開孔而與錨體整合,該銷體係處於 第一組態; 第8B圖為圖示於第8 A圖之錯的透視圖,該錫體 係處於擴展組態; 第9A圖的透視圖圖示包含|苗體與由該錨體伸出 之孔眼的錨,以及附接至該孔眼及編織穿過錨體之可 擴展部份的致動繩股’該可擴展部份係處於第一組態; 第9B圖為圖示於第9A圖之銷的透視圖,其係圖 示由第一組態運動至擴展組態時的可擴展部份; 第9C圖為圖示於第9A圖之銷的透視圖,該可擴 展部份係處於擴展組態; 第10A圖至第10G圖根據一實施例圖示製作第 9A圖之孔眼的方法步驟; 第11A圖至第11H圖根據一實施例圖示製作第 9A圖之可擴展部份的方法步驟; 第12A圖至第12B圖圖示使致動繩股可卸除地附 接至第9A圖所示之描體内的方法步驟; 第13A圖的側視圖根據一替代實施例圖示包含錨 體及編織穿過該錨體之致動構件的錨,該錨體係處於 第一組態; 第13B圖為圖示於第13A圖之錨的剖面側視圖; 第13C圖為圖示於第13A圖之錨的側視圖,該錨 體係處於擴展組態; 第14A圖的側視圖根據一實施例構成的兩段式錨 146 201210564 體繩股; 第14B圖的側視圖根據另一實施例圖示包含一對 分開線的兩段式錨體繩股; 第15A圖的透視圖圖示包含形式為網目之錨體及 與該網目整合之致動繩股的錨,該錨體係處於第一組 態; 第15B圖為圖示於第15A圖之錨的透視圖,該錨 體係處於第一組態; 第15C圖的透視圖圖示包含定義複數個切割開孔 之錨體及與該錨體整個之致動繩股的錨,該錨體係處 於第一組態; 第15D圖的透視圖圖示包含編結錨體及與該編結 錨體整合之致動繩股的錨; 第16A圖的透視圖圖示包含有形式為網目之可擴 展部份之錨體及由該可擴展部份伸出之孔眼的錨;該 可擴展部份係處於第一組態; 第16B圖為圖示於第16A圖之錨的透視圖,其係 包含耦合至該可擴展部份的致動繩股,該可擴展部份 係處於第一組態; 第16C圖的透視圖圖示包含具有定義複數個切割 開孔之可擴展部份之錨體以及由可擴展部份伸出之孔 眼的錯, 第17A圖的透視圖圖示包含可滑動地耦合至共同 繩股之複數個錨構件的錨,圖中該錨處於第一組態; 第17B圖為圖示於第17A圖之錨的透視圖,該錨 147 201210564 係處於擴展組態; 第一錨組件的側視圖’其係包含各自處於 第、.且心以及植入於解剖結構的第—及 第18B圖為圖示於第 今㈣於弟18A圖之錄組件的側視圖, 5玄專第—及第二财自處於擴展組態; 1 ^二f為圖示於第18B圖之錯組件的側視圖’ 八係包Μ吏第-_接至第二料連接構件; 第圖為如第18Α圖所示之触件的側視圖, 實施例’其係包含附接於第-及第二錫體 之間的辅助連接繩股; 第19A圖的透視圖圖示被組態成為結 此圖 連接構件; 其係包含第一及第二 錦附接至第二錨的連 第19B圖的錯組件側視圖, 錨與根據另一實施例構成使第一 接構件; 第19C圖的錨組件側視圖,其係包含第一及第二 銷與根據另—實施例構成使第1附接至第二銷的連 接構件; 第19D圖為根據另一實施例構成之銷組件的側視 圖’其係包含各自處於第-組態以及植人於解剖結構 的第一及第二銷; 第19E圖為圖示於第19D圖之錨組件的側視圖, 其係圖示各自處於擴展組態的第一及第二錨; 第19F圖為如第19E圖所示之錨組件的部份放大 側視圖,其係包含第一及第二連接構件; 148 201210564 第19G圖為第19F圖之第一連接構件的放大剖面 側視圖; 第19H圖為第19F圖之第二連接構件的放大剖面 侧視圖; 第20A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖; 第20B圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖, 第20C圖為根據另一實施例構成之銷組件的侧視 圖, 第21A圖為根據另一實施例構成之|苗組件的側視 圖’其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錯; 第21B圖為圖不於第21A圖之Ί苗纽件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第21C圖為類似於第22B圖之錨組件的側視圖, 但是包含根據一替代實施例構成的連接構件; 第22A圖為根據一實施例構成之連接構件的透視 圖; 第22B圖為錨組件的側視圖,其係包含各自處於 第一組態以及植入於解剖結構以及經由第22A圖連接 構件附接的第一及第二銷; 第22C圖為圖示於第22B圖之銷組件的侧視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第2 2 D圖為根據另一實施例構成之連接構件的透 149 201210564 視圖 第—’其係包含各自處於 接構件附接的第構以及經由第22D圖之連 第22F圖為圖示於第圖 第一及第高自處繼件的側視圖, 部份==根據另-替代實施例構成之錫組件的 其传包含各於第Μ圖之錨組件的側視圖, 各自處於擴展組態及植入於解剖結構的第一 該等示於第23B圖之錨組件的側視圖, 亥4第一及第1各自處於擴展組態; 組件ί:::剖面端視圖圖示如第23c圖所示之錨 圖,另一實施例構成之鋪組件的側視 的第二及第二銷處於第-組態以及植入於解剖結構 該蓉ΐ二Γ為圖示於第2 4 Α圖之1苗組件的側視圖, ^ 第二1 苗各自處於擴展組態; = = 另一實施例構成之錯組件的側視 二二:Ϊ含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 J弟一及第二4苗; 誃耸圖為圖示於第25A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 人 及第二錯各自處於擴展組態; 150 201210564 第26A圖為根據另一貫施例構成之錯組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第26B圖為圖示於第26A圖之I苗組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第2 7 A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第27B圖為圖示於第27A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第28A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第28B圖為圖示於第28A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第28C圖為圖示於第28B圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨係處於接近組態; 第28D圖為類似於第28C圖之錨組件的側視圖, 但是圖示由解剖結構伸出的孔眼; 第2 9 A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第29B圖為圖示於第29A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第29C圖為第29B圖錨組件之連接構件的透視 151 201210564 圖; 第29D圖為第29B圖錨組件之另一連接構件的透 視圖, 第3 0 A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第30B圖為圖示於第30A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第30C圖為圖示於第30B圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨係處於接近組態; 第30D圖為第30A圖之錨組件的放大部份; 第31A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第31B圖為圖示於第31A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第31C圖為圖示於第31B圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨係處於接近組態; 第3 2 A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錨組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第32B圖為圖示於第32A圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第32C圖為圖示於第32B圖之錨組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨係處於接近組態; 152 201210564 第33A圖為根據另一實施例構成之銷組件的側視 圖’其係包含各自處於第一組態以及植入於解剖結構 的第一及第二錨; 第33B圖為圖示於第33A圖之錯組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 圖示於第33B圖之銷組件的側視圖, 肩寺弟一及第一錨係處於接近組態; 第3 4 A圖為根據另一實施例構成之銷組件的側視 圖’其係包含各自處於擴展組態以及植人於解剖结構 的第一及第二錨; —第34B圖為圖示於第34AS之銷組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨係處於接近組態; 第3认圖為根據另一實施例構成之錄組件的側視 圖,其係包含各自處於擴展組態以及植人於目標解剖 結構的第m該驗件係處於接近虹態;° 第35B圖的側視圖圖示於驅使錨組件運動至接近 組態之前的第35A圖錨組件; 第35C圖為與如第35B圖所示之銷組件類似之錯 組件的側視圖’但是包含根據—替代實施例構成 接構件; 弟35D圖為與如第35A圖所示之銷組件類似之銷 組件的側視圖,但是包含根據—替代實施例構成 接構件; 第3乂 6 A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錯組件的侧視 圖’其係包含各自處於第—組態以及植人於解剖結構 153 201210564 的第一及第二錨; 第36B圖為圖示於第36A圖之錯組件的侧視圖, 该等第-及第二財自處於擴展組態; 、第37A圖為根據另—替代實施例構成之錫組件的 側視圖其係包含各自處於第—組態的第—及第二錫; 第37B圖為圖示於第37A圖之錯組件的側視圖, s亥等第-及第二錦各自處於第—組態; 第3 7 C圖的侧視圖圖示植入於目標解剖結構的第 3 7B圖錯組件; 第37D圖為圖示於第37A圖之錯組件的側視圖, 该等第-及第二錦各自處於擴展組態; 第37E圖的側視圖圖示有孔眼及延伸穿過該孔眼 之複數條致動繩股的I苗; 第38A圖為根據另一實施例構成之銷組件的側視 圖,該等第-及第二錦各自處於第一組態; 第38B圖的側視圖圖示植入於目標解剖結構的第 3 8 A圖錫組件; 第38C圖為圖示於第38B圖之錯組件的側視圖, s亥等第一及第二|苗各自處於擴展組態; 第39A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錯組件的側視 圖,其係包含第一及第二錨; 第39B圖圖示於第39A gj之錯組件的側視圖,該 第一錨係附接至第二銷; 第39C圖為圖示於第39B目之鋪組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於第一組態以及植入於目標 154 201210564 解剖結構; 第39D圖為圖示於第39C圖之銷址件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第40A圖為根據另一實施例構成之錯組件的側視 圖,其係包含第一及第二|苗; /第40B圖圖示於第40A圖之錯組件的側視圖,其 係植入於目標解剖結構以及該等第一及第二錨各自處 於第一組態; 第40C目圖示於第備圖之名苗組件的側視圖,其 係處於接近組態; 第41A圖為根據另一實施例構成之銷組件的側視 圖’其係包含第一及第二銷; 第41B圖圖不於第41A圖之錯組件的側視圖,其 係植入於目標解剖結構以及該等第—及第二銷各自處 於第一組態; 第41C圖圖示於第41B圖之錯組件的側視圖,該 等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第42A圖為根據另—實施例構成之触件的側視 圖,其係包含第一及第二錨; /第42B圖圖示於第42A圖之錯組件的側視圖,其 係植入於目標解剖結構以及該等第—及第二錯各自處 於第一組態; a第42f圖圖示於第42B圖之錯組件的侧視圖,該 等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第侃圖為根據另一實施例構成之錯組件的側視 155 201210564 圖,其係包含植入於目標解剖結構的第一及第二錨, 以及該等第一及第二錨各自處於第一組態; 第43B圖為圖示於第43A圖之麵組件的側視圖, 該專第一及第一錦各自處於擴展组態; 第4 3 C圖為根據另—實施例構成之錯組件的側視 圖,其係包含植入於目標解剖結構的第一及第二錨, 以及該等第一及第二錨各自處於第—組態; 第43D圖為圖示於第43C圖之錯組件的側視圖, 該等第一及第二錨各自處於擴展組態; 第4 4 A圖為根據一替代實施例構成之錫組件的示 意俯視圖’其係包含朗解剖缺損地相互附接的 錨; 第補圖為根據-替代實施例構成之錯組件的示 意俯視圖,其係包含越過解剖缺損地在共同集線器相 互附接的複數個錨;· 第45A圖為固定套件的側視圖,其係包含至少一 在苗與插入器(insertion instrument); 第45B ffi為第45A1J之固定套件的剖面側視圖; 第46A圖的剔面正視圖圖示根據一替代實施例構 成處於第一轉動狀態的固定套件; 第46B圖為第46A圖之套件沿著直線46b_46b 1會出的剖面側視圖; 第46C圖為第46A圖之固定套件的剖面側視圖, 但是其係處於使一對孔口對齊的第二轉動狀態; 第46D圖為第46C圖之固定套件沿著直線 156 201210564 46D-46D繪出的剖面側視圖; 第47A圖為插入器在組裝期間的剖面側視圖; 第47B圖為已組成之第47A圖插入器的剖面侧視 圖, 第47C圖為第47B圖插入器之握把的剖面侧視 圖, 第47D圖為第47C圖之握把的透視圖;以及 第48圖為根據另一實施例構成之固定套件的側 視圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 1 10...錯組件 29...中軸線 2 0…錫組件 30...第一末端或近端 22...可擴展錨 31...線圈 22a、b...第一錨、第二 32...第二末端或遠端 錫 32a、b...致動繩股 23…開孔 33...輔助繩股 24…解剖結構 33a...第一輔助繩股 24a、b...第一及第二目 3 4…長形方向 標解剖位置 35...第二方向 24c...間隙 36...可擴展部份 25...輔助結構 36a、b...第一及第二可 27...解剖結構 擴展部份 28...錨體 37...致動構件 28a、b...第一及第二錨 體 37a、b...第一及第二致 動構件 157 201210564 38.. .致動繩股 38a...第一致動繩股 38b...第二致動繩股 39a...第一末端或近端 39b...第二末端或遠端 40.. .開孔 40a...最近端開孔 40b...最遠端開孔 40c...中間開孔 41、41a...第一部份 42.. .基材 43.. .第二部份 44.. .錨體繩股 45a...第一或近端選定 開孔 45b...第二或遠端選定 開孔 46.. .第一止擋結 47.. .滑動構件 48.. .支柱端 49…開孔 50.. .自由端 52…第一端部 53.. .線圈 54…第二端部 54a、b...第二端部 5 5...錯線 56.. .線圈 56a...第一近端線圈 56b...第二遠端線圈 56c...第三遠端線圈 57.. .最近端線圈 5 8...編結 59.. .連接繩股 59a、b...第一及第二連 接繩股 60.. .第二止擋結 61.. .倒刺 63.. .連接構件 63a、b...連接構件 63c、d...第三及第四連 接構件 63e...第五連接構件 63f...第六連接構件 64.. .鎖定構件 65…前端 66.. .結 66a、66b...結 66c、66d、66f...結 67.. .尾端 158 201210564 68.. .支柱端 69.. .倒刺 70.. .自由端 70a...靜態部份 70b...自由部份 71.. .滑動線圈 71A...第一滑動線圈 71B...第二滑動線圈 71C…第三滑動線圈 71D...第四滑動線圈 72.. .孔眼 73、73a...間隙 74.. .折疊部份 75.. .缝合線 76.. .梗柄 77.. .輔助連接構件 78.. .末端 79…成圈繩股 79a、b...第一及第二相 對兩端 8 0...孔眼結 81.. .線圈 82.. .附接構件 82a、b...第一及第二末 端 83.. .連續線圈 84a...第一孔眼 84b...第二孔眼 85…本體部份 86.. .權疊 87a、b...開孔 90.. .孔眼 91.. .線圈 92a、b...第一及第二段 92c...自由端 93.. .第一縫合 94.. .針 95…第二缝合 9 6...線圈 97.. .結 99…線圈 99a...第一線圈 99b...第二線圈 99c...第三線圈 99d...第四線圈 100.. .自由端 101a…第一段 101b...第二段 102a...第一部份 102b...第二部份 159 201210564 103a...第一段 103b...第二段 104…線 105a...第一段 105b...第二段 107a...第一段 107b...第二段 108.. .連接 109.. .錨體纖維 110.. .中軸線 111.. .網目 112.. .孔眼 111、113…封閉位置 114.. .錨構件 115.. .固定位置 117.. .孔眼 118…、線圈 119.. .離開位置 120…簇 120.. .第一部份 120a、b...第一部份 121.. .第二部份 121a、b...第二部份 121b...第三部份 123.. .中間部份 125.. .連接點 125a、b...連接點 131、131a、b...致動部 份 132.. .扭結 133.. .附接部份 133a、b...第二或附接 部份 134a、134b...絞結 134c、134d...絞結 135a、b...終端部份 136…線 137a、b...第一末端 138.. .U 形釘 139a、b...第二末端 140.. .橫桿 141a、b...第一終端部 份 141a’、141b’.·.第二終 端部份 142.. .腳部 144…開孔 146.. .塊體 14 8…結 149.. .軸線 160 201210564 150、152…箭頭 154.. .夾具 156a、b...本體部份 158.. .腳部 160.. .孔道 161…開孔 162.. .收縮包覆材料 164.. .孔道 166.. .縫合扣片 168.. .主體 170.. .倒刺 172.. .套環 174、176…孔道 178.. .内棘齒 180a、b...棘齒 182.. .長軸 184.. .棘輪殼體 186、188...孔道 187.. .中轴線 190.. .内棘齒 192a、b...棘齒 194.. .束帶外管 196、198...孔道 197.. .中軸線 200…内齒 202a、b...齒 204.. .封閉線圈 210a、b...鉤子 212a...第 附接端 212b...第二附接端 214a...第二嚙合端 214b...第二嚙合端 216.. .棘齒 216a...前端 216b...尾端 218.. .掣子構件 220…孔口 222.. .空隙 223…網目 224.. .彈簧構件 224a、b...第一及第二 附接端 228.. .壓縮構件 228a、b...相對兩端 230a、b...附接位置 232a、b...第一末端 234a、b...第二末端 236a、b...開孑L 240…共同集線器 250…固定套件 161 201210564 252.. .插入器 254.. .套管 256.. .中央開孔 258.. .柱塞或推桿 260…尖端 262.. .握把 264.. .操作槓桿 266…入口 268.. .槽孔 270…針 272.. .中心孔 274.. .第一縱向孔口 276.. .第二縱向孔口 278.. .溝槽 279…葉片彈簧 280.. .叉件 282.. .深度控制管 284.. .夾緊元件 286.. .第一舌片 288.. .第二舌片 290.. .第三舌片 AF...接近力 D1...初始距離 D2...第二距離 F...致動力 F1...收緊力 T1...初始最大厚度 T2...第二最大厚度 16266. The locking force can be applied to the following in the above manner: Terminal part ΐ4ι& ,  The free portion 70b is defined to drive the junction 66 to the locked configuration such that the second terminal-terminal portion 141a is translatably fixed to the first portion 141a' by the junction 66.  During operation, First and second actuation strands 38 & And 38b each with an acceptable actuation force F resulting in junction 66a, 66b is in the unlocked configuration, the anchor body 28a, Each of 28b moves from the first configuration to the extended configuration. As shown, The actuation force F is in the first and second actuation portions 131a, respectively. 131b can be applied directly to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Or the first and second connecting members 63a, respectively An upstream position of 63b can be applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a, 38b. then, The knots 66a-b can be locked by applying a tensile locking force to the attachment portions 133a to b' of the actuation strands 38, respectively. Alternatively, This tensile stabilization can be applied by the proximity force AF. This will be described.  For example, 'once the anchor body 28a, 28b has been activated to the expanded configuration after the first and second connecting strands 59a, First and second terminals of 59b 107 201210564 Part 141a, Each of 141b is each acceptable to produce a connecting strand 59a, The proximity force AF of the tension in 59b, Thereby, the proximity force AF is applied to the actuating strands 38a and 38b and at least one or both of the anchors 22a-b and thus the respective anchor bodies 28a-b are biased toward the biasing position to bring the gap 24c into proximity. It should be understood that Produced from the connecting strand 59a, The tension of 59b further imparts tension to the eyelet 72. Since the eyelets 72 are defined by the respective attachment portions 133a to b, The tension created by the apertures 72 will counteract the respective junctions 66a-b producing a pulling force that drives the junctions 66a-b to the locked configuration.  In addition, Since the first and second connecting strands 59a to b respond to the application of the proximity force AF in tension, The first connecting strand 59a can apply a compressive force to the second connecting strand 59b, for example, at the first and second strands 134a-b. especially, The first portion i2〇a of the first connecting strand 59a can apply a compressive force to the first portion 120b outside the second connecting strand 5 at the first knot 134a, And the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a can apply a compressive force to the second portion nib of the second connecting strand 59b at the second strand i34b. The compressive force applied by the first connecting strand 59a to the second connecting strand 59b can reduce or prevent the second connecting strand 59b from being displaced at the strands 134a-b for the first connecting strand.  In addition, The second connecting strand 59b can apply a compressive force to the first connecting strand 59a, for example, at the third and fourth strands 134c to d. especially, The first portion 12Gb of the second connecting strand 59b can apply a compressive force to the first portion 120a of the first connecting strand at the third strand 134c, And the second portion i2ib of the second connecting strand 59b can apply a compressive force to the first connecting strand 59& at the fourth 108 201210564 = knot 134a The second decoration 121a. The compressive force from the second connecting strand 59 to the first connecting strand may reduce or prevent the first connecting strand from 5% of the translation of the second connecting web at the knots 134c to d, respectively.  Once the gap 24c is approaching, Each of the first connecting strands 5, such as the first and second terminal portions 141 & And 14la, The junction 66 can be actuated to lock the configuration' thereby preventing the first and second portions 12& , 121& Relatively Move through the junction 66. Similarly, the first and second terminal portions 141b and 141b of the second connecting strand 59b are attached, respectively. The junction 66 can be actuated to the lock configuration. Thereby preventing the first and second portions 12〇b, The db is translated relatively through the junction 66.  Although the figure anchor assembly 2 includes at least one side that may include an eyelet, Attached to the second anchor over the defect via at least one integrated connecting member, It should be understood that The anchor assembly may alternatively or additionally comprise an auxiliary connecting member of the type described herein to attach the aperture of an anchor to the second error across the anatomical defect.  E.g, Please refer to Figures 34A to 34B, First and second in Tian 22a, At least one or both of 22b may comprise any suitable aperture of the type described herein or an aperture formed in any alternative manner, An eyelet 72 of the illustrated embodiment is illustrated. The anchor assembly 1A can further include an auxiliary connecting member 77 that attaches the first pin 22a to the second anchor 22b. For example, the 'auxiliary connection member 77 can be configured to attach the first anchor 22a to at least one hook of the second anchor 22b, For example, a pair of hooks 21〇a, 21〇b.  According to an embodiment, the first hook 21A can define a corresponding first attachment end 212a and a second engagement end 214a, And the 109th 201210564 two hook 210b can define the second attachment end 212b and the second engagement end 214b. First and second attachment ends 212a, 212b can each be attached to actuating strands 38a and 38b, For example, the apertures 72 defined by the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b. According to an embodiment, Attachment ends 212a through b define apertures, And the respective actuating strands 38a to b, For example, attaching parts 131a to b, During the construction of the respective apertures 72,  It can be fed through the first and second attachment ends 212a-b. Alternatively, First and second attachment ends 212a, 212b can be attached to the prefabricated eyelet 72,  For example, the clip is 'adhered with an adhesive or otherwise attached.  The engagement ends 214a-b are configured to be matable with each other to attach the first hook 210a to the second hook 21 Ob, Thereby, the first | seedling 22a is also attached to the second tin 22b', for example, in the shop 22a, 22b has been activated to the extended configuration. According to an embodiment, Hook 210a, 210b can be made of shape memory material. For example, you are Nitinol, So that once the hook 210a, 210b pairing 'hook 210a, 210b will revert to hook 210a, 210b has a different shape when paired. therefore, The hooks 21〇a to b define the first shape when paired, And a second shape different from the first shape after the hooks 2i〇a to b are paired.  For example 'hook 210a, 210b can lie substantially across the anatomy 24. Alternatively, Hook 210a, 210b can be paired with each other to maintain their shape. The hooks 210a-b can define a sufficient length to extend between the anchors 22a-b such that the hooks 210a-b can apply an abutting force to the actuating strands 38a-b after mating to cause the anchor 28a, At least one or both of 28b are biased toward each other to bring the gap 24c close. Alternatively or additionally, For example, if the hooks 210a to b are made of shape memory material 110 201210564, For example, the length of your Tino's hooks 210a-b between the anchors 22a-b can be reduced after pairing to apply a proximity force to the actuation strands 38a-b. So you should understand that The auxiliary connecting member 77 can define the first and second actuating strands 38a, 38b is a fixedly attached locking member,  And also applying a proximity force to the anchor 22a, 22b is biased toward the other to bring the gap 24c close to 'and keep the gap 24c close.  Please refer to pictures 35A to 35C, The auxiliary attachment member 77 can be configured as a connecting strand 59 substantially as described above, It can define and connect the first and second parts of the strand 12〇, 121 integrated connecting member 63. According to the illustrated embodiment, The connecting strand 59 can define an intermediate portion 123 extending between the apertures 72 of the first and second actuating strands 38a-b. The connecting strands 59 are fed through or otherwise extend through the apertures 72 such that the first and second portions 12, 121 is extended by the eyelets 72 and is sinusally attached to each other. For example, 'the first and second parts are 12〇,  At least one of 121, For example, as shown in the first part of the figure 12〇, Can be barbed, Thus, the ratchet teeth 216 each having a front end 216a and a rear end 216b are defined to protrude outward. First and second parts 120, Another one of 121, For example, the first part 121 as shown, At least one of the engine members 218' can be defined to be configured to mate with the ratchet teeth 216 to attach the first portion 120 to the second portion 12, for example, The dice member us can be configured to be the first and second parts 120, a defined aperture in the aperture 121, the second 220 can be cut through the second portion 121, As shown in Figure 35B,  It can be defined as the gap 222 between the fibers of the second portion 丨21, For example, in the first °, the mesh 223 or the braided structure, Or any alternative structure that accepts the first 12G gap 222 with barbs 111 201210564. It should be understood that Alternatively, the forceps member 218 can be configured as desired.  During operation, The first and second anchors 22aib can be actuated to the extended configuration in the manner described above. And at the anchor 22& Before or after actuating b, Connecting strands 59 can be fed through respective apertures 72. The ratchet 216 of the first injury 120 can be mated with the forceps member 218 of the second portion 21〇 such that the connecting strand 59 defines a closed coil 2〇4. E.g, The first portion 210 with barbs can be fed through the aperture 220 of the second portion 121 to attach the first portion 12A to the second portion 121, Thereby the first actuating strand 38a is also attached to the second actuating strand 38b. The front end 216a and the trailing end 216b of the ratchet teeth 216 can be configured to allow the first portion of the wound 120 to travel relative to the second portion 121 in a direction that causes the size of the coil 204 to decrease. And preventing the first portion 12 from substantially traveling relative to the second portion 121 in a direction opposite to the increase in the size of the coil 204. The size of the coil 204 is reduced, The connecting strands 59 apply a proximity force to the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b to bias the first and second anchors toward each other to bring the gap 24c into proximity. So you should understand that The connecting member illustrated in Figures 34A through 34B may define a sliding member and a locking member of the type described herein.  Please refer to figure 35D, The auxiliary attachment member 77 can be configured as a spring member 224, It is configured to be attachable between the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Thereby the first and second anchors 22a,  Between 22b. The spring member D4 can be configured as a coil spring as shown.  Or a spring member constructed in any alternative manner, attached to the iron 22a, When between 22b, its spring constant can make the anchor 22a, 22b is biased to the office. E.g, The spring member 224 can be configured as a spring wire or a spring member 224 that is suitably constructed in an alternative manner. The magazine member 224 can define first and second attachment ends 224a, 224b, It is configured to be attachable to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, respectively. E.g,  The attachment ends 224a-b define apertures, And the respective actuating strands 38a to b', for example, the attachment portions 131a to b, During the construction of each eyelet 72, It can be fed through the first and second attachment ends 212a-b. Alternatively, the first and second attachment ends 212a, 212b can be attached to the pre-formed eye 72', such as on a clip, Adhesive sticking, Or attached in other ways.  Alternatively, the 'first and second attachment ends 214a-b can be integrated with the actuation strands 38a and 38b' thereby defining the magazine member 224 as an auxiliary strand member 33 (defining the first and second sides that can be integrated with each other) The elastic portion of the strands 38a and 38b) is actuated.  During operation, The first and second anchors 22a-b can be actuated to the extended configuration in the manner described above. And before or after actuation of the faults 22a-b, the spring member 224 can be attached to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, It is attached to the pin bodies 28a to b. The spring member 224 applies a spring force that defines the proximity force to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to bias the first and second anchors toward each other to approximate the gap 24c.  It will be appreciated that a connecting member 63 of the type described herein is configured to attach the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b to each other, The proximity force can be applied to the anchor 22a, 22b and anchor 22a, 22b is biased to the opposite side to bring the gap 24c close. Please refer to Figures 36A through 36B. It should also be understood that One of the actuating strands 38a and 38b can be associated with each of the anchor bodies 28a, 28b integration, And the other of the actuating strands 38a and 38b can be associated with the respective anchor body 28a, 28b separation and weaving penetration 113 201210564 Pass it to attach the actuation strand to the anchor body. According to the illustrated embodiment,  The second actuating strand 38b is integrated with the pin body 28b, And the first actuating strand 38a defines an auxiliary strand 33a associated with the first pin body 38a. Therefore, The integrated actuating strand 3 of the second anchor 22b complements the auxiliary actuating strand 38a of the first anchor. therefore, As described above in the description of Figs. 7A to 7B, the first portion 41 of the second cat body 22b can define the respective actuation portions 131b and attachment portions 133b. In addition, After the auxiliary strands 33 are removed, a connecting member 63 of the type described herein can be attached directly to any of the apertures of the type described herein. For example, the apertures 90' are as detailed below in the description of Figures 37A through 37B:  The attachment portion 丨 33b of the second actuation strand 38b can be integrated with the attachment portion 133a of the first actuation strand 38a. First Consistent Rope 38& Can be woven through the tin body in the above manner, The first actuation portion 131a of the first panel 22a is caused to extend from the first anchor body 28a and to be spaced apart from the first attachment portion 133a in the manner described above. The pin assembly 20 can include another location for attaching the first actuating portion 131a to the auxiliary strand 33a (e.g., First and second attachment portions 133a, A connecting member 63 of either or both of 133b. According to the illustrated embodiment, the connecting member 63 attaches the first actuating portion injury 131a to the first to the attachment portion 133b. The connecting member 63 can be configured to be adapted according to any of the embodiments described herein. In order to attach the first actuation portion 131a directly or indirectly to another target position of the auxiliary strand 33a, For example, the first and second attachment portions 133a,  At least one or both of 133b.  According to the illustrated embodiment, The connecting member 63 is configured as a target position & by the first actuating portion 131a and the auxiliary strand 33a (which may be the second attachment portion 114 201210564 133b).  ★ Set the knot of 疋, As above. First Motion 1& Available & The new end 68 of Yijie 66, The terminal portion 135a ώ I j is extended, And the second actuating strand 38b defines the free end 70 of the knot 66. E.g, 哲一 rA &  Gotti II actuated strand 38b is placed in knot 66,  The part between two and three can define the static part of the free end 7G: The unconstrained strand 38b is disposed in the knot 66, First anchor body 28a, P injury can be used as a free part of the free end.  = during the period, Job can be in the unlocking group minus the pillar end "  Actuating part 131a, Relative to the free end 7〇 or the second actuating strand 38b, It can be described as J's movement through the knot 66. therefore, Actuator F can be applied to: Actuating part 131a, Especially applied to the terminal part 5& This creates tension in the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, thereby driving the first and second errors 22a, 22b is each applied from the first configuration motion to the extended planting state. The proximity force AF is applied to the first actuation portion 131a', Don't apply it to the first terminal part 13 brother, Further generating tension in the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Thereby the first and first anchors 22a, 22b biases the opponent and brings the gap 24c closer. therefore, The proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F.  As above, The anchor assembly 20 can include a first eyelet attached to the first anchor 22a, A connecting member 63 between the second holes of the second anchor 22b.  Any suitable embodiment or any suitable alternative embodiment described herein may constitute at least one or both of the first and second apertures. Please refer to pictures 37A to 43C. At least one or both of the first and second apertures may be configured as apertures 90 as described above in the description of Figures 9A through 12B.  115 201210564 For example, Please refer to Figures 37A to 37D, And as described above in the description of Figures 9A to 9C, The auxiliary strands 33 can extend through the apertures 90 and can be woven through the anchors 28 to define the path of the apertures 90 through the anchors 28 when the anchors 28 are actuated from the first configuration to the expanded configuration. In addition, The auxiliary strands 33 can be configured to facilitate deployment of the anchor 22 to another anchor line. Alternatively or additionally, it may be configured to accept an actuation strand that causes the pin to be actuated from the first configuration to the extended configuration upon implantation of the anatomy 24.  According to the illustrated embodiment, Tin assembly 20 can include perforations 9〇a, First and second anchors 22a of 90b, 22b, It is activated to an extended configuration, As described above in the description of FIGS. 9A to 9C. Next, the auxiliary strands 33 of one of the anchors 22a to b can be unloaded by the respective apertures 90a to b' and the auxiliary strands 33 of the other of the anchors 22a to b can be fed through the faults 22a to b. The eyelets 90a to b of the auxiliary strand. Thus, the auxiliary strands 33 of one of the 'anchors' may define a first coincident movable strand 38a and a second actuated strand 38b. Alternatively, Anchor 22a,  The auxiliary strands 90a to b of both 22b can be removed by the respective eyelets 90a to b, And a new auxiliary strand 33 can be fed through the aperture 90a, 90b both to make the first anchor 22a, 22b is attached to each other. therefore, The auxiliary strand 33 illustrated in Fig. 37A and the anchor body 28a, 28b separates and extends through respective apertures 90a, 90b to define the respective integrated actuation strands 38a and 38b.  As shown in Figure 37B, Along the respective actuation strands 38a and 38b, Driving the anchor body 28a, The 28bs are each moved from the extended configuration to the first configuration. therefore, Actuating strands 38a and 38b extend through anchor body 28a,  116 201210564 28b the same opening, As described above, the auxiliary strands 33 shown in Figs. 9a to 9C are illustrated. therefore, The strands 38a and the respective first and second actuating portions 131a-b and the first and second attachment portions 133a-b are actuated. The first and second actuating portions 131a-b are configured to each accept an actuation force F that moves the anchors 28a-b to an extended configuration in the manner described above, And the second actuation portions 133a-b are configured to be attachable to each other. E.g, The first and second actuation portions 133a to b can be integrated with each other, It can be attached via any suitable connecting member of the type described herein.  Continue to refer to Figures 37A through 37D, The anchor assembly can include a connecting member 63, It can be configured to be attachable to the first and second actuation portions 131a, 131b' thus attaches the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to each other' and also causes the anchor 22a, 22b is attached to each other. For example, in an integrated manner across the gap 24c, according to the illustrated embodiment, Attachment portions 133a to b of the auxiliary strands 33 may be attached.  The connecting members 63, which may define at least one of the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64, as described above, for example, attach the first and first actuating strands 38a and 38b together at the joint 125. In addition, According to the illustrated embodiment, the connecting member 63 can be defined by the auxiliary strands 33 and thus by the actuating strands 38a and 38b. therefore, According to an embodiment, The connecting member 63 can attach the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b while actuating the strands 38a and 38b with tension, In order to keep the gap 24c in a close state. Alternatively or additionally, It should be understood that Before the actuation strands 38a and 38b are tensioned, Therefore, before the gap 24c is brought close, The connecting member 63 allows the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b 117 201210564 to be attached to each other.  According to the illustrated embodiment, The connecting member 63 is defined by and integrated with the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. therefore, The actuation strands 38a and 38b are directly attached to each other. The connecting member 63 can define the sliding member 47 and the locking member 64 at the connection point 125. E.g, Connection member 63 can define a junction 66, The knot 66 can be constructed in the manner described above in the description of Figure 4A to the stimuli, and the knot 66 can be defined by one or more of the actuating strands 38a and 3bb. However, it should be understood that The knot may alternatively be defined by at least one of the actuation strands 38a and 38b and the connecting strand. Alternatively, For example, when the connecting strands are attached to the actuating strands 38a and 38b, The knot 66 allows portions of the connecting strand to be attached to each other to attach the actuating strands 38a and 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment,  The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b define a knot 66. therefore, At least a portion of the connecting members 63 can be integrated with at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b.  One of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can define a strut end 68' and the other of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b can define a free end 70. According to the illustrated embodiment, The first actuating strand ', such as the first actuating portion 131a, Defining the strut end 68, And the second actuating strand 38b, For example, the second actuation portion 131b, Definition Free end 70. The free end free portion 70b can be defined by the terminal portion 135b of the second actuating strand 135b. same, The terminal portion 135a of the first actuating strand 38a is extended by the knot 66 into a strut end 68.  Applying tension to the actuating strands 38a and 38b to cause the first and second pins 22a, 22b biases the opponent and brings the gap 24c closer,  118 201210564 The first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be knotted 66. Once the junction 66 is formed, And when the knot 66 is in the unlocked configuration, The actuation force f can be applied to the actuation strands 38a and 38b, Especially the actuation parts 13la to b, In order to drive the respective expandable portion 36 from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Next, The proximity force AF can be applied to the terminal portion 135a of the first actuating strand 38a, It defines a pillar line 68, Thereby causing the strut ends 68 to slide through the knots 66 and the respective anchors, For example, the first anchor 22a, Pull to another anchor, For example, the second anchor 22b. Once the gap 24c is approaching, Can make the free end 70 (for example, The free line 7 〇b defined by the terminal portion 135b of the second actuating strand 38b has a tension secondary locking knot 66 and prevents the first actuating strand 38a from translating through the 钤 66, Thereby, the tension actuating strands 38a and 3 are fixed.  The deadlock interface 63 can be configured as a knot 66. It should be understood that  Alternatively, the connection member 63 can be configured as needed according to any solid paste or any alternative connection H'. In addition, Do your best ^ 22a, Each of the illustrations 22b has a respective _joining member η, = solution, One of the tins may include attachment members 82 while being coupled to the respective actuation strands 38.  Tian In addition, please refer to the 37th chart, It should be understood that The U2 of the wrong component 可 may include the actuating strand 38 mountain extending through the aperture 9 或 or more in the manner described above in the description of Fig. 37A. E.g, —曰=two Actuated to the extended configuration so that the eyelet 9G is out of the expandable body 28 A plurality of auxiliary strands 3Mb can be inserted into the perforated ^ protruding tin body 28 along the respective actuating ropes to b from the extended stage = 119 201210564 to the first configuration. therefore, Each of the plurality of actuating strands 38a-b extends through the same opening of the pin body 28, As described above, the auxiliary strands 33 shown in Figs. 9A to 9C are illustrated. It should be understood that  The actuation strands 38a-b can be configured to be attachable to other anchors or anatomical locations as desired. At this point, 'should understand, As needed, At least one of the plurality of actuating strands 38a-b may be referred to as a connecting strand.  凊 Refer to Figures 38A through 38C, The recording assembly 20 as described above in the description of Figures 37A through 37D may include a plurality of connecting members 63 configured to attach at least one or both of the actuation strands 38a and 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, Actuating strands 38a and 38b are defined by a common strand. For example, the auxiliary strands 33, Making the respective attachment portions 133a, 133b integrates with each other. therefore, According to the illustrated embodiment, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are integrated with each other.  The anchor assembly 20 can include a configuration configured to cause the actuation portion i31a, 131b are attached to the other positions of the common strand to thereby attach the first and second connecting members 63a, 63b. According to the illustrated embodiment, The first connecting member 63a can attach the corresponding first actuating portion 131a to another position of the auxiliary strand 33 spaced apart from the first actuating portion 131a. same, The second connecting member 63b can attach the corresponding second actuating portion 131b to another position of the auxiliary strand 33 spaced apart from the second actuating portion 131b. E.g, According to the illustrated embodiment, The first connecting member 63a attaches the first actuating portion 131a to the first attaching portion 133a, And the second connecting member 63b attaches the second actuating portion 131b to the second attaching portion 133b.  therefore, It can be said, At least one connecting member, For example, the first and the 120th 201210564 - the connecting member 63a, 63b, The first and second actuation portions 13ia, 131b are each attached to other positions of the auxiliary strands 33 so that the first and second actuating portions 13la, 13讣 are attached to each other, For example, indirectly through the attachment portion 133a, At least one or both of 133b. More to say, The first attachment member 63a operatively attaches one of the first actuation strands 38a to another location of the actuation strand 38a, And the second connecting member 63b allows one of the second actuating strands 38b to be attached to another position of the second actuating strand 38b.  According to the illustrated embodiment, First and second connecting members 63a, Each of 63b can be individually configured as a knot 66a defined by the auxiliary strands 33 at different locations on the auxiliary ropes. 66b. Junction 66a, 66b can be constructed as described above in the description of Figs. 4A to 4F.  Or it can be constructed in an alternative way as needed. According to the illustrated embodiment, The first knot 66a includes a strut end 68 that can be defined by the actuating portion 13 of the first actuating strand 38a, And a free end 70 defined by the first end 137a of the first attachment portion 133a and a free end 70 defined by the second end 139a of the first attachment portion 133a. The first end 137a can be disposed at the junction 66a, The first Jin 2 is like this, And the second end 139a is configurable at the junction 66a, Between the second connecting members 63b. Alternatively, The free portion 7% can be defined by the attachment portion 133b of the second actuation strand 38b.  According to an embodiment, The second knot 66a includes a support end that can be defined by the actuating portion i31b of the second actuating strand 38b. And a free end of the free portion 70b defined by the first end portion 1131 of the second attachment portion 133b and the second end portion 13b of the second attachment portion 133b 70. The first end 137b can be placed in the junction 66b, Between the second pin bodies 28b, And the second end 139b is disposed at the junction 66b, Between the first connecting members 63a. Alternatively,  The free portion 70b can be attached to the first actuation strand 38a by a portion 133 &  definition. Attachment portion 133a, 133b is illustrated as being integrated with each other, However, it should be understood that Attachment portion 133a, 133b can be separated and attached to each other, For example, the anchor assembly 20 defines each of the first and second anchors 22a, 2 operably consuming the first and first auxiliary fibers 33a, 33b (for example,  Refer to Figure 30A to Figure 3D).  First and second junctions 66a, Each of 66b can define a respective sliding member 47, It allows the respective strut end 68 to translate through it relative to the free end 70. therefore, The sliding member 47 allows the first and second actuation portions 131a and 131b and the first and second attachment portions 133a, 133b is relatively translational, For example, in response to knot 66a, 66b can be applied to the terminal portion 135a when the configuration is unlocked, 135b's additional actuation force F, Thereby driving the respective anchor body "a, 28b is moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Each knot 66 is further defined to be actuatable to a locked configuration to enable I seed 22a, At least one or both of 22b are secured to locking members 64 at respective biasing positions. E.g, The tensile locking force can be applied to the knot 66a, The free portion of the free end of 66b is 7〇b to prevent the actuating portion 131a, 131b with respect to the attachment portion 133a, 133b translates through the knot 66a, 66b.  First and second junctions 66a, 66b may be spaced along the auxiliary strands 33 by a fixed distance L' whereby the anchor body 22a, 22b is inserted into the target anatomical position 24a, At 24b, the gap 24c is kept close. E.g, At 122 201210564 knot 66a, 66b injects their respective target anatomical locations 24& , Before 2 Park,  The gap 24c can be brought close to it. During operation, Once the first and second target anatomical locations 24a, Each of 24b is implanted with a first and second anchor 22a, After 22b, The knots 66a-b can be in an unlocked configuration such that the actuation force F is applied to the respective actuation strands 38a-b, For example, the actuation portions 131a to b,  This causes the respective faults 28a to b to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Next, The tensile locking force can be applied to the respective attachment portions 133a-b against the corresponding knots 66a-b, In order to drive the knot 66a to b to the locked configuration and to keep the anchors 2 2 a to b in an extended configuration.  First and first knot 66a, The distance l of 66b can be substantially equal to or less than the target anatomical position 24a, 24b distance, Making the gap 24c in the first and second tins 22a, 22b expands behind the anatomical position and approaches when connected with the auxiliary strands 33, The tension generated by the actuation strands 38a and 38b is maintained to maintain the proximity of the gap 24c. Although the first and second connecting members 63a to b can each be configured as the knot 66, It should be understood that  First and second connecting members 63a, Either or both of 63b can alternatively be configured as any suitable locking member 63 of the type described herein or alternatively in any suitable locking member. E.g, At least one or both of the connecting members 63a to b may define a twist, Thereby one or both of the actuating strands 38a-b can be hinged through the other of the self-actuating strands 38a-b, And at the anchor 22a, The actuation of 22b causes tension in the connecting strands to apply a compressive force that prevents translation of the anchor wires 38a-b. A twisted embodiment is described above in the context of the description of the 19D to the drawings.  , '° Please refer to pictures from 39 to 39D. The auxiliary strands 33 can be inserted 123 201210564 to extend through the first and second anchor bodies 28a, Hole 28a of 28b, 90b, As described above in the description of Figure 37A, And then,  Along the first and second anchor bodies 28a, The direction between 28b, In more than one location separated from each other (for example, Two positions) can be hinged through itself. Thus the 'anchor assembly 20 can include at least one connecting member 63 that couples the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b, For example, a pair of connecting members 63a, 63b.  E.g, Connecting member 63a, Each of 63b is configurable to be a knuckle 134a defined by first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, respectively 134b. In an embodiment, One of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be woven or otherwise spliced through another location of the auxiliary strand 33, For example, through the actuating strands 38 & And another of 38b. According to the illustrated embodiment, The actuation portion 131b of the first or second actuation strand 38b can be woven or otherwise spliced through the attachment portion 133b of the second or second actuation strand 38b and the second or first actuation At least one or both of the attachment portions 133a of the strands 38a are used to define the first hinge 134a. The second actuation strand 38b can enter the first actuation strand 38a and can extend along the first actuation strand 38a in a direction away from the corresponding second anchor 28b within the first actuation strand 38a for The first hinge 134a is defined at the first terminal portion 135b prior to exiting the first actuation strand 38a. Thus the first actuating strand 38a can surround the second actuating strand 38b along a portion of the length of the second actuating strand 38b.  In addition, The first actuating strand 38a can be woven or otherwise twisted through the second actuating strand 38b to define a second strand i34b. Root 124 201210564 According to the figure, no embodiment, The first or actuating portion 131a of the first actuating strand 38a can be woven or otherwise spliced through the attachment portion 133a of the second or first actuating cord 38a and the second or second At least one or both of the moving strands 38b^ attach portions 133b to define a first twisted junction l34b. First and second attachment portions 133a, The 133b may be attached to each other', for example, in an integrated manner or in a separate manner via a connecting member.  First and second kinks 134a, 134b can be separated, Thereby, the first hinge U4a is disposed closer to the first anchor 22a than the second hinge 134b. And the second twist 134b is disposed closer to the second twist 22b than the first twist 134a. The first actuating strand 38a can enter the second actuating strand 38b and extend along the second actuating strand 38b in the second actuating strand 38b in a direction away from the first tin body 28a for exiting The second twist 134b is defined at the first terminal portion 135a prior to the actuation of the strand 38b. therefore, The second actuating strand 38b can surround the first actuating strand 38a along a portion of the length of the first actuating strand 38a.  During operation, First and second actuation strands 38a and 38b,  In particular, the first and second actuation ends 131a, 131b, Each of them can be made to form an anchor body 28a, Each of 28b moves from the first configuration to the actuation force F of the extended configuration. As shown, The actuation force F is in the first and second actuation portions 131a, respectively. 13lb (for example, First and second terminal portions 135a, 135b) can be directly applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Or each in the knot 134b, An upstream position of 134a can be applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b.  Next, First and second actuation portions 131a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Each of 131b can accept proximity force AF,  125 201210564 The system makes 4 seed bodies 28a, At least one or both of 28b are directed to tin body 28a,  The other of 28b is biased to the biasing position to bring the gap 24c closer. The proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force f. E.g, If the actuation force F is applied to the actuation portion 丨3ia, 131b words. It should be understood that Once the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b have tension, The first actuating strand 38a applies a compressive force at the first strand 134a to the second actuating strand 38b' and the second actuating strand 38b applies a compressive force at the second strand 134b to the first actuating strand Share 38a. The first compressive force is sufficient to prevent the second actuating strand 38b from retreating away from the first strand 134a in a direction toward the second anchor body 28b, And the second compressive force is sufficient to prevent the first actuating strand 38a from retreating away from the second strand 134b in a direction toward the first anchor body 28a.  Therefore, the first and second kinks 134a, Each of the 134b defines a sliding member 47' that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to cause the gap 24C Approaching, And further defining the locking member 64 for securing the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, for example, the first and second anchor bodies 28a, The relative motion of 28b separation.  Eyes refer to pictures 40A to 40C, Before driving the first and second anchor bodies to the first configuration, The auxiliary strands 33 are insertable to extend through the first and second anchor bodies 28a, Hole 28a of 28b, 90b, As described above in the description of Figure 37A, And can be further spliced through itself. E.g, The auxiliary strands 33 can include a compression member 228, It can define a braided structure, such as a braid, Fabric, Mesh or knitwear, Or 126 201210564 any suitable component constructed in an alternative manner, For example, a non-woven structure defining at least one opening. In the first and second anchor bodies 28a, Attachment position 230a separated by a direction between 28b, 230b, a second or attachment portion 133a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, 133b can be attached to the compression member 228, For example, the opposite ends 228a of the compression member 228, 228b. therefore, The auxiliary strands 33 can define a common strand for the first and first actuating strands 38a and 38b and also for the compression member 228. According to an embodiment, In any way you want, Attached 133a, 133b can be woven into a compression member 228, Knotted with the compression member 228, Attached to the compression member 228 with an adhesive, Soldered to the compression member 228, Integrated with the weaving section, Or otherwise attached to the compression member 228. At this point, It should be understood that For example, when attaching parts,  When 133b is integrated with the compression member 228, The substantial entirety of the auxiliary strands 33 can be a woven structure. More should understand, The compression member 228 can define a connecting member 63 that is integral with the auxiliary strands 33 or that can be separated and attached to the secondary strands.  Therefore, the 'wrong component 20' can define its own configuration as a twist 134a,  134b's & First - connecting member 63a, 63b, It is defined by the auxiliary strands 33, In particular, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b are defined by the compression member 228. In an embodiment, The first actuating portion of the first actuating strand 38a is said to be extendable by the overcompressing member to define the first strand 134a. The first actuation portion ma extends substantially through the compression member 228 in a first direction from the first anchor body 28a toward the second anchor body. therefore, The compression member 228 can extend around the length of the actuation portion (four) U of the first actuation strand. The first-actuating portion 127 201210564 portion 13la can leave the compression member at the first terminal portion 135a 228 °, The second actuation portion 131b of the second actuation strand 38b can extend through the compression member 228 to define a second hinge 134b. Thus, the compression member 228 can surround the length of the actuation portion 131b of the second actuation strand 38b. The second actuating portion 131b extends substantially through the compression member 228 along a second direction from the second pin body 28b toward the first anchor body 28a. therefore, The second direction can be substantially opposite to the first direction. The second actuating portion 131b can exit the compression member 228 at the second terminal portion 135b.  During operation, First and second actuation strands 38a and 38b,  In particular, the first and second actuation ends 13la, 131b, Each can accept the formation of a wrong body 28a, 28b moves from the first configuration to the extended actuation force F. As shown, The actuation forces f are each in the first and second actuation portions 131a, 131b (for example, First and second terminal portions 135a, 135b) can be directly applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Or separately in the knot 134b, An upstream position of 134a can be applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b.  Next, First and second actuation portions 131a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Each of 131b can each receive a first and second actuation portion 131a, The 131b translates through the tensile proximity force AF of the compression member 228 that defines the connector 63, It is along the anchor body 28a, At least one or both of 28b are directed to the anchor body 28a, The other of 28b is biased to the biasing position to bring the gap 24c into the first direction. The proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. E.g, If the actuation force F is applied to the actuation portion 131a, 131b words. It should be understood that  128 201210564 Proximity force AF causes tension on the auxiliary strands 33, Thereby causing the compression member 228 to apply a compressive force at the first hinge 134a to the first actuation strand 38a (particularly the 'first actuation portion i31a'), And applied to the second actuation strand 38b at the second hinge 134b, In particular, the second actuating portion 131b. Applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a by the compression member 228, The compressive force of 38b prevents the first and second actuating strands 38& And 38b retreat away from the compression member 228 toward the respective first and second anchor bodies 28b in a second direction opposite the first direction.  therefore, First and second kinks 134a, Each of the 134b defines a sliding member 47' that allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to cause the gap 24c Approaching, And further defining a locking member 64 for securing the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, such as in a second direction substantially opposite the first direction, to cause the first and second anchor bodies 28a, The relative motion of 28b separation.  Please refer to Figures 41A through 41C, The auxiliary strands 33 define first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b. The first actuating strand 38a defines a first end 232a and a second end 234a of the other end, And the second actuating strand 38b defines a first end 232b and a second end 234b of the other end. The auxiliary strands 33 further define a compression member 228, Causing each along the first and second anchor bodies 28a, Attachment position 230a separated by a direction between 28b, 230b, First ends 232a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, 232b are attached to the compression member 228, For example, to the opposite ends 228a of the compression member 228, 228b.  According to an embodiment, In any way you want, Attachment portion 133a, 133b 129 201210564 : , , The flat woven compression member 228' is knotted with the compression member 228, Soldered to the compression member 228 with adhesion = attached to the compression member 228', Compiling with the weaving, Or otherwise attached to the compression member 228. It will therefore be appreciated that the 'compression member 228 can define a connecting member 63 that is integral with or can be separated and attached to the auxiliary strands.  Each of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can extend through the first and second apertures 9a, 90 both, As described above in the description of the figure, Driving the first and second anchor bodies to the first configuration. E.g, The first actuating strand 38a can be extended by the first end 232a.  Passing through the first eye 90a, Passing through the second hole 9〇b, And the second end 234a can extend through a corresponding opening 236a that extends through the compression member 228. same, The second actuating strand 38b can be second end 232 &  Extending the 'tooth through the first eye 90b' through the first eye 90a, And the second end 234b can extend through a corresponding opening 236b that extends through the compression member 228. The first and second actuating strands 3, such as and 38b, can each define a terminal portion 135a that extends downstream of the compression member 228, 135b.  At each of the openings 236a of the compression member 228, 236b and each defining a terminal portion 135a, Before 135b, At the position closest to the compression member 228 (for example, The second end 234a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b can be further wrapped around each other at the upstream of the compression member. 234b. The first terminal portion 135a of the first actuating strand 38a exits the compression member 228' at the first position and the second terminal portion 135b of the second actuation strand 38b exits the compression member 228' at the second position. Compared to the first position, The second position is relatively close to the first pin 28a. It should be understood that The auxiliary strands 33 can be defined for the first and second 130 201210564 actuating strands 38a and 38b and also for the common strand of the dust-reducing member 228.  Therefore, the 'wrong component 20 can define the configuration as a twist 134a, First and second connecting members 63a of 134b, 63b, It is defined by the auxiliary strands 33', in particular by the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b and the compression member 228. In an embodiment, The first hinge 13 is defined by the first actuation strand 38a extending through the second end 234a of the compression member 228, for example, at the first aperture 236a. The second hinge 134b is defined by the first coincident strand 38b extending, for example, at the first opening 23 6a through the second end 234b of the compression member 228. therefore, The compression member 228 has a length around the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b.  During operation, the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b,  In particular, the first and second ends 135a, 135b, Each can accept the anchor body 28a, Each of 28b is moved from the first configuration to the extended actuation force F. As shown, The actuation forces F are each in the first and second terminal portions 135a, 135b can be directly applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Or each of the knots 134b, The upstream position of 134a can be applied to the first and second actuation strands 38 & And 38b.  Next, the first and second terminal portions 135a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Each of the respective acceptable extensional force AF' of 135b is along the anchoring body 28a, At least one or both of 28b are directed to the anchor body 28a, The other of 28b is biased to the biasing position to cause the first direction in which the gap 24c is approaching to cause the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to translate through the compression member 228. Proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F. For example, 'If the actuation force ρ is applied to the terminal portion 131 201210564 copies 135a, 135b words. It should be understood that The proximity force AF causes the auxiliary strands 33 to have tension, Thereby causing the compression member 228 to apply a compressive force to the first actuation strand 38a at the first hinge 134a, And applied to the second actuation strand 38b at the second twist 134b. Applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a by the compression member 228, The compressive force of 38b prevents the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b from receding away from the compression member 228 toward the first and second anchor bodies 28b, respectively, in a second direction opposite the first direction.  therefore, First and second kinks 134a, Each of the 134b defines a sliding member 47, The sliding member 47 allows one of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to slide relative to the other of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b to bring the gap 24c into proximity. And further defining a locking member 64 for securing the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, such as in a second direction substantially opposite the first direction, to cause the first and second anchor bodies 28a, The relative motion of 28b separation.  Please refer to pictures 42A to 42C, It should be understood that The anchor assembly can include at least one anchor, For example, the first and second anchors 22a to b, The system includes an aperture 90 of the type described above, And each of them may further comprise a separate body 28a, The end of 28b (for example, Corresponding second end portion 54a, 54b) defined connecting strands 59a, 59b. therefore, Connecting the strands 59a, 59b and the anchor body 28a, 28b integration, And configured to enable the first and second anchors 22a, Each of 22b is attached to the first and second anchors 22a, The other of 22b. E.g, The first connecting strand 59a is extended by the first anchor body 28a and woven through the second eyelet 90b of the second anchor 22b. Therefore, the first connecting strand 59a extends through the second eyelet 90b, And 132 201210564 defining a first portion 120a extending from the first anchor body 28a to the second eyelet 90b, And a second portion Ula extending from the second aperture 90b at a position spaced apart from the first portion 12A. same, The second connecting strand 5卯 projects from the second wrong body 28b and is woven through the first eyelet 90a of the first anchor 22a. therefore, The second connecting strand 59b extends through the first eyelet 90a, And defining a first portion i2〇b' extending from the second anchor body 28b to the first aperture 90a and a second portion 121b extending from the first aperture 90a at a position spaced apart from the first portion i20b.  Once the second connecting strand 59b has been attached to the first eyelet 90a' thereby attaching the first anchor 22a to the second anchor 22b, The first wrong body 28a can be driven along the respective connecting strands 59b, Especially along the first and second parts 12〇b, 121b, Move from the extended configuration to the first configuration. Thus the second connecting strand 59b can define the first coincident strand 38a of the first anchor 22a. The first portion 120b of the second connecting strand 59b can define an attachment portion 133a of the first actuating strand 38a, And the second portion 12lb of the second connecting strand may define an actuating portion 131a of the first actuating strand 38a. therefore, The first actuating strand 38a can define an auxiliary strand 33a associated with the first anchor 28a, And can be integrated with the second anchor body 28b.  Similarly, once the first connecting strand 59a has been attached to the second eyelet 90b, Thereby attaching the first anchor 22a to the second anchor 22b, The second anchor body 28b can be driven along the respective connecting strands 59a, Especially along the first and second portions 120a, 121a, Move from the extended configuration to the first configuration. therefore, The first connecting strand 59a can define a second actuating strand 38b of the second anchor 22b. The first portion 12〇a 133 201210564 of the first connecting strand 59a may define an attachment portion 133b of the second actuating strand 38b, And the second portion 121a of the first connecting strand 59a defines an actuating portion 131b of the second actuating strand 38b. therefore, The second actuating strand 38b can define an auxiliary strand 33b associated with the second wrong body 28b, And it can be integrated with the first anchor body 28a.  The anchor assembly 20 may include at least one connecting member 63' such as a first connecting member that attaches the actuating portion 131a of the first actuating strand 38a to the attachment portion 133a of the first actuating strand 38a. 63a. The anchor assembly 20 can further include a second attachment member 63b that attaches the actuation portion 131b of the second actuation strand 38b to the attachment portion 133b of the second actuation strand 38b. E.g, Connecting member 63a, Each of 63b is configurable to be a hinge 134a defined by the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, 134b. In an embodiment, One of the attachment portion 133a of the first movable strand 38a and the actuating portion 131a can be woven or otherwise spliced through the other. same, One of the attachment portion 133b and the actuation portion 131b of the second actuation strand 38b can be woven or otherwise spliced through the other. According to the illustrated embodiment, For example, along the direction from the first anchor body 28a toward the second anchor body 28b, The actuating portion 131a of the first actuating strand 38 8a can be woven or otherwise spliced through the attachment portion 133a of the first actuating strand 38a, And, for example, in a direction from the second anchor body 28b toward the first anchor body 28a, The actuating portion 131b of the second actuating strand 38b can be woven or otherwise spliced through the attachment portion 133b of the second actuating strand 38b.  The actuating portion 131a of the first actuating strand 38a can thus extend through the attachment portion 133a of the first actuating strand 38a to define a first strand 134 201210564 knot 134a, Having the attachment portion 133a surrounding the actuation portion 131 & There is a length. same, The actuating portion 131b of the second actuating strand 38b can thus extend through the attachment portion 133b of the second actuating strand 38b to facilitate the twisting of the knot 134b, The attachment portion 133b is caused to have a length around the actuation portion 131b. First and second actuation portions 131a,  131b is defined in the kinks 134a, respectively. Terminal portion 135a extending downstream of 134b, 135b.  During operation, First and second actuation strands 38a and 38b,  In particular, the first and second actuation ends 131a, 131b, Each can accept the pin body 28a, 28b is actuated from the first configuration to the actuation force F of the extended configuration. As shown in the figure, the actuation force f is in the first and second actuation portions 131a, respectively. 131b (for example, First and second terminal portions 135a, 135b) can be directly applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Or at the knot 134b, An upstream position of 134a can be applied to the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b.  Next, First and second actuation portions 131a of the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Each of 131b can accept an anchor 28a, At least one or both of 28b are directed to the anchor body 28a, Another proximity force in biasing to the biasing position in 28b to approximate the gap 24c AF 〇 proximity force AF may be a continuation of the actuation force F, E.g, If the actuation force F is applied to the actuation portion 131a, 131b words. It should be understood that The proximity force AF is applied to the first and second actuation portions 131a, 131b causes tension between the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, The first attachment portion 133a is caused to apply a first compressive force to the first movable portion 131a at the first hinge 134a, And the second attachment portion 133b applies a second compressive force to the first attachment portion 131b at the second twist 135 201210564 junction 134b. The first compressive force is sufficient to prevent the first actuating portion 131a from retreating away from the first striking 134a in a direction toward the respective first anchor body 28a, And the second compressive force is sufficient to prevent the second actuating portion 131b from retreating away from the second striking 134b in a direction toward the second anchor body 28b.  therefore, The first hinge 134a can define a sliding member 47, Passing the first portion of the first actuating strand 38a relative to the second portion of the first actuating strand 38a to actuate the respective anchor 28a from the first configuration to the extended configuration, And also close the gap 24c,  And further defining the locking member 64 for securing the first and second portions of the actuation strand 38a, for example, the first and second anchor bodies 28a, 28b Relative motion of separation. same, The second hinge 134b can define a sliding member 47, It allows the first portion of the second actuating strand 38b to slide relative to the first portion of the second actuating strand 38b to actuate the respective anchor 28b from the first configuration to the expanded configuration. And also close the gap 24c, And further defining the locking member 64 for securing the first and second portions of the second actuation strand 38b, for example, the first and second anchors 28a, The relative motion of 28b separation.  Please refer to pictures 43A to 43B, The anchor assembly 20 can include a first anchor 22a having an eyelet 90a, As described above in the description of Figs. 37A to 37D, And the second anchor 22b can include an anchor body 28b that integrates the actuating strands 28b, As described above in the description of Figs. 36A to 36B. therefore, As above, One of the actuation strands 38a and 38b can each be associated with the anchor body 28a, 28b integration, And actuating the strands 38a,  The other of 38b can be connected to the anchor body 28a, 28b separates and weaves through each of the 136 201210564 from the anchor body 28a, 28b to attach the actuation strand to the anchor. According to the illustrated embodiment, The integrated actuating strand 38b of the second anchor 22b defines the auxiliary actuating strand 38a of the first anchor 22a. therefore, As described above in the description of Figs. 7A to 7B, The first portion 41 of the second anchor 22b can define a respective actuation portion 131b and attachment portion 133b.  The attachment portion 133b of the second actuation strand 38b can be integrated with the attachment portion 133a of the first actuation strand 38a. In the manner described above when describing Figures 9A through 9C, The first movable strand 38a can be woven through the anchor body, The first actuating strand 38a can be defined as a path through which the eyelet 90a can travel when the anchor 28a is moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration. In addition, The first or actuating portion 131a and the second or attachment portion 133a are extended by the first anchor body 28a and spaced apart from each other in the manner described above.  The anchor assembly 20 can include another location for attaching the first actuation portion 131a to the auxiliary strand 33a (e.g., First and second attachment portions 133a,  The connection member of either or both of 133b is magical. According to the illustrated embodiment, The connecting member 63 attaches the first actuation portion 131a to the second attachment 133b. According to any of the specific embodiments described herein, The connecting member 63' can be adapted to attach the first actuating portion 13la directly or indirectly to the other target position of the auxiliary strand 33a, For example, the first and second attachment portions 133a, 13 at least one or both of them.  According to the illustrated embodiment, The connecting member 63 is configured to be defined by the first 133 bl portion 13U and the lion strand 33a (which may be the second attachment portion mi ‘position defined knot 66, As above. The first-actuator ^ Ula defines a post end 68 of the knot 66, Making the terminal portion a knot 66 extend, And the second actuating strand 381) defines the 137 201210564 free end 70 of the knot 66. E.g, The second actuating strand 38b is disposed in the knot 66,  The portion between the anchors 28b defines a static portion 70a of the free end 70, The second actuating strand 38b is disposed in the knot 66, The portion between the first anchors 28a may define a free portion 70b of the free end 70.  During operation, The knot 66 can be in an unlocked configuration such that the strut end 68, Or the first actuating portion 131a' relative to the free end 70 or the second actuating strand 38b, It can slide through the knot 66. therefore, The actuation force ρ can be applied to the first actuation portion 131 a ', in particular to the first terminal portion 135a, This creates tension in the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Thereby driving the first and second anchors 22a, Each of 22b moves from the first configuration to the extended configuration. The proximity force AF is applied to the first actuation portion 131a, Especially applied to the first terminal portion 135a, Further generating tension in the first and second actuation strands 38a and 38b, Thereby the first and second anchors 22a, 22b biases the opponent and brings the gap 24c closer. therefore, The proximity force AF can be a continuation of the actuation force F.  Although the connecting member 63 is illustrated as a knot 66 in Figs. 43A to 43B, It should be understood that According to any suitable embodiment or any suitable alternative embodiment described herein, The connecting member 63 can be configured. E.g, As shown in Figures 43C through 43D, The connecting member 63 can be configured as a hinge 134 defined by the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b.  According to the illustrated embodiment, The first actuating strand 38a is hinged through the second actuating strand 38b to define the strand 134.  In particular, the first actuating portion 131a is hinged through the second actuating strand 38b extending from the second anchor body 28b. So’ as mentioned above, The second actuating strand 38b has a length that can surround the first actuating strand 38a - length 138 201210564 degrees. Alternatively, the first actuation strand 38a can be woven through the first actuation strand 38b to define the hinge 134 as desired.  During operation, The first consistent moving strand 38a, In particular, the terminal portion 135a of the actuating portion 131a, Acceptable to cause the anchor 28a to move from the first configuration to the extended configuration of the actuation force F, And also creating tension in the first and second actuation strands 38a-b. The tension generated by the first actuating strand 38a from the second actuating strand 38b applies an actuation force F to the second actuating strand 38b, Thereby the respective second anchor body 28b is moved from the first configuration to the extended configuration. Next, the first terminal portion 135a can accept the proximity force AF, It is conveyed along the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b and the anchor body 28a, At least one or both of 28b are directed to the anchor body 28a, The other of 28b is biased to a biasing position to bring the gap 24c close. The proximity force AF may be a continuation of the actuation force F 'e.g.' if the actuation force F is applied to the terminal portion 135a.  It should be understood that once the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b have tension,  The first actuating strand 38b applies a compressive force to the first actuation at the hinge 134, , The strand 38a' is sufficient to prevent the first actuating strand 3 from retreating away from the second stranded knot 34b in a direction toward the first anchor body 28a.  λ ‘, , , people, , , The mouth ί34 definition allows the first double-strength scraping:  The /monthly member 47' that is translated relative to the second actuation strand 38b to bring the gap 24e into contact, and the step-by-step definition locking member 64 for securing the first and second actuation strands And the second anchor body 28a, The relative motion of 28b separation.  Although the money-connecting member 63 is described as being detached from the strands 38b to J- or both, the actuating strands and the 139 201210564 38b are directly attached to each other, It should be understood that The anchor assembly 2, alternatively or additionally, may comprise a connection member configured to be the auxiliary connecting member 77,  Attached to the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b, so that the first and second anchors 22, 221? Attached to each other. The auxiliary connecting member 77 may alternatively or additionally attach at least one of the first and second actuating strands 38a and 38b to the connecting strand, It may also define an auxiliary connecting member 77' or may attach portions of the connecting strand to itself to attach the first actuating strand 38a to the second actuating strand 38b', for example, at actuation The strands 38a and 3讣 define the apertures and when the connecting strands extend through the apertures. The auxiliary connecting member 77 may be made of metal,  plastic, Suture, Or made of any suitable alternative material.  Although the above has been based on crossing one of the defects to the attachment anchor 22a,  22b illustrates a specific embodiment to describe the anchor assembly 2〇, However, it should be understood that The anchor assembly 20 can contain as many anchors as desired. They can be attached to each other in any way and configuration. E.g, Please refer to page 44, The anchor assembly 20 can include a plurality of pairs of first and second anchors 22 attached to two sides of a gap 24c (which can be the same or different anatomical defects),  2 2 b. The first and second anchors 22a of each pair of anchors may be attached according to any of the embodiments described herein or any suitable alternative embodiment, 22b. Alternatively, Please refer to Figure 44B, Multiple pairs of the second and second anchors 22a may be implanted across the gap 24c, 22b is at the target anatomy 24, And the anchor assembly 2 can include a switch 22 that can be configured to be in a common hub (c〇mm〇n hub) Each of the attachment members 63 attached to each other 22b. The connecting member 63 can be configured as any suitable connecting member of the type described herein or any suitable alternative connecting member. E.g, Can make the wrong 22a,  140 201210564 22b attachment part and anchor 22a, At least one of the connecting strands of 22b is attached to all.  Figure 45A of the multi-test in May, The fixation kit 25A can include at least one record 22 and an inserter 2 configured to inject the anchor 22 into the anatomy 24 as shown in Figures 1A through Figure. It should be understood that Fixing kit 250 can be separate, Attached to each other, Or at least one or more, in accordance with any of the embodiments described herein, configured to be attachable to each other,  To all the errors described in this article 22. The inserter 252 can include a cannula [a) 254 having a central opening 256 and a plunger or pusher 258 axially insertable into the central opening 256. The sleeve 254 has a tapered tip 260 and a slot 268 that projects axially from the tip 260.  Further, the insertion benefit 252 includes a grip 262 that operates the lever 264. The grip 262 #-end is detachably attached to the sleeve f 254, And the face lever 2M is detachably attached to the plunger (10). The outer diameter of the plunger 258 corresponds to the central opening 256 _ diameter of the sleeve 254. The end of the central opening of the sleeve 254 is configured in a conical configuration such that it expands at the end of the inlet to the sleeve 254. therefore, The wrong body 28 of the anchor 22 can be inserted through the tapered inlet 266 and into the central opening 256 of the sleeve 254 in the first configuration. Thereby the anchor body can be compressed.  The field causes the anchor body 28 to be forced out of the casing by pressing the plunger 258. The ship 28 can expand radially. For example, in the second direction 35 (see FIGS. 1A through 1B), the tension applied to the actuation strand 38 can be secured by the front face of the sleeve 254 to tighten the anchor body 28. The actuation strand 38 is inserted into the slot 268 such that it can be introduced along the sleeve 254 when the sleeve f 254 is inserted into the anatomy 24. When the wrong body 28 of the pin 22 has actuated 141 201210564 to the extended configuration and is fixed to the anatomy 24, A needle 270 attached to the free end of the actuation strand 38 can be used to complete a surgical procedure.  Eyes refer to Figure 45B, The outer diameter or alternative cross-sectional dimension of the plunger 258 can be less than the inner diameter or cross-sectional dimension of the central opening 256 of the sleeve 254. therefore, When the plunger 258 is inserted into the central opening 256 of the sleeve 254, The actuation strand 38 of the anchor 22 can be introduced into the central opening 256 of the sleeve 254. By actuating the operating lever 264 on the grip 262, The plunger 258 can be pushed away from the sleeve 254 toward the pin body 28 by the central opening 256 at the tip end 260 of the sleeve 254. Once the anchor 28 is in the central opening 256, The actuating strands 38 can be pulled back at the end of the sleeve 254 to thereby drive the anchor body 28 to the expanded configuration in the cavity 256.  凊 Refer to Figures 46A through 46D, The plunger 258 can define a central bore 272 into which the actuating strands 38 of the anchor 22 can be introduced. In addition, The sleeve 254 has a first longitudinal aperture 274 extending between the tip end 260 and the trailing end of the sleeve 254 thereby inserting the sleeve 254 of the entire length. A second longitudinal aperture 276 extends over the plunger 258 between the forward and trailing ends of the plunger 258 thereby also inserting the plunger 258 of the entire length. As shown in Figure 46B, When the sleeve 254 is in the first rotational position relative to the plunger 258, The first longitudinal aperture 274 of the sleeve 254 is diametrically opposed to the second longitudinal aperture 276 of the plunger 258. In the first rotational position of the sleeve 254, The actuation strands 38 of the anchor 22 are secured by a central aperture 272. Once the actuating strands 28 of the anchor 22 are secured to the cavity of the patient's body by actuating the strands 38 of the anchor 22, The sleeve 254 can be rotated to a second rotational position relative to the plunger 258 (Fig. 46D). In this second rotational position of the sleeve 254, The first longitudinal aperture 274 of the sleeve 254 is aligned with the second longitudinal aperture 276 of the plunger 258 142 201210564, And the inserter 252 can be released by the actuation strand 38 of the anchor 22.  Figures 47A through 47D illustrate the grip 262 of the embodiment of the inserter 252 attached to the sleeve 262 and the sleeve 254 to Figs. 45A through 46D. The upper end portion of the grip 262 includes a groove 278 into which the sleeve 254 can be inserted and a spring member (for example, Leaf spring 279) provides a releasable snap lock that is configured to releasably attach sleeve 254 to grip 262. The rear end of the plunger 258 can be snapped into a resilient fork 28 配置 disposed at the upper end of the operating lever 264.  Please refer to Figure 48, The inserter 52 can include a depth control tube 282 and a clamping element 284 that slide over the sleeve 254. The inserter 52 can be prepared prior to surgery by inserting the error 22 into the cannula 254 and inserting the plunger 258. Once the anchor 22 and the plunger 258 are inserted, Either of the plurality of clamping elements 284 is attached to the trailing end of the inserter 252 by snapping a first tab 286 on the rear of the sleeve 254. In order to prevent the plunger 258 from being inadvertently displaced relative to the sleeve 254, Clamping member 284 includes a second tab 288 that abuts the trailing end of sleeve 254 and a third tab 290 that abuts the enlarged portion of the end of plunger 258. Prior to use of the inserter 252, the gripping element 284 is unloaded by the sleeve 254 and the grip 262 is attached to the sleeve 254' and the inserter 252 can be operated in the manner described herein.  An example of a specific embodiment relating to the illustrated embodiment has been presented, However, the invention is not intended to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed. Further, the structures and features of the above-described embodiments may be applied to other specific embodiments described herein unless otherwise stated. therefore,  143 201210564 Those skilled in the art will recognize that the present invention is intended to cover all modifications and alternative arrangements falling within the spirit of the invention. For example, it is stated in the scope of the attached patent application.  BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The above summary and the following detailed description of exemplary embodiments of the present application can be more clearly understood. The exemplary embodiments illustrated in the drawings are for illustration purposes only. but, It should be understood that The application is not limited to the exact configuration and tools illustrated.  BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1A is a schematic side elevational view of an I seedling assembly comprising an anatomical defect implanted in one of the first configurations;  Figure 1B is a schematic side view of the wrong component of the »1 diagram, It is a schematic side view showing the sorrow of the extended group and the approaching position. FIG. 1C is a schematic side view of the 1A pin assembly fixed to the auxiliary structure according to an embodiment;  The forbearing side view of FIG. 1D illustrates a erroneous assembly as shown in FIG. 1C fixed to the auxiliary structure according to another embodiment;  Figure 2A is a perspective view of the construction according to an embodiment;  Figure 2B is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  2C is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  Figure 2D is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  Figure 2E is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  Figure 2F is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  Figure 2G is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  144 201210564 Figure 2H is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment;  3A to 3C are diagrams showing a method for making an anchor body of an anchor;  4A through 4F illustrate method steps for making a slip joint of 4 seedlings shown in Fig. 2G, according to an embodiment;  5A-5B illustrate method steps for fabricating an aperture of an anchor shown in FIG. 2H, according to an embodiment;  Figure 5C illustrates method steps for fabricating an aperture of an anchor shown in Figure 2H in accordance with an alternate embodiment;  Figure 5D illustrates method steps for making an aperture of an anchor shown in Figure 2H in accordance with an alternate embodiment;  Figure 6A is a perspective view of an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment,  The anchor is in the first configuration in the figure;  Figure 6B is a perspective view showing the error in Figure 6A, The anchor is in the extended configuration in the figure;  The perspective views of Figures 6C through 6E illustrate method steps for making the error illustrated in Figure 6A;  The perspective view of Figure 7A contains the anchor of the actuating strand, The actuating strands are woven through a plurality of openings defined by the expandable portion of the anchor body to integrate with the anchor body. The anchor system is in the first configuration;  Brother 7B is a perspective view of the fault of the figure 7A. The wrong system is in an extended configuration;  Figure 7C is a perspective view showing the actuating strand inserted through the opening when the anchor body is in the first configuration as shown in Figure 7A;  The perspective view of Fig. 8A illustrates the error of including the 145 201210564 moving strand according to an alternative embodiment. The actuating strand is woven through a plurality of openings defined by the expandable portion of the pin body for integration with the anchor body. The pin system is in the first configuration;  Figure 8B is a perspective view showing the error in Figure 8A. The tin system is in an extended configuration;  The perspective view of Fig. 9A illustrates an anchor comprising a seedling and an eyelet extending from the anchor body. And an actuating strand attached to the eyelet and woven through the expandable portion of the anchor body' the expandable portion is in the first configuration;  Figure 9B is a perspective view of the pin illustrated in Figure 9A, The diagram shows the expandable part from the first configuration movement to the extended configuration;  Figure 9C is a perspective view of the pin illustrated in Figure 9A, The expandable part is in an extended configuration;  10A through 10G illustrate method steps for fabricating the aperture of Fig. 9A, according to an embodiment;  11A through 11H illustrate method steps for fabricating the expandable portion of FIG. 9A in accordance with an embodiment;  12A to 12B are diagrams showing the steps of removably attaching the actuating strand to the body shown in Fig. 9A;  The side view of Figure 13A illustrates, according to an alternate embodiment, an anchor comprising an anchor and an actuating member woven through the anchor. The anchor system is in the first configuration;  Figure 13B is a cross-sectional side view showing the anchor of Figure 13A;  Figure 13C is a side view of the anchor illustrated in Figure 13A, The anchor system is in an extended configuration;  Figure 14A is a side view of a two-stage anchor constructed in accordance with an embodiment;  Figure 14B is a side view of a two-stage anchor strand comprising a pair of separate lines in accordance with another embodiment;  Figure 15A is a perspective view showing an anchor in the form of a mesh and an anchor of the actuating strand integrated with the mesh. The anchor system is in the first configuration;  Figure 15B is a perspective view of the anchor illustrated in Figure 15A, The anchor system is in the first configuration;  The perspective view of Fig. 15C includes an anchor body defining a plurality of cutting openings and an anchor of the actuating strands of the entire anchor body, The anchor system is in a first configuration;  Figure 15D is a perspective view of an anchor comprising a braided anchor and an actuating strand integrated with the braided anchor;  Figure 16A is a perspective view showing an anchor body having an expandable portion in the form of a mesh and an anchor extending from the expandable portion; The expandable part is in the first configuration;  Figure 16B is a perspective view of the anchor illustrated in Figure 16A, The system includes an actuation strand coupled to the expandable portion, The expandable part is in the first configuration;  The perspective view of Fig. 16C includes an anchor body having an expandable portion defining a plurality of cut openings and a hole extending from the expandable portion.  The perspective view of Figure 17A illustrates an anchor comprising a plurality of anchor members slidably coupled to a common strand, The anchor is in the first configuration in the figure;  Figure 17B is a perspective view of the anchor illustrated in Figure 17A, The anchor 147 201210564 is in an extended configuration;  a side view of the first anchor assembly . And the heart and the first and the 18B pictures implanted in the anatomical structure are the side views of the components recorded in the first (four) Yudi 18A diagram, 5 Xuan special - and the second Caizi are in the extended configuration; 1 ^ 2f is a side view of the erroneous assembly shown in Fig. 18B's octagonal package--to the second material connection member; the figure is a side view of the contact as shown in Fig. 18, embodiment 'The system includes an auxiliary connecting strand attached between the first and second tin bodies; the perspective view of Fig. 19A is configured to be a connecting member of the figure; the system includes the first and second brocade a side view of the wrong assembly of the second anchor connected to the 19B, the anchor and the second joint member according to another embodiment; the side view of the anchor assembly of the 19C, including the first and second pins and Further, the embodiment constitutes a connecting member that attaches the first to the second pin; FIG. 19D is a side view of the pin assembly constructed according to another embodiment, which includes each of the first configuration and the implanted anatomical structure The first and second pins; Figure 19E is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in Figure 19D, The first and second anchors of the extended configuration; FIG. 19F is a partially enlarged side view of the anchor assembly shown in FIG. 19E, including the first and second connecting members; 148 201210564 19G is 19F FIG. 19H is an enlarged cross-sectional side view of the second connecting member of FIG. 19F; FIG. 20A is a side view of the anchor assembly constructed according to another embodiment; FIG. 20B A side view of an anchor assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, FIG. 20C is a side view of a pin assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, and FIG. 21A is a side view of a seedling assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment The first and second errors are respectively included in the first configuration and implanted in the anatomical structure; FIG. 21B is a side view of the seedlings in FIG. 21A, the first and second anchors are respectively In an expanded configuration; FIG. 21C is a side view similar to the anchor assembly of FIG. 22B, but including a connecting member constructed in accordance with an alternative embodiment; FIG. 22A is a perspective view of the connecting member constructed in accordance with an embodiment; Figure 22B is a side view of the anchor assembly The first and second pins are each included in a first configuration and implanted in an anatomical structure and attached via a connecting member of FIG. 22A; FIG. 22C is a side view of the pin assembly illustrated in FIG. 22B, The first and second anchors are each in an expanded configuration; the 2nd 2D is a perspective view of the connecting member constructed according to another embodiment 149 201210564 View - 'these include the first structure that is attached to the connecting member and via FIG. 22D is a side view showing the first and the second self-receiving members in the first embodiment, and the part == according to another alternative embodiment, the tin component is included in the second figure. a side view of the anchor assembly, each of which is in an expanded configuration and a first side view of the anchor assembly shown in Fig. 23B, which is embedded in the anatomical structure, the first and the first of each of the Hai 4 are in an extended configuration; ::: The cross-sectional end view shows the anchor map as shown in Fig. 23c, and the second and second pins of the side view of the paving assembly of another embodiment are in the first configuration and implanted in the anatomical structure. The second is a side view of the 1 seedling assembly shown in Figure 2, ^ 2 1 In the extended configuration; = = another embodiment constitutes the wrong component of the side view 22: the respective ones are in the first configuration and implanted in the anatomical structure J and the second 4 seedlings; In the side view of the anchor assembly of Figure 25A, the person and the second error are each in an extended configuration; 150 201210564 Figure 26A is a side view of the wrong component constructed according to another embodiment, each of which is in a first configuration And first and second anchors implanted in the anatomical structure; Figure 26B is a side view of the I seedling assembly illustrated in Figure 26A, the first and second anchors each in an expanded configuration; 2 7 A Figure 2 is a side elevational view of an anchor assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, including first and second anchors each in a first configuration and implanted in an anatomical structure; Figure 27B is an illustration of the anchor illustrated in Figure 27A Side view of the assembly, the first and second anchors are each in an expanded configuration; Figure 28A is a side view of the anchor assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, each comprising a first configuration and an implanted anatomy First and second anchors of the structure; Figure 28B is a diagram of Figure 28A Side view of the assembly, the first and second anchors are each in an expanded configuration; Figure 28C is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in Figure 28B, the first and second anchor systems are in a near configuration; Figure 28D is a side view similar to the anchor assembly of Figure 28C, but showing an eyelet extending from the anatomical structure; Figure 29A is a side view of the anchor assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, including The first configuration and the first and second anchors implanted in the anatomy; FIG. 29B is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in FIG. 29A, each of the first and second anchors being in an expanded configuration; Figure 29C is a perspective view of a connecting member of the anchor assembly of Figure 29B 151 201210564; Figure 29D is a perspective view of another connecting member of the anchor assembly of Figure 29B, and Figure 30A is an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment A side view of the assembly, including first and second anchors each in a first configuration and implanted in an anatomical structure; Figure 30B is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in Figure 30A, the first The second anchors are each in an extended configuration; Figure 30C is a diagram shown in Figure 30B Side view of the assembly, the first and second anchor systems are in an approximate configuration; Figure 30D is an enlarged portion of the anchor assembly of Figure 30A; and Figure 31A is a side view of the anchor assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment , the first and second anchors each being in a first configuration and implanted in an anatomical structure; FIG. 31B is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in FIG. 31A, the first and second anchors respectively In an extended configuration; Figure 31C is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in Figure 31B, the first and second anchor systems are in a near configuration; Figure 3 2 A is an anchor constructed in accordance with another embodiment A side view of the assembly, including first and second anchors each in a first configuration and implanted in an anatomical structure; Figure 32B is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in Figure 32A, the first The second anchors are each in an extended configuration; Figure 32C is a side view of the anchor assembly illustrated in Figure 32B, the first and second anchor systems are in a near configuration; 152 201210564 Figure 33A is in accordance with another implementation The side view of the pin assembly of the example consists of the first configuration and the plant The first and second anchors of the anatomical structure; Figure 33B is a side view of the wrong component illustrated in Figure 33A, the first and second anchors are each in an extended configuration; the figure is shown in Figure 33B The side view of the assembly, the shoulder and the first anchor are in a close configuration; the 3 4 A is a side view of the pin assembly constructed according to another embodiment, which includes the respective configurations in the extended configuration and implanted in First and second anchors of the anatomical structure; - Figure 34B is a side view of the pin assembly illustrated in the 34th AS, the first and second anchor systems are in a near configuration; the third drawing is in accordance with another implementation A side view of the component of the recording component, including the m-th inspection piece that is in an extended configuration and implanted in the target anatomy, is in a state close to the rainbow; ° FIG. 35B is a side view showing the movement of the anchor assembly To the anchor assembly of Figure 35A prior to configuration; Figure 35C is a side view of a faulty assembly similar to the pin assembly as shown in Figure 35B, but including the construction of the joint member according to an alternative embodiment; Side of the pin assembly similar to the pin assembly shown in Figure 35A Figure, but including a splicing member according to an alternative embodiment; Figure 3A6 is a side view of a erroneous assembly constructed according to another embodiment, which includes each being in a first configuration and implanted in an anatomical structure 153 201210564 The first and second anchors; Fig. 36B is a side view showing the wrong component in Fig. 36A, the first and second financials are in an extended configuration; and Fig. 37A is a further alternative embodiment The side view of the constructed tin assembly includes the first and second tins respectively in the first configuration; the 37B is a side view of the wrong component illustrated in Fig. 37A, shai, etc. - and the second brocade Each of them is in the first configuration; the side view of the 3rd C chart illustrates the 3rd 7B error component implanted in the target anatomy; the 37D is a side view of the component illustrated in Fig. 37A, The first and second brocades are each in an expanded configuration; the side view of Fig. 37E illustrates an eyelet and a plurality of actuating strands extending through the aperture; and Fig. 38A is constructed in accordance with another embodiment Side view of the pin assembly, each of the first and second brocades in a first configuration; The side view illustrates the 3rd 8th tin assembly implanted in the target anatomy; the 38C is a side view of the wrong assembly illustrated in Fig. 38B, the first and second | Figure 39A is a side view of a faulty assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, including first and second anchors; Figure 39B is a side view of the wrong assembly of the 39A gj, the first anchorage Attached to the second pin; Figure 39C is a side view of the assembly shown in Figure 39B, the first and second anchors each in a first configuration and implanted in a target 154 201210564 anatomy; The figure is a side view of the pin member illustrated in Figure 39C, each of the first and second anchors being in an expanded configuration; FIG. 40A is a side view of the wrong component constructed in accordance with another embodiment, including First and second | seedlings; / Figure 40B illustrates a side view of the wrong component of Figure 40A, which is implanted in the target anatomy and the first and second anchors are each in a first configuration; 40C is a side view of the name of the seedling assembly in the second drawing, which is in close proximity to the configuration; Figure 41A is based on another A side view of a pin assembly constructed in one embodiment includes first and second pins; and FIG. 41B is a side view of the wrong assembly of FIG. 41A, which is implanted in a target anatomy and the like - And the second pins are each in a first configuration; FIG. 41C illustrates a side view of the wrong assembly in FIG. 41B, the first and second anchors are each in an expanded configuration; and FIG. 42A is in accordance with another embodiment a side view of the formed contact comprising the first and second anchors; / Figure 42B is a side view of the wrong assembly illustrated in Figure 42A, implanted in the target anatomy and the first and the The second errors are each in the first configuration; a 42f shows a side view of the wrong component in Figure 42B, the first and second anchors are each in an extended configuration; the second figure is constructed in accordance with another embodiment A side view of the wrong component 155 201210564, which includes first and second anchors implanted in the target anatomy, and the first and second anchors are each in a first configuration; Figure 43B is an illustration of a side view of the assembly of the face of Figure 43A, the first and the first are each in an extended configuration; Figure 4 3 C is a side view of a faulty assembly constructed in accordance with another embodiment, including first and second anchors implanted in the target anatomy, and the first and second anchors each in a first group Figure 43D is a side view showing the wrong assembly of Figure 43C, each of the first and second anchors being in an expanded configuration; Figure 4 4A is a schematic illustration of a tin assembly constructed in accordance with an alternate embodiment The top view 'is an anchor that is attached to each other including a anatomical defect; the top view is a schematic top view of a faulty assembly constructed in accordance with an alternative embodiment, comprising a plurality of anchors attached to each other at a common hub across the anatomical defect; Figure 45A is a side view of the fixation kit, including at least one of the seedling and insertion instrument; the 45B ffi is a cross-sectional side view of the fixing kit of the 45A1J; According to an alternative embodiment, the fixing set is in a first rotational state; the 46B is a cross-sectional side view of the kit of Fig. 46A taken along line 46b_46b 1; and Fig. 46C is a cross-sectional side view of the fixing set of Fig. 46A , Is a second rotational state in which the pair of apertures are aligned; Figure 46D is a cross-sectional side view of the fixation kit of Figure 46C taken along line 156 201210564 46D-46D; Figure 47A is an illustration of the inserter during assembly Sectional view of section 47B is a cross-sectional side view of the inserted inserter of Fig. 47A, Fig. 47C is a cross-sectional side view of the grip of the inserter of Fig. 47B, and Fig. 47D is a view of the grip of Fig. 47C A perspective view; and Fig. 48 is a side view of a fixing kit constructed in accordance with another embodiment. [Main component symbol description] 1 10. . . Wrong component 29. . . Central axis 2 0... tin assembly 30. . . First end or near end 22. . . Scalable anchor 31. . . Coil 22a, b. . . First anchor, second 32. . . Second end or distal end tin 32a, b. . . Actuating the strands 23... opening 33. . . Auxiliary strands 24...anatomical structure 33a. . . First auxiliary strand 24a, b. . . First and second heads 3 4...long direction anatomical position 35. . . Second direction 24c. . . Clearance 36. . . Scalable part 25. . . Auxiliary structure 36a, b. . . The first and second can be 27. . . Anatomical structure Extended part 28. . . Anchor body 37. . . Actuating member 28a, b. . . First and second anchor bodies 37a, b. . . First and second actuation members 157 201210564 38. .  . Actuate the strands 38a. . . The first consistent moving strand 38b. . . Second actuating strand 39a. . . First end or near end 39b. . . Second end or distal end 40. .  . Opening 40a. . . The nearest end opening 40b. . . The most distal opening 40c. . . Intermediate opening 41, 41a. . . The first part 42. .  . Substrate 43. .  . The second part 44. .  . Anchor rope strand 45a. . . First or proximal selection opening 45b. . . Second or distal selection opening 46. .  . First stop knot 47. .  . Sliding member 48. .  . Pillar end 49... opening 50. .  . Free end 52... first end 53. .  . Coil 54...second end 54a, b. . . Second end 5 5. . . Wrong line 56. .  . Coil 56a. . . First proximal coil 56b. . . Second distal coil 56c. . . Third distal coil 57. .  . Near-end coil 5 8. . . Compilation 59. .  . Connecting strands 59a, b. . . First and second connecting strands 60. .  . Second stop knot 61. .  . Barbed 63. .  . Connecting member 63a, b. . . Connecting member 63c, d. . . Third and fourth connecting members 63e. . . Fifth connecting member 63f. . . The sixth connecting member 64. .  . Locking member 65... front end 66. .  . Junction 66a, 66b. . . 66c, 66d, 66f. . . Conclusion 67. .  . Tail end 158 201210564 68. .  . Pillar end 69. .  . Barbed 70. .  . Free end 70a. . . Static part 70b. . . Free part 71. .  . Sliding coil 71A. . . First sliding coil 71B. . . Second sliding coil 71C...third sliding coil 71D. . . Fourth sliding coil 72. .  . Eyelet 73, 73a. . . Clearance 74. .  . Folding part 75. .  . Suture 76. .  . Stem handle 77. .  . Auxiliary connecting member 78. .  . End 79...turned strands 79a, b. . . First and second opposite ends 8 0. . . Eyelet knot 81. .  . Coil 82. .  . Attachment member 82a, b. . . First and second ends 83. .  . Continuous coil 84a. . . First hole 84b. . . Second aperture 85... body portion 86. .  . Weight stack 87a, b. . . Opening 90. .  . Eyelet 91. .  . Coil 92a, b. . . First and second paragraphs 92c. . . Free end 93. .  . First stitching 94. .  . Needle 95...Second suture 9 6. . . Coil 97. .  . Knot 99...coil 99a. . . First coil 99b. . . Second coil 99c. . . Third coil 99d. . . Fourth coil 100. .  . Free end 101a... first paragraph 101b. . . Second paragraph 102a. . . Part 1 102b. . . The second part 159 201210564 103a. . . The first paragraph 103b. . . The second paragraph 104... line 105a. . . The first paragraph 105b. . . Second paragraph 107a. . . First paragraph 107b. . . Second paragraph 108. .  . Connection 109. .  . Anchor fiber 110. .  . Central axis 111. .  . Mesh 112. .  . Holes 111, 113... closed position 114. .  . Anchor member 115. .  . Fixed position 117. .  . Hole 118..., coil 119. .  . Leaving position 120... cluster 120. .  . The first part 120a, b. . . The first part 121. .  . The second part 121a, b. . . The second part 121b. . . The third part 123. .  . Middle part 125. .  . Connection point 125a, b. . . Connection points 131, 131a, b. . . Actuation section 132. .  . Kinking 133. .  . Attachment part 133a, b. . . Second or attached portion 134a, 134b. . . Twisted 134c, 134d. . . Twist 135a, b. . . Terminal part 136... line 137a, b. . . First end 138. .  . U-shaped nail 139a, b. . . Second end 140. .  . Crossbar 141a, b. . . First terminal parts 141a', 141b'. ·. The second terminal portion 142. .  . Foot 144...opening 146. .  . Block 14 8... knot 149. .  . Axis 160 201210564 150, 152... arrow 154. .  . Clamp 156a, b. . . Body part 158. .  . Foot 160. .  . Hole 161...opening 162. .  . Shrink wrap material 164. .  . Hole 166. .  . Stitching clasp 168. .  . Main body 170. .  . Barbed 172. .  . Collar 174, 176... Hole 178. .  . Internal ratchets 180a, b. . . Ratchet 182. .  . Long axis 184. .  . Ratchet housing 186, 188. . . Hole 187. .  . Central axis 190. .  . Internal ratchet 192a, b. . . Ratchet 194. .  . Belt outer tube 196, 198. . . Hole 197. .  . Central axis 200... internal teeth 202a, b. . . Tooth 204. .  . Closed coils 210a, b. . . Hook 212a. . . The first attachment end 212b. . . Second attachment end 214a. . . Second meshing end 214b. . . Second meshing end 216. .  . Ratchet 216a. . . Front end 216b. . . Tail end 218. .  . Tweezers member 220... orifice 222. .  . Void 223... mesh 224. .  . Spring member 224a, b. . . First and second attachment ends 228. .  . Compression member 228a, b. . . The opposite ends 230a, b. . . Attachment position 232a, b. . . First end 234a, b. . . Second end 236a, b. . . Open L 240...Common Hub 250...Fixed Kit 161 201210564 252. .  . Inserter 254. .  . Casing 256. .  . Central opening 258. .  . Plunger or push rod 260...tip 262. .  . Grip 264. .  . Operating lever 266...inlet 268. .  . Slot 270...needle 272. .  . Center hole 274. .  . First longitudinal aperture 276. .  . Second longitudinal orifice 278. .  . Groove 279...blade spring 280. .  . Fork 282. .  . Depth control tube .  . Clamping element 286. .  . First tongue 288. .  . Second tongue 290. .  . Third tongue AF. . . Proximity force D1. . . Initial distance D2. . . Second distance F. . . Actuation F1. . . Tightening force T1. . . Initial maximum thickness T2. . . Second maximum thickness 162

Claims (1)

201210564 七、申請專利範圍: 1. 一種組態成可錨定於解剖位置的錨組件,該錨 組件包含: 一錨,其係包含定義一可擴展部份的一錨 體,該可擴展部份定義一長形方向(direction of elongation),該錨體定義延伸穿過該可擴展部份 及實質沿著該長形方向隔開的複數個開孔;以 及 該錨更包含延伸穿過該等開孔中之至少兩 個的一致動構件,該致動構件經組態成可接受 一致動力,以及回應該致動力,使該可擴展部 份由第一組態運動致動至擴展組態,在處於該 第一組態時該可擴展部份沿著與該長形方向有 角度偏移的第二方向定義一第一最大厚度,在 處於該擴展組態時該可擴展部份沿著大於該第 一最大厚度的第二方向定義一第二最大厚度。 2. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中該錨體 包含初始缺少該等開孔中之至少一些開孔的一 基材,以及該基材為編結物、針織物及編織物 中之至少一者以便定義該等開孔。 3. 如申請專利範圍第2項之錨組件,其中該基材 包含一錨體繩股。 4. 如申請專利範圍第3項之錨組件,其中該錨體 繩股包含一縫合線。 5. 如申請專利範圍第3項之錨組件,其中該錨包 163 201210564 含以相同方式構成且沿著該長形方向隔開的複 數個線圈。 6. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中在該可 擴展部份由該第一組態運動至該擴展組態時, 該可擴展部份沿著該長形方向收合。 7. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中該致動 構件包含一致動繩股。 8. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中該致動 力為拉力。 9. 如申請專利範圍第3項之錨組件,其中該致動 構件包含一致動繩股。 10. 如申請專利範圍第9項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股由與基材分離及附接至該基材的一輔助繩 股定義。 11. 如申請專利範圍第10項之錨組件,其中該致動 力為近端定向力,以及該致動繩股包含接受該 致動力的第一末端。 12. 如申請專利範圍第11項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股由該第一末端遠端伸出以及沿著該長形方 向遠端編織穿過該等開孔中之至少第一及第二 選定者。 13. 如申請專利範圍第12項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股成圈穿過該第二選定開孔以便定義一近端 延伸第二末端。 14. 如申請專利範圍第13項之錨組件,其中該第二 164 201210564 末端近端編織穿過該等開孔中之至少一者。 15. 如申請專利範圍第13項之錨組件,其中該第二 末端近端伸出該錨體以便附接至另一錨。 16. 如申請專利範圍第13項之錨組件,其中該第二 末端進一步近端編織穿過複數個開孔。 17. 如申請專利範圍第12項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股沿著該長形方向遠端編織穿過複數個開 孔。 18. 如申請專利範圍第17項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股成圈穿過該等開孔中之一個以便定義一近 端延伸第二末端。 19. 如申請專利範圍第17項之錨組件,其中該第二 末端進一步近端編織穿過該等開孔中之至少一 者。 20. 如申請專利範圍第19項之錨組件,其中該第二 末端編織穿過該等複數個開孔中被該致動繩股 遠端編織穿過的一個。 21. 如申請專利範圍第20項之錨組件,其中該第二 末端編織穿過該等開孔中之最近端者。 22. 如申請專利範圍第9項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股帶有倒刺。 23. 如申請專利範圍第22項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股包含允許該致動繩股沿著一致動方向移動 穿過該等開孔以便驅使該可擴展部份由該第一 組態運動至該擴展組態的第一至少一倒刺。 165 201210564 24. 如申請專利範圍第23項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股更包含方向與該第一至少一倒刺相反的第 二至少一倒刺,其中該第二至少一倒刺係經組 態成在該致動繩股沿著該致動方向移動時可與 該錨體繩股配對。 25. 如申請專利範圍第18項之錨組件,其中該第二 末端與該第一末端定義有一尺寸的一線圈。 26. 如申請專利範圍第25項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股定義相對於該錨體是配置於近端的一滑動 構件,以及該第二末端可滑動地耦合至該滑動 構件以便減少該線圈之尺寸。 27. 如申請專利範圍第26項之錨組件,其中該滑動 構件包含延伸穿過該致動繩股的一開孔,使得 該第二末端延伸穿過該開孔。 28. 如申請專利範圍第25項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股定義相對於該可擴展部份是配置於近端的 一滑動構件,以及該第一末端可滑動地耦合至 該滑動構件以便減少該線圈之尺寸。 29. 如申請專利範圍第26項之錨組件,其中該滑動 構件包含延伸穿過該第二末端的一開孔,使得 該第一末端延伸穿過該開孔。 30. 如申請專利範圍第10項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股定義一支柱端與一自由端,其中該自由端 繞著該支柱端打結使得該支柱端初始對於該自 由端可平移。 166 201210564 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 如申請專利範圍第30項之錨組件,其中該支柱 端定義該致動繩股。 如申請專利範圍第30項之錨組件,其中該自由 端可收緊以鎖定該支柱端與該自由端的相對平 移。 如申請專利範圍第30項之錨組件,其中該自由 端提供一第二錨之一致動繩股。 如申請專利範圍第30項之錯組件,其中該自由 端進一步形成於一孔眼中。 如申請專利範圍第30項之錨組件,其中該自由 ^^饋入穿過一第二錯體之一孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第35項之錨組件,其中該孔眼 係經組態成可接受耦合至一第二錨的一致動繩 股。 如申請專利範圍第10項之錨組件,其中該錨更 包含一成圈繩股。 如申請專利範圍第37項之錨組件,其中該線圈 的相對兩端中之每一各自延伸穿過該錨體之至 少—開孔以便定義各自的第一及第二孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第38項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股延伸穿過該等第一及第二孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第39項之錯組件,其中該致動 繩股定義由延伸穿過該第二孔眼之—權疊伸出 的第一及第二末端,以及該致動繩股之該等第 一及第二末端延伸穿過該第一線圈。 167 201210564 41. 如申請專利範圍第40項之錨組件,其中該致動 力施加至該等第一及第二末端中之至少一者造 成該第二孔眼移動穿過該第一孔眼。 42. 如申請專利範圍第41項之錨組件,其中該第二 孔眼定義經組態成可附接至另一連接構件以便 使該錨體附接至第二錨體的一連接構件。 43. 如申請專利範圍第5項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股與該基材整合。 44. 如申請專利範圍第43項之錨組件,其中該錨體 定義近端與在對面的遠端,該致動繩股遠端饋 入穿過該等開孔中之一選定者以及近端編織穿 過該等開孔中相對於該等開孔中之該選定者是 配置於近端的至少一他者。 45. 如申請專利範圍第44項之錨組件,其中該選定 開孔為最遠端開孔。 46. 如申請專利範圍第44項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股由該選定開孔近端編織穿過複數個開孔。 47. 如申請專利範圍第43項之錨組件,其中該致動 繩股由該錨體近端伸出。 48. 如申請專利範圍第43項之錨組件,其中該錨體 繩股定義近端伸出該錨體的第一端部,以及該 第一端部定義該致動繩股。 49. 如申請專利範圍第48項之錨組件,其中該錨體 繩股更包含遠端伸出該錨體的一第二端部。 50. 如申請專利範圍第49項之錨組件,其中該第二 168 201210564 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 端部在緊鄰該錨體的一位置處結尾。 如申凊專利範圍第47項之錯組件,其中該第二 端部係經組態成可使該錨體附接至第二錫體。 如申凊專利範圍第9項之錨組件,其中該錨定 ,孔敬與定義各自之開孔的複數個線圈,該 寺線圈貫質沿著該長形方向與該孔眼遠端地隔 開。 如申請專利範圍第52項之錨組件,其中該孔眼 由在該錨體之一端的一結定義。 如申清專利範圍第52項之錨組件,其中該錨體 縫合穿過本身以便定義該孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第52項之錨組件,其中該錨體 焊接至本身以便定義該孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第52項之錯組件,其中該致動 繩股定義第一及第二末端,以及配置於該等第 及第一末端之間的一褶疊,其中該褶疊延伸 穿過該孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第56項之錫組件,其中該等第 —及第二末端延伸穿過該等開孔中之複數個選 定者。 如申請專利範圍第57項之錨組件,其中該等第 一及第二末端延伸穿過相同的開孔。 如申請專利範圍第58項之錨組件,其中至少複 數個開孔中之每一者係分開以便定義一第一部 份與經配置成毗鄰於該第一部份以及藉由—繩 169 201210564 股而與該第一部份分離的一第二部份,以及該 專弟一及第二末端父替延伸穿過該等選定開孔 的各個該等第一及第二部份。 60. 如申請專利範圍第58項之錨組件,其中該致動 力包含施加至該致動繩股之該等第―及第二末 端中之至少一者的一拉力,該拉力造成該孔眼 沿著由該致動繩股定義的一路徑被拉穿過該錯 體’以及伸出該錨體。 61. 如申請專利範圍第60項之錨組件,其中該孔眼 係經組態成可附接至使該錨體連接至第二錨體 的另一繩股。 62·如申請專利範圍第9項之錨組件,其中在該可 ,展部份處於該第一組態時,該錨體繩股沿著 貫質沿著該長形方向延伸的一申軸線呈長形。 63.如申請專利範圍第62項之錨組件,其 繩股定義第-橫截面尺寸,以及該致動繩股定 義小於該第-橫截面尺寸的第二橫截面尺寸。 •如申請專利範圍第63項之錨組件,其中該可擴 展部份在致動至該擴展組態時折疊成一手風琴 結構。 ^申喷專觀’ 3項之触件,其中該錯體 繩股經折4以定義繩股段的兩段切股對,其 經編結以定義該等開孔。 利範圍第3項之錨組件,其中該錨體 ’疋義經編結成可定義該等開孔的一對分離 170 201210564 錨體繩股段。 67. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中該等開 孔預先存在於製成後的基材中。 68. 如申請專利範圍第67項之錨組件,其中該基材 包含定義編結物、織物、針織物及網目中之至 少一者的複數條纖維。 69. 如申請專利範圍第68項之錨組件,其中該編結 物包含一編結繩股。 70. 如申請專利範圍第69項之錨組件,其中該編結 物包含編結在一起的複數條繩股。 71. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中該等開 孔係切穿該基材。 72. 如申請專利範圍第71項之錨組件,其中該等開 孔係雷射切穿該基材。 73. 如申請專利範圍第1項之錨組件,其中該可擴 展部份定義相對的近端與遠端,以及該長形方 向在該近端與該遠端之間線性延伸。 74. 如申請專利範圍第73項之錨組件,其中該可擴 展部份沿著一中軸線呈長形。 75. 如申請專利範圍第74項之錨組件,其中該中轴 線中之至少一部份相關於該長形方向偏移。 76. —種組態成可插設於解剖位置的錨,該錨包 含: 可滑動地耦合至一共同致動繩股的複數個 結,該共同致動繩股定義一大小可變的線圈, 171 2〇12l〇564 其中該等複數個結中之每一者係經組態成可插 設於一目標解剖位置,以及該大小可變線圈係 經組態成可減少尺寸以便將該等複數個結中之 每一者一起定義尺寸個別大於該等複數個結中 之每一者的一簇。 77. 78. 如申請專利範圍第76項之錨,其中該等結中之 母一者可滑動地裝在該共同致動繩股上。 如申請專利範圍第7 7項之錨組件,其中該等結 中之每一者定義接受該共同致動繩股以及沿著 該共同致動繩股可滑動的一孔眼。 如申請專利範圍第76項之錨組件,其中該共同 致動繩股在該致動部份處定義可滑動地相互附 接的一對自由端。 80. 81. 如申請專利範圍第78項之錨組件,其中該等自 由端打成一滑結使得該等自由端中之一個沿著 另一個滑動以便減少該線圈之大小。 如申請專利範圍第丨項之錨組件,其 繩股 第一銷’該第-狀該致動繩股為第—致動繩 股’該第1之該錨體為第1體,以及㈣ ,件更包含-第二錨’該第二錯包含”實質沿 著一第二長形方向延伸的一第二錨體,續第二 銷定義延伸穿過該第二㈣的第二複數個開 孔,該等開孔沿著該第二長㈣向_,以及 2)編織穿過該等開孔中之至少兩個的第二致動 172 201210564 其中沿著實質沿著該第二長形方向的一方 向施加至該第二致動繩股的一拉力造成該第二 錨體沿著該第二長形方向收合以及相關於該第 二長形方向,沿著角度偏移的方向擴展,以便 使該第二錨由一第一組態擴展成一擴展組態。 82. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股附接至該第二致動繩股。 83. 如申請專利範圍第82項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股與第二致動繩股整合。 84. 如申請專利範圍第82項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股係與該第二致動繩股分離及附接至該 第二致動繩股。 85. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其更包含使 5亥第一錨附接至該第二錨的一連接構件。 86. 如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件定義一滑動構件,該滑動構件允許該等第 一及第一致動繩股中之一個相對於該等第一及 第二致動繩股中之另一個平移穿過該連接構 件。 87·如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件定義一鎖定構件,該鎖定構件防止該等第 一及第二致動繩股相對於該等第一及第二致動 繩股中之另一個平移穿過該連接構件。 88.如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件由該等第一及第二致動繩股定義。 173 201210564 89. 如申請專利範圍第88項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件包含由該等第一及第二致動繩股定義的一 結。 90. 如申請專利範圍第89項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股與該第二致動繩股打結以便定義該 結。 91. 如申請專利範圍第90項之錨組件,其中該結具 有1)解鎖組態,其中該等第一及第二致動繩股 中之一個相關於該等第一及第二致動繩股中之 另一個可平移穿過該結,以及2)鎖定組態,其 中該等第一及第二致動繩股相關於穿過該結的 相對平移係鎖在一起。 92. 如申請專利範圍第88項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件包含在該等第一及第二致動繩股之間的一 焊件。 93. 如申請專利範圍第92項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股焊接至該第二致動繩股。 94. 如申請專利範圍第88項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件包含一扭結(twist tie)。 95. 如申請專利範圍第94項之錨組件,其中該扭結 由該等第一及第二致動繩股定義。 96. 如申請專利範圍第95項之錨組件,其中該等第 一及第二致動繩股中之至少一者包括一柔軟可 變形的材料以便至少部份定義該扭結。 97. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 174 201210564 致動繩股與該第一錨體整合,以及該第二致動 繩股與該第二錨體整合。 98. 如申請專利範圍第97項之錨組件,其中該第二 致動繩股絞接穿過該第一致動繩股以便定義一 第一绞結(splice)。 99. 如申請專利範圍第98項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股絞接穿過該第二致動繩股以便定義一 第二絞結。 100. 如申請專利範圍第99項之錨組件,其中該第一 絞結經配置成比該第二絞結還要靠近該第一 錫。 101. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股與該第二致動繩股整合。 102. 如申請專利範圍第88項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件為經組態成可使該第一致動繩股附接至該 第二致動繩股的一輔助連接構件。 103. 如申請專利範圍第102項之錨組件,其中該輔 助連接構件包含缝合穿過該等第一及第二致動 繩股的一繩股。 104. 如申請專利範圍第102項之錨組件,其中該輔 助連接構件包含使該第一致動繩股附接至該第 二致動繩股的一 U形釘。 105. 如申請專利範圍第101或102項之錨組件,其 中該等第一及第二致動繩股中之至少一者係縫 合穿過該輔助連接構件。 175 201210564 106·如申請專利範圍第1〇5項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股中之至少一者繞著該輔助 連接器打結。 107. 如申請專利範圍第1〇2項之錨組件其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股編織成該輔助連接構件。 108. 如申請專利範圍第1〇7項之錨組件其中該輔 助連接構件包含一編結管。 109. 如申請專利範圍第1〇8項之錨組件其中該編 結管包含定義一核心的縫合線與管狀網目中之 至少一者。 110. 如申請專利範圍第102項之錨組件,其中該輔 助連接構件包含經組態成可激活以便繞著該等 第一及第二致動繩股收緊的一收縮包覆材料。 111. 如申請專利範圍第1〇2項之錨組件,其中該輔 助連接構件包含有至少一棘齒的一套環,以及 該等第一及第二致動繩股各自有與該套環之該 至少一棘齒嚙合的互補棘齒。 112. 如申請專利範圍第U1項之錨組件,其中該套 環之至少一棘齒與該等第一及第二致動繩股之 該棘齒配對以便允許該等第一及第二致動繩股 各自沿著離開該等第一及第二錨的方向滑動穿 過該套環,同時各自防止該等第一及第二致動 繩叔冶著朝向該等第一及第二錨的方向在該套 環中滑動。 113 •如申凊專利範圍第111項之錯組件,其中該等 176 201210564 第一及第二致動繩股係沿著相反的方向插入該 套環。 114. 如申請專利範圍第1〇2項之錨組件,其中該辅 助連接構件包含具有至少一棘齒的一棘輪殼 體,在5亥棘輪殼體沿著該等第一及第二致動繩 股向該解剖位置滑動時,該至少一棘齒與該等 第一及第二致動繩股的互補棘齒配對。 115. 如申請專利範圍第114項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股沿著實質相同的方向插入 該套環。 116. 如申請專利範圍第1〇2項之錨組件,其中該辅 助連接構件包含一束帶外管(zip tie h〇using), 该束帶外管定義經組態成可接受該等第一及第 二致動繩股的第一及第二孔道。 117. 如申請專利範圍第116項之錨組件,其中該束 T外管定義組態成可與該等第一及第二致動繩 股配對的複數個齒使得該束帶外管可向該等第 一及第二錨移動但被阻止移離該等第一及第二 崔苗。 118. 如申請專利範圍第117項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股中之每一者定義一齒條, 該=條之齒經組態成可與該束帶外管之齒配對 使得該束帶外管向該等第一及第二錨可移動但 被阻止移離該等第一及第二錨。 119. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中至少該 177 201210564 第一錨更包含第一成圈繩股,該第一成圈繩股 延伸穿過該第一錨體之至少一個別開孔以便各 自定義第一及第二孔眼,其定義各自之第一及 第二開孔。 120. 如申請專利範圍第119項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股包含一輔助繩股,該輔助繩股延伸 穿過該等第一及第二孔眼的該等開孔。 121. 如申請專利範圍第120項之錨組件,其中該第 二錨更包含一第二成圈繩股,該第二成圈繩股 延伸穿過該第二錨體之至少一個別開孔以便各 自定義第一及第二孔眼,其定義各自之第一及 第二開孔。 122. 如申請專利範圍第121項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股為一輔助繩股,該輔助繩股延伸穿 過該第二成圈繩股之該等第一及第二孔眼的該 等開孔。 123. 如申請專利範圍第122項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股與該第二致動繩股整合。 124. 如申請專利範圍第122項之錨組件,其更包含 使該第一致動繩股附接至該第二致動繩股的一 連接構件。 125. 如申請專利範圍第124項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件包含一結,該結可致動於解鎖組態及鎖 定組態之間,在處於該解鎖組態時,該等第一 及第二致動繩股中之至少一者相關於該等第一 178 201210564 及第二致動繩股中之另一個可平移穿過該結, 以及在處於該鎖定組態時,該等第一及第二致 動繩股穿過該結相互平移地固定。 126. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股與該第一錨體分離以及附接至該第一 錨體,以及定義由該第一錨體伸出的一第一及 一第二部份。 127. 如申請專利範圍第126項之錨組件,其更包含 使該第一致動繩股之該第一部份耦合至該第一 致動繩股之該第二部份的一連接構件。 128. 如申請專利範圍第127項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為可操作於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之間的 一結,在處於該解鎖組態時,該第一致動繩股 之該第一部份可平移穿過該結以便使該第一錨 由該第一組態致動至該擴展組態,以及在處於 該鎖定組態時,防止該第一致動繩股之該第一 部份平移穿過該結。 129. 如申請專利範圍第127項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股與該第二錨體分離以及附接至該第 二錨體,以及定義由該第二錨體伸出的一第一 及一第二部份。 130. 如申請專利範圍第129項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為一第一連接構件,該錨組件更包含使 該第二致動繩股之該第一部份耦合至該第二致 動繩股之該第二部份的一第二連接構件。 179 201210564 131. 如申請專利範圍第130項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為可操作於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之間的 一第二結,在處於該解鎖組態時,該第二致動 繩股之該第一部份可平移穿過該第二結以便使 該第二錨由該第一組態致動至該擴展組態,以 及在處於該鎖定組態時,防止該第二致動繩股 之該第一部份平移穿過該第二結。 132. 如申請專利範圍第129項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股定義由該第一錫體钟出的一第一及 一第二部份,以及該第二致動繩股定義由該第 二錨體伸出的一第一及一第二部份。 133. 如申請專利範圍第132項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股之該第二部份與該第一致動繩股之 該第二部份整合。 134. 如申請專利範圍第133項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股由一共同繩股定義,該錨 組件更包含使該第一致動繩股之該第一部份附 接至該共同繩股之一位置的一第一連接構件, 以及使該第二致動繩股之該第二部份附接至該 共同繩股之另一位置的一第二連接器。 135. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股絞接穿過該第二致動繩股。 136. 如申請專利範圍第135項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股絞接穿過該第一致動繩股。 137. 如申請專利範圍第135項之錨組件,其中該第 180 201210564 一致動繩股沿著由該第二錨體朝向該第一錨體 的方向絞接穿過該第二致動繩股。 138. 如申請專利範圍第137項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股沿著由該第一錨體朝向該第二錨體 的方向絞接穿過該第一致動繩股。 139. 如申請專利範圍第136項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股在一第一位置絞接穿過該第一致動 繩股,該第一致動繩股在一第二位置絞接穿過 該第二致動繩股,以及該第一位置比該第二位 置還要靠近該第一錨體。 140. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第二 錨包含一孔眼,以及該第一致動繩股附接至該 孔眼。 141. 如申請專利範圍第140項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股延伸穿過該孔眼以便定義一第一末 端與一第二末端。 142. 如申請專利範圍第141項之錨組件,其更包含 使該第一末端附接至該第二末端的一連接構 件。 143. 如申請專利範圍第142項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件與該等第一及第二末端整合。 144. 如申請專利範圍第143項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為一结。 145. 如申請專利範圍第144項之錨組件,其中該結 係經組態成可致動於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之 181 201210564 間,在處於該解鎖組態時,相關於該第二末端, 該第一末端可平移穿過該結,以及在處於該鎖 定組態時,該第一末端相關於平移穿過該結係 固定於該第二末端。 146. 如申請專利範圍第140項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股相關於該第二錨體為輔助以及定義 該孔眼。 147. 如申請專利範圍第146項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股包含由該第二錨體伸出的一第一及 一第二部份,其中該第二部份定義該孔眼,以 及該第一部份附接至該第二部份。 148. 如申請專利範圍第147項之錨組件,其中該第 一部份與該第二部份定義經組態成可被致動於 解鎖組態、鎖定組態之間的一結,在處於該解 鎖組態時,該第一部份相關於該第二部份可平 移穿過該結,以及在處於該鎖定組態時’該第 一部份相關於平移穿過該結係固定於該第二部 份。 149. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其更包含附 接於該等第一及第二錨之間的一連接構件。 150. 如申請專利範圍第149項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件附接於該等第一及第二致動繩股之間。 151. 如申請專利範圍第149項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件包含一連接繩股。 152. 如申請專利範圍第151項之錨組件,其更包含 182 201210564 使該連接繩股之一第一部份附接至該連接繩股 之一第二部份以便使該等第一及第二致動繩股 相互固定的一第二連接構件。 153. 如申請專利範圍第152項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接構件與該連接繩股之該等第一及第二部 份整合。 154. 如申請專利範圍第153項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接構件包含由該等第一及第二連接繩股定 義的一結。 155. 如申請專利範圍第154項之錨組件,其中該結 係經組態成可被致動於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之 間,在處於該解鎖組態時,該第一部份相關於 該第二部份可平移穿過該結,以及在處於鎖定 組態時,該第一部份相關於平移穿過該結係固 定於該第二部份。 156. 如申請專利範圍第151項之錨組件,其中該第 一錫包令—第一孔眼,該第二錫包含一第二孔 眼,以及該連接繩股附接至該等第一及第二孔 眼。 157. 如申請專利範圍第156項之錨組件,其中該連 接繩股延伸穿過該等第一及第二孔眼,以及該 連接繩股定義各自由該等第一及第二孔眼伸出 的一第一及一第二部份。 158. 如申請專利範圍第157項之錨組件,其更包含 附接該連接繩股之該等第一及第二部份的一第 183 201210564 二連接構件。 159. 如申請專利範圍第158項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接器與該連接繩股之該等第一及第二部份 整合。 160. 如申請專利範圍第159項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接器為由該連接繩股之該等第一及第二部 份定義的結。 161. 如申請專利範圍第160項之錨組件,其中該結 係經組態成可被致動於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之 間,在處於該解鎖組態時,該第一部份相關於 該第二部份可平移穿過該結,以及在處於鎖定 組態時,該第一部份相關於平移穿過該結係固 定於該第二部份。 162. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其更包含附 接於該等第一及第二致動繩股之間的一第一及 一第二連接繩股。 163. 如申請專利範圍第162項之錨組件,其中該第 一連接繩股絞接穿過該第二連接繩股。 164. 如申請專利範圍第163項之錨組件,其中該第 一連接繩股絞接穿過該第二連接繩股以及相互 隔開的第一及第二位置。 165. 如申請專利範圍第162項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接繩股絞接穿過該第一連接繩股。 166. 如申請專利範圍第165項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接繩股絞接穿過該第一連接繩股以及相互 184 201210564 隔開的第一及第二位置。 167·如申請專利範圍第166項之錯組件’其中該第 一連接繩股絞接穿過該第二連接繩股。 168. 如申請專利範圍第167項之錨組件,其中該第 一連接繩股由該第一致動繩股伸出以便定義對 應的第一及第二部份,以及該第二連接繩股由 該第二致動繩股伸出以便定義對應的第—及第 二部份。 169. 如申請專利範圍第168項之錨組件,其中該第 一連接繩股之該第一部份絞接穿過該第二連接 繩股之該第一部份。 170. 如申請專利範圍第169項之錨組件’其中該第 一連接繩股之該第一部份沿著由該第二錨體朝 向該第一錨體的方向絞接穿過該第二連接繩股 之該第一部份。 171. 如申請專利範圍第169項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接繩股之該第一部份絞接穿過該第一連接 繩股之該第一部份。 172. 如申請專利範圍第171項之錨組件,其中該第 「連接繩股之該第一部份在一第一位置絞接穿 過该第二連接繩股之該第一部份,該第二連接 繩股之該第-部份在-第二位置絞接穿過該第 一連接繩股之該第一部份,以及該第—位置經 配置成比該第二位置還要靠近該第二錨體。 173. 如申請專利範圍第m項之倾件,其中該第 185 201210564 一連接繩股之該第二部份絞接穿過該第二連接 繩股之該第二部份。 174. 如申請專利範圍第173項之錨組件,其十該第 二連接繩股之該第二部份絞接穿過該第二連 繩股之該第一部份。 175. 如申請專利範圍第169項之錨組件,其中該第 一連接繩股之該第二部份絞接穿過該第二 繩股之該第二部份。 一 176. 如申請專利範圍第175項之錨組件,1中泫第 :連^繩股之1亥等第一及第二部份各自離:該 第-連接繩股之該等第一及第二部份以便 各自的一第一及一第二終端部份。 177. 如申睛專利範圍第176項之錨組件,其更勹人 =終端部份附接至該第二終端部份二 178. 如申請專利範圍帛i77項之錯組件, 接構件與該等第一及第二終端部份整合。S 179. 如申請專利範圍帛178項之銷組件, =件包含由該等第-及第二終端部份= j 1 ' V π〜聊組仟,复中 係經組態成可致動於解鎖組態定:“ ::,在處於該解鎖組態時’該第一終端部= m於该第二終端部份可平移穿過該結 處於該鎖定組態時’該第-終端部份相關4 186 201210564 移穿過該結係固定於該第二終端部份。 ⑻.如申請專利範圍第1〇2項之錨組 第-及第二錯中之至少一者包含一孔眼中 5亥輔助連接構件附接至該孔眼。 182. 如申請專利範圍第15〇項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為附接於該等第一及第二致動繩股之間 的一輔助連接器。 183. 如申請專利範圍第182項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二錨中之至少一者包含一孔眼,以及 該辅助連接構件附接至該孔眼。 184. 如申請專利範圍第183項之錫組件,其中該輔 助連接構件包含附接至該孔眼的至少一鉤子。 185. 如申請專利範圍第184項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二錨中之另一包含第二孔眼,以及該 辅助連接器包含附接至該第二孔眼以及經組態 成可與該第一鉤子配對以便附接該等第一及第 一銷的一第二釣子。 186. 如申請專利範圍第185項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二鉤子由一形狀記憶材料製成以及定 義在彼此配對時的一第一形狀以及在彼此配對 後的一第二形狀,其中該第一形狀與該第二形 狀不同。 187. 如申請專利範圍第151項之錨組件,其中該連 接繩股包含一第一末端,以及定義經組態成可 與該第一末端配對的一第二末端。 187 201210564 188. 如申請專利範圍第187項之錨組件,其中該連 接繩股定義在該第一末端與該第二末端配對時 有一尺寸的一線圈,以及該第一末端與該第二 末端配對使得該第一末端相關於該第二末端只 能在減少該線圈之該尺寸的方向移動。 189. 如申請專利範圍第188項之錨組件,其中該第 一末端帶有倒刺,以及該第二末端定義經組態 成可接受該帶有倒刺之第一末端的一孔口。 190. 如申請專利範圍第187項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二錨包含數個孔眼,以及該連接繩股 延伸穿過該等孔眼。 191. 如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該連接 構件包含具有使該第一 I苗向該第二銷偏壓之彈 簧常數的一彈簣。 192. 如申請專利範圍第191項之錨組件,其中該彈 簧構件附接至該等第一及第二致動繩股中之至 少一者。 193. 如申請專利範圍第191項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二錨中之該至少一者定義一孔眼,以 及該彈簧構件附接至該孔眼。 194·如申請專利範圍第81項之錯組件,其中該等第 一及第二致動繩股定義一滑動構件,該滑動構 件允許該等致動繩股中之一個與該第二致動繩 股相對平移以便施加一力至該等錨中之至少一 者而使該錨向另一錨偏壓。 188 201210564 195. ί申ΐ專利範圍第194項之錨組件,其更包含 鎖疋構件用以防止該等致動繩股通過該鎖定 構件相互平移。 196. =申請專利範圍第195項之錯組件,其更包含 疋義该滑動構件及該鎖定構件兩者的一連接構 197. 如=請專利範圍第81項之錯組件,其更包含— 鎖定構件用卩防止該等致動繩股通過該鎖定構 件彼此相對平移。 198. 如中請專利範圍第81項之肋件’其更包含附 接於該等第一及第二錯之間的一連接繩股。 申叫專利範圍第丨98項之錯組件,其中該連 ,繩股定義—第―部份及與該第—部份隔開的 :第二部份,該錨組件包含一滑動構件,該滑 ,件允許該等第—及第二部份中之—個與該 一及第二部份中之另一個相對平移以便施 σ力至該等财之至少—者而使該銷向另一 錯偏壓。 皿^申^專·圍第199項之錫組件’其更包含 :鎖定構件用以防止該等第一及第二部份通過 5亥鎖定構件彼此相對平移。 2〇1.^請專利範圍第細項之錯組件,其更包含 義忒π動構件及該鎖定構件兩者的—連接構 件〇 胤如申請專利範圍第198項之錫組件,其中該連 189 201210564 接繩股定義一第一部份及與該第一部份隔開的 一第二部份,該錨組件更包含一鎖定構件用以 防止該等第一及第二部份通過該鎖定構件彼此 相對平移。 203. 如申請專利範圍第198項之錨組件,其中該連 接繩股附接至該等第一及第二致動繩股中之至 少一者。 204. 如申請專利範圍第203項之錨組件,其更包含 一滑動構件用以允許該連接繩股中之一個與該 等第一及第二致動繩股中之該至少一者彼此相 對平移以便施加一力至該等錫中之至少一者而 使該錨向另一錨偏壓。 205. 如申請專利範圍第204項之錨組件,其更包含 一鎖定構件用以防止該連接繩股與該等第一及 第二致動繩股中之該至少一者通過該鎖定構件 彼此相對平移。 206. 如申請專利範圍第205項之錨組件,其更包含 定義該滑動構件及該鎖定構件兩者的的一連接 構件。 207. 如申請專利範圍第203項之錨組件,其更包含 一鎖定構件用以防止該連接繩股與該等第一及 第二致動繩股中之該至少一者通過該鎖定構件 彼此相對平移。 208. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股相對於該第一錨體為輔助以及該第二 190 201210564 致動繩股與該第二錨體整合。 209. 如申請專利範圍第82項之錨組件,其中該第一 致動繩股定義一第一部份及由該銷體伸出的一 第二部份。 210. 如申請專利範圍第2〇9項之錨組件,其中該第 二部份與該第二致動繩股整合。 211. 如申請專利範圍第21〇項之錨組件,其更包含 使該第一致動繩股之該第一部份附接至該致動 繩股之該第二部份與該第二致動繩股中之至少 一者的一連接器。 212. 如申凊專利範圍第hi項之錯組件,其中該連 接器允許該第一致動繩股之該第一部份相關於 。亥致動繩股之該第二部份與該第二致動繩股中 之至少一者平移。 213. 如申凊專利範圍第212項之銷組件,其中該連 接器進一步經組態成可防止該第一致動繩股之 °亥第一部份相關於該第一致動繩股之該第二部 知與该第二致動繩股中之至少一者平移。 214. 如。申請專利範圍第211項之錯組件,其令該連 接态包含由該第一致動繩股之該第一部份及該 致動繩股之$第—部份與該第二致動繩股中之 至少一者定義的一結。 215. 如申=專利圍帛85項之錯組件,其中該等第 一及第二錨體包含各自的一第一及一第二孔 眼,以及該等第-及第二致動繩股各自編織穿 191 201210564 過該等第一及第二錨體以及附接至該等第一及 第二孔眼。 216. 如申請專利範圍第215項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股與該第二致動繩股整合。 217. 如申請專利範圍第215項之錨組件,其更包含 使該第一致動繩股附接至該第二致動繩股的一 連接構件。 218. 如申請專利範圍第215項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股包含各自由該第一錨體伸出的一第 一致動部份及一第一附接部份,以及該第二致 動繩股包含各自由該第二錨體伸出的第二致動 部份及第二附接部份。 219. 如申請專利範圍第218項之錨組件,其中該第 一附接部份與該第二附接部份整合。 220. 如申請專利範圍第218項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件係附接該第一致動部份及該第二致動部 份。 221. 如申請專利範圍第220項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件由該第一致動部份及該第二致動部份定 義0 222. 如申請專利範圍第221項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件包含由該第一致動部份及該第二致動部 份定義的一結。 223. 如申請專利範圍第222項之錨組件,其中該結 可致動於解鎖組態及鎖定組態之間,在處於該 192 201210564 解鎖組態時,該等第一及第二致動部份中之至 少一者相關於該等第一及第二致動部份中之另 一個可平移穿過該結,以及在處於該鎖定組態 時,該等第一及第二致動繩股穿過該結被相互 平移地固定。 224. 如申請專利範圍第220項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動部份各經組態成可各自接受致 動力而各自造成該等第一及第二錨由該第一組 態致動至該擴展組態。 225. 如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該等第 一及第二錨體包含各自的第一及第二孔眼,以 及該等第一及第二致動繩股各自編織穿過該等 第一及第二錨體以及附接至該等第一及第二孔 眼。 226. 如申請專利範圍第225項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股定義從該第一錨體延伸的一第一及 一第二部份。 227. 如申請專利範圍第226項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件係使該第一致動繩股之該第一部份附接 至該第一致動繩股之該第二部份。 228. 如申請專利範圍第227項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為可操作於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之間的 一結,在處於該解鎖組態時,該第一致動繩股 之該第一部份可平移穿過該結以便使該第一錨 由該第一組態致動至該擴展組態,以及在處於 193 201210564 該鎖定組態時,防止該第一致動繩股之該第一 部份平移穿過該結。 229. 如申請專利範圍第227項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股定義從該第二錨體延伸的一第一及 一第二部份。 230. 如申請專利範圍第229項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件為一第一連接構件,該錨組件更包含使 該第二致動繩股之該第一部份耦合至該第二致 動繩股之該第二部份的一第二連接構件。 231. 如申請專利範圍第230項之錨組件,其中該第 二連接構件為可操作於解鎖組態、鎖定組態之 間的第二結,在處於該解鎖組態時,該第二致 動繩股之該第一部份可平移穿過該第二結以便 使該第二錨由該第一組態致動至該擴展組態, 以及在處於該鎖定組態時,防止該第二致動繩 股之該第一部份平移穿過該第二結。 232. 如申請專利範圍第229項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股定義由該第一錨體伸出的一第一及 一第二部份,以及該第二致動繩股定義由該第 二錨體伸出的一第一及一第二部份。 233. 如申請專利範圍第232項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股之該第二部份與該第一致動繩股之 該第二部份整合。 234. 如申請專利範圍第233項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股由一共同繩股定義,該錨 194 201210564 235. 236. 237. 238. 239. 組件更包含使該第一致動繩股之該第—部份附 接至該共同繩股之一位置的一第一連接構件, 以及使該第二致動繩股之該第二部份附接至該 共同繩股之另一位置的一第二連接器。 Λ 如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該等第 一及第二錨體包含各自的一第一及一第二孔 眼’以及s亥等第一及第二致動繩股各自編織穿 過δ亥荨第一及第二錫體以及附接至該等第一及 第二孔眼。 如申凊專利範圍第235項之|苗組件,其中該第 一致動繩股與該第二致動繩股整合以便定義一 共同輔助繩股。 如申請專利範圍第235項之錨組件,其中該第 —致動繩股絞接穿過該第一致動繩股以便 —第一絞結。 如申請專利範圍第237項之錨組件,其中該第 —致動繩股絞接穿過該第二致動繩股以便定義 —第二絞結。 如申請專利範圍第238項之錨組件,其中該第 一紋結經配置成比該第二絞結還要靠近該第— !苗。 如申明專利範圍第238項之銷組件,其中該第 致動繩股定義由該第一錨體伸出的一第一及 :第二相隔開部份,該第二致動繩股定義由該 第—錨體伸出的-第-及-第二相隔開部份, 195 240. 201210564 以及該第一致動繩股之該第二部份附接至該第 二致動繩股之該第二部份。 241. 如申請專利範圍第240項之錫組件,其中該第 一致動繩股之該第二部份與該第二致動繩股之 該第二部份整合。 242. 如申請專利範圍第240項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股之該第一部份絞接穿過該第二致動 繩股之该第二部份,以及該第二致動繩股之該 第一部份纹接穿過該第一致動繩股之該第二部 份。 243.如申請專利範圍第235項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股定義由該第一錨體伸出的一第一及 一第二相隔開部份,以及該第二致動繩股定義 由該第二㈣伸出的一第—及-第二相隔開部 份,該錨組件更包含附接至該等第一及第二致 動繩股之該等第二部份的一壓縮構件。 244·如申請專利範圍第243項之錨組件,其中該等 及第二致動繩股之該等第二部份與該;縮 構件整合。 245·如申請專利範圍帛243項之錯組件,其中該等 致動繩股之該等第-部份延“過 246.2 =利2第245項之鋪組件’其中施加 一料第一及第二致動繩股之該等第-部份的 —拉力產生張力於該等第-及第二致動繩股而 196 201210564 造成該壓縮構件對該等第一及第二致動繩股之 該等第一部份壓縮。 247. 如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該等第 一及第二錨體包含各自的一第一及一第二孔 眼,以及該等第一及第二致動繩股各自編織穿 過該等第一及第二錨體以及附接至該等第一及 第二孔眼。 248. 如申請專利範圍第247項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股各自延伸穿過該第一錨體 及該第二錨體兩者。 249. 如申請專利範圍第248項之錨組件,其中該等 第一及第二致動繩股各自延伸穿過該第一孔眼 及該第二孔眼兩者。 250. 如申請專利範圍第247項之錨組件,其更包含 附接於該等第一及第二致動繩股之間的一壓縮 構件。 251. 如申請專利範圍第250項之錨組件,其中該壓 縮構件與該等第一及第二致動繩股整合。 252. 如申請專利範圍第250項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股在一端附接至該壓縮構件,延伸穿 過該等第一及第二孔眼,以及在另一端定義一 第一終端部份,其中該第一終端部份延伸穿過 該壓縮構件。 253. 如申請專利範圍第252項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動繩股在一端附接至該壓縮構件,延伸穿 197 201210564 過該等第一及第二孔眼,以及在另一端定義一 第二終端部份,其中該第二終端部份延伸穿過 該壓縮構件。 254. 如申請專利範圍第253項之錨組件,其中施加 至該等第一及第二致動繩股之該等終端部份的 一拉力產生張力於該等第一及第二致動繩股而 造成該壓縮構件對於該等第一及第二致動繩股 施加一壓縮力。 255. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該第一 錨體包含第一孔眼,以及該第二錨包含與該第 二錨體整合的一連接繩股,其中該第二錨之該 連接繩股定義該第一錨之一致動繩股。 256. 如申請專利範圍第255項之錨組件,其中該第 一錨之該致動繩股包含一附接部份及一致動部 份,其中該附接部份延伸至該第二錨體,以及 該致動部份可滑動地附接至該附接部份。 257. 如申請專利範圍第256項之錨組件,其中該致 動部份絞接穿過該附接部份。 258. 如申請專利範圍第257項之錨組件,其中該第 二錨體定義一第二孔眼,以及該第一錨包含與 該第一錨體整合的一連接繩股,其中該第一錨 之該連接繩股定義該第二錨之一致動繩股。 259. 如申請專利範圍第258項之錨組件,其中該第 二錨之該致動繩股包含一第二附接部份與一第 二致動部份,其中該第二附接部份延伸至該第 198 201210564 一錨體,以及該第二致動部份可滑動地附接至 該第二附接部份。 260. 如申請專利範圍第259項之錨組件,其中該第 二致動部份絞接穿過該第二附接部份。 261. 如申請專利範圍第255項之錨組件,其中該致 動構件延伸穿過該孔眼。 262. 如申請專利範圍第257項之錨組件,其中該第 二錨之該致動繩股延伸穿過該第二孔眼。 263. 如申請專利範圍第85項之錨組件,其中該第一 錨體包含一孔眼,以及該第一致動繩股編織穿 過該第一錨體及附接至該孔眼。 264. 如申請專利範圍第263項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股對於該第一錨體為辅助,以及該第 二致動繩股與該第二錨體整合。 265. 如申請專利範圍第264項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股定義從該錨體延伸的一第一部份及 一第二部份。 266. 如申請專利範圍第265項之錨組件,其中該第 二部份與該第二致動繩股整合。 267. 如申請專利範圍第266項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件使該第一致動繩股之該第一部份附接至 該致動繩股之該第二部份與該第二致動繩股中 之至少一者。 268. 如申請專利範圍第267項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件允許該第一致動繩股之該第一部份相關 199 201210564 於該致動繩股之該第二部份與該第二致動繩股 中之該至少一者平移。 269. 如申請專利範圍第268項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件更被組態成可防止該第一致動繩股之該 第一部份相關於該致動繩股之該第二部份與該 第二致動繩股中之該至少一者的平移。 270. 如申請專利範圍第267項之錨組件,其中該連 接構件包含由該第一致動繩股之該第二部份、 該致動繩股之該第一部份與該第二致動繩股中 之至少一者定義的一結。 271. 如申請專利範圍第265項之錨組件,其中該第 一致動繩股絞接穿過該第二致動繩股使得該連 接構件定義一絞結。 272. 如申請專利範圍第81項之錨組件,其中該等第 一及第二錨體中之至少一者包含一孔眼,以及 複數條致動繩股編織穿過該孔眼。 273. 如申請專利範圍第102項之錨組件,其中該輔 助連接構件包含使該第一錨體附接至該第二錨 體的一連接繩股。 274. 如申請專利範圍第273項之錨組件,其中該連 接繩股沿著離開該第二錨體的方向延伸穿過該 第一錨體之一第一開孔,沿著朝向該第二錨體 的方向折疊穿過該第一錨體的一第二開孔,延 伸穿過該第二錨體的一第一開孔,以及沿著朝 向該第一錨體的方向折疊穿過該第二錨體的一 200 201210564 275. 276. 277. 第二開孔。 如申請專利範圍第274項之錨組件,其中該連 接繩股定義各自從該等第一及第二錨體延伸的 第一及第二部份。 如申請專利範圍第275項之錨組件,其更包含 使該連接繩股之該第一部份附接至該連接繩股 之該第二部份的一連接構件。 一種由一錨體繩股製成一錨體的方法,該錨體 經組怨成可植入一目標解剖位置以及隨後被擴 展’該方法包含下列步驟: 打結該錨體繩股以便定義有一支柱端與一 自由%的第一止擋結,該自由端由該錯體繩 瓜的一第一端部定義以及該支柱端由該錨體繩 股的一第二端部定義; 使該第一端部成圈以便形成一第一近端線 圈; 使該第一近端線圈穿過該止擋結使得該第 二端部從該第一近端線圈延伸穿過該止擋結; 由該止擋結遠端編結該第二端部以便定義 以頒似方式構成實質沿著一長形方向隔開的複 數個線圈,其中該等線圈中之每一者各自定義 一開孔; 使一致動繩股編織穿過該等開孔中之至少 者,使得該致動繩股經組態成可接受一致動 力而W成该|苗體沿著相關於該長形方向偏移的 201 201210564 278 279. 280. 第二方向擴展。 如申請專利範圍第277項之方法,其中該穿過 步驟更包含拉該第—端部穿過該第—近端線圈 以及收緊該第1部以便定義—最近端結。 如申請專利範圍第277項之方法,其更包含下 列步驟:製作數個附加遠端線圈,以及相對於 該等附加遠端線圈中之每一者,使該等附加遠 端線圈中之每—者穿過—在最近端的線圈。 一種由至少一錨體繩股構成錨的方法,該錨包 含經組態成可植人—目標解剖位置以及隨後被 擴展的-可擴展部份,該方法包含下列步驟: (A) 製作第一先則線圈,使得該|苗體繩股定 義從該先前線圈延伸的一端部; (B) 由該錨體繩股製成該可擴展部份,其係包 含下列步驟: (1)使該端部成圈穿過該第一先前線圈以 便定義一第一新線圈,該第一新線圈 定義一開孔,其中該第一新線圈配置 於該第一先前線圈之一面上,以及該 端部在該第一先前線圈的反面從該第 —新線圈延伸; (H)使该端部成圈穿過由該第一新線圈定 義的一第二先前線圈,以便定義一第 二新線圈,該第二新線圈定義一開孔; (iii)使該第二新線圈繞著該第二先前線圈 202 201210564 收緊;以及 (iv) 製作各自延伸穿過先前線圈的 數個附加新線圈以便定義各自有 一開孔的複數個線圈;以及 (C)使一致動繩股編織穿過該等開孔中之至少 一者,使得該致動繩股經組態成可接受一 致動力而造成該錨體沿著相關於該長形方 向偏移的第二方向擴展。 281. 如申請專利範圍第280項之方法,其中該第一 先前線圈定義一孔眼。 282. 如申請專利範圍第281項之方法,其更包含形 成與該錨體繩股整合之該孔眼的步驟。 283. 如申請專利範圍第282項之方法,其中該致動 繩股縫合穿過本身以便定義該孔眼。 284. 如申請專利範圍第283項之方法,其中進一步 打結該致動繩股以便固定該孔眼。 285. 如申請專利範圍第283項之方法,其中該致動 繩股第二次缝合穿過本身。 286. 如申請專利範圍第283項之方法,其中打結該 致動繩股以便定義該孔眼。 287. —種組態成可在解剖結構部署至少一錨的插入 器,該錨包含實質沿著一長形方向延伸的一基 材’該基材定義沿著該長形方向隔開的複數個 開孔,以及編織穿過該等開孔中之至少兩個的 一致動構件,該插入器包含: 203 201210564 一套官,其係定義尺寸經製作成可接受該 錨的一中央開孔;以及 、一推桿,其係可插入該套管以及經組態成 被壓入該中央開孔以便由該套管彈出一錨進入 &quot;亥解剖結構,使得在施加一拉力至該致動構件 時沿著貫質沿著該長形方向的方向,使得該錨 沿著相關於該長形方向有角度偏移的第二方向 擴展。 288. =申請專利範圍第287項之插入器,其中該推 桿係經組態成可頂著該錨撐住。 289. 如申請專利範圍第287項之插入器,其中該套 管定義接受該致動構件的一槽孔,使得該致動 構件由該結錨伸出該套管。 290. =申請專利範圍第287項之插入器,其中該推 桿的外徑小於該套管之該中央開孔的外徑使得 该致動構件在該推桿旁邊延伸穿過該套管之該 中央開孔。 291·如申請專利範圍第287項之插入器其中該推 桿包含一中心孔使得該錨可插穿該中心孔=進 入該套管之該中央開孔。 至該握把 以2.如申請專利範圍第287項之插入器,其中該 入器更包含一握把,以及該套管可卸除地附 iS, 4rtr Λ 293.如申請專利範圍第287項之插入器,其中該套 管定義一錐形入口。 204 201210564 294. 如申請專利範圍第287項之插入器,其中壓制 該推桿造成該錨平移出該開孔。 295. 如申請專利範圍第294項之插入器,其中該套 管定義一定義一針尖的遠端,以及壓制該推桿 造成該錨遠端地移出該開孔。 296. 如申請專利範圍第295項之插入器,其中該針 尖為錐形。 297. 如申請專利範圍第294項之插入器,其中該開 孔在遠端結尾,以及該套管定義與該開孔之該 遠端相通的一側面彈出口(side ejection portal)。 298. 如申請專利範圍第297項之插入器,其更包含 由該套管遠端伸出的一尖端。 299. 如申請專利範圍第298項之插入器,其中該尖 端為錐形。 300. 如申請專利範圍第299項之插入器,其中該尖 端由一圓錐構成。 301. 如申請專利範圍第294項之插入器,其中該套 管定義一錐形遠端。 302. 如申請專利範圍第286項之插入器,其中該套 管定義一第一縱向孔口以及該中空推桿定義一 第二縱向孔口使得藉由使該推桿對於該套管旋 轉,該等第一及第二孔口可對齊以及該插入器 由該長形縫合元件釋放。 205201210564 VII. Patent application scope: 1.  An anchor assembly configured to be anchored to an anatomical location, the anchor assembly comprising: an anchor comprising an anchor defining an expandable portion, the expandable portion defining a direction of elongation And the anchor body defines a plurality of openings extending through the expandable portion and substantially along the elongated direction; and the anchor further comprises an intermeshing extending through at least two of the openings a member configured to receive a consistent power and to respond to an actuation force to cause the expandable portion to be actuated from the first configuration motion to the extended configuration, when in the first configuration The extended portion defines a first maximum thickness along a second direction angularly offset from the elongated direction, the expandable portion being defined along a second direction greater than the first maximum thickness when in the expanded configuration A second maximum thickness. 2.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the anchor body comprises a substrate that initially lacks at least some of the openings, and the substrate is at least one of a knitted fabric, a knitted fabric, and a braid. In order to define the openings. 3.  An anchor assembly of claim 2, wherein the substrate comprises an anchor strand. 4.  An anchor assembly of claim 3, wherein the anchor strand comprises a suture. 5.  An anchor assembly of claim 3, wherein the anchor pack 163 201210564 comprises a plurality of coils constructed in the same manner and spaced along the elongate direction. 6.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the expandable portion is collapsed along the elongate direction when the expandable portion is moved from the first configuration to the expanded configuration. 7.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the actuating member comprises a uniform moving strand. 8.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the actuating force is a pulling force. 9.  An anchor assembly according to claim 3, wherein the actuating member comprises a uniform moving strand. 10.  An anchor assembly according to claim 9 wherein the actuating strand is defined by an auxiliary strand separated from the substrate and attached to the substrate. 11.  The anchor assembly of claim 10, wherein the actuation force is a proximal orientation force and the actuation strand includes a first end that receives the actuation force. 12.  The anchor assembly of claim 11, wherein the actuating strand extends from the distal end of the first end and is woven through at least the first and second of the openings along the longitudinal direction Selected. 13.  The anchor assembly of claim 12, wherein the actuating strands loop through the second selected aperture to define a proximal end extending the second end. 14.  The anchor assembly of claim 13, wherein the second end of the second 164 201210564 is woven through at least one of the openings. 15.  An anchor assembly according to claim 13 wherein the second end proximal end projects from the anchor for attachment to another anchor. 16.  The anchor assembly of claim 13, wherein the second end is further proximally woven through the plurality of openings. 17.  The anchor assembly of claim 12, wherein the actuating strand is woven through the plurality of openings at a distal end along the elongate direction. 18.  The anchor assembly of claim 17, wherein the actuating strands loop through one of the openings to define a proximal end extending the second end. 19.  The anchor assembly of claim 17, wherein the second end is further proximally woven through at least one of the openings. 20.  The anchor assembly of claim 19, wherein the second end is woven through the one of the plurality of openings that is woven through the distal end of the actuation strand. twenty one.  An anchor assembly according to claim 20, wherein the second end is woven through the nearest end of the openings. twenty two.  An anchor assembly according to claim 9 wherein the actuating strand has a barb. twenty three.  The anchor assembly of claim 22, wherein the actuating strand includes allowing the actuating strand to move through the openings in a direction of motion to drive the expandable portion from the first configuration movement The first at least one barb to the extended configuration. 165 201210564 24.  The anchor assembly of claim 23, wherein the actuating strand further comprises a second at least one barb having a direction opposite the first at least one barb, wherein the second at least one barb is configured The anchor strand can be mated with the anchor strand as it moves in the actuating direction. 25.  The anchor assembly of claim 18, wherein the second end defines a coil of a size with the first end. 26.  An anchor assembly according to claim 25, wherein the actuating strand defines a sliding member disposed at a proximal end relative to the anchor body, and the second end is slidably coupled to the sliding member to reduce the coil The size. 27.  The anchor assembly of claim 26, wherein the sliding member includes an opening extending through the actuation strand such that the second end extends through the aperture. 28.  The anchor assembly of claim 25, wherein the actuating strand defines a sliding member disposed at a proximal end relative to the expandable portion, and the first end is slidably coupled to the sliding member to reduce The size of the coil. 29.  The anchor assembly of claim 26, wherein the sliding member includes an opening extending through the second end such that the first end extends through the opening. 30.  The anchor assembly of claim 10, wherein the actuating strand defines a strut end and a free end, wherein the free end is knotted about the strut end such that the strut end is initially translatable for the free end. 166 201210564 31.  32.  33.  34.  35.  36.  37.  38.  39.  40.   An anchor assembly of claim 30, wherein the strut end defines the actuating strand. An anchor assembly according to claim 30, wherein the free end is tightenable to lock the relative displacement of the strut end and the free end. An anchor assembly of claim 30, wherein the free end provides a second anchor of the movable strand. The erroneous assembly of claim 30, wherein the free end is further formed in an eyelet. The anchor assembly of claim 30, wherein the free feed is fed through an aperture of a second wrong body. An anchor assembly of claim 35, wherein the aperture is configured to accept an uncoupled strand coupled to a second anchor. An anchor assembly according to claim 10, wherein the anchor further comprises a loop of strands. An anchor assembly according to claim 37, wherein each of the opposite ends of the coil extends through at least the aperture of the anchor body to define respective first and second apertures. The anchor assembly of claim 38, wherein the actuating strand extends through the first and second apertures. The erroneous assembly of claim 39, wherein the actuating strand defines a first and a second end extending through the second eyelet, and the actuating strand The first and second ends extend through the first coil. 167 201210564 41.  An anchor assembly of claim 40, wherein the actuating force applied to at least one of the first and second ends causes the second aperture to move through the first aperture. 42.  An anchor assembly according to claim 41, wherein the second eyelet defines a connecting member configured to be attachable to another connecting member for attaching the anchor body to the second anchor body. 43.  An anchor assembly of claim 5, wherein the actuating strand is integrated with the substrate. 44.  An anchor assembly according to claim 43, wherein the anchor body defines a proximal end and a distal end opposite thereto, the distal end of the actuating strand is fed through a selected one of the openings and the proximal end is woven The selected ones of the openings are at least one other disposed at the proximal end relative to the selected one of the openings. 45.  An anchor assembly according to claim 44, wherein the selected opening is the most distal opening. 46.  The anchor assembly of claim 44, wherein the actuating strand is woven through the plurality of openings from the proximal end of the selected opening. 47.  An anchor assembly of claim 43, wherein the actuating strand extends from the proximal end of the anchor. 48.  An anchor assembly of claim 43, wherein the anchor strand defines a proximal end projecting from the first end of the anchor body, and the first end defines the actuating strand. 49.  The anchor assembly of claim 48, wherein the anchor strand further comprises a second end extending distally of the anchor body. 50.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 49, wherein the second 168 201210564 51.  52.  53.  54.  55.  56.  57.  58.  59.   The end ends at a position adjacent to the anchor body. The erroneous assembly of claim 47, wherein the second end is configured to attach the anchor to the second tin body. An anchor assembly according to claim 9 wherein the anchoring, the hole and the plurality of coils defining the respective openings, the temple coils are separated from the distal end of the aperture along the elongated direction. An anchor assembly according to claim 52, wherein the eyelet is defined by a knot at one end of the anchor body. An anchor assembly of claim 52, wherein the anchor body is sewn through itself to define the aperture. An anchor assembly of claim 52, wherein the anchor is welded to itself to define the aperture. The erroneous assembly of claim 52, wherein the actuating strand defines a first and a second end, and a pleat disposed between the first and first ends, wherein the pleat extends through the pleat Eyelet. A tin component according to claim 56, wherein the first and second ends extend through a plurality of selected ones of the openings. An anchor assembly of claim 57, wherein the first and second ends extend through the same opening. For example, in the anchor assembly of claim 58, wherein at least each of the plurality of openings is separated to define a first portion and is configured to be adjacent to the first portion and by the rope 169 201210564 shares And a second portion separated from the first portion, and the first and second ends of the first and second ends extend through each of the first and second portions of the selected openings. 60.  The anchor assembly of claim 58 wherein the actuation force comprises a pulling force applied to at least one of the first and second ends of the actuation strand, the tension causing the aperture to follow A path defined by the actuating strand is pulled through the wrong body' and the anchor body is extended. 61.  An anchor assembly of claim 60, wherein the aperture is configured to be attachable to another strand that connects the anchor to the second anchor. 62. The anchor assembly of claim 9, wherein in the first configuration, the anchor strand is along an axis extending along the longitudinal direction of the permeate. rectangle. 63. An anchor assembly of claim 62, wherein the strand defines a first cross-sectional dimension and the actuating strand defines a second cross-sectional dimension that is less than the first cross-sectional dimension. • The anchor assembly of claim 63, wherein the expandable portion is folded into an accordion structure upon actuation to the expanded configuration. The application of the three-piece contact, wherein the wrong body strand is folded 4 to define two pairs of strands of the strand segment, which are braided to define the openings. The anchor assembly of item 3, wherein the anchor body is braided into a pair of split 170 201210564 anchor strand segments that define the openings. 67.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the openings are pre-existing in the finished substrate. 68.  An anchor assembly of claim 67, wherein the substrate comprises a plurality of fibers defining at least one of a braid, a fabric, a knit, and a mesh. 69.  An anchor assembly as claimed in claim 68, wherein the composition comprises a braided strand. 70.  An anchor assembly of claim 69, wherein the composition comprises a plurality of strands braided together. 71.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the openings cut through the substrate. 72.  An anchor assembly according to claim 71, wherein the openings are laser cut through the substrate. 73.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the expandable portion defines opposing proximal and distal ends, and the elongate direction extends linearly between the proximal end and the distal end. 74.  An anchor assembly according to claim 73, wherein the expandable portion is elongated along a central axis. 75.  An anchor assembly of claim 74, wherein at least a portion of the central axis is offset relative to the elongate direction. 76.  An anchor configured to be insertable in an anatomical position, the anchor comprising: a plurality of knots slidably coupled to a common actuating strand, the common actuating strand defining a coil of variable size, 171 2 〇12l〇564 wherein each of the plurality of knots is configured to be insertable at a target anatomical location, and the variable size coil is configured to reduce size for the plurality of knots Each of them together defines a cluster whose size is individually larger than each of the plurality of knots. 77.  78.   An anchor of claim 76, wherein the parent of the knots is slidably mounted on the common actuating strand. An anchor assembly of claim 7, wherein each of the knots defines an aperture that receives the common actuation strand and is slidable along the common actuation strand. The anchor assembly of claim 76, wherein the common actuating strand defines a pair of free ends slidably attached to each other at the actuating portion. 80.   81.   An anchor assembly of claim 78, wherein the free ends are scored such that one of the free ends slides along the other to reduce the size of the coil. For example, in the anchor assembly of the third aspect of the patent application, the first pin of the strand is 'the first-shaped actuating strand is the first-actuated strand', the first anchor body is the first body, and (four), The second member includes a second anchor that extends substantially along a second elongate direction, and the second pin defines a second plurality of openings extending through the second (four) And the second actuation 172 201210564 through which the second length (four) direction _, and 2) are woven through at least two of the apertures, wherein substantially along the second elongate direction a pulling force applied to the second actuating strand in a direction causes the second anchor body to be folded in the second elongate direction and in the direction of the angular offset in relation to the second elongate direction, so that The second anchor is expanded from a first configuration to an extended configuration.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the first actuation strand is attached to the second actuation strand. 83.  An anchor assembly of claim 82, wherein the first actuating strand is integrated with the second actuating strand. 84.  The anchor assembly of claim 82, wherein the first actuating strand is separated from the second actuating strand and attached to the second actuating strand. 85.  An anchor assembly according to claim 81, further comprising a connecting member for attaching the first anchor to the second anchor. 86.  The anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the connecting member defines a sliding member that allows one of the first and first actuating strands to be relative to the first and second actuating strands The other of the strands translates through the connecting member. 87. The anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the connecting member defines a locking member that prevents the first and second actuation strands from being relative to the first and second actuation strands The other of the ones translates through the connecting member. 88. An anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the connecting member is defined by the first and second actuating strands. 173 201210564 89.  An anchor assembly of claim 88, wherein the connecting member comprises a knot defined by the first and second actuating strands. 90.  An anchor assembly of claim 89, wherein the first actuating strand is knotted with the second actuating strand to define the knot. 91.  An anchor assembly of claim 90, wherein the knot has 1) an unlocking configuration, wherein one of the first and second actuating strands is associated with the first and second actuating strands The other can translate through the knot, and 2) the locking configuration, wherein the first and second actuation strands are locked together with respect to the relative translational linkages through the knot. 92.  An anchor assembly according to claim 88, wherein the connecting member comprises a weldment between the first and second actuating strands. 93.  An anchor assembly of claim 92, wherein the first actuating strand is welded to the second actuating strand. 94.  An anchor assembly according to claim 88, wherein the connecting member comprises a twist tie. 95.  An anchor assembly of claim 94, wherein the kinking is defined by the first and second actuating strands. 96.  The anchor assembly of claim 95, wherein at least one of the first and second actuation strands comprises a soft, deformable material to at least partially define the kink. 97.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the first 174 201210564 actuating strand is integrated with the first anchor and the second actuating strand is integrated with the second anchor. 98.  An anchor assembly of claim 97, wherein the second actuating strand is hinged through the first actuating strand to define a first splice. 99.  The anchor assembly of claim 98, wherein the first actuating strand is hinged through the second actuating strand to define a second strand. 100.  The anchor assembly of claim 99, wherein the first hinge is configured to be closer to the first tin than the second twist. 101.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the first actuating strand is integrated with the second actuating strand. 102.  The anchor assembly of claim 88, wherein the connecting member is an auxiliary connecting member configured to attach the first actuating strand to the second actuating strand. 103.  The anchor assembly of claim 102, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a strand stitched through the first and second actuating strands. 104.  The anchor assembly of claim 102, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a staple that attaches the first actuation strand to the second actuation strand. 105.  An anchor assembly of claim 101 or 102, wherein at least one of the first and second actuation strands is sewn through the auxiliary attachment member. 175 201210564 106. The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein at least one of the first and second actuation strands are knotted about the auxiliary connector. 107.  An anchor assembly according to claim 1 wherein the first and second actuating strands are woven into the auxiliary connecting member. 108.  An anchor assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a braided tube. 109.  An anchor assembly according to claim 1 wherein the braided tube comprises at least one of a suture defining a core and a tubular mesh. 110.  The anchor assembly of claim 102, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a shrink wrap material configured to be actuatable for tightening around the first and second actuating strands. 111.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a set of rings having at least one ratchet, and wherein the first and second actuating strands each have at least the loop with the collar A complementary ratchet that is ratcheted. 112.  The anchor assembly of claim U1, wherein at least one ratchet of the collar is paired with the ratchets of the first and second actuating strands to allow the first and second actuating strands Each sliding through the collar in a direction away from the first and second anchors while preventing each of the first and second actuation cords from stalking toward the first and second anchors Slide in the collar. 113 • The wrong component of claim 111, wherein the first and second actuating strands are inserted into the collar in opposite directions. 114.  The anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a ratchet housing having at least one ratchet, and the fifth and second actuating strands along the first and second actuating strands The at least one ratchet is mated with the complementary ratchets of the first and second actuation strands as the anatomical position slides. 115.  The anchor assembly of claim 114, wherein the first and second actuating strands are inserted into the collar in substantially the same direction. 116.  An anchor assembly of claim 1, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a bundle of outer tubes defined to be acceptable for the first and the first The first and second tunnels of the actuating strands. 117.  An anchor assembly of claim 116, wherein the bundle T outer tube defines a plurality of teeth configured to be mated with the first and second actuation strands such that the outer tube of the bundle can be The first and second anchors move but are prevented from moving away from the first and second Cui Miao. 118.  An anchor assembly of claim 117, wherein each of the first and second actuating strands defines a rack, the teeth of the strip being configured to be associated with the outer tube of the strap The pairing of teeth causes the outer tube of the band to be movable toward the first and second anchors but is prevented from moving away from the first and second anchors. 119.  The anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein at least the 177 201210564 first anchor further comprises a first loop of strands extending through at least one of the openings of the first anchor body so as to The first and second apertures are each defined, which define respective first and second apertures. 120.  The anchor assembly of claim 119, wherein the first movable strand includes an auxiliary strand extending through the openings of the first and second apertures. 121.  The anchor assembly of claim 120, wherein the second anchor further comprises a second loop of strands extending through at least one of the other openings of the second anchor body for respective definition First and second apertures defining respective first and second apertures. 122.  The anchor assembly of claim 121, wherein the second actuating strand is an auxiliary strand, the auxiliary strand extending through the first and second apertures of the second looped strand Wait for the opening. 123.  An anchor assembly of claim 122, wherein the first actuating strand is integrated with the second actuating strand. 124.  An anchor assembly of claim 122, further comprising a connecting member for attaching the first actuating strand to the second actuating strand. 125.  The anchor assembly of claim 124, wherein the connecting member comprises a knot that is actuable between an unlocking configuration and a locked configuration, and in the unlocking configuration, the first and second At least one of the actuating strands is translatable through the knot in relation to the other of the first 178 201210564 and the second actuating strand, and when in the locked configuration, the first and the first The two actuating strands are fixed in translation relative to each other through the knot. 126.  An anchor assembly according to claim 81, wherein the first actuating strand is separated from the first anchor and attached to the first anchor, and a first defined by the first anchor And a second part. 127.  The anchor assembly of claim 126, further comprising a connecting member coupling the first portion of the first actuating strand to the second portion of the first actuating strand. 128.  The anchor assembly of claim 127, wherein the connecting member is a knot operable between the unlocking configuration and the locking configuration, and in the unlocking configuration, the first actuating strand A portion can be translated through the knot to cause the first anchor to be actuated from the first configuration to the extended configuration, and to prevent the first actuation of the first actuation strand when in the locked configuration Partial translation through the knot. 129.  An anchor assembly of claim 127, wherein the second actuating strand is separated from the second anchor and attached to the second anchor, and defining a first extension from the second anchor And a second part. 130.  The anchor assembly of claim 129, wherein the connecting member is a first connecting member, the anchor assembly further comprising coupling the first portion of the second actuating strand to the second actuating strand a second connecting member of the second portion. 179 201210564 131.  The anchor assembly of claim 130, wherein the connecting member is a second knot operable between the unlocking configuration and the locking configuration, and in the unlocking configuration, the second actuating strand The first portion is translatable through the second junction to cause the second anchor to be actuated from the first configuration to the extended configuration, and to prevent the second actuation strand when in the locked configuration The first portion translates through the second junction. 132.  The anchor assembly of claim 129, wherein the first actuating strand defines a first and a second portion that is clocked by the first tin body, and the second actuating strand is defined by the a first and a second portion of the second anchor body extending. 133.  The anchor assembly of claim 132, wherein the second portion of the first movable strand is integrated with the second portion of the first actuating strand. 134.  The anchor assembly of claim 133, wherein the first and second actuating strands are defined by a common strand, the anchor assembly further comprising attaching the first portion of the first actuating strand a first connecting member connected to one of the common strands and a second connector for attaching the second portion of the second actuating strand to another position of the common strand. 135.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the first actuating strand is hinged through the second actuating strand. 136.  An anchor assembly of claim 135, wherein the second actuating strand is hinged through the first actuating strand. 137.  An anchor assembly of claim 135, wherein the 180th 201210564 unconstrained strand is spliced through the second actuating strand in a direction from the second anchor toward the first anchor. 138.  The anchor assembly of claim 137, wherein the second actuating strand is hinged through the first actuating strand in a direction from the first anchor toward the second anchor. 139.  The anchor assembly of claim 136, wherein the second actuating strand is hinged through the first actuating strand in a first position, the first actuating strand being hinged in a second position Passing through the second actuating strand, and the first position is closer to the first anchor than the second position. 140.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the second anchor comprises an eyelet and the first actuating strand is attached to the eyelet. 141.  An anchor assembly of claim 140, wherein the first alignment strand extends through the aperture to define a first end and a second end. 142.  An anchor assembly of claim 141, further comprising a connecting member for attaching the first end to the second end. 143.  An anchor assembly of claim 142, wherein the connecting member is integral with the first and second ends. 144.  An anchor assembly of claim 143, wherein the connecting member is a knot. 145.  An anchor assembly as claimed in claim 144, wherein the knot is configured to be actuated between an unlocked configuration, a locked configuration 181 201210564, and in the unlocked configuration, associated with the second end, The first end is translatable through the knot, and when in the locked configuration, the first end is fixed to the second end with respect to translation through the knot. 146.  An anchor assembly of claim 140, wherein the second actuation strand is associated with the second anchor and assists in defining the aperture. 147.  The anchor assembly of claim 146, wherein the second actuation strand includes a first portion and a second portion extending from the second anchor body, wherein the second portion defines the aperture, and The first portion is attached to the second portion. 148.  An anchor assembly of claim 147, wherein the first portion and the second portion are configured to be actuated to unlock a configuration, lock a configuration, and are in the unlock In configuration, the first portion is translatable through the knot relative to the second portion, and when in the locked configuration, the first portion is fixed relative to the translation through the knot to the second Part. 149.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, further comprising a connecting member attached between the first and second anchors. 150.  An anchor assembly of claim 149, wherein the connecting member is attached between the first and second actuation strands. 151.  An anchor assembly of claim 149, wherein the connecting member comprises a connecting strand. 152.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 151 further includes 182 201210564 to attach a first portion of the connecting strand to a second portion of the connecting strand to enable the first and second A second connecting member in which the moving strands are fixed to each other. 153.  An anchor assembly of claim 152, wherein the second connecting member is integral with the first and second portions of the connecting strand. 154.  An anchor assembly of claim 153, wherein the second connecting member comprises a knot defined by the first and second connecting strands. 155.  An anchor assembly of claim 154, wherein the knot is configured to be actuated between an unlocked configuration and a locked configuration, the first portion being associated with the unlocked configuration The second portion is translatable through the knot, and when in the locked configuration, the first portion is fixed to the second portion with respect to translation through the knot. 156.  The anchor assembly of claim 151, wherein the first tin package has a first eyelet, the second tin includes a second eyelet, and the connecting strand is attached to the first and second eyelets. 157.  An anchor assembly of claim 156, wherein the connecting strand extends through the first and second apertures, and the connecting strand defines a first one that each extends from the first and second apertures And a second part. 158.  The anchor assembly of claim 157, further comprising a first 183 201210564 two connecting member to which the first and second portions of the connecting strand are attached. 159.  The anchor assembly of claim 158, wherein the second connector is integrated with the first and second portions of the connecting strand. 160.  An anchor assembly of claim 159, wherein the second connector is a knot defined by the first and second portions of the connecting strand. 161.  An anchor assembly of claim 160, wherein the knot is configured to be actuated between an unlocked configuration and a locked configuration, the first portion being associated with the unlocked configuration The second portion is translatable through the knot, and when in the locked configuration, the first portion is fixed to the second portion with respect to translation through the knot. 162.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, further comprising a first and a second connecting strand attached between the first and second actuating strands. 163.  An anchor assembly of claim 162, wherein the first connecting strand is hinged through the second connecting strand. 164.  The anchor assembly of claim 163, wherein the first connecting strand is hinged through the second connecting strand and the spaced apart first and second positions. 165.  An anchor assembly of claim 162, wherein the second connecting strand is hinged through the first connecting strand. 166.  The anchor assembly of claim 165, wherein the second connecting strand is hinged through the first connecting strand and the first and second positions spaced apart from each other 184 201210564. 167. The erroneous component of claim 166, wherein the first connecting strand is hinged through the second connecting strand. 168.  The anchor assembly of claim 167, wherein the first connecting strand extends from the first actuating strand to define a corresponding first and second portions, and the second connecting strand is The second actuating strand extends to define the corresponding first and second portions. 169.  The anchor assembly of claim 168, wherein the first portion of the first connecting strand is spliced through the first portion of the second connecting strand. 170.  The anchor assembly of claim 169, wherein the first portion of the first connecting strand is spliced through the second connecting strand in a direction from the second anchor toward the first anchor The first part. 171.  The anchor assembly of claim 169, wherein the first portion of the second connecting strand is hinged through the first portion of the first connecting strand. 172.  The anchor assembly of claim 171, wherein the first portion of the first connecting strand is spliced through the first portion of the second connecting strand at a first position, the second connection The first portion of the strand is twisted through the first portion of the first connecting strand at a second position, and the first position is configured to be closer to the second anchor than the second position 173.  For example, in the application of the scope of item m, the second portion of the 185 201210564 connecting strand is spliced through the second portion of the second connecting strand. 174.  For example, in the anchor assembly of claim 173, the second portion of the second connecting strand is spliced through the first portion of the second strand. 175.  The anchor assembly of claim 169, wherein the second portion of the first connecting strand is spliced through the second portion of the second strand. One 176.  For example, in the anchor assembly of the 175th patent application, the first and second parts of the 1st and the second part of the 1st and the 2nd strands of the stranded strands are respectively: the first and second parts of the first connected strand For each of the first and second terminal parts. 177.  For example, the anchor assembly of the 176th scope of the patent application is more 勹 = the terminal part is attached to the second terminal part 178.  If the wrong component of the patent scope 帛i77 is applied, the connection component is integrated with the first and second terminal parts. S 179.  For example, if the patent application scope is 178 items, the component contains the first and second terminal parts = j 1 'V π~聊组仟, the complex system is configured to be activated to unlock the configuration. Set: ":, when in the unlocked configuration" the first terminal part = m when the second terminal part can be translated through the node in the locked configuration 'the first terminal part related 4 186 201210564 Move through the knot and fix it to the second terminal part. (8). The at least one of the first and second errors of the anchor set of claim 1 includes an eyelet attached to the eyelet. 182.  The anchor assembly of claim 15 wherein the connecting member is an auxiliary connector attached between the first and second actuating strands. 183.  An anchor assembly of claim 182, wherein at least one of the first and second anchors comprises an eyelet, and the auxiliary connecting member is attached to the eyelet. 184.  A tin component according to claim 183, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises at least one hook attached to the eyelet. 185.  An anchor assembly of claim 184, wherein the other of the first and second anchors comprises a second eyelet, and the auxiliary connector includes an attachment to the second eyelet and is configured to be The first hooks are paired to attach a second catcher of the first and first pins. 186.  The anchor assembly of claim 185, wherein the first and second hooks are made of a shape memory material and define a first shape when paired with each other and a second shape after pairing with each other, wherein The first shape is different from the second shape. 187.  An anchor assembly of claim 151, wherein the connecting strand includes a first end and a second end configured to be mated with the first end. 187 201210564 188.  The anchor assembly of claim 187, wherein the connecting strand defines a coil having a size when the first end is mated with the second end, and the first end is paired with the second end such that the first The end associated with the second end can only move in a direction that reduces the size of the coil. 189.  An anchor assembly of claim 188, wherein the first end is barbed, and the second end defines an aperture configured to accept the barbed first end. 190.  An anchor assembly of claim 187, wherein the first and second anchors comprise a plurality of apertures and the connecting strands extend through the apertures. 191.  An anchor assembly according to claim 85, wherein the connecting member comprises a magazine having a spring constant for biasing the first seedling toward the second pin. 192.  An anchor assembly of claim 191, wherein the spring member is attached to at least one of the first and second actuation strands. 193.  An anchor assembly of claim 191, wherein the at least one of the first and second anchors defines an eyelet and the spring member is attached to the eyelet. 194. The erroneous assembly of claim 81, wherein the first and second actuating strands define a sliding member that allows one of the actuating strands and the second actuating cord The strands are relatively translated to apply a force to at least one of the anchors to bias the anchor to the other anchor. 188 201210564 195.  The anchor assembly of claim 194, further comprising a latching member for preventing the actuating strands from translating through the locking member. 196.  = the wrong component of claim 195, which further comprises a connection structure of the sliding member and the locking member.  For example, the wrong component of claim 81 of the patent scope, further comprising - the locking member is adapted to prevent the actuating strands from being translated relative to each other by the locking member. 198.  The rib member of claim 81, which further includes a connecting strand attached between the first and second faults. The wrong component of claim 98, wherein the connection, the definition of the strand - the portion and the portion separated from the first portion: the second portion, the anchor assembly comprises a sliding member, the sliding a piece that allows one of the first and second parts to be translated relative to the other of the one and the second part to apply a force to at least the money to cause the pin to the other bias. The tin component of the 199th item further includes: a locking member for preventing the first and second portions from being translated relative to each other by the 5H locking member. 2〇1. ^Please refer to the wrong component of the scope of the patent, which further includes the 忒 π moving member and the connecting member of the locking member, such as the tin component of claim 198, wherein the 189 201210564 Defining a first portion and a second portion spaced apart from the first portion, the anchor assembly further includes a locking member for preventing the first and second portions from translating relative to each other through the locking member. 203.  An anchor assembly of claim 198, wherein the connecting strand is attached to at least one of the first and second actuating strands. 204.  An anchor assembly according to claim 203, further comprising a sliding member for allowing one of the connecting strands and the at least one of the first and second actuating strands to be translated relative to each other for application At least one of the tins is biased to bias the anchor to the other anchor. 205.  The anchor assembly of claim 204, further comprising a locking member for preventing the at least one of the connecting strand and the first and second actuating strands from translating relative to each other by the locking member. 206.  An anchor assembly of claim 205, further comprising a connecting member defining both the sliding member and the locking member. 207.  The anchor assembly of claim 203, further comprising a locking member for preventing the at least one of the connecting strand and the first and second actuating strands from being translated relative to each other by the locking member. 208.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the first actuating strand is assisted relative to the first anchor and the second 190 201210564 actuating strand is integrated with the second anchor. 209.  The anchor assembly of claim 82, wherein the first actuating strand defines a first portion and a second portion extending from the pin body. 210.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 2, wherein the second portion is integrated with the second actuating strand. 211.  The anchor assembly of claim 21, further comprising attaching the first portion of the first actuating strand to the second portion of the actuating strand and the second actuating cord A connector of at least one of the shares. 212.  For example, the wrong component of the item hi of the patent range is claimed, wherein the connector allows the first portion of the first actuating strand to be related to . The second portion of the self-actuating strands translates with at least one of the second actuating strands. 213.  The pin assembly of claim 212, wherein the connector is further configured to prevent the first portion of the first actuating strand from being associated with the second portion of the first actuating strand The portion is translatable with at least one of the second actuation strands. 214.  Such as. Applying the wrong component of claim 211, the connection state comprising the first portion of the first actuating strand and the first portion of the actuating strand and the second actuating strand A knot defined by at least one of them. 215.  The wrong component of claim 85, wherein the first and second anchor bodies comprise respective first and second apertures, and the first and second actuation strands are each woven through 191 201210564 Passing the first and second anchor bodies and attaching to the first and second apertures. 216.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 215, wherein the first movable strand is integrated with the second actuating strand. 217.  An anchor assembly of claim 215, further comprising a connecting member for attaching the first actuating strand to the second actuating strand. 218.  The anchor assembly of claim 215, wherein the first actuation strand includes a first actuation portion and a first attachment portion each extending from the first anchor body, and the second The actuation strand includes a second actuation portion and a second attachment portion each extending from the second anchor body. 219.  The anchor assembly of claim 218, wherein the first attachment portion is integrated with the second attachment portion. 220.  The anchor assembly of claim 218, wherein the connecting member attaches the first actuating portion and the second actuating portion. 221.  The anchor assembly of claim 220, wherein the connecting member defines 0 222 from the first actuating portion and the second actuating portion.  The anchor assembly of claim 221, wherein the connecting member comprises a knot defined by the first actuating portion and the second actuating portion. 223.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 222, wherein the knot can be actuated between an unlocked configuration and a locked configuration, in the first and second actuation portions when the 192 201210564 unlock configuration is performed At least one of the first and second actuation portions is translatable through the junction, and the first and second actuation strands pass through in the locked configuration The knots are fixed in translation to each other. 224.  The anchor assembly of claim 220, wherein the first and second actuation portions are each configured to each receive an actuation force and each of the first and second anchors is caused by the first configuration Actuated to the extended configuration. 225.  The anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the first and second anchor bodies comprise respective first and second apertures, and the first and second actuation strands are each woven through the First and second anchor bodies and attached to the first and second apertures. 226.  An anchor assembly of claim 225, wherein the first movable strand defines a first and a second portion extending from the first anchor. 227.  The anchor assembly of claim 226, wherein the connecting member attaches the first portion of the first actuating strand to the second portion of the first actuating strand. 228.  The anchor assembly of claim 227, wherein the connecting member is a knot operable between the unlocking configuration and the locking configuration, and in the unlocking configuration, the first actuating strand A portion can be translated through the knot to cause the first anchor to be actuated from the first configuration to the extended configuration, and to prevent the first actuating strand from being in the locked configuration at 193 201210564 The first portion translates through the knot. 229.  An anchor assembly of claim 227, wherein the second actuating strand defines a first and a second portion extending from the second anchor. 230.  The anchor assembly of claim 229, wherein the connecting member is a first connecting member, the anchor assembly further comprising coupling the first portion of the second actuating strand to the second actuating strand a second connecting member of the second portion. 231.  The anchor assembly of claim 230, wherein the second connecting member is a second knot operable between the unlocking configuration and the locking configuration, and in the unlocking configuration, the second actuating strand The first portion is translatable through the second junction to cause the second anchor to be actuated from the first configuration to the extended configuration, and to prevent the second actuation cord when in the locked configuration The first portion of the strand translates through the second knot. 232.  The anchor assembly of claim 229, wherein the first actuating strand defines a first and a second portion extending from the first anchor body, and the second actuating strand is defined by the a first and a second portion of the second anchor body extending. 233.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 232, wherein the second portion of the first movable strand is integrated with the second portion of the first actuating strand. 234.  The anchor assembly of claim 233, wherein the first and second actuating strands are defined by a common strand, the anchor 194 201210564 235.   236.   237.   238.   239.   The assembly further includes a first connecting member for attaching the first portion of the first actuating strand to a position of the common strand, and attaching the second portion of the second actuating strand A second connector connected to another location of the common strand. Λ The anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the first and second anchor bodies comprise respective first and second apertures, and the first and second actuation strands, such as shai, are individually woven. The first and second tin bodies are attached to the first and second apertures. For example, the seedling assembly of claim 235, wherein the first actuating strand is integrated with the second actuating strand to define a common auxiliary strand. The anchor assembly of claim 235, wherein the first actuating strand is spliced through the first actuating strand to - first twist. The anchor assembly of claim 237, wherein the first actuating strand is hinged through the second actuating strand to define a second strand. An anchor assembly of claim 238, wherein the first knot is configured to be closer to the first seed than the second knot. The pin assembly of claim 238, wherein the first actuating strand defines a first and a second phase separated by the first anchor body, and the second actuating strand is defined by the The first-and-second phase separated by the first-anchor body, 195 240.   201210564 and the second portion of the first actuation strand are attached to the second portion of the second actuation strand. 241.  The tin component of claim 240, wherein the second portion of the first actuating strand is integrated with the second portion of the second actuating strand. 242.  The anchor assembly of claim 240, wherein the first portion of the first actuating strand is spliced through the second portion of the second actuating strand, and the second actuating cord The first portion of the strand passes through the second portion of the first actuating strand. 243. The anchor assembly of claim 235, wherein the first actuating strand defines a first and a second phase separated portion extending from the first anchor body, and the second actuating strand definition a first and/or second phase spaced apart portion of the second (four), the anchor assembly further comprising a compression member attached to the second portions of the first and second actuation strands . 244. The anchor assembly of claim 243, wherein the second portions of the second and second actuating strands are integrated with the reduced member. 245. If the wrong part of the patent application area 243 is applied, the first part of the actuating strands is extended by 246. 2 = </ RTI> </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; </ RTI> <RTIgt; 201210564 causes the compression member to compress the first portions of the first and second actuation strands. 247.  The anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the first and second anchor bodies comprise respective first and second apertures, and the first and second actuation strands are each woven through the And first and second anchor bodies are attached to the first and second apertures. 248.  The anchor assembly of claim 247, wherein the first and second actuation strands each extend through both the first anchor body and the second anchor body. 249.  The anchor assembly of claim 248, wherein the first and second actuation strands each extend through both the first aperture and the second aperture. 250.  An anchor assembly of claim 247, further comprising a compression member attached between the first and second actuation strands. 251.  An anchor assembly of claim 250, wherein the compression member is integrated with the first and second actuation strands. 252.  An anchor assembly of claim 250, wherein the first actuation strand is attached to the compression member at one end, extends through the first and second apertures, and defines a first end portion at the other end And wherein the first terminal portion extends through the compression member. 253.  The anchor assembly of claim 252, wherein the second actuating strand is attached to the compression member at one end, extends through the first and second apertures 197 201210564, and defines a second at the other end a terminal portion, wherein the second terminal portion extends through the compression member. 254.  An anchor assembly of claim 253, wherein a tensile force applied to the terminal portions of the first and second actuating strands causes tension in the first and second actuating strands The compression member applies a compressive force to the first and second actuation strands. 255.  The anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein the first anchor body comprises a first eyelet, and the second anchor comprises a connecting strand integrated with the second anchor body, wherein the connecting rope of the second anchor The stock defines the unanimous moving strand of the first anchor. 256.  The anchor assembly of claim 255, wherein the actuation strand of the first anchor includes an attachment portion and an actuation portion, wherein the attachment portion extends to the second anchor body, and the The actuation portion is slidably attached to the attachment portion. 257.  An anchor assembly of claim 256, wherein the actuating portion is hinged through the attachment portion. 258.  The anchor assembly of claim 257, wherein the second anchor defines a second eyelet, and the first anchor includes a connecting strand integrated with the first anchor body, wherein the first anchor is connected The strand defines the unconstrained strand of the second anchor. 259.  The anchor assembly of claim 258, wherein the actuating strand of the second anchor comprises a second attachment portion and a second actuation portion, wherein the second attachment portion extends to the No. 198 201210564 an anchor body, and the second actuation portion is slidably attached to the second attachment portion. 260.  An anchor assembly of claim 259, wherein the second actuating portion is hinged through the second attachment portion. 261.  An anchor assembly of claim 255, wherein the actuating member extends through the aperture. 262.  An anchor assembly of claim 257, wherein the actuation strand of the second anchor extends through the second aperture. 263.  The anchor assembly of claim 85, wherein the first anchor body comprises an eyelet, and the first actuating strand is woven through the first anchor body and attached to the eyelet. 264.  An anchor assembly of claim 263, wherein the first actuating strand is assisted by the first anchor and the second actuating strand is integrated with the second anchor. 265.  An anchor assembly of claim 264, wherein the first movable strand defines a first portion and a second portion extending from the anchor body. 266.  For example, the anchor assembly of claim 265, wherein the second portion is integrated with the second actuation strand. 267.  The anchor assembly of claim 266, wherein the connecting member attaches the first portion of the first actuating strand to the second portion of the actuating strand and the second actuating cord At least one of the shares. 268.  The anchor assembly of claim 267, wherein the connecting member allows the first portion of the first actuating strand to be related to 199 201210564 in the second portion of the actuating strand and the second actuating The at least one of the strands translates. 269.  The anchor assembly of claim 268, wherein the connecting member is further configured to prevent the first portion of the first actuating strand from being associated with the second portion of the actuating strand and the second portion Translation of the at least one of the second actuation strands. 270.  The anchor assembly of claim 267, wherein the connecting member comprises the second portion of the first actuating strand, the first portion of the actuating strand and the second actuating strand A knot defined by at least one of them. 271.  An anchor assembly of claim 265, wherein the first actuating strand is hinged through the second actuating strand such that the connecting member defines a twist. 272.  An anchor assembly of claim 81, wherein at least one of the first and second anchor bodies comprises an eyelet and a plurality of actuating strands are woven through the eyelet. 273.  The anchor assembly of claim 102, wherein the auxiliary connecting member comprises a connecting strand that attaches the first anchor to the second anchor. 274.  The anchor assembly of claim 273, wherein the connecting strand extends in a direction away from the second anchor body through a first opening of the first anchor body along a direction toward the second anchor body The direction is folded through a second opening of the first anchor body, extends through a first opening of the second anchor body, and is folded through the second anchor body in a direction toward the first anchor body One of the 200 201210564 275.   276.   277.   The second opening. The anchor assembly of claim 274, wherein the connecting strands define first and second portions each extending from the first and second anchor bodies. An anchor assembly of claim 275, further comprising a connecting member for attaching the first portion of the connecting strand to the second portion of the connecting strand. A method of making an anchor body from an anchor strand, the anchor body being capable of being implanted into a target anatomical position and subsequently being expanded. The method comprises the steps of: knotting the anchor strand to define a a strut end and a free % first stop knot, the free end being defined by a first end of the wrong body stud and the strut end being defined by a second end of the anchor strand; One end is looped to form a first proximal coil; the first proximal coil is passed through the stop so that the second end extends from the first proximal coil through the stop; The distal end of the stop knot is braided to define a plurality of coils substantially separated along an elongated direction, wherein each of the coils defines an opening; The strands are woven through at least one of the openings such that the actuating strands are configured to accept a consistent power and the resulting body is offset along the direction associated with the elongated direction 201210564 278 279 .   280.   The second direction is extended. The method of claim 277, wherein the step of traversing further comprises pulling the first end through the first proximal coil and tightening the first portion to define a proximal end knot. The method of claim 277, further comprising the steps of: making a plurality of additional distal coils, and for each of the additional distal coils, each of the additional distal coils - Pass through - the coil at the nearest end. A method of constructing an anchor from at least one anchor strand, the anchor comprising an expandable portion configured to be implantable - a target anatomical location and subsequently expanded, the method comprising the steps of: (A) making the first First, the coil is such that the |mesh strand defines one end extending from the previous coil; (B) the expandable portion is made of the anchor strand, which comprises the following steps: (1) making the end Passing through the first previous coil to define a first new coil, the first new coil defining an opening, wherein the first new coil is disposed on one side of the first previous coil, and the end is a reverse side of the first previous coil extending from the first new coil; (H) looping the end through a second previous coil defined by the first new coil to define a second new coil, the first The second coil defines an opening; (iii) tightens the second new coil about the second previous coil 202 201210564; and (iv) fabricates a plurality of additional new coils each extending through the previous coil to define a respective one a plurality of coils of the opening; and C) knitting the coincident moving strands through at least one of the openings such that the actuating strands are configured to accept a consistent dynamic force causing the anchor body to be offset along a direction associated with the elongated shape The second direction is extended. 281.  The method of claim 280, wherein the first prior coil defines an eyelet. 282.  The method of claim 281, further comprising the step of forming the aperture integral with the anchor strand. 283.  The method of claim 282, wherein the actuating strand is stitched through itself to define the aperture. 284.  The method of claim 283, wherein the actuating strand is further knotted to secure the eyelet. 285.  The method of claim 283, wherein the actuating strand is stitched through itself a second time. 286.  The method of claim 283, wherein the actuating strand is knotted to define the eyelet. 287.  An inserter configured to deploy at least one anchor in an anatomy, the anchor comprising a substrate extending substantially in an elongate direction. The substrate defines a plurality of openings spaced along the elongated direction And woven through the at least two of the apertures, the interposer comprising: 203 201210564 a set of officially defined dimensions that are made to accept a central opening of the anchor; and a pusher that is insertable into the sleeve and configured to be pressed into the central opening to eject an anchor from the sleeve into the &quot;Hai anatomy such that when a pulling force is applied to the actuating member The direction of the permeate along the elongate direction causes the anchor to expand in a second direction that is angularly offset with respect to the elongate direction. 288.  = The inserter of claim 287, wherein the pusher is configured to be supported against the anchor. 289.  The inserter of claim 287, wherein the sleeve defines a slot for receiving the actuating member such that the actuating member extends from the knot by the knot. 290.  The inserter of claim 287, wherein an outer diameter of the push rod is smaller than an outer diameter of the central opening of the sleeve such that the actuating member extends through the center of the sleeve beside the push rod hole. 291. The inserter of claim 287, wherein the pusher includes a central aperture such that the anchor can be inserted through the central aperture = the central opening into the sleeve. To the grip to 2. The inserter of claim 287, wherein the insert further comprises a grip, and the sleeve is removably attached to the iS, 4rtr 293 293. The inserter of claim 287, wherein the sleeve defines a tapered inlet. 204 201210564 294.  The inserter of claim 287, wherein pressing the pusher causes the anchor to translate out of the opening. 295.  The inserter of claim 294, wherein the sleeve defines a distal end defining a tip and pressing the push rod causes the anchor to be distally removed from the opening. 296.  The inserter of claim 295, wherein the needle tip is tapered. 297.  The inserter of claim 294, wherein the opening ends at a distal end, and the sleeve defines a side ejection portal that communicates with the distal end of the opening. 298.  The inserter of claim 297, further comprising a tip extending from the distal end of the sleeve. 299.  The inserter of claim 298, wherein the tip is tapered. 300.  The inserter of claim 299, wherein the tip end is formed by a cone. 301.  The inserter of claim 294, wherein the sleeve defines a tapered distal end. 302.  The inserter of claim 286, wherein the sleeve defines a first longitudinal aperture and the hollow push rod defines a second longitudinal aperture such that by rotating the push rod for the sleeve, the The first and second apertures are alignable and the inserter is released by the elongate stapling element. 205
TW100114690A 2010-04-27 2011-04-27 Anchor assembly including expandable anchor TW201210564A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US32825110P 2010-04-27 2010-04-27
US39869910P 2010-06-29 2010-06-29
US43275511P 2011-01-14 2011-01-14
US46149011P 2011-01-18 2011-01-18
US44314211P 2011-02-15 2011-02-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201210564A true TW201210564A (en) 2012-03-16

Family

ID=46764049

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW100114690A TW201210564A (en) 2010-04-27 2011-04-27 Anchor assembly including expandable anchor

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW201210564A (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI894067B (en) * 2024-05-28 2025-08-11 艾斯創生醫股份有限公司 Surgical guidewire device and suture fixation system

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI894067B (en) * 2024-05-28 2025-08-11 艾斯創生醫股份有限公司 Surgical guidewire device and suture fixation system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN102933158B (en) Comprise the anchoring assembly of expandable anchor
US12213664B2 (en) Pre-tied surgical knots for use with suture passers
AU2011245417A1 (en) Anchor assembly including expandable anchor
JP5972903B2 (en) Seam lock for attaching two or more structures
US10285685B2 (en) Knotless filamentary fixation devices, assemblies and systems and methods of assembly and use
AU2013230095B2 (en) Suture-based knotless repair
CN103385741B (en) Use the systems, devices and methods of snare component and soft holdfast fixing organization
US10736620B2 (en) Soft anchors with soft eyelets
US9314234B2 (en) Pre-tied surgical knots for use with suture passers
US6152934A (en) Surgical knot tying instrument
US10610211B2 (en) Filament engagement system and methods of use
JP2024510376A (en) Methods and systems related to joint repair
TW201210564A (en) Anchor assembly including expandable anchor
EP4552587A1 (en) All-suture knotless repair construct
CN118401182A (en) Knotless soft anchoring system
CN116847792A (en) Methods and systems related to joint repair